Home

Canon 9128B002 User's Manual

Contents

1. O O ISO Set ISO speed hold button turn Exposure SOA ISO hold down lever turn 2 ISO Set ISO speed amp during meter Exposure compensation hold button turn gt Exposure compensation hold down lever turn gt Shutter speed setting in M mode 455 Aperture setting in M mode 456 3 Custom Controls cS Gs uD Pe os a O O O O 2 O 2 O O O 3 O 3 On O O 5 O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O The AF stop button B is provided only on super telephoto IS lenses 447 3 Custom Controls Function Page le AF ON raw One touch image quality setting RAWH One touch image quality hold 456 Image quality Images S22 Picture Style 457 S Depth of field preview wy IS start 457 MENU Menu display 7 Register recall shooting function O 7 O 7 gt Image Playback Magnify Reduce press SET turn Q P Cycle amp 80 Drive AF WB Operation 458 untock Unlock while button pressed m 3 Flash function settings OFF No function disabled mn ead 448 3 Custom Controls SS 8S D ou
2. 180 High speed continuous shooting 141 Histogram Brightness RGB 360 Hot ShOE gt 22 259 Household power cccccceeeeee 474 l ICC profile Acincccmnasteansenicceeercsie 187 ICON a A 8 Illumination AF point 131 Illumination LCD panel 60 Image conversion factor 50 Image dust prevention 4 405 Image recording quality 149 330 Image review timMe ceeeeee 70 Image Stabilizer lens 53 Images AF point display 359 Auto playback cecceeeeeee 382 Auto rotation ceeeeeeeee eee 395 COPYING sxctcssicssantcntcdasdaciannitanalenn 388 Downloading images to a computer ccceeeeeees 534 ERASE oir eiei 392 Highlight alert cccccccees 359 Histogram axicnworssrtdccsrszerionvtaenes 360 UNG cn seushitaceceamtnatudteeadsssatandaeseds 361 Jump display image browSingQ eeee 362 Magnification cccceeeeeee 364 Manual rotation 08 367 Numbering secvssiissccercccsecavesticasens 193 Playback ssininncivasmeredcovsuatentacannans 353 Protection cccccssnrcccccsssstaceeeennmannn 368 Rating reai aA 371 Shooting information 356 SZ Oee E 151 334 357 Slide SNOW sencvcieccessscetiemncceeress 382 Transfer sicesiiicoisiiavicrreeccnntne 425 Two image display 006 366 V
3. 195 Creative photo 160 233 238 X Creative Zone icon 8 Cropping for printing 419 Cropping information 0 443 Cross type focusing sseceeees 99 Custom Controls 0008 62 445 Custom shooting mode 464 Custom WB cccccceeseeeeeeeeeeeeees 169 D D 180 Date tiMe rrei aiee 47 Daylight saving time 00 48 Depth of field preview 221 Detailed information 00 357 Dials Main Dial cccccceeceeeneeeeee ees 56 Quick Control Dial 0 57 Digital COMPASS 0cseeee eee 206 Calibration 0cccccceeeeeeeeeeees 207 Digital terminal 23 34 412 425 534 Dimmed menu items 00 66 Dioptric adjustment 54 Direct printing ccceeeeeeeeeeee ees 412 Direct selection of AF point 453 Direction soscessevecsncviacesveeseaccess 204 206 Distortion correction c 00 182 Downloading images to a computer cccceeeeeeees 535 DPOF Digital Print Order Format 421 Drive MOG ccccceececsseeeeeeeeees 141 Dual cross type focusing 99 Dust Delete Data 0 407 E Electronic level cccccssesseeeeeees 75 Erasing IM QES csseeeeeeeeees 392 E coh cecedeccceecccsesagatearetscavtenesests 25 510 Error CODES ssiusti
4. ccccccceeseeeeeeeeees 61 M Menu Operations cccccceccccesseceecssseceesseeeceseecesssseeeseeeeens 64 Before You Start ccccccccssssssseeeeceeceessseeeeeeeceeenssseceeeeeeeesenseeeeees 67 Formatting the Card cccccccccecceeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeseeeeseeseeeeeeseneeeees 67 Disabling the Beeper ccccceccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeneeeeeeeaeeeeeeeaaeees 69 Setting the Power off Time Auto Power Off c0ccceeeeeeeeeeeees 69 Setting the Image Review TIMC cceeececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaeeees 70 Reverting the Camera to the Default Settings ceeee 70 10 Contents E Displaying the GPG rscistseactenssionsavetunnbernausnotaninrintdestoniunatiadseniasaies 74 Q Displaying the Electronic Level ccccccsecsseseceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 75 Setting the Viewfinder Information Display 0 cccceceeeeseeeeees 77 Sarees openers eter est aserent eine EA 78 J Basic Shooting 79 G Fully Automatic Shooting Scene Intelligent Auto 80 4S Full Auto Techniques Scene Intelligent Auto e 83 3 Setting the AF and Drive Modes 85 AF Selecting the AF Operation cccccccccesssceeceessseeeeeeseneaees 86 Selecting the AF Area and AF Point c cccccccessecessesereneens 90 AF Area Selection Modes ccccccssssssseeececeeeeesseeeeeeeeeeeeenseeeeeeeeeas 95 AF SEIS ON sorserien tinal aE E E REA E EEEE AE
5. Charging the Battery m Remove the protective cover Detach the protective cover provided with the battery 2 Attach the battery As shown in the illustration attach the battery securely to the charger To detach the battery follow the above procedure in reverse Recharge the battery For LC E6 As shown by the arrow flip out the battery charger s prongs and insert the prongs into a power outlet For LC E6E Connect the power cord to the charger and insert the plug into a power outlet gt Recharging starts automatically and the charge lamp blinks in orange Charge Level epaige amp Display Blinks once per second Orange Blinks twice per second Blinks three times per second Fully charged Lights up Ittakes approx 2 hr and 30 min to fully recharge a completely exhausted battery at room temperature 23 C 73 F The time required to recharge the battery will vary greatly depending on the ambient temperature and the battery s remaining capacity For safety reasons recharging in low temperatures 5 C 10 C 41 F 50 F will take longer up to approx 4 hr 38 Charging the Battery Ss Null lt y lt Tips for Using the Battery and Charger Upon purchase the battery is not fully charged Charge the battery before use Recharge the battery on the day before or on the day it is to be used Even during s
6. Zoom position index Distance scale Filter thread front of lens Zoom ring p 51 Focusing ring p 140 308 i i Contacts p 21 Image Stabilizer switch p 53 Lens mount index p 50 31 Nomenclature Battery Charger LC E6 Charger for Battery Pack LP E6N LP E6 p 38 a Power plug Battery pack slot IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS DANGER TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK CAREFULLY FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS For connection to a supply not in the U S A use an attachment plug adapter of the proper configuration for the power outlet if needed Battery Charger LC E6E Charger for Battery Pack LP E6N LP E6 p 38 Power cord Charge lamp Battery pack slot 32 Attaching the Strap LIN the strap p 247 Nomenclature Pass the end of the strap through the camera s strap mount eyelet from the bottom Then pass it through the strap s buckle as shown in the illustration Pull the strap to take up any slack and make sure the strap will not loosen from the buckle The eyepiece cover is also attached to Eyepiece cover 33 Nomenclature Using the Cable Protector When connecting the camera to a computer printer or Wireless File Transmitter use the provided interface cable or one from Canon shown in the System Map on page 478 When connecting the interface cable also use the provided cable protector Using the
7. AUTO Auto The flash sync speed is set automatically within a range of 1 250 sec to 30 sec to suit the scene s brightness With an external Speedlite high speed sync is also possible 12a 1 250 1 60sec auto Prevents a slow shutter speed from being set in low light conditions It is effective for preventing subject blur and camera shake However while the subject will be properly exposed with the flash E the background may come out dark 1 250 1 250 sec fixed The flash sync speed is fixed at 1 250 sec This more effectively prevents subject blur and camera shake than with 1 250 1 60sec auto However in low light the subject s background will come out darker than with 1 250 1 60sec auto 4D If 1 250 1 60sec auto or 1 250 sec fixed is set high speed sync is not possible in the lt Av gt mode with the external Speedlite 263 tM Setting the Flash E Displaying the Flash Function Setting Screen Directly When you use the built in flash or an external EX series Speedlite compatible with flash function settings you can press the lt gt button to directly display the Built in flash settings or External flash func setting screen without first displaying the menu screen With built in flash Builiinflashisetings Press the lt gt button twice Flash mode E TTL II Press the button again and the built Nee es are in flash will be raised Wireless func Disable
8. Wireless File Transmitter WFT E7 Ver 2 TV Video WFT E7 2 EOS Solution Disk Wireless LAN access point BE Interface Cable IFC 150U II 1 5 m 4 9 ft Interface Cable IFC 500U II D gt 7 m 15 4 ft Do Computer Windows 8 1 8 Windows 7 Mac OS X ie mi E PictBridge compatible printer 1 Battery Pack LP E6 can also be used 2 To use the older model WFT E7 not Version 2 the firmware must be updated and Interface Cable IFC 40AB II or IFC 150AB II must be used 3 With IFC 500U II the communication speed will be equivalent to Hi Speed USB USB 2 0 All cable lengths given are approximate figures 479 Function Availability Table According to Shooting Mode Still Photo Shooting Set automatically O User selectable __ Not selectable Disabled lt gt lt Function TH All image quality settings selectable O Automatically set Auto ISO Manually set ISO speed Automatically set Auto Picture Style Manual selection Auto Preset White balance Custom Color temperature setting Correction Bracketing Auto Lighting Optimizer Long exposure noise reduction High ISO speed noise reduction Highlight tone priority Peripheral illumination correction Lens aberration Chromatic aberration correction correction Distortion correction Anti flicker shooting sRGB
9. Folder name Highest file number Fi Folders As with 100EOS7D for example the folder name starts with three digits the folder number followed by five alphanumeric characters A folder can contain up to 9999 images file number 0001 9999 When a folder becomes full a new folder with the folder number increased by one is created automatically Also if manual reset p 194 is executed a new folder will be created automatically Folders numbered from 100 to 999 can be created Creating Folders with a Computer With the card open on the screen create a new folder named DCIM Open the DCIM folder and create as many folders as necessary to save and organize your images The folder name must follow the format 100ABC_D The first three digits are the folder number from 100 to 999 The last five characters can be any combination of upper and lower case letters from A to Z numerals and the underscore _ The space cannot be used Also note that two folder names cannot share the same three digit folder number for example 100ABC_D and 100W_XY2Z even if the remaining five characters in each name are different 189 MI Changing the File Name m The file name has four alphanumeric characters followed by a four digit image Example BE3B0001 JPG number p 193 and extension The first four alphanumeric characters are set upon factory shipment and unique to the camera However you can change them
10. Start time setting the movie during movie shooting It is MONE ITES COUN eee eee recorded at all times in the following Movie play count Rec time i HDMI units hours minutes seconds and Drop frame Enable frames It is mainly used during movie MENU fa Pe editing Use 5 Time code the 83 tab in lt A5 gt to set the time code Count Up Rec run The time code counts up only while you are shooting a movie The time code will continue in the sequence of the movie files captured Free run The time code counts up whether you are shooting a movie or not Start Time Setting You can set the time code s start time Manual input setting You can freely set the hour minute second and frames Reset The time set with Manual input setting and Set to camera time is reset to 00 00 00 or 00 00 00 p 341 Set to camera time Sets hours minutes and seconds to match the camera s internal clock Frames will be set to 00 p Shooting still photos during movie shooting will cause a discrepancy between the actual time and time code If Free run is set and you change the time zone or daylight saving time p 47 the time code will be affected If you use a different camera to play an MP4 movie recorded with this camera the time code may not be displayed correctly 339 MM Setting the Time Code EE Movie Recording Count You can select what to display on the mo
11. The registered file name will be P saved File name 5 Select the registered file name HE Select File name then press lt gt ETEA Select the registered file name then size Preset code BE3B press lt 61 gt ae fe a If User setting2 is registered select t T i L n the 3 characters registered Settings image size 191 tE Changing the File Name Q The first character cannot be an underscore Fi User setting2 When you select the image size registered with User setting2 and take pictures the image recording quality character will be automatically appended as the file name s fourth character from the left The meaning of the image recording quality characters is as follows l 2l aL M AM aM MG S MSM 0S1 S ae sys eee S3 When the image is transferred to a computer the automatically appended fourth character will be included You can then see the image size without having to open the image RAW or JPEG images can be distinguished with the extension F The extension will be JPG for JPEG images CR2 for RAW images and MOV or MP4 for movies When you shoot a movie with User setting2 the file name s fourth character will be an underscore _ 192 M File Numbering Methods m The four digit file number is like the frame number on a roll of film The captured images are assigned a sequential file number from
12. 257 259 269 Flash Mode ccsecceeeeeeeeees 267 Flash sync contacts 008 22 Flash sync speed 260 263 Flash sync speed in Av IMO GC dc cacccsanceeteveannctsaccedensecicess 263 Manual flash 08 267 283 Red eye reduction 0 256 Shutter synchronization 1st 2nd curtain aoaeaaiaee 269 Wireless 268 272 Focus indicator soonnnenennneeneeneenen 80 Focus IOC creseeescegencddcdisiedteeeenacseeeds 83 Focus mode switch 50 140 308 544 Focusing AF Manual Focusing MF FOCUSING SCIEeN 0008 440 478 Folder creation selection 188 For editing ALL I eee 332 Formatting card initialization 67 Frame rate 331 350 FES SUM aicwentecontiactrecdmetectebeseaet 339 Full Auto mode cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 80 Full High Definition FullHD joeri 313 331 Function availability by shooting MOE ceeeeeeee cess 480 G GPSa e eee 197 CTO DTE 74 295 344 355 H HD e E ec emery 331 HDMI 34 341 348 350 385 HDMI CEC wcsecseencsecasbdeetsatavedecess 386 HDR oecite riiai ainina iya 233 Headphone cccccssseseeeeeeeeees 337 FIG IO whetecentcestnnnnneaiiaarsaceiernndeeh nants 78 High ISO speed noise reduction 176 High Definition HD movies 331 Highlight alert eceeeeeeeee eee 359 Highlight detail loss 06 359 Highlight tone priority
13. Date Time Zone Beeper Copyright information Clear all camera settings Viewfinder Dioptric adjustment Eyepiece cover Grid display Electronic level gt p 38 gt p 46 gt p 470 gt p 474 gt p 69 gt p 67 gt p 146 gt p 148 gt p 42 gt p 50 gt p 51 gt p 52 gt p 53 gt p 49 gt p 47 gt p 69 gt p 195 gt p 70 gt p 54 gt p 247 gt p 74 gt p 76 Show hide in viewfinder gt p 77 LCD Monitor Brightness adjustment Electronic level Help AF AF operation AF area selection mode AF point selection AF point registration Lens group AF points lighting up in red Al Servo AF characteristics AF Custom Functions AF Microadjustment Focusing manually Metering Metering mode Drive Drive mode Self timer Maximum burst Recording Images Recording function Creating Selecting a folder File name File numbering gt p 394 gt p 75 gt p 78 gt p 86 gt p 90 gt p 93 gt p 450 gt p 100 gt p 131 gt p 108 gt p 117 gt p 133 gt p 140 gt p 224 gt p 141 gt p 143 gt p 153 gt p 146 gt p 188 gt p 190 gt p 193 17 Index to Features Image Quality Image recording quality gt p 149 ISO speed Picture Style White balance Auto Lighting Optimizer Noise reduction for high ISO
14. Do not carry the camera around while it is attached to a tripod Doing so may cause injury Also make sure the tripod is sturdy enough to support the camera and lens Do not leave a lens or lens attached camera under the sun without the lens cap attached Otherwise the lens may concentrate the sun s rays and cause a fire Do not cover or wrap the battery recharging apparatus with a cloth Doing so may trap heat within and cause the casing to deform or catch fire If you drop the camera in water or if water or metal fragments enter inside the camera promptly remove the battery pack and back up battery This is to prevent fire and electrical shock Do not use or leave the battery pack or back up battery in a hot environment Doing so may cause battery leakage or a shorter battery life The battery pack or back up battery can also become hot and cause skin burns Do not use paint thinner benzene or other organic solvents to clean the equipment Doing so may cause fire or a health hazard If the product does not work properly or requires repair contact your dealer or your nearest Canon Service Center Only for European Union and EEA Norway Iceland and Liechtenstein These symbols indicate that this product is not to be disposed of with your household waste according to the WEEE Directive 2012 19 EU the Battery Directive 2006 66 EC and or national legislation implementing those Directives il If a chemical symbo
15. No of exposures 3 displayed Save source imgs All images 2 Select an image Continue Mult ex 1 shot only Turn the lt 3 gt dial to select the image to be used as the first single exposure then press lt gt Select OK The file number of the selected image will be displayed at the bottom of the screen 3 Take the picture When you select the first image the number of remaining exposures as set with No of exposures will decrease by 1 For example if No of exposures is 3 you can shoot two exposures Select image for multi expo Q The following cannot be selected as the first single exposure Images shot with t483 Highlight tone priority set to Enable images whose Aspect ratio is set to any setting other than 3 2 p 295 and images having cropping information p 443 Disable will be applied for 1 Lens aberration correction 2 Auto Lighting Optimizer and 283 Highlight tone priority regardless of the settings of the RAW image selected as the first single exposure The ISO speed Picture Style high ISO speed noise reduction and color space etc set for the first image will also apply for the subsequent images If t 83 Picture Style is Auto for the RAW image selected as the first single exposure Standard will be applied for shooting You cannot select an image taken with another camera 243 Multiple Exposures F You can also se
16. Shooting function settings screen then turn off the power switch 469 is Checking the Battery Information You can check the battery s condition on the LCD monitor Each Battery Pack LP E6N LP E6 has a unique serial number and you can register multiple battery packs to the camera When you use this feature you can check the registered battery pack s remaining capacity and operation history O a oA g Select Battery info Video system For PAL Under the 3 tab select Battery Battery info info then press lt gt Sensor cleaning button display options gt The battery info screen will appear Battery position Battery model or household power source being used Battery info C P E6N The battery level icon p 46 is displayed Remaining cap together with the remaining battery Shutter count capacity shown in 1 increments Rech rf EDAS peraman The number of shots taken with the current battery The number is reset when the INFO S battery is recharged Battery s recharge performance level is displayed in one of three levels fi ii Green Battery s recharge performance is fine ii 0 Green Battery s recharge performance is slightly degraded HOUO Red Purchasing a new battery is recommended 4D Using a genuine Canon Battery Pack LP E6N LP E6 is recommended If you use batteries that are not genuine Canon products the camera s full performa
17. The image just captured will be displayed for 2 sec on the LCD monitor oe To display the image again press the lt L gt gt button p 354 To shoot while looking at the LCD monitor see Live View Shooting p 285 To view the images captured so far see Image Playback p 354 To delete an image see Erasing Images p 392 Conventions Used in this Manual m Icons in this Manual lt i gt Indicates the Main Dial lt gt Indicates the Quick Control Dial lt O gt Indicates the AF area selection lever lt gt Indicates the Multi controller lt Q gt Indicates the Setting button 64 46 610 816 Indicates that the corresponding function remains active for 4 sec 6 sec 10 sec or 16 sec respectively after you let go of the button In this manual the icons and markings indicating the camera s buttons dials and settings correspond to the icons and markings on the camera and on the LCD monitor MENU Indicates a function that can be changed by pressing the lt MENU gt button to change its settings x When shown on the upper right of a page it indicates that the function is available only in the lt P gt lt Tv gt lt Av gt lt M gt or lt B gt mode p Reference page numbers for more information Q Warning to prevent shooting problems E Supplemental information 20 Tips or advice fo
18. You can edit images with originals remaining unchanged Can be used by a wide range of users from amateurs to professionals It is especially recommended for users who mainly shoot RAW images Picture Style Editor Picture Style File Creating Software This software is aimed at advanced users who are experienced in processing images You can edit Picture Style to your unique image characteristics and create save an original Picture Style file 537 About the Software An Internet connection is necessary to install the software below Insert the EOS Solution Disk into your Internet ready computer Click Easy installation or Install on a Macintosh and the software will be installed automatically ImageBrowser EX Image Viewing and Editing Software Connect to the Internet to download and install the software You can view browse and print JPEG images on your computer You can play movies MOV files video snapshot albums and extract still photos from movies Recommended for novices who are using a digital camera for the first time and amateur users EOS Solution Disk is necessary for downloading and installing ImageBrowser EX Map Utility GPS software Connect to the Internet to download and install the software Shooting locations can be displayed on a map on a computer screen by using the geotag information recorded using the GPS function 4D The ZoomBrowser EX Imag
19. lt OFF gt at a short interval the lt c gt icon may not be displayed p 45 Printing Related Problems There are fewer printing effects than listed in the instruction manual Contents displayed on the screen vary depending on the printer This instruction manual lists all the printing effects available p 416 Computer Connection Problems Communication between the connected camera and computer does not work When using EOS Utility EOS software set I 4 Interval timer to Disable p 250 cannot transfer images to a computer Install the EOS software EOS Solution Disk CD ROM on the computer p 537 Check that EOS Utility s main window is displayed 509 Error Codes m Error number If there is a problem with the camera an error message will appear Follow the on x screen instructions Err 01 Communications between the camera and lens is faulty Clean the lens contacts Cause and countermeasures Number Error Message and Solution Communications between the camera and lens is faulty Clean the lens contacts Clean the electrical contacts on the camera and lens use a Canon lens or remove and install the battery pack again p 21 22 40 Card cannot be accessed Reinsert change card or format card with camera gt Remove and insert the card again replace the card or format the card p 41 67 Cannot save images because card is full Replace card
20. 04 The built in flash could not be raised Turn the camera off and on again gt Operate the power switch p 45 Sensor cleaning could not be performed Turn the camera off and on again gt Operate the power switch p 45 gt Replace the card erase unnecessary images or format the card p 41 67 392 An error prevented shooting Turn the camera off and on again or re install the battery gt Operate the power switch remove and install the battery pack again or use a Canon lens p 40 45 If the error still persists write down the error number and contact your nearest Canon Service Center 510 Specifications m e Type Type Recording media Image sensor size Compatible lenses Lens mount e Image Sensor Type Effective pixels Aspect ratio Dust delete feature e Recording System Recording format Image type Pixels recorded Record function Create select a folder File name File numbering Digital single lens reflex AF AE camera with built in flash CF cards Type UDMA 7 supported SD SDHC SDXC memory cards UHS I cards compatible Approx 22 4 x 15 0 mm Canon EF lenses including EF S lenses Excluding EF M lenses 35mm equivalent focal length is approx 1 6 times the focal length indicated on the lens Canon EF mount CMOS sensor Approx 20 20 megapixels Rounded off to the nearest 10 000th 3 2 Auto Manual Appending Dust Delete Da
21. A Li Basic Instruction GPS Cautions Manual EOS Camera Instruction Manuals Disk DVD ROM Contains the following PDF manuals e Instruction Manual Detailed version e Software Instruction Manuals for the software on the EOS Solution Disk Instructions for viewing the Instruction Manuals on the DVD ROM are on pages 532 534 EOS Solution Disk Contains various software For outlines and installation procedure for the software see pages 537 540 Compatible Cards pe The camera can use the following cards regardless of capacity If the card is new or was previously formatted by another camera or computer it is recommended that you format the card with this camera p 67 g CF CompactFlash cards Type UDMA mode 7 compatible SD SDHC SDXC memory cards UHS I cards supported Cards that Can Record Movies When shooting movies use a large capacity card with a fast reading writing speed as shown in the table Movie Recording Size p 330 CF Card Recording Formats ALL I For editing 30 MB sec or faster IPB Standard 30 MB sec or faster Other than above 10 MB sec or faster IPB Light 10 MB sec or faster Movie Recording Size p 330 a I Fomai ALL I For editing 20 MB sec or faster IPB Standard FHD 20 MB sec or faster Other than above 6 MB sec or faster IPB Light 4 MB sec or faster If you use a slow writing card when shooting movies the movie may not be recorded properly
22. MF Focusing Manually 5 Focus manually While looking at the magnified image turn the lens s focusing ring to focus After achieving focus press the lt Q gt button to return to the normal view 6 Take the picture Check the exposure then press the shutter button completely to take the picture p 286 309 4 General Live View Shooting Cautions Image Quality When you shoot at high ISO speeds noise such as dots of light and banding may become noticeable Shooting in high temperatures may cause noise and irregular colors in the image If Live View shooting is used continuously for a prolonged period the camera s internal temperature may rise and image quality may deteriorate Always exit Live View shooting when you are not shooting If you shoot a long exposure while the camera s internal temperature is high image quality may deteriorate Exit Live View shooting and wait a few minutes before shooting again White lt gt and Red lt i gt Internal Temperature Warning Icons If the camera s internal temperature increases due to prolonged Live View shooting or under a high ambient temperature a white lt gt or red lt gt icon will appear The white lt i gt icon indicates that the image quality of still photos will deteriorate It is recommended that you temporarily exit Live View shooting and allow the camera to cool down before shooting again The red lt gt icon in
23. With User setting1 you can change and register the four characters as desired With User setting2 if you register three characters the fourth character from the left will be appended automatically to indicate the image size Registering or Changing the File Name O a bm 1 Select File name Record func card folder sel Under the 1 tab select File File numbering Continuous name then press lt G1 gt File name Auto rotate fey o pl Format card File name 2 Select Change User setting File name BE3B Change User setting1 Change User setting2 Preset code BE3B User setting1 IMG_ User setting2 IMG image size MENU a File name Enter any alphanumeric o characters Oe a l simi For User setting1 enter four AIBCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ characters For User setting2 enter UE ae three characters INFO keeles Press the lt T gt button to delete any unnecessary characters Press the lt Q gt button The text palette will be highlighted with a color frame and text can be entered 190 tE Changing the File Name ee File name Operate the lt 3 gt dial or lt 5 gt to 7DM2 4 4 move the and select the desired oe a character Then press lt gt to enter it ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ _01 2 3456789 INFO LEEA MENU KOL A Exit the setting After entering the correct number of characters press the lt MENU gt button then select OK
24. 240 V AC 50 60 Hz Rated output 8 4VDC 1 2A Working temperature 5 C 40 C 41 F 104 F range Working humidity 85 or less Dimensions W x H x D Approx 69 0 x 33 0 x 93 0 mm 2 7 x 1 3 x 3 7 in Weight Approx 130 g 4 6 oz e Battery Charger LC E6E Compatible battery Battery Pack LP E6N LP E6 Power cord length Approx 1 m 3 3 ft Recharging time Approx 2 hr 30 min Rated input 100 240 V AC 50 60 Hz Rated output 8 4 V DC 1 2A Working temperature 5 C 40 C 41 F 104 F range Working humidity 85 or less Dimensions W x H x D Approx 69 0 x 33 0 x 93 0 mm 2 7 x 1 3 x 3 7 in Weight 125 g 4 4 oz excluding power cord e EF S18 135mm f 3 5 5 6 IS STM Focal length Speed 18 mm 135 mm f 3 5 5 6 Lens construction 16 elements in 12 groups Minimum aperture f 22 36 f 22 38 when 1 2 stop increments set for aperture Angle of view Diagonal extent 74 20 11 30 Vertical extent 45 30 6 20 Horizontal extent 64 30 9 30 Closest focusing 0 39 m 1 28 ft distance Max magnification 0 28x at 135 mm focal length Field of view Approx 248 x 372 53 x 80 mm 9 8 x 14 6 2 1 x 3 1 in at 0 39 m 1 28 ft Filter size 67 mm Max diameter x length Approx 76 6 x 96 0 mm 3 0 x 3 8 in Weight Approx 480 g 16 9 oz Hood EW 73B sold separately Lens cap E 67 ll Case LP1116 sold separately 521 Specifications e EF S1
25. 333 M9 Setting the Movie Recording Size Total Movie Recording Time and File Size Per Minute In MOV Format Approx Movie Recording Total Recording Time on Card E EOD 8 min min 17min min 34min min 440 MB min om som 6 min min 13min min 26 min min 583 MB min a aS EI So 1 hr 41 min 3 hr 22 min 75 MB min In MP4 Format Approx Movie Recording Total Recording Time on Card D mo mm com enn zr oi ou SRO Sn ess S 4 An increase of the camera s internal temperature may cause movie shooting to stop before the maximum recording time shown in the table p 351 334 M9 Setting the Movie Recording Size a Movie Files Exceeding 4 GB Even if you shoot a movie exceeding 4 GB you can keep shooting without interruption During movie shooting approx 30 sec before the movie reaches the 4 GB file size the elapsed shooting time or time code displayed in the movie shooting screen will start blinking If you keep shooting until the movie file size exceeds 4 GB a new movie file will be created automatically and the elapsed shooting time or time code will stop blinking When you play back the movie you will have to play each movie file individually Movie files cannot be played back automatically in consecutive order After the movie playback ends select the next movie and play it back Movie Shooting Time Limit The maximum recording time of one mov
26. 394 Changing Image Playback Settings M Auto Rotation of Vertical Images Vertical images are rotated automatically so they are displayed vertically on the camera s LCD monitor and on the computer instead of horizontally You can change the setting for this feature Select Auto rotate Under the 1 tab select Auto rotate then press lt gt SET UP1 Auto rotate Set the auto rotation Select the desired setting then press lt e1 gt e One E The vertical image is automatically rotated during playback on both the camera s LCD monitor and on the computer On The vertical image is automatically rotated only on the computer Off The vertical image is not automatically rotated QD Auto rotation will not work with vertical images captured while auto rotation was Off They will not rotate even if you later switch it to On for playback ir The vertical image will not be automatically rotated for the image review just after shooting If the vertical image is taken while the camera is pointed up or down the image may not be rotated automatically for playback If the vertical image is not automatically rotated on the computer screen it means the software you are using is unable to rotate the image Using the EOS software is recommended 395 396 11 Post Processing Images You can process RAW images with the camera or resize reduce the resolution of JPE
27. 4 LRT STE r Locked on 1 2 O Responsive 1 2 34 tracking sensitivity Sound recording Auto Manual Disable 3 2 3 1 3 6 5 6 In the lt gt mode these menu options are displayed under 32 In the lt j gt shooting mode Sound recording settings will be On Off 493 Menu Settings 43 Shooting 5 1 Movie Red Page Silent LV shooting Mode 1 Mode 2 Disable Metering timer 4 sec 8 sec 16 sec 30 sec g 1 min 10 min 30 min Count up Start time setting Movie recording Time code count Movie play count 2 I HDMI Drop frame button function HDMI output LCD No mirroring Mirroring 1 In the lt J gt mode these menu options are displayed under 33 2 The setting is linked to Movie play count under the L gt 3 tab 3 Displayed when 59 94 fps or 29 97 fps is set 494 Troubleshooting Guide m If a problem occurs with the camera first refer to this Troubleshooting Guide If this Troubleshooting Guide does not resolve the problem contact your dealer or nearest Canon Service Center Power Related Problems The battery pack does not recharge Ifthe battery s remaining capacity is 94 or higher the battery will not be recharged p 470 Do not use any battery pack other than genuine Battery Pack LP E6N LP E6 The charger s lamp blinks at high speed If 1 the battery charger or battery pack has a prob
28. Q Do not affix the label on any part other than as shown in the illustration in step 2 Otherwise the misplaced label may make it difficult to insert the battery or impossible to turn on the camera Ifyou use Battery Grip BG E16 sold separately the label may peel off as you repeatedly insert and remove the battery pack If it peels off affix a new label 472 tE Checking the Battery Information ee Checking the Remaining Capacity of a Registered Battery Pack You can check the remaining capacity of any battery pack even when not installed and also when it was last used Serial number Date last used Look for the serial number Refer to the battery s serial number Battery tnfo label and look for the battery s serial ied pda ical eat number on the battery history screen gt You can check the respective battery pack s remaining capacity and the date when it was last used Register Delete info Remaining capacity Deleting the Registered Battery Pack Information 1 Select Delete info Follow step 2 on page 471 to select Delete info then press lt Ge gt Select the battery pack information to be deleted Select the battery pack information to be deleted then press lt Ge gt gt vV will appear To delete information for another battery pack repeat this procedure gt Press the lt gt button gt The confirmation dialog screen will appear 4 Select OK gt T
29. Shutter priority AE Aperture priority AE Manual exposure 3 stops in 1 3 stop or 1 2 stop increments Scene Intelligent Auto Tv Automatically set within ISO 100 ISO 16000 P Av B Automatically set within ISO 100 ISO 16000 expandable to H1 equivalent to ISO 25600 M Auto ISO automatically set within ISO 100 ISO 16000 ISO 100 ISO 16000 set manually in 1 3 or whole stop increments expandable to H1 equivalent to ISO 25600 Supported Compatible with 59 94p 29 97p Built in monaural microphone external stereo microphone terminal provided Sound recording level adjustable wind filter provided attenuator provided Headphone socket provided and volume adjustment possible 3 types Possible Except when set to Full HD 59 94p 50 00p LCD monitor and HDMI output movie displayable simultaneously Movie without information display can also be output Auto 59 94i 50 00i 59 94p 50 00p 23 98p selectable 517 Specifications e LCD Monitor Type Monitor size and dots Brightness adjustment Electronic level Interface languages Help display e Playback Image display formats Highlight alert AF point display Grid display Magnified view Image browsing methods Image rotation Rating Movie playback Slide show Image protection Copying images TFT color liquid crystal monitor Wide 7 7 cm 3 0 in 3 2 with approx 1 04 million dots Auto Dark Standard Bright Manual 7 levels Prov
30. Toe A Take the picture Check the focus and exposure then press the shutter button completely to take the picture p 286 304 Using AF to Focus AF Method a Notes for AF AF Operation Even when focus is achieved pressing the shutter button halfway will focus again The image brightness may change during and after the AF operation If the light source changes while the Live View image is displayed the screen may flicker and focusing may be difficult If this happens exit Live View shooting and execute AF under the actual light source If Tracking is set magnified view is not possible When FlexiZone Multi is set and you press the lt Q gt button the center of the selected zone or image center with automatic selection will be magnified When FlexiZone Single is set and you press the lt Q gt button the area covered by the AF point will be magnified If you press the shutter button halfway focusing will be performed while displaying the magnified view If focusing is difficult in magnified view return to A the normal display and use AF Note that the AF speed may differ between the normal and magnified views If you magnify the view after focusing with FlexiZone Multi or FlexiZone Single in the normal view precise focus may not be achieved O When in magnified view contrast detection AF will be applied regardless of the lens used The AF
31. You cannot use AEB and WB bracketing The Distortion setting will be set automatically to Disable If ta3 Long exp noise reduction 3 Multiple exposure 33 HDR Mode AEB or WB bracketing is set Multi Shot Noise Reduction cannot be set Flash shooting is not possible The AF assist beam will be emitted according to the AF3 AF assist beam firing setting You cannot set Multi Shot Noise Reduction for bulb exposures and movie shooting The setting will automatically switch to Standard if you do any of the following Turn the power switch to lt OFF gt change the battery replace the card select the lt J gt or lt B gt shooting mode set or switch the image recording quality to RAW or RAW JPEG or switch to movie shooting 177 UEM Setting Noise Reduction Long Exposure Noise Reduction Noise reduction is possible with images exposed for 1 sec or longer 1 Select Long exp noise SHOOTS Picture Style Standard reduction Long exp noise reduction OFF eT 7 Under the 63 tab select Long Highlight tone priority exp noise reduction then press Dust Delete Data lt gt Multiple exposure Disable HDR Mode Disable HDR Long exp noise reduction Set the desired setting Select the desired setting then press Auto Enable 3 a Auto For exposures of 1 sec or longer noise reduction is performed automatically if noise typical of long exposures is detected T
32. lt LJ gt Single AF point lt e gt Spot AF point p 95 Grid p 74 2 2 2 G Exposure level indicator Metering Flash metering Area AF frame p 91 97 Flicker detection err ONE SHOT enw S RS ease p 185 a iy ia Rey RER lt B gt AF status indicator p 89 Shooting mode lt gt Warning symbol White balance p 168 p 441 Standard exposure index Exposure level scale 1 stop 1 3 stop Overexposure Flash overexposure Drive mode p 141 AF operation p 86 Metering mode p 224 JPEG RAW p 149 Flash exposure level Flash underexposure Underexposure l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l i vel l Exposure leve i l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l The display will show only the settings currently applied Nomenclature SSS ne lt ISO gt ISO speed ONE SHOT asi WRENS pts Pet E ARM Po lt gt FOCUS indicator lt qaaa gt Battery check p 80 87 p 46 lt x 4 gt AF status indicator p 132 lt gt AE lock p 229 AEB in progress Maximum burst p 153 p 227 Number of remaining multiple exposures p 240 ISO speed p 154 lt 4 gt Flash ready p 254 259 Improper FE lock warning lt D gt Highlight tone priority p 180 lt 4 gt FE lock p 259 FEB in progress p 269 Expos
33. sensitivity Movie recording quality Sound recording Time code HDMI output Still photo shooting Playback Image review time Single image display Shooting information Index display Image browsing Jump display Magnified view Two image display Image rotation Protect Rating Movie playback Slide show Viewing images ona TV set Copying Erase Quick Control gt p 313 gt p 299 gt p 342 gt p 345 gt p 346 gt p 330 gt p 336 gt p 339 gt p 348 gt p 327 gt p 70 gt p 354 gt p 356 gt p 361 gt p 362 gt p 364 gt p 366 gt p 367 gt p 368 gt p 371 gt p 378 gt p 382 gt p 385 gt p 388 gt p 392 gt p 374 Image Editing RAW image processing gt p 398 Resizing JPEG gt p 403 Printing and Transferring Images PictBridge gt p 411 Print Order DPOF gt p 421 Image transfer gt p 425 Photobook Set up gt p 429 Customization Custom Functions C Fn gt p 432 Custom Controls gt p 445 My Menu gt p 459 Custom shooting mode gt p 464 Sensor Cleaning and Dust Reduction Sensor cleaning gt p 406 Append Dust Delete Data gt p 407 Interface Cable protector gt p 34 Software Overview gt p 537 Installation gt p 539 19 Handling Precautions 99 Camera Care This camera is a precision instrument Do not d
34. 4 5 5 6 USM EF100 200mm f 4 5A EF55 200mm f 4 5 5 6 Il USM EF100 300mm f 4 5 5 6 USM EF70 200mm f 2 8L USM gt r J dJ W W mM OO O DW w Tm mM TM 7 m My Wy OO CO WO MT TH OO WO WD mM Mm m m mM mm ow EF100 300mm f 5 6 EF70 200mm f 2 8L USM EF100 300mm f 5 6L w w wi Ow J o m mM o W w w w w O w w w w w Extender EF1 4x p EF100 400mm f 4 5 5 6L IS USM EF70 200mm f 2 8L USM B EF100 400mm f 4 5 5 6L IS USM G f 8 Extender EF2x Extender EF1 4x EF70 200mm f 2 8L IS USM A 106 Lenses and Usable AF Points EF200 400mm f 4L IS USM Extender 1 4x EF200 400mm f 4L IS USM Extender 1 4x With built in Ext 1 4x EF200 400mm f 4L IS USM Extender 1 4x Extender EF1 4x EF200 400mm f 4L IS USM Extender 1 4x With built in Ext 1 4x Extender EF1 4x G f 8 EF200 400mm f 4L IS USM Extender 1 4x Extender EF2x G f 8 TS E17mm f 4L TS E24mm f 3 5L TS E24mm f 3 5L II TS E45mm f 2 8 TS E90mm f 2 8 gt gt w w wW QD When using a lens and an Extender in the combination marked with precise focus may not be achieved with AF Refer to the instruction manual of the lens or Extender used Fil Both Extender EF1 4x and Extender EF2x apply to all the I II III models under this grouping 107 Selecting Al Servo AF Characteristics You can
35. 54 498 RECOMPOSING cccseseeeeeeeeeees 83 942 Subjects difficult to TORUS wccscepesscat tes cetececteenaies 139 306 Al FOCUS AI Focus AF 88 Al SERVO AI Servo AF 88 Acceleration deceleration tracking s lt ootczsrcrsncnanceenctaatideudenite 114 AF Operation indicator 89 131 AF point auto switching 115 AF points light up in red 89 131 AF Sensor sidscctinisiematnessccanieeinas 99 Tracking sensitivity 0 113 ALL I For editing l only 332 Ambient light sensor 24 394 Anti flicker Shooting 000 185 Aperture priority AE 220 316 Area AF frame 91 97 Aspect ratio ccceceeeeseeeeeeee eens 295 PUIGIVUALOM scsceccccccscectiatavedebtersencaie 336 Audio video output 0 385 Auto Lighting Optimizer 79 175 Auto playback ccccceeeeeeeees 382 Auto power Off 45 69 Auto reSet ccceccssesessseeeeeeseeees 194 Auto rotation cccccseeeeeeeeeeee ees 395 Auto switch Card ccecceeeees 147 Auto time setting cceeeees 209 Autofocus AF Automatic selection AF 91 97 Av Aperture priority AE 220 316 A V OUT Audio video output 376 B B Bulb scot cient ea aceecn 230 314 Battery 38 40 46 470 Battery Grip ccccccccseeeeeeeeees 46 478 BG GOEL vcs ssnwetecedscrasinmrb
36. 9 image index button to select the desired option Play movie then press the Enter button For a amp Slide show slide show press the T button to INFO Display shooting info select an option then press the Enter Rotate button If you select Return and press the Enter button the menu will disappear and you can use the button to select an image Q During the two image display p 366 playback with the TV s remote control is not possible To use the TV s remote control for playback first press the lt gt button to return to the single image display E Some TV sets require you to first enable the HDMI CEC connection For details refer to the TV set s instruction manual Certain TV sets even those compatible with HDMI CEC may not operate properly In such a case set L gt 3 Ctrl over HDMI to Disable and use the camera to control the playback operation 387 Copying Images m The images recorded on one card can be copied to another card tM Copying a Single Image 1 Select Image copy er images Under the L gt 1 tab select Image notaisimage copy then press lt gt Erase images Print order Photobook Set up Image copy RAW image processing lmage copy 2 Select Sel Image Check the copy source and target cards number and remaining Source Freespace BD 7 22 GB capacity Sel mage Sel All image Select Sel Image then press lt gt
37. AF ES AF 329 tE Setting the Movie Recording Size a To select the card for recording playing back WB Shift Bracketing or Picture Style parameters press the lt INFO gt button Pressing lt gt will return the camera to movie shooting iS Setting the Movie Recording Size Movie rec quality With I 4 Movie rec quality the 6 2 1920x1080 25 00fps tab in lt 5 gt you can set the movie Biatidetsidee recording format movie recording size MOV MP4 MOV a i E EF FEDTE size frame rate compression method 24 00p Disable and other functions The frame rate displayed on the Movie rec size screen switches automatically depending on the 3 Video system setting p 491 MENU Aa MOV MP4 You can select the movie s recording format Movie rec quality MOV 1920x1080 25 00fps The movie is recorded in the MOV Stendalite format file extension MOV Convenient for editing with a computer MOV MP4 ua MP4 The movie is recorded in the MP4 format file extension MP4 This format is compatible with a much larger range of playback systems than the MOV format 330 M9 Setting the Movie Recording Size a Movie Recording Size You can select the movie s size frame rate and compression method Movie rec size Image Size 1920x1080 25 00fps 29 59 FFHD 1920x1080 siandard IRB Full High Definition Full HD FAoMGIPE Ap EBA l ne FASAL HbO recordin
38. Al Servo AF characteristics AF Custom Functions AF fine adjustment AF assist beam e Exposure Control Metering modes Brightness metering range Exposure control ISO speed Recommended exposure index ISO speed settings Exposure compensation manual selection AF point expansion manual selection up down left and right AF point expansion manual selection surround Zone AF manual selection of zone Large Zone AF manual selection of zone 65 point automatic selection AF Based on EOS iTR AF setting Enables AF incorporating human face color information ITR Intelligent Tracking and Recognition Case 1 6 Tracking sensitivity Acceleration deceleration tracking AF point auto switching 17 functions AF Microadjustment All lenses by same amount or Adjust by lens Small series of flashes fired by built in flash Approx 150 000 pixel RGB IR metering sensor and 252 zone TTL metering at max aperture EOS ISA Intelligent Subject Analysis system e Evaluative metering linked to all AF points e Partial metering approx 6 of viewfinder at center e Spot metering approx 1 8 of viewfinder at center e Center weighted average metering EV 0 20 at room temperature ISO 100 Program AE Scene Intelligent Auto Program Shutter priority AE Aperture priority AE Manual exposure Bulb exposure Scene Intelligent Auto ISO 100 ISO 6400 set automatically P Tv Av M B Auto ISO
39. B 4 Anti flicker shoot is set to Disable metering under flickering light source will cause lt GIES gt to blink in the viewfinder as a warning Setting Enable before shooting is recommended In the lt 4j gt mode the effects of flickering light will be reduced when you shoot but lt GETA gt will not be displayed Anti flicker shooting also works with flash However the expected result may not be obtained during wireless flash shooting Setting the Color Space me The range of reproducible colors is called color space With this camera you can set the color space for captured images to SRGB or Adobe RGB For normal shooting SRGB is recommended The color space is set automatically to sRGB in the lt Aj gt mode 1 Select Color space Under the 2 tab select Color space then press lt 6 gt Set the desired color space Select SRGB or Adobe RGB then press lt gt SHOOT2 Color space Adobe RGB Adobe RGB This color space is mainly used for commercial printing and other industrial uses This setting is not recommended if you are not familiar with image processing Adobe RGB and Design rule for Camera File System 2 0 Exif 2 21 or higher The image will look very subdued in a sRGB computer environment and with printers not compatible with Design rule for Camera File System 2 0 Exif 2 21 or higher Post processing of the image with computer software will therefore be req
40. C3 Shooting with the LCD Monitor IE een Enabling Live View Shooting Oa A Y Set 5 Live View shoot the 33 nanas mama tab in lt 4J gt to Enable Live View shoot i DIELE Number of Possible Shots with Live View Shooting Room Temperature Low Temperatures Tepee 23 C 73 F 0 C 32 F No Flash Approx 270 shots Approx 260 shots 50 Flash Use Approx 250 shots Approx 240 shots The figures above are based on a fully charged Battery Pack LP E6N and CIPA Camera amp Imaging Products Association testing standards With a fully charged Battery Pack LP E6N continuous Live View shooting is possible for approx 2 hr 20 min at room temperature 23 C 73 F or for approx 2 hr 10 min at low temperatures 0 C 32 F a Do not point the camera toward an intense light source such as the sun on a sunny day or an intense artificial light source Doing so may Fa damage the image sensor or the camera s internal components amp General Live View Shooting Cautions are on pages 310 311 El You can also focus by pressing the lt AF ON gt button When flash is used there will be two shutter sounds but only one shot will be taken Also the time it takes to take the picture after you press the shutter button completely will be slightly longer than with viewfinder shooting If the camera is not operated for a prolonged period the power will turn off automatically after the time se
41. Off the Rotate image setting will be recorded to the image but the camera will not rotate the image for display F Pressing the lt Q gt button during the index display will switch to the single image display and the Quick Control screen will appear Pressing the lt Q gt button again will return to the index display For images taken with another camera the options you can select may be restricted 375 Enjoying Movies mem You can play back movies in the following three ways Playback ona TV Set p 385 By connecting the camera to a TV set with HDMI Cable HTC 100 sold separately you can play back the camera s still photos and movies on the TV set gt 4 Since hard disk recorders do not have an HDMI IN port the camera cannot be connected to a hard disk recorder with an HDMI cable Even if the camera is connected to a hard disk recorder with a USB cable movies and still photos cannot be played back or saved Playback on the Camera s LCD Monitor p 378 379 You can play back movies on the camera s LCD monitor You can also edit out the movie s first and last scenes and play back the still photos and movies on the card in an automatic slide show 4p A movie edited with a computer cannot be rewritten to the card and played back with the camera 376 Enjoying Movies Playback and Editing with a Computer p 537 The movie files recorded on the card
42. Press the button again to display the Built in flash settings screen With external Speedlite External flash func setting Press the lt gt button ETTL RELESS Zoom AUTO With the external Speedlite turned on press the lt gt button to display the External flash func setting screen D gt BA 0 FEB Ral E TTL II flash metering ay When you press the lt gt button to display the flash function setting screen you cannot set Flash firing E TTL II meter or Flash sync speed in Av mode Set these functions with 1 Flash control instead If Flash firing is set to Disable and you press the lt gt button the Flash control screen will appear p 262 264 TAM Setting the Flash Built in Flash Settings Flash mode Built in flash settings Normally set this to E TTL Il This Flash mode enables autoexposure shooting with the Manual flash built in flash MULTI flash nie eines To set the flash output level manually Flash mode Manual flash select Manual flash saflash output W 1 Select amp flash output then set the Shutter sync 1st curtain mT a E T flash output level to within 1 1 1 128 1 3 stop increments before shooting This mode is for advanced users T With MULTI flash selected youcan _ Flash mode MULTI flash use a slow shutter speed to capture AA flas OULD URE A multiple moments of a moving subject in Hest cn TS E one image First
43. Press the shutter button completely to take the picture gt The captured image will be displayed Fil In the lt 4j gt mode you can only select the recording function and card and set the image recording quality drive mode and flash firing 61 Q Quick Control for Shooting Functions LSS SSS Settable Functions on Quick Control Screen Aperture p 220 AE lock p 229 Shutter speed p 218 Shooting mode p 29 Highlight tone priority p 180 Exposure ISO speed p 154 compensation M 1 125 F5 6 AUTO Flash exposure AEB setting IPEWE EEE EN l 5a G4 1 p 226 227 sla compensation p 257 3 2 S on Picture Style p 160 i Custom Controls p 445 ONESHOT o bo mial Flash firing E mode AF operation p 36 Exppsure comp AEB Setting Image recording quality p 149 White balance p 168 Metering mode p 224 Recording function Card selection p 146 Auto Lighting Optimizer p 175 Drive mode p 141 White balance correction White balance bracketing p 172 173 F Functions marked with an asterisk cannot be set with the Quick Control screen 62 Q Quick Control for Shooting Functions ae Function Setting Screen Select a function and press lt gt P AUTO The function setting screen will 3 2 1 0 1 2 3 SA40 appear OW Ehon aL Turn the lt gt or lt 3 gt dial to ONESHOT O B change some of the settings There cone
44. Processing RAW images in the camera will not produce the same results as processing RAW images with Digital Photo Professional When processing images with Distortion set to Enable AF point display information p 359 and Dust Delete Data p 407 will not be appended to the image 402 cri Resizing JPEG Images m You can resize a JPEG image to make the pixel count lower and save it as a new image Resizing an image is possible only with JPEG L M S1 S2 images JPEG 3 and RAW images cannot be resized 1 Select Resize RE Under the D12 tab select Resize then press lt gt E gt An image will be displayed Image jump w 2 Select an image Turn the lt 3 gt dial to select the image you want to resize If you press the lt Q gt button and turn the lt s7 3 gt dial counterclockwise you can select an image from the index display 3 Select the desired image size Press lt gt to display the image len sizes ata Select the desired image size then 8 9M 3648x2432 press lt G1 gt A Save the image Select OK to save the resized image Check the destination folder and image file number then select OK Save as new file Cancel OK To resize another image repeat steps 2 to 4 403 Cri Resizing JPEG Images Resize Options by Original Image Size Image Sizes Image sizes by aspect ratio are shown in the table below The image recording
45. See page 364 for the operation procedure During Live View or movie shooting except Tracking you can also magnify the image p 305 308 Cycle 80 Drive AF WB Ss Pressing the lt M Fn gt button changes the settable function in this sequence A E0 DRIVE AF gt WB Ie UNLOCK amp Unlock while button pressed Even when the lt LOCK gt switch is set to the right only while you hold down the depth of field preview button you can use the camera control buttons and dials restricted by 2 3 Multi function lock m Flash function settings Pressing lt gt will display the function setting screen for the built in flash or external Speedlite OFF No function disabled Use this setting when you do not want to assign any function to the button 458 MIM Registering My Menu me Under My Menu tab you can register menu items and Custom Functions whose settings you change frequently You can also name the registered menu tabs and press the lt MENU gt button to display the My Menu tab first Adding My Menu Tab O ar o 9 I 1 Select Add My Menu tab MY MENU Set up Add My Menu tab Under the xX tab select Add My Menu tab then press lt gt Add My Menu tab 2 Select OK gt The MY MENU 1 tab is created You can create up to five menu tabs by repeating steps 1 and 2 Add MY MENU1 tab Cancel Registering Menu Items under the My Menu Tab s Select
46. Separate AF pts Area pt Separate AF pts Pt only 5 INFO Orientation linked AF point Select separate AF area selection modes and AF points for vertical and horizontal shooting Same for both vert horiz Use the same AF area INFO a Example 2 3 Multi function lock Multi function lock 2 Main Dial 4 Quick Control Dial Multi controller AF area select lever 01 4 Cancel INFO KaG 78 INFO Multi function lock Select controls that are deactivated when the multi function lock switch is set to LOCK with v This can help prevent accidentally changing Basic Shooting This chapter explains how to use the Mode Dial s lt j gt Scene Intelligent Auto mode for easy picture taking In the lt j gt mode all you do is point and shoot and the camera sets everything automatically p 480 Also to prevent botched pictures due to mistaken operations advanced shooting function settings cannot be changed Q ath w Scene Intelligent Auto F Auto Lighting Optimizer In the lt j gt mode the Auto Lighting Optimizer p 175 will adjust the image automatically to obtain the optimum brightness and contrast It is also enabled by default in the lt P gt lt Tv gt or lt Av gt mode 19 TH Fully Automatic Shooting Scene Intelligent Auto lt 4j gt is a fully automatic mode The camera analyzes the scene and sets the optimum settings automatically It
47. Shooting Situation ISO speed No flash Flash Range The higher the ISO ISO 400 ISO 1600 Overcast skes 0 peed thefartherith evening time flash range will be ISO 1600 ISO 16000 H1 H2 Dark indoors or night High ISO speeds will result in grainier images 154 ISO Setting the ISO Speed Wee Q As H1 equivalent to ISO 25600 and H2 equivalent to ISO 51200 are expanded ISO speed settings noise dots of light banding etc and irregular colors will be more noticeable and the resolution lower than usual If t 83 Highlight tone priority is set to Enable p 180 ISO 100 125 160 H1 equivalent to ISO 25600 and H2 equivalent to ISO 51200 cannot be selected Shooting in high temperatures may result in images that look grainier Long exposures can also cause irregular colors in the image When you shoot at high ISO speeds noise such as dots of light and banding may become noticeable When shooting in conditions that produce an extreme amount of noise such as a combination of high ISO speed high temperature and long exposure images may not be recorded properly If you use a high ISO speed and flash to shoot a close subject overexposure may result If you set H2 equivalent to ISO 51200 and shoot a movie it will switch to H1 equivalent to ISO 25600 with manual exposure movie shooting Even if you switch back to still photo shooting the ISO speed will not revert to H
48. Silent LV shooting Metering timer Count up Start time setting Unchanged Unchanged Movie recording count Unenanged Movie playback eee Unchanged Unchanged Drop frame Unchanged Silent control button ove HDMI output LCD HDMI frame rate No mirroring Auto 73 F Displaying the Grid m You can display a grid in the viewfinder to help you check the camera tilt or compose the shot Oo a AA g Select Viewfinder display Auto power off 1 min Under the 2 tab select LEDiprightness aut Viewfinder display then press Date Time Zone 24 09 14 13 30 lt gt LanguageGa English Viewfinder display lt GPS digital compass settings Viewfinder display 2 Select VF grid display Viewfinder level Hide VF grid display Disable Show hide in viewfinder Viewfinder display 3 Select Enable When you exit the menu the grid will appear in the viewfinder VF grid display Enable F You can display a grid on the LCD monitor during Live View shooting and before you start shooting a movie p 295 344 74 4 Displaying the Electronic Level lt You can display the electronic level on the LCD monitor and in the viewfinder to help you correct camera tilt Displaying the Electronic Level on the LCD Monitor 1 Press the lt INFO gt button is Each time you press the lt INFO gt button the screen display will change Display the el
49. The personal white balance registered with the EOS software will be registered under lt 184 gt If you perform step 3 the data for the registered personal white balance will be erased 170 WB Setting the White Balance E E 4 Setting the Color Temperature You can set the white balance s color temperature numerically This is for advanced users Oa A Lk 1 Select White balance Expo comp AEB EZERAS Under the 62 tab select White ISO speed settings lt gt Auto Lighting Optimizer Eh balance then ae White balance AWB Custom White Balance WB Shift Bkt 0 0 0 Color space sRGB White balance 2 Set the color temperature Color temp Select E8 Turn the lt 4 gt dial to set the color Kaa kS n temperature then press lt i gt SeS2 00ND The color temperature can be set EGE OK from approx 2500 K to 10000 K in 100 K increments F When setting the color temperature for an artificial light source set white balance correction magenta or green as necessary If you set E to the reading taken with a commercially available color temperature meter take test shots and adjust the setting to compensate for the difference between the color temperature meter s reading and the camera s color temperature reading 171 WB White Balance Correction m You can correct the white balance that is set This adjustment will have the same effect as using a commercially available color te
50. W IS start With the lens s IS switch set to lt ON gt the lens s Image Stabilizer operates when you press the button assigned to this function p 53 MENU Menu display Press lt gt will display the menu on the LCD monitor O7 Register recall shooting function You can manually set the main shooting functions such as the shutter speed aperture ISO speed metering mode AF area selection mode and register them to the camera Only while you hold down the button assigned to this function you can summon and use the registered shooting function settings and shoot 7 On the setting screen press the lt INFO gt button to display the detailed settings Turn the lt 3 gt or lt gt dial to select the function to be registered then press lt gt to append a checkmark v to it Register recall shooting func v ISO speed AUTO When you select a parameter and press lt gt you NEEE e e can adjust the parameter By pressing the lt T gt 7 peenema 0 button you can revert the settings to their defaults egister current settings By selecting Register current settings the EGE Default set TE gt camera s current settings will be registered To register the AF point see page 450 457 3 Custom Controls gt Image playback Pressing lt gt will play back images Q Magnify Reduce press SET turn Press lt gt to magnify or reduce the images recorded on the card
51. When you exit the menu the checkmarked information will appear in the viewfinder p 27 4p If no card is inserted in the camera the image recording quality will not be displayed in the viewfinder E When you press the lt WB gt or lt DRIVE AF gt button operate the lens s focus mode switch or when a lens equipped with electronic manual focusing is used and the AF MF switches as the lens s focusing ring is turned p 119 the respective information will appear in the viewfinder regardless of whether it is checkmarked TT Help When MZA Help is displayed at the bottom of the menu screen the feature s description Help can be displayed The Help screen is displayed only while you hold down the lt INFO gt button If the Help fills more than one screen a scroll bar will appear on the right edge To scroll hold down the lt INFO gt button and turn the lt gt dial Example AF1 Case2 Tracking sensitivity Y Accel decel tracking OY AF pt auto switching INFO faao RATE DIEE A AF1 AF config tool Fad Case 2 Continue to track subjects ee ignoring possible obstacles INFO amp Case2 Even if subjects briefly move from the AF points they will remain in focus Effective when obstacles briefly come between the camera and subject or with INFO Ex Scroll bar Example AF 4 Orientation linked AF point Orientation linked AF point Same for both vert horiz
52. display turn the lt g gt dial clockwise Press the lt MENU gt button to save the print order to the card Set up MENU pa Standard Both Om 2 L7 Press lt gt and a print order for one Quantity copy of the displayed image will be Total images selected placed By turning the lt 3 gt dial you can set the number of copies to be printed up to 99 Index D v Press lt gt to add a checkmark to the Checkmark box V The image will be included in Index icon the index print By Select Mark all in folder and select the folder A print order for one copy of all the images in the folder will be placed If you select Clear all in folder and select the folder the print order for all the images in the folder will be canceled All image If you select Mark all on card one copy of all the images on the card will be set for printing If you select Clear all on card the print order will be cleared for all the images on the card QD Note that RAW images and movies will not be included in the print order even if you set By fil or All image When using a PictBridge printer print no more than 400 images for one print order If you specify more than this all the images may not be printed 423 gt Direct Printing of Print Ordered Images Print order With a PictBridge printer you can easily eae i L prines print images with DPOF Index 2 images Date Off File No Off Sel lmage By fa All
53. each shot and then merged together automatically The HDR image is recorded as a JPEG image HDR stands for High Dynamic Range Press the lt C gt button a7 HDR 2 Select the HDR mode Select HDR then press lt gt gt The HDR mode screen will appear HDR Mode Shoot images with a wide tonal HDR Mode 3 Set Adjust dyn range SoS SCUINEINES Select the desired dynamic range LNT ce y or setting then press lt gt 2 EV Selecting Auto will have the i EV dynamic range set automatically depending on the image s overall tonal range The higher the number the wider the dynamic range will be To exit HDR shooting select Disable HDR HDR Mode 4 Set Effect es s Select the desired effect then press Art standard lt GE gt Art vivid Art bold Art embossed E You can also set HDR shooting with 3 HDR Mode 233 HDR HDR High Dynamic Range Shooting ee Effects Natural For images preserving a wide tonal range where the highlight and shadow details would otherwise be lost Art standard While the highlight and shadow details will be better preserved than with Natural the contrast will be lower and the gradation flatter to have the picture look like a painting The subject outlines will have bright or dark edges Art vivid The colors are more saturated than with Art standard and the low contrast and flat gradation create a graphi
54. faster the indicator will climb upward If the indicator becomes full movie shooting will stop automatically Indicator If the card has a fast writing speed the indicator will either not appear or the level if displayed will hardly go upward First shoot a few test movies to see if the card can write fast enough If the indicator indicates that the card is full and movie shooting stops automatically the sound near the end of the movie may not be recorded properly If the card s writing speed decreases due to fragmentation and the indicator appears formatting the CF card p 67 or low level formatting of the SD card p 67 68 may resolve the problem Still Photo Shooting during Movie Shooting Regarding the image quality of still photos see Image Quality on page 310 352 10 Image Playback This chapter explains how to play back or erase photos and movies how to display them on a TV screen and other playback related functions Images shot and saved with another device The camera may not be able to properly display images captured with a different camera edited with a computer or that have had their file names changed gt Image Playback memm Single image Display Play back the image Press the lt L gt gt button The last image captured or played back will appear Select an image To play back images starting with the last image c
55. focusing may be difficult during hand held shooting or for a moving subject E oaooda O Single point AF Manual selection Select one AF point lt gt to be used for focusing ooo og oo o oo TA R S G yp ea 80050 yanan 28 82 8 aoaood gt AF point expansion Manual selection lt The manually selected AF point lt gt and adjacent AF points lt a gt above below on the left and on the right are used to focus Effective when it is difficult to track a moving subject with just one AF point With Al Servo AF the initial manually selected AF point lt gt must focus track the subject first However it is superior to Zone AF in focusing on the target subject With One Shot AF when focus is achieved with expanded AF points the expanded AF points lt _ gt will also be displayed along with the manually selected AF point lt gt 95 AF Area Selection Modes sos AF point expansion Manual selection surrounding points The manually selected AF point lt gt and surrounding AF points lt 20 gt are used to focus The AF point expansion is larger than with AF point expansion manual selection a so the focusing is executed over a wider area Effective when it is difficult to track a moving subject with just one AF point Al Servo AF and One Shot AF work
56. gt Select All by same amount then AF A AF Microadjustment All by same amount 5 Adjust by lens W 0 T 0 press lt GE a INFO KEES f Clear all 5 Check the result of the adjustment Take a picture and play back the image p 354 to check the adjustment result Ifthe shooting result comes out with focus in front of the targeted point adjust toward the Aa side If it comes out with focus behind the targeted point adjust toward the side f necessary repeat the adjustment 4 If All by same amount is selected separate AF adjustment will not be possible for the wide angle and telephoto ends of zoom lenses 134 EM Fine Adjustment of AF s Point of Focus E R Adjust by Lens You can make the adjustment for each lens and register the adjustment in the camera You can register the adjustment for up to 40 lenses When you autofocus with a lens whose adjustment is registered the point of focus will always be shifted by the adjustment amount Set the adjustment manually by adjusting shooting and checking the result Repeat this until the desired adjustment is made If you use a zoom lens make the adjustment for the wide angle W and telephoto T ends AF Microadjustment AF 1 Select Adjust by lens F EF S18 135mm f 3 5 5 6 IS STM Adjust focus for each model of lens individually All by same amount 0 Adjust by lens W 0 T 0 INFO LORG Clear all EMSS m Press
57. gt Bulb timer shooting lt AB gt GPS acquisition p 231 status p 201 lt W8 gt White balance correction lt QBOE gt Interval timer shooting p 172 p 250 lt h gt Auto Lighting Optimizer lt HDR gt HDR shooting p 233 p 175 lt mh gt Multiple exposure shooting p 238 The display will show only the settings currently applied 25 Nomenclature lt gt CF card selection icon ISO speed p 154 lt ISO gt ISO speed p 154 lt D gt Highlight tone priority p 180 ISo DIDID D LILAA LAILI 3e ele el eG el 02023 PTTL 6A O AI SERVO OSEN iS Exposure level indicator Setting value Cc Exposure compensation amount p 226 yy AEB range p 227 Flash exposure compensation amount Ey p 257 os lt 4 gt Flash exposure Js compensation p 257 lt gt Warning symbol p 441 26 lt gt SD card selection icon lt gt SD card indicator AF operation p 86 ONE SHOT One Shot AF Al FOCUS Al Focus AF Al SERVO Al Servo AF M FOCUS Manual focus Drive mode p 141 Single shooting High speed continuous shooting Low speed continuous shooting Silent single shooting Silent continuous shooting Self timer 10 sec remote control Self timer 2 sec remote control Nomenclature Viewfinder Information Electronic level p 76 Large Zone AF frame p 91 97 Spot metering circle p 224 Focusing screen
58. set the shutter speed to 1 25 sec or slower If the shutter speed is 1 30 sec or faster first curtain synchronization will be applied automatically even if 2nd curtain is set 266 TAM Setting the Flash External Flash Function Settings The screen display and setting options will vary depending on the external Speedlite model current flash mode Speedlite s Custom Function settings etc To see which functions your Speedlite sold separately provides refer to the Speedlite s instruction manual Sample display Wireless functions Flash ratio control External flash fun setting Flash zoom Flash mode S a il irae PAN ie Flash coverage Shutter gt 4 0 FEB Bales Flash exposure synchronization bracketing Flash exposure compensation E TTL Il flash metering Flash mode You can select the flash mode to suit your desired flash shooting E TTL Il flash metering is the standard mode of EX series Speedlites for Flash mode E TTL II flash metering automatic flash shooting M MUT ExtA ExtM Manual flash is for setting the Speedlite s Flash output level yourself Regarding other flash modes refer to the instruction manual of a Speedlite compatible with the functions 267 tM Setting the Flash Wireless functions Flash ratio control Wireless functions Wireless Off p M Firing ratio control Firing ratio control Disable RATIO Wireless multiple flash s
59. setting will obtain the correct white balance If natural looking colors cannot be obtained with lt MBD gt you can select the white balance to match the light source or set it manually by shooting a white object lt A3 gt is automatically set in the lt B gt mode 1 Press the lt WB gt button 46 Select a white balance setting While looking at the LCD panel or viewfinder turn the lt gt dial Approx Display Woas Color Temperature K Kelvin a toudy wight sunset owo ss eustom 765 zooo ta Cotortemperatue pary 250700 Applicable with Speedlites having a color temperature transmission function Otherwise it will be fixed to approx 6000 K Fl You can also set this with I 2 White balance 168 WB Setting the White Balance EE E White Balance To the human eye a white object looks white regardless of the type of lighting With a digital camera the color temperature is adjusted with software to make the white areas look white This adjustment serves as the basis for the color correction With this function pictures with natural color shades can be taken x Custom White Balance Custom white balance enables you to manually set the white balance for a specific light source for better accuracy Perform this procedure under the actual light source to be used 1 Shoot a white object Look through the viewfinder and aim the entire
60. to 1 30 sec The flash duration of such units is longer than that of compact flash units and varies depending on the model PC Terminal Mj The camera s PC terminal can be used with flash units having a sync z 4 cord The PC terminal is threaded to f prevent inadvertent disconnection oj 2 The camera s PC terminal has no d polarity You can connect any sync cord regardless of its polarity Cautions for Live View Shooting If you use a non Canon flash unit with Live View shooting set B 6 Silent LV shoot to Disable p 297 The flash will not fire if it is set to Mode 1 or Mode 2 260 4 Using an External Speedlite Q If the camera is used with a flash unit or flash accessory dedicated to another camera brand the camera may not operate properly and malfunction may result Do not connect to the camera s PC terminal any flash unit with an output voltage of 250 V or more Do not attach a high voltage flash unit on the camera s hot shoe It may not fire F A flash unit attached to the camera s hot shoe and a flash unit connected to the PC terminal can both be used at the same time 261 MIN Setting the Flash me With the built in flash or an EX series external Speedlite compatible with flash function settings you can use the camera s menu screen to set flash functions and the external Speedlite s Custom Functions If you use an external Speedlite attach the
61. 103 particularly Group G the setting may be cleared 126 tM Customizing AF Functions Initial AF Point 2 Al Servo AF You can set the Al Servo AF s starting AF point for when the AF area selection mode is set to Auto selection 65 pt AF Initial AFpt 2 Al Servo AF Initial L AF pt selected Initial C AF a selected 2 AI Servo AF will start with the Manual mimE E N manually selected AF point when the AF operation is set to Al Servo AF and the AF area selection mode is set to Auto selection 65 pt AF C Manual E O 2 2 AF pt If you switch from Manual select Spot AF Manual selection 1 pt AF Expand AF area or Expand AF area Surround to Auto selection 65 pt AF Al Servo AF will start with the AF point that was manually selected before the switch Convenient if you want Al Servo AF to start with the AF point which was selected before the AF area selection mode was switched to Auto selection 65 pt AF After you set the AF area selection mode to Auto selection 65 pt AF with the 4 3 Custom Controls menu s Metering and AF start p 450 Switch to registered AF func p 452 or Register recall shooting func p 457 you can press the assigned button during Manual select Spot AF Manual selection 1 pt AF Expand AF area as or Expand AF area Surround to switch to Al Servo AF using Auto selection 65 pt AF instead of the AF point used immediately before AUTO Auto The AF point which Al
62. 4 5 6 Extender EF2x EF28 90mm f 4 5 6 USM EF70 200mm f 4L USM EF28 90mm f 4 5 6 II EF70 200mm f 4L USM EF28 90mm f 4 5 6 II USM Extender EF 1 4x EF28 90mm f 4 5 6 III EF70 200mm f 4L USM G f 8 EF28 105mm f 3 5 4 5 USM Extender EF2x EF28 105mm f 3 5 4 5 II USM EF70 200mm f 4L IS USM B EF28 105mm f 4 5 6 EF70 200mm f 4L IS USM B EF28 105mm f 4 5 6 USM Extender EF 1 4x EF28 135mm f 3 5 5 6 IS USM EF70 200mm f 4L IS USM G f 8 EF28 200mm f 3 5 5 6 Extender EF2x EF28 200mm f 3 5 5 6 USM EF70 210mm f 3 5 4 5 USM EF28 300mm f 3 5 5 6L IS USM EF70 210mm f 4 EF35 70mm f 3 5 4 5 EF70 300mm f 4 5 6 IS USM EF35 70mm f 3 5 4 5A EF70 300mm f 4 5 6L IS USM EF35 80mm f 4 5 6 EF70 300mm f 4 5 5 6 DO IS USM EF35 80mm f 4 5 6 PZ EF75 300mm f 4 5 6 EF35 80mm f 4 5 6 USM EF75 300mm f 4 5 6 USM EF35 80mm f 4 5 6 II EF75 300mm f 4 5 6 II EF35 80mm f 4 5 6 III EF75 300mm f 4 5 6 Il USM EF35 105mm f 3 5 4 5 EF75 300mm f 4 5 6 III EF35 105mm f 4 5 5 6 EF75 300mm f 4 5 6 III USM EF35 105mm f 4 5 5 6 USM EF75 300mm f 4 5 6 IS USM EF35 135mm f 3 5 4 5 EF80 200mm f 2 8L EF35 135mm f 4 5 6 USM EF80 200mm f 4 5 5 6 EF35 350mm f 3 5 5 6L USM EF80 200mm f 4 5 5 6 USM EF38 76mm f 4 5 5 6 EF80 200mm f 4 5 5 6 II EF50 200mm f 3 5 4 5 EF90 300mm f 4 5 5 6 EF50 200mm f 3 5 4 5L EF90 300mm f 4 5 5 6 USM EF55 200mm
63. 540 A 541 Index Numerics 10 or 2 sec self timer 0 143 1280x720 MOVIE cceeeeeeeeees 331 1920x1080 movie 00c cee 331 BOO scrapie se tecaccees cecececseeeaaaaa tee 333 640x480 MOVIE cccseeeeeeeees 331 65 point automatic selection AF 91 97 A AF Scene Intelligent Auto 80 AC Adapter Kit cccceeseeeeees 474 Acceleration deceleration tracking saamactedaccivvesdedduavessespossodendas 114 ACCESS lamp ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 43 44 ACCESSOMES wise vcstviivccerssiveticdeivesaeeds 3 Adobe RGB 187 AE NOC Risccsereviccstosddensinnrnareivdeswseusees 229 AEB Auto Exposure Bracketing 227 434 PP cs ates erence ee deena 85 AF area selection lever 58 AF area selection mode 90 92 AF assist beam 065 89 120 AF Configuration Tool 108 PAP grOUP ossei 100 AF method 299 343 AF Microadjustment 133 AF ON AF start button noice 55 446 448 AF operation ccccceeeeeeeeees 86 AF point 90 93 95 99 AF point expansion 90 95 AF point registration 450 AF point selection 93 453 Beeper vi ccc usiincennbanmnneiecatisustansnins 69 Color information 0 128 Customization 117 TO AF ccce 99 103 Facial information 0 0 128 Manual focusing MF 140 308 Out of focus 53
64. AF shooting suitable for a wide variety of subjects and scenes You can also select the AF operation and drive mode that best match the shooting conditions and subject A X icon atthe upper right of a page title indicates a function that can be used only in these modes lt P gt lt Tv gt lt Av gt lt M gt lt B gt Inthe lt G gt mode the AF operation and AF area selection mode are set automatically F lt AF gt stands for autofocus lt MF gt stands for manual focus 85 AF Selecting the AF Operation m You can select the AF operation characteristics to suit the shooting conditions or subject In the lt Aj gt mode Al Focus AF is set automatically 1 Set the lens s focus mode switch to lt AF gt se Ss N Set the lt P gt lt Tv gt lt Av gt lt M gt lt B gt mode 3 Press the lt DRIVE AF gt button 6 A Select the AF operation While looking at the LCD panel or through the viewfinder turn the lt g gt dial ONE SHOT One Shot AF Al FOCUS Al Focus AF Al SERVO Al Servo AF Fl In the lt P gt lt Tv gt lt Av gt lt M gt or lt B gt mode AF is also possible by pressing the lt AF ON gt button 86 AF Selecting the AF Operation One Shot
65. AII Start images Movies Stills MENU ES OnProtect Then press lt gt Date Folder Rating Select one of the following EF Date gu Folder x Rating When lt Q 42 gt is highlighted press the lt INFO gt button Select the desired setting then press lt Ge gt Folder Rating Select date i 19 09 2014 U 20 09 2014 e i 21 09 2014 Select folder EN Select images Gi 100EOS7D 28 E EE 101EOS7D 5 ba 22 09 2014 010313 102 0020 fs 33101 20333 24 09 2014 mE a 20 10 2014 22 10 2014 382 M9 Slide Show Auto Playback item O Playback Description h All images All the still photos and movies on the card will be played back E Date Stil photos and movies taken on the selected shooting date will be played back fmaFoider Still photos and movies in the selected folder will be played back Only the movies on the card will be played back aStills Only the still photos on the card will be played back Only the protected still photos and movies on the card will be On Protected played back Rating Only the still photos and movies with the selected rating will be played back Slide show 3 Configure Set up as desired F Y 46 images Select Set up then press lt gt ype IAI images Set the Display time and Repeat ci ATE settings for still photos CT After completing the settings press 5 the lt MENU gt button Display time Repeat S
66. Adobe RGB One Shot AF Al Servo AF Al Focus AF AF area selection mode AF point Manual focusing MF O OlO Color space oio AF AF assist beam AF Microadjustment w face Tracking FlexZone Multi FlexZone Single Continuous AF O O O OF OF Of OC OIO CO OC OJ O OF CO OC Of OC CO O CF CO OJ O CO OC OC OF OC OC CO OF U O O O O O OF CO CO O OC OC CO OF CO CO OF OF CO OC OC OF CF OC OF OF OC CF OF OC CO OIO OPO Or Ol Oro OrOy OOO OOO OO OP Orga Oro Oro OVO 0 O O CO OJ O OF O OC O CO OC OJ OF CO OC OF OF CO OC OC OF CF CF OF OF OC CF O OC CO OIO O O O OF O Of OC OIO CO OC OJ OF CO CO O Of OC OC O CF OC OF O OC OC OC OF OC OC OC OF DW O OO CO O 480 Function Availability Table According to Shooting Mode EE a aE Function G P Tv Av M B Evaluative metering O O O O O Partial metering O O O O Metering Spot metering O O O O O Center weighted average metering O O O O O Program shift O AE lock olojo Exposure compensation O O O os AEB O O O O Exposure Depth of field preview O O O O O HDR shooting O O O O Multiple exposures O O O O O Interval timer O O O O O Bulb timer O Single shooting
67. Configure MY MENU Configure MY MENUI Turn the lt s3 gt dial and select Configure MY MENU tab for registering menu items then press lt eI gt 459 tM Registering My Menu E E Configure MY MENUI 2 Select Select items to register Select items to register Sort registered items Delete selected items Delete all items on tab Delete tab Rename tab Sanno eN Register the desired items Image quality j Select the desired item then press Image review Beep gt i Release shutter without card Select OK on the confirmation Lens aberration correction dialog Flash control You can register up to six items To return to the screen in step 2 press the lt MENU gt button My Menu Tab Settings SaUn MY MENU1 You can sort and delete items under the Select items to register menu tab and rename or delete the Sort registered items menu tab Delete selected items Delete all items on tab DAGGAEIS Rename tab Sort registered items You can change the order of the registered items in My Menu Select Sort registered items and select the item whose order you want to change Then press lt amp gt With displayed turn the lt gt dial to change the order then press lt gt Delete selected items Delete all items on tab You can delete any of the registered items Delete selected items deletes one item at a time and Delete all items on tab dele
68. Delete Data me Normally the Self Cleaning Sensor Unit will eliminate most of the dust that may be visible on captured images However in case visible dust still remains you can append the Dust Delete Data to the image for erasing the dust spots later The Dust Delete Data is used by Digital Photo Professional EOS software p 537 to erase the dust spots automatically Preparation Prepare a solid white object such as a sheet of paper Set the lens focal length to 50 mm or longer Set the lens s focus mode switch to lt MF gt and set the focus to infinity co If the lens has no distance scale rotate the camera to face towards you and turn the focusing ring clockwise all the way Obtaining the Dust Delete Data 1 Select Dust Delete Data Picture Style Standard Under the 63 tab select Dust Long exp noise reduction OFF Delete Data then press lt GE gt High ISO speed NR ail Highlight tone priority DY UK am DY c DY te Dust Delete Data 2 Select OK TANE EE gt After the automatic self cleaning of dust using software the sensor is performed a message Refer to manual for details P will appear Although there will be a shutter sound during the cleaning no Cancel OK picture is taken Last updated 00 00 00 00 00 DHA AACA ELE Fully press the shutter e button when ready Sensor cleaning 407 T Appending Dust Delete Data a 3 Shoot a solid white objec
69. Effective when there may be an obstacle blocking the subject or when you do not want to focus on the background E If an obstacle gets in the way or if the subject moves away from the AF points for a prolonged period and the default setting is unable to track the target subject setting Tracking sensitivity to 2 may give better results p 113 109 EWM Selecting Al Servo AF Characteristics Case 3 Instantly focus on subjects suddenly entering AF points AF1 AF config tool Case 3 Instantly focus on subjects suddenly entering AF points Tracking sensitivity See Y Accel decel tracking 4 of AF pt auto switching I A INFO LAOT RATE DAEA Default settings e Tracking sensitivity Responsive 1 e Accel decel tracking 1 e AF pt auto switching 0 Once an AF point starts tracking the subject this setting enables the camera to consecutively focus on subjects at different distances If a new subject appears in front of the target subject the camera will start focusing on the new subject Also effective when you want to always focus on the closest subject F If you want to quickly focus on a subject appearing suddenly setting Tracking sensitivity to 2 may give better results p 113 Case 4 For subjects that accelerate or decelerate quickly AF1 AF config tool Case 4 For subjects that accel erate or decelerate quickly y Tracking sensitivity Y Accel decel tracking OY AF pt aut
70. Even during menu display image playback or image recording you can go back to shooting ready by pressing the shutter button halfway 55 Basic Operation Mode Dial 2 Turn the dial while holding down the lock release button at the center of the dial Use it to set the shooting mode After pressing a button turn the lt i gt dial When you press a button such as lt WB gt lt DRIVE AF gt lt amp 4 ISO gt the respective function remains selected for 6 sec 6 During this time you can turn the lt 743 gt dial to change the setting When the function selection ends or if you press the shutter button halfway the camera will be ready to shoot Use this dial to select or set the metering mode AF operation ISO speed AF point etc Turn the lt gt dial only While looking at the viewfinder or LCD panel turn the lt s gt dial to change the setting Use this dial to set the shutter speed aperture etc Fl The operations in 1 are possible even when the lt LOCK gt switch is set to the right Multi function lock p 59 56 Basic Operation Quick Control Dial 1 After pressing a button turn the lt gt dial When you press a button such as lt WB gt lt DRIVE AF gt lt amp 4 ISO gt the B respective function remains selected for 6 sec 6 During this time you can turn the lt 3 gt dial to change the s
71. Example Skyscraper windows computer keyboards etc In such cases focus by doing either of the following 1 With One Shot AF focus on an object at the same distance as the subject and lock the focus then recompose the shot p 83 2 Set the lens s focus mode switch to lt MF gt and focus manually p 140 E Depending on the subject focus may be achieved by slightly recomposing the shot and performing AF operation again Conditions that make focusing difficult with AF during Live View shooting or movie shooting are listed on page 306 139 When Autofocus Fails MF Manual Focus 1 Set the lens s focus mode switch to lt MF gt gt lt M FOCUS gt will be displayed on the LCD panel Focus on the subject Focus by turning the lens s focusing ring until the subject looks sharp in the viewfinder F Ifyou press the shutter button halfway while focusing manually the focus indicator lt gt will light up when focus is achieved With 65 point automatic selection AF when the center AF point achieves focus the focus indicator lt gt will light up 140 AH Selecting the Drive Mode m Single and continuous drive modes are provided You can select the drive mode suiting the scene or subject 1 Press the lt DRIVE AF gt button 6 2 Select the drive mode While looking at the LCD panel or viewfinder turn the lt gt dial C Single shoo
72. Flash Photography This chapter explains how to shoot with the built in flash and external Speedlites EX series sold separately how to set flash settings with the camera s menu screen and how to use the built in flash for wireless flash shooting GD Flash cannot be used with movie shooting It will not fire AEB cannot be used with flash y Using the Built in Flash m In the lt P gt lt Tv gt lt Av gt lt M gt lt B gt modes just press the lt gt button to raise the built in flash for flash photography Before shooting check that 4 is displayed in the viewfinder After shooting push the built in flash back down with your fingers until it clicks into place In the lt J gt mode the built in flash will be raised and fire automatically in low light or backlit conditions You can also enable or disable the flash firing The table below shows the shutter speed and aperture settings that will be used with flash Shooting Mode Shutter Speed Aperture amp Automatically set Automatically set Automatically set 1 250 sec 1 60 sec Automatically set Tv Manually set 1 250 sec 30 sec Automatically set Automatically set Manually set 1 250 sec 30 sec Manually set Exposure continues while you hold down the shutter button or while Manually set the bulb timer is operating F Flash Photography in the lt Av gt Mode To obtain a correct flash exposure the flash output will b
73. ISO 100 ISO 16000 in 1 3 or whole stop increments or ISO expansion to H1 equivalent to ISO 25600 or H2 equivalent to ISO 51200 ISO speed range Auto ISO range and Auto ISO minimum shutter speed settable Manual 5 stops in 1 3 or 1 2 stop increments AEB 3 stops in 1 3 or 1 2 stop increments can be combined with manual exposure compensation 913 Specifications AE lock Interval timer Bulb timer e HDR Shooting Dynamic range adjustment Effects Auto image align e Multiple Exposures Shooting methods Number of multiple exposures Multiple exposure control e Shutter Type Shutter speeds e Drive System Drive modes Continuous shooting speed Max burst 514 Auto Applied in One Shot AF mode with evaluative metering when focus is achieved Manual By AE lock button Shooting interval and shot count settable Bulb exposure time settable Auto 1 2 3 Natural Art standard Art vivid Art bold Art embossed Provided Function control priority Continuous shooting priority 2 to 9 exposures Additive Average Bright Dark Electronically controlled focal plane shutter 1 8000 sec to 30 sec total shutter speed range available range varies by shooting mode Bulb X sync at 1 250 sec Single shooting High speed continuous shooting Low speed continuous shooting Silent single shooting Silent continuous shooting 10 sec self timer remote control 2 sec self tim
74. O 6 O 6 O 6 O 6 O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O The AF stop button B is provided only on super telephoto IS lenses 449 3 Custom Controls SS a F Metering and AF start When you press the button assigned to this function metering and AF are executed 1 When assigned to the lt AF ON gt or lt gt button pressing the lt INFO gt button while the setting ET screen is displayed will enable you to set the Asno A charactontice detailed AF settings When shooting pressing the AF operation AISERVO lt AF ON gt or lt gt button will execute AF as it was BEGEJ TILE set Detail set INFO Tatil AF start position When Registered AF point is set you can press the lt AF ON gt or lt gt button to switch to the registered AF point Registering the AF Point 1 Set the AF area selection mode to one of the following Single point Spot AF manual selection Single point AF manual selection AF point expansion manual selection a AF point expansion manual selection surrounding points or 65 point automatic selection AF Zone AF manual selection of zone and Large Zone AF manual selection of zone cannot be selected 2 Select an AF point manually 3 Hold down the lt gt button and press the lt 8 gt button A beep will sound and the AF point will be registered If the AF area selection mode is set to any setting other th
75. O O Picture Automatically set Auto O OIOI Ol O O Style Manual selection O lololo O O Auto O OIOIOI O O Preset O IOIOIO O O White Custom O ECAECRE O O balance Color temperature setting O IOIOIJIO O O Correction O IOIOIO O O Bracketing O O Auto Lighting Optimizer e O O l0O 0 O O Long exposure noise reduction High ISO speed noise reduction O O l0O 0 O O Highlight tone priority O Co Oe O O Peripheral illumination Lens a O O a A O O berration Chromatic aberration JSE correction O O JOOJOO 2 Distortion correction Color sRGB e o 0 0 0 e O O space Adobe RGB O O Tracking OIO IOI IOJOJO O O FlexiZone Multi OIO IOIOIOIO O O AF FlexiZone Single OIO 10 10 10 10 O O Manual focusing MF OIO IT OIOIOTITO O O Movie Servo AF OIO IOIOIOIO O O 1 The amp icon indicates still photo shooting during movie shooting 2 Multi Shot Noise Reduction cannot be set 482 Function Availability Table According to Shooting Mode eee Movies Still Photos a Function G P B Tv Av M G P B Tv Av M ah m foal wav aM gA EB aT ogv aM Metering OOo oo Program shift AE lock O 1 O O Be O 3 Exposure Exposure compensation O IOIO O Ola AEB Depth of field preview Single shooting O O O High speed continuous AnP O O O shooting Low speed continuous ig O O O shooting Drive Silent single shootin
76. O O O O O O High speed continuous shooting O O O O O O Low speed continuous shooting O O O O O O Drive Silent single shooting O IOl Oe Oe Oe Silent continuous shooting O O O O O O 10 sec self timer Remote control O O O O O O 2 sec self timer Remote control O O O O O O Automatic firing O Flash on Fires at all times O O O O O O Flash off O O O O O O Built in flash Red eye reduction O O O O O FE lock O O O O O Flash exposure compensation O O O O O Wireless control O O O O O External Function settings O O O O O Speedlite Custom Function settings O O O O O Live View shooting O O O O O O Quick Control O O O O O O 1 If the built in flash is set to lt gt the AF assist beam will not be emitted 2 Settable only during Live View shooting E 3 With Auto ISO you can set a fixed ISO speed 4 Settable only when Auto ISO is set 5 Settable only during viewfinder shooting 481 Function Availability Table According to Shooting Mode SS SSSSSSS____________a_ __j Movie Shooting Set automatically O User selectable _ Not selectable Disabled Movies Still Photos a Function G P B Tv Av M P B Tv Av M gA m balv nev aM gA aly gAv aM All im li in l le aa quality settings selectab ololololo All image quality settings selectable still cae i a S 2 Automatically set Auto ISO Ol O ISO speed Manually set
77. Select the card then press lt gt Format card ity 3 Select OK Format card1 gt The card will be formatted All data will be lost 7 76 GB used 7 81 GB Cancel 7 7648 used 7 81 GB When B is selected low level ga EA iai aa fonmat formatting is possible p 68 Cancel Shs For low level formatting press the lt T gt button to append Low level format with a checkmark lt V gt then select OK 67 Before You Start wy z9 Format the card in the following cases The card is new The card was formatted by a different camera or a computer The card is full with images or data Acard related error is displayed p 510 Low level Formatting Perform low level formatting if the SD card s reading or writing speed seems slow or if you want to totally erase all data on the card Since low level formatting will erase all recordable sectors on the SD card the formatting will take slightly longer than normal formatting You can stop the low level formatting by selecting Cancel Even in this case normal formatting will be completed and you can use the SD card as usual 68 When the card is formatted or data is erased only the file management information is changed The actual data is not completely erased Be aware of this when selling or discarding the card When discarding the card execute low level formatting or destroy the card physically to prevent the personal data
78. Servo AF starts with is set automatically to suit the shooting conditions Fl When Manual E 0 22 AF pt is set Al Servo AF will start with the zone that corresponds to the manually selected AF point even if you switch AF area selection mode to Zone AF manual selection of zone or Large Zone AF manual selection of zone 127 M Customizing AF Functions a T E Auto AF point selection EOS iTR AF EOS iTR AF executes autofocus by recognizing faces and subject colors EOS iTR AF works when the AF area selection mode is set to Zone AF manual selection of zone Large Zone AF manual selection of zone or 65 point automatic selection AF intelligent Tracking and Recognition The metering sensor recognizes the subject and the AF points track it Auto AF pt sel EOS iTR AF ON Enable The AF point is automatically selected based not only on AF information but also faces and other details Disable In Al Servo AF mode the camera remembers the color at the position it focused on first then continues to track and focus the subject by switching AF points to track that color This makes it easier to keep track of the subject than when only AF information is available In One Shot AF mode EOS iTR AF makes focusing on people easier so you can prioritize composition OFF Disable AF points are automatically selected based only on AF information The AF will not use information based on faces subject colors and other detail
79. Single Manual focus approx 5x and 10x magnified view possible for focus check Continuous AF Provided Focusing brightness EV 0 18 at room temperature ISO 100 range Metering modes Evaluative metering 315 zones Partial metering approx 10 of Live View screen Spot metering approx 2 6 of Live View screen Center weighted average metering Brightness metering range EV 0 20 at room temperature ISO 100 Aspect ratio 3 2 4 3 16 9 1 1 Silent shooting Provided Mode 1 and 2 Grid display 3 types e Movie Shooting Recording format MOV MP4 Movie MPEG 4 AVC H 264 Variable average bit rate Audio MOV Linear PCM MP4 AAC Recording size and frame rate Full HD 1920x1080 59 94p 50 00p 29 97p 25 00p E 24 00p 23 98p HD 1280x720 59 94p 50 00p 29 97p 25 00p SD 640x480 29 97p 25 00p 515 Specifications Compression method ALL I For editing l only IPB Standard IPB Light IPB Light is for MP4 only File size MOV Full HD 59 94p 50 00p IPB Standard Approx 440 MB min Full HD 29 97p 25 00p 24 00p 23 98p ALL I Approx 654 MB min Full HD 29 97p 25 00p 24 00p 23 98p IPB Standard Approx 225 MB min HD 59 94p 50 00p ALL I Approx 583 MB min HD 59 94p 50 00p IPB Standard Approx 196 MB min SD 29 97p 25 00p IPB Standard Approx 75 MB min MP4 Full HD 59 94p 50 00p IPB Standard Approx 431 MB min Full HD 29 97p 25 00p 24 00p 23 98p AL
80. Speedlite to the camera and turn on the Speedlite before setting the flash functions For details on the external Speedlite s flash functions refer to the Speedliite s instruction manual 1 Select Flash control SHOOT1 Image quality Under the 61 tab select Flash Image review 2 sec control then press lt CE gt Beep Enable Release shutter without card gt The Flash control screen will appear Lens aberration correction Flash control a Select the desired item Flash firing Enable Select the item to be set then press E TTL II meter Evaluative lt 3 gt Flash sync speed in Av mode AUTO Built in flash settings External flash func setting External flash C Fn setting Clear settings MENU fa Flash Firing Flash control To enable flash photography set Flash firing Enable To enable only the AF assist Disable beam set Disable E TTL Il Flash Metering Sian eras For normal flash exposures set it to Evaluative If Average is set the E TTL Il meter 4 flash exposure will be averaged for the Average entire metered area Depending on the scene flash exposure compensation may be necessary This setting is for advanced users 262 TEW Setting the Flash Flash Synchronization Speed in Av Mode SE aie Sean You can set the flash sync speed for flash photography in the aperture priority 1 250 1 60sec auto 10 A AE Av mode 1 250 sec fixed 1 250
81. Turn on 6 or off the LCD panel illumination by pressing the lt 8 gt button During a bulb exposure pressing the shutter button completely will turn off the LCD panel illumination Displaying Shooting Function Settings After you press the lt INFO gt button a number of times the shooting function settings will be displayed With the shooting function settings displayed you can turn the Mode Dial to see the settings for each shooting mode p 469 Pressing the lt Q gt button enables Quick Control of the shooting function settings p 61 Press the lt INFO gt button again to turn off the display P E AUTO Scene Intelligent Auto 4A 3 2 1 1 2 73 b i ab AWB aL Oo ONESHOT O D 514 ona 514 60 Q Quick Control for Shooting Functions You can directly select and set the shooting functions displayed on the LCD monitor This is called Quick Control 1 Press the lt Q gt button 610 gt The Quick Control screen will appear Set the desired functions Use lt lt gt to select a function The setting of the selected function is displayed Turn the lt 3 gt or lt s 8 gt dial to change the setting lt P Tv Av M B gt modes P E AUTO Scene Intelligent Auto JA WN gm 3 2 1 1 2 73 A0 f RY al f Yas MB Gow al oO l j ONESHOT amp Single shooting AN FA Exposure comp AEB setting Take the picture
82. a heat source It can deform the cord or melt the insulation and cause a fire or electrical shock Do not hold the camera in the same position for long periods of time Even if the camera does not feel too hot prolonged contact with the same body part may cause skin redness blistering or low temperature contact burns Using a tripod is recommended for people with circulation problems or very sensitive skin or when using the camera in very hot places Do not fire the flash at someone driving a car It may cause an accident Do not fire the flash near a person s eyes It may impair the person s vision When using flash to photograph an infant keep at least 1 meter 3 3 feet away 526 Before storing the camera or accessory when not in use remove the battery pack and disconnect the power plug This is to prevent electrical shock heat generation and fire Do not use the equipment where there is flammable gas This is to prevent an explosion or fire If you drop the equipment and the casing breaks open to expose the internal parts do not touch the internal parts due to the possibility of electrical shock Do not disassemble or modify the equipment High voltage internal parts can cause electrical shock Do not look at the sun or an extremely bright light source through the camera or lens Doing so may damage your vision Keep equipment out of the reach of children and infants including when using it Straps or cords m
83. according to cards or folders If the replacement card or existing folder already contains images recorded previously the file numbering of the new images may continue from the file numbering of the existing images on the card or in the folder If you want to save images with the file numbering starting from 0001 use a newly formatted card each time File numbering after File numbering after replacing the card creating a folder File numbering is reset Manual Reset Resets the file numbering to 0001 or to start from file number 0001 in a new folder When you reset the file numbering manually a new folder is created automatically and the file numbering of images saved to that folder starts from 0001 This is convenient if you want to use different folders for the images taken yesterday and the ones taken today for example After the manual reset the file numbering returns to continuous or auto reset There will be no manual reset confirmation screen 4 If the file number in folder 999 reaches 9999 shooting will not be possible even if the card still has storage capacity The LCD monitor will display a message telling you to replace the card Replace it with a new card 194 MIN Setting Copyright Information When you set the copyright information it will be recorded to the image as Exif information ro AF M B 1 Select Copyright information Custom shooting mode C1 C3 Under the 4 tab select Cop
84. again Convenient when you want to focus and meter the shot at different areas or when you want to take multiple shots at the same exposure setting ar orr AE lock AF stop When you press the button assigned to this function you can lock the exposure AE lock and the AF will stop Convenient during Al Servo AF if you want AE lock at the same time when AF stops FEL FE lock During flash photography pressing the button assigned to this function will fire a preflash and record the required flash output FE lock QD If you assign AE lock while button pressed to the shutter button any buttons assigned to AE lock or AE lock hold will also work as AE lock while button pressed 454 2 3 Custom Controls IS0 amp Set ISO speed hold button turn You can set the ISO speed by holding down lt gt and turning the lt s gt dial If this control is used while Auto ISO is set manual ISO speed setting will take effect Auto ISO cannot be set If you use this function in the lt M gt mode you can adjust the exposure with the ISO speed while maintaining the current shutter soeed and aperture S0 ISO hold down lever turn You can set the ISO speed by tilting lt gt to the right and turning the lt s7 3 gt dial The settable range is the same as with IS0 ISO Set ISO speed during metering During metering you can set the ISO speed by turning the lt gt dial The settable range is the sam
85. ambient temperature range of 0 C 40 C 32 F 104 F Also do not exceed the recharging time Do not insert any foreign metallic objects into the electrical contacts of the camera accessories connecting cables etc Keep the back up battery and other accessories out of the reach of children and infants If a child or infant swallows a battery or accessory consult a physician immediately Battery chemicals may harm the stomach and intestines When disposing of a battery pack or back up battery insulate the electrical contacts with tape to prevent contact with other metallic objects or batteries This is to prevent fire or an explosion If excessive heat smoke or fumes are emitted during battery pack recharging immediately unplug the battery charger from the power outlet to stop the recharging and prevent a fire If the battery pack or back up battery leaks changes color deforms or emits smoke or fumes remove it immediately Be careful not to get burned in the process Prevent any battery leakage from contacting your eyes skin and clothing It can cause blindness or skin problems If the battery leakage contacts your eyes skin or clothing flush the affected area with lots of clean water without rubbing it See a physician immediately During the recharging keep the equipment away from the reach of children The cord can accidentally choke the child or give an electrical shock Do not leave any cords near
86. an intense light source such as the sun on a sunny day or an intense artificial light source Doing so may damage the image sensor or the camera s internal components 230 B Bulb Exposures E E With t 493 Long exp noise reduction you can reduce the noise generated during long exposures p 178 For bulb exposures using a tripod and bulb timer is recommended Using mirror lockup p 246 with bulb exposures is also possible You can also shoot bulb exposures by using Remote Switch RS 80N3 or Timer Remote Controller TC 80N3 both sold separately p 248 You can also use Remote Controller RC 6 sold separately p 248 for bulb exposures When you press the remote controller s transmit button the bulb exposure will start immediately or 2 sec later Press the button again to stop the bulb exposure CN Bulb Timer You can preset the bulb exposure s exposure time With the bulb timer you need not hold down the shutter button during the bulb exposure This reduces camera shake The bulb timer can be set only in the lt B gt Bulb shooting mode It cannot be set or will not function in any other shooting mode Select Bulb timer Red eye reduc Disable Under the 4 tab select Bulb imer then lt GET gt Bulb timer Disable timer then press Anti flicker shoot DREIG Mirror lockup Bulb timer 2 Select Enable Select Enable then press lt INFO gt Enable button Expo
87. and Playback eee Selecting the CF or SD Card for Recording and Playback If Record func is set to Standard or Auto switch card select the card for recording and playing images If Record func is set to Rec separately or Rec to multiple select the card for playing images Standard Auto switch card Record func card folder sel Select Record play Record func Standard Select Record play then press Record play G lt 3 gt Folder 100EOS7D images back from the CF card Record images to and play images back from the SD card Select the card then press lt amp gt Rec separately Rec to multiple Record func card folder sel Select Playback Record func _ Rec separately Select Playback then press lt 6 gt ahah _ Play back the CF card s images A Play back the SD card s images Select the card then press lt amp gt 148 iS Setting the Image Recording Quality You can select the pixel count and the image quality There are eight JPEG image recording quality settings ML ML AM M 451 d S1 S2 3 There are three RAW image quality settings AWM M GW S p 152 Select Image quality Image quality Under the B1 tab select Image Image review 2 sec ualit then press lt gt Beep EIG q yl p Release shutter without card Lens aberration correction Flash control Standard Auto switch 2 Select the image
88. applies to lt HiH gt high speed continuous shooting Figures in parentheses apply to an Ultra DMA UDMA 7 CF card based on Canon s testing standards E Even if you use a UDMA card the maximum burst indicator will not change The maximum burst in parentheses in the table will apply instead 151 M9 Setting the Image Recording Quality S F If you select both RAW and JPEG the same image will be recorded simultaneously to the card in both RAW and JPEG at the image recording qualities that were set The two images will be recorded with the same file numbers file extension JPG for JPEG and CR2 for RAW The image recording quality icons are as follows RAW M Medium RAW S GW Small RAW JPEG JPEG Fine a Normal L Large M Medium and S Small RAW Images A RAW image is raw data output by the image sensor converted to digital data It is recorded to the card as is and you can select the quality as follows GW M EW or S GA A image can be processed with gt 1 RAW image processing p 398 and saved as a JPEG image M and S images cannot be processed with the camera As the RAW image itself does not change you can process the RAW image according to different processing conditions to create any number of JPEG images from it You can use Digital Photo Professional EOS software p 537 to process RAW images You can make various adjustments as desired and generate a JPEG TIFF etc image incorporat
89. area selection method o Min M Fn button After you press the lt EJ gt button operating the lt gt or lt M Fn gt button changes the AF area selection mode lF Main Dial After you press the lt EJ gt button E operating the lt gt or lt 7 gt dial changes the AF area selection mode Main Dial E When E Main Dial is set use the lt gt to move the AF point horizontally Orientation linked AF point You can set the AF point or the AF area selection mode AF point separately for vertical shooting and horizontal shooting Orientation linked AF point u Same for both vert horiz The same AF area selection mode and manually selected AF point or zone are used for both vertical shooting and horizontal shooting Separate AF pts Area pt Separate AF pts Pt only 125 M Customizing AF Functions _ L L LESSEE SE ot Separate AF pts Areatpt The AF area selection mode and AF point or zone can be set separately for each camera orientation 1 Horizontal 2 Vertical with the camera grip at the top 3 Vertical with the camera grip at the bottom When you manually select the AF area selection mode and AF point or zone for each of the three camera orientations they will be set for the respective orientation Whenever you change the camera orientation during shooting the camera will switch to the AF area selection mode and manually selected AF point or zone set for t
90. cable protector prevents the cable from accidental disconnection and the terminal from getting damaged Using a Provided Interface Cable and a Genuine HDMI Cable sold separately 1 Provided interface cable HDMI cable sold separately 34 Nomenclature Using a Genuine Interface Cable sold separately If you use a genuine interface cable sold separately p 478 run the cable through the clamp before attaching the clamp to the cable E protector W Connecting interface cable without using the cable protector may damage the digital terminal Do not use a USB 2 0 cable equipped with a Micro B plug It may damage the camera s digital terminal amp As shown in the lower right illustration for step 4 check that the interface cable is securely attached to the digital terminal g To connect the camera to a TV set using HDMI Cable HTC 100 sold separately is recommended Using the cable protector is recommended even when connecting an HDMI cable 35 36 Getting Started This chapter explains preparatory steps before you start shooting and basic camera operations Minimizing Dust When changing lenses do it quickly in a place with minimal dust When storing the camera without a lens attached be sure to attach the body cap to the camera Remove dust on the body cap before attaching it
91. card s write protect switch is set upward to enable writing erasing Installing the Card Open the cover Slide the cover as shown by the arrows to open it 2 Insert the card The camera front side slot is for a CF card and the camera back side slot is for an SD card Face the CF card s label toward you and insert the end with the small holes into the camera If the card is inserted in the wrong way it may damage the camera The CF card eject button will stick out With the SD card s label facing you push in the card until it clicks in place Write protect switch 41 Installing and Removing the Card d 3 Close the cover Close the cover and slide it in the direction shown by the arrows until it snaps shut gt When you set the power switch to lt ON gt p 45 the number of possible ea Possible shots and the loaded card s will be selection icon shots displayed on the LCD panel The images will be recorded to the card indicated by the arrow lt gt icon CF card indicator SD card indicator D The camera cannot use Type II CF cards or hard disk type cards F Ultra DMA UDMA CF cards can also be used with the camera UDMA cards enable faster data writing SD SDHC SDXC memory cards are supported UHS I SDHC or SDXC memory cards can also be used The number of possible shots depends on the remaining ca
92. case Do not store the card in hot dusty or humid locations Lens After detaching the lens from the camera put down the lens with the rear end up and attach the lens caps to avoid scratching the lens surface and electrical contacts Contacts EEE Nomenclature m lt DRIVE AF gt Drive mode selection AF operation AF method selection button p 141 86 299 lt WB gt White balance selection Metering mode selection button p 168 224 lt 4ISO gt Flash exposure compensation ISO speed setting button p 257 154 EF lens mount index p 50 lt 8 gt LCD panel Built in flash AF assist beam p 254 89 illumination button p 60 EF S lens mount index p 50 lt M Fn gt AF area selection GPS antenna Multi function button p 92 258 Flash sync contacts Hot shoe p 259 lt gt Main Dial p 56 Shutter A p 55 Self timer lamp 07s p 143 loi Remote control ia sensor p 248 Grip Battery i compartment DC coupler cord hole p 474 Depth of field preview button p 221 Mode Dial lock release button p 56 Mode Dial x p 29 56 Strap mount p 33 a A puis in ee p 337 A pA Flash button p 254 Yar Lens release button p 51 Lens lock pin Lens mount Contacts p 21 Mirror p 246 409 Body cap p 50 22 Nomenclature lt gt AF area selection lever p 58 lt AF ON gt AF start button p 55 86 2
93. dial to select the icon of the case you want to adjust 2 Press the lt RATE gt button The selected parameter will have a purple frame 3 Select the parameter to adjust Select the parameter to adjust then press lt gt When Tracking sensitivity is selected the setting screen will appear Make the adjustment Adjust the setting then press lt gt gt The adjustment is saved The default setting is indicated by the light gray mark To return to the screen in step 1 press the lt RATE gt button F In step 2 if you press the lt RATE gt button and then press the lt j gt button you can revert the 1 2 and 3 parameter settings above for each case You can also register the 1 2 and 3 parameter settings to My Menu p 459 Doing so will change the selected case s settings When shooting with a case whose parameters you adjusted select the adjusted case and then take the picture 116 Customizing AF Functions m With the AF 2 to AF 5 menu tabs you AIServolistimage priority uae aan can set the AF functions to suit your Al Servo 2nd image priority shooting style or subject AF2 AI Servo AF2 Al Servo Al Servo 1st image priority You can set the AF operation characteristics and shutter release timing for the first shot with Al Servo AF RiSeNO tet ene Onn o Equal priority Equal priority is given to focusing and sh
94. download images from the camera to your computer gives an overview of the software in the EOS Solution Disk CD ROM and explains how to install the software on your computer EOS Camera Instruction EOS Solution Disk Manuals Disk Software 531 Viewing the EOS Camera Instruction Manuals Disk DVD ROM The EOS Camera Instruction Manuals Disk DVD ROM contains the following electronic manuals PDF Instruction Manual Explains all the camera functions and procedures including basic content Software Instruction Manuals Software Instruction Manuals PDFs for the software supplied on the EOS Solution Disk see p 537 932 Viewing the EOS Camera Instruction Manuals Disk DVD ROM Viewing the EOS Camera Instruction Manuals Disk DVD ROM WINDOWS EOS Camera Instruction Manuals Disk Copy the PDF Instruction Manuals contained on the disk to your computer 1 Insert the EOS Camera Instruction Manuals Disk DVD into the DVD ROM drive of your computer 2 Double click My Computer on the desktop and then double click the DVD ROM drive into which you have inserted the disk 3 Click on the name of the instruction manual you want to view Select your language and operating system The index of the Instruction Manuals is displayed Canon Canon EOS 7D Mark Il Manuals EOS 72 markt EOS 7D Mark II G Hardware Manuals EOS 7D Mark II Instruction Manual Software Manuals Digital Photo P
95. f 3 5 5 6 IS STM support slow focus transition during movie shooting For details refer to the Canon website Q If FHD EWA 59 94 fps or ANY 50 00 fps is set Movie Servo AF will not function and therefore the settings above will not be available F If AF method is set to 4 Tracking or FlexiZone Multi the AF adjustment speed will be equivalent to the Standard setting 345 tM Menu Function Settings eee Movie Servo AF tracking sensitivity Mavic Sonoran EER You can change the Movie Servo AF s INFO ES SET OK Q F tracking sensitivity to one of five levels This affects the responsiveness of AF tracking sensitivity when the AF point Locked on Responsive loses the subject such as during panning or when an obstacle enters the AF points This function is available when Movie Servo AF is set to Enable and AF method is set to FlexiZone Single Locked on 2 Locked on 1 This setting makes the camera less inclined to track a different subject if the AF point loses the original subject The 2 setting makes the camera less inclined to track a different subject than the 1 setting It is effective when you want to prevent the AF points from rapidly tracking something that is not the intended subject during panning or when an obstacle enters the AF points Responsive 2 Responsive 1 This makes the camera more responsive when tracking a subject that covers the AF point The 2 setting make
96. for unchanged A 3 Focusing screen and 4 3 Custom Controls will remain 433 TM Setting Custom Functions __ Exoaclrellevellinereirients various camera features to suit your ISO speed setting increments picture taking preferences Any settings Bracketing auto cance different from the default will be Bracketing sequence i Number of bracketed shots displayed in blue Safety shift Same expo for new aperture C Fn1 Exposure Exposure level increments 1 3 1 3 stop 1 2 1 2 stop Sets 1 2 stop increments for the shutter speed aperture exposure compensation AEB flash exposure compensation etc This is effective when you prefer to control the exposure in less fine increments than 1 3 stop F When 1 2 stop is set the exposure level will be displayed as shown below Val Id med 5j 4 3 TE O Brat A23 S0 10 Tr e e A eles ane ii wt Ler ii ISO speed setting increments 1 3 1 3 stop 1 1 1 stop F Even when 1 stop is set you can set ISO 16000 Bracketing auto cancel ON Enable When you set the power switch to lt OFF gt the AEB and white balance bracketing settings will be canceled AEB will also be canceled when the flash is ready to fire or if you switch to movie shooting OFF Disable The AEB and white balance bracketing settings will not be canceled even if you set the power switch to lt OF F gt If the flash is ready to fire or if you switch to movie shooting AEB will
97. frame marking the AF area Area AF frame will be different from 65 point automatic selection AF Ooo Mmasa o E Cross type AF point Subject Oo S888 oO tracking is superior and high gg ee gg precision focusing is achieved 00 seeee CO L AF points sensitive to horizontal lines Disabled AF points not displayed Group F Autofocusing with only 45 points is possible Not possible with all 65 AF points All the AF area selection modes are selectable During automatic AF point selection the outer frame marking the AF area Area AF frame will be different from 65 point automatic selection AF pog 20009 po E Cross type AF point Subject OO S888 OO tracking is superior and high a pana ae precision focusing is achieved 00 goooo HE O AF points sensitive to vertical lines AF points in the horizontal array at the top and bottom or horizontal lines AF points in a vertical array on the left and right Disabled AF points not displayed 102 Lenses and Usable AF Points O Group G AF is possible with the center AF point and the adjacent AF points above below on the left and on the right Only the following AF area selection modes are selectable Single point AF manual selection Single point Spot AF manual selection and AF point expansion manual selection 2 If an Extender is attached to the lens and the maximum aperture is f 8 between f 5 6 and f 8 AF will be possible E Cross type AF point S
98. greatly affect the AF speed and the camera may take a longer time to focus phase difference detection generally allows faster AF focusing For details refer to the Canon website Selecting the AF Method You can select an AF method to suit the shooting conditions and your subject The following AF methods are provided 4 face Tracking p 300 FlexiZone Multi p 302 and FlexiZone Single p 304 If you want to achieve precise focus set the lens s focus mode switch to lt MF gt magnify the image and focus manually p 308 Select the AF method Under the 5 tab the 3 tab in AF mehog lt Aj gt select AF method E T Select the desired AF method then press lt gt When the Live View image is displayed you can press the lt DRIVE AF gt button to select the AF method SHOOTS Lv func 299 Using AF to Focus AF Method SSS SqqQ5 50909 amp amp E X face Tracking AFL The camera detects and focuses on human faces If a face moves the AF point lt gt also moves to track the face 1 Display the Live View image Press the lt HR gt button The Live View image will appear on the LCD monitor 2 Select an AF point When a face is detected the lt gt frame will appear over the face to be focused on If multiple faces are detected lt gt will be displayed Use lt s gt to move the lt 4 gt frame over the face you want to f
99. in the index display p 361 3 Rotate the image Each time you press lt gt the image will rotate clockwise as follows 90 270 gt 0 To rotate another image repeat steps 2 and 3 E Ifyou set 1 Auto rotate to Ons E p 395 before taking vertical shots you need not rotate the image as described above If the rotated image is not displayed in the rotated orientation during image playback set 1 Auto rotate to On 6 H A movie cannot be rotated 367 o Protecting Images me Protecting an image prevents it from being erased accidentally M4 Protecting a Single Image ao 1 Select Protect images HETE Under the L gt 1 1 tab select Protect cacy eet images then press lt gt Print order Photobook Set up Image copy RAW image processing E i 2 Select Select images Select images gt An image will be displayed All images in folder Unprotect all images in folder All images on card Unprotect all images on card MENU p Image protection icon Select an image Turn the lt 3 gt dial to select the image to be protected You can also select an image or movie on the index display p 361 A Protect the image Press lt gt to protect the selected image The lt gt icon will appear at the top of the screen To cancel the image protection press lt 1 gt again The lt e gt icon will disappear To protect another image
100. is lt Tv gt you can manually set the shutter speed for movie shooting The ISO speed and aperture will be set automatically to suit the brightness and obtain a standard exposure RANI 1 Set the Mode Dial to lt Tv gt air Ord Set the Live View shooting Movie shooting switch to lt gt 3 Set the desired shutter speed While looking at the LCD monitor turn the lt s gt dial The settable shutter speeds depend on the frame rate PERS 1 4000 sec 1 30 sec Git 1 4000 sec 1 60 sec Focus and shoot the movie E The procedure is the same as steps 3 and 4 for Autoexposure Shooting p 314 O Changing the shutter speed during movie shooting is not recommended since the changes in the exposure will be recorded When shooting a movie of a moving subject a shutter speed of 1 30 sec to 1 125 sec is recommended The faster the shutter speed the less smooth the subjects movement will look If you change the shutter speed while shooting under fluorescent or LED lighting image flicker may be recorded 315 Shooting Movies A Aperture priority AE When the shooting mode is lt Av gt you can manually set the aperture for movie shooting The ISO speed and shutter speed will be set automatically to suit the brightness and obtain a standard exposure VANL 1 Set the Mode Dial to lt Av gt DAE ai A Set the Live View shooting Movie shooti
101. mode switch to lt MF gt and focus manually If you shoot the subject at the periphery and it is slightly out of focus aim the center AF point or zone over the subject to focus on focus again and then take the picture The AF assist beam will not be emitted However if an EX series Speedlite sold separately equipped with an LED light is used the LED light will turn on for AF assist when necessary During magnified view camera shake may make it harder to achieve focus Using a tripod is recommended 307 MF Focusing Manually ec You can magnify the image and focus precisely with MF manual focus 1 Set the lens s focus mode switch to lt MF gt Turn the lens s focusing ring to focus roughly 2 Display the magnifying frame Press the lt Q gt button gt The magnifying frame will appear Wang 3 Move the magnifying frame Use lt gt to move the magnifying On frame to the position where you want PON tof TN o focus KEAN Pressing lt 4 gt will return the magnifying frame to the screen s center A Magnify the image Each time you press the lt Q gt button the magnification within the frame will change as follows Noma view gt 1x gt 5x gt ae While in magnified view you can use AE lock Magnified area position Magnification Approx 308 lt gt to scroll around the magnified image
102. new folder select Create folder Create folder 389 Copying Images SSS SSS eee lmage copy g Select OK Source i 100EOS7D Check the information of the source 3 images 12 6 MB Target B 101EOS7D card and target card then select Freespace 7 22 GB OK Copy images Cancel OK Rimage copy The copying will start and the progress will be displayed When the copying is completed the a ie result will be displayed Select OK to Images not copied return to the screen in step 2 Finished copying OK tM Copying All Images in a Folder or on a Card You can copy all the images in a folder or on a card at once TEE Under gt 1 Image copy when you select Sel fg or All image you can copy all the images in the folder or ona Freespace D 7 21 GB card Source Sel Image Sel All image MENU fa 390 Copying Images ee F The file name of the copied image will be the same as the source image s file name If Sel Image is set you cannot copy images in multiple folders at once Select images in each folder to copy them folder by folder Ifan image is being copied to a target folder card which has an image with the same file number the following will be displayed Skip image and continue Replace existing image Cancel copy Select the copying method then press lt 1 gt Skip image and continue Any images in the source folder having the same file number a
103. or down and horizontal shooting If AF start position Registered AF point and AF area selection mode are both set Registered AF point will take effect 451 4 3 Custom Controls SS AFOFF AF stop The AF will stop while you hold down the button assigned to this function Convenient when you want to stop the AF during Al Servo AF AF Switch to registered AF function After setting and assigning this function to a button you can apply the following settings by holding down the assigned button for AF AF area selection mode p 90 Tracking sensitivity p 113 Acceleration deceleration tracking p 114 AF point auto switching p 115 Servo 1st image priority p 117 and Servo 2nd image priority p 118 Convenient when you want to change the AF characteristics during Al Servo AF 2 On the setting screen press the lt INFO gt button to display the detailed settings screen Turn the lt 3 gt or lt gt dial to select the parameter to be Switch to registered AF func AF area selection mode Tracking sensitivity registered then press lt gt to append a Accel decel tracking checkmark v When you select a parameter and AF pt auto switching press lt gt you can adjust the parameter Servo Ist img priority By pressing the lt j gt button you can revert the Serve 2nd img priority settings to their defaults Default set aso ONE SHOT Al SERVO You can switch the
104. p 348 Monaural sound is recorded by the camera s built in microphone p 314 Most external microphones commercially available equipped with a 3 5 mm diameter mini plug can be used By using HDMI Cable HTC 100 sold separately you can display the movie on a TV screen p 385 If the picture does not appear on the TV screen check if 3 Video system is correctly set to For NTSC or For PAL depending on the video standard of your TV set By connecting stereo headphones commercially available equipped with a 3 5 mm diameter mini plug to the camera s headphone terminal p 23 you can listen to the sound during movie shooting You can use Remote Controller RC 6 sold separately p 248 to start and stop the movie shooting if the drive mode is lt gt or lt j 82 gt Set the shooting timing switch to lt 2 gt 2 sec delay then press the transmit button If the switch is set to lt gt immediate shooting still photo shooting will take effect amp With a fully charged Battery Pack LP E6N the total movie recording time will be as follows At 23 C 73 F Approx 1 hr 40 min At 0 C 32 F Approx 1 hr 30 min The focus preset function is possible for movie shooting when using a super telephoto lens equipped with the focus preset mode available since the second half of 2011 QD Do not hold the camera in the same position for long periods of time Even if the camera does not feel too hot
105. p 61 The flash fired and the picture came out extremely bright Move further away from the subject and shoot When shooting flash photography if the subject is too close to the camera the picture may come out extremely bright overexposure In low light the built in flash fired a series of flashes Pressing the shutter button halfway may trigger the built in flash to fire a series of flashes to assist autofocusing This is called the AF assist beam p 89 Its effective range is approx 4 meters 13 1 feet The built in flash will make a sound when firing continuously This is normal and not a malfunction When flash was used the bottom part of the picture came out unnaturally dark The shadow of the lens barrel was captured in the picture because the subject was too close to the camera Move further away from the subject and shoot If a hood is attached to the lens remove it before taking the flash picture F Full Auto Techniques Scene Intelligent Auto Recomposing the Shot Depending on the scene position the subject toward the left or right to create a balanced background and good perspective In the lt E gt mode pressing the shutter button halfway to focus on a still subject will lock the focus on that subject Recompose the shot while keeping the shutter button pressed halfway and then press the shutter button completely to take the picture This is called focus lock Shooting a Moving Subject I
106. photography with EX series Speedlite sold separately is as easy as with built in flash For detailed instructions refer to the EX series Speedlite s instruction manual This camera is a Type A camera that can use all the features of EX series Speedlites To set the flash functions and flash Custom Functions with the camera s menu see pages 262 271 Shoe mount Speedlites Macro Lites Flash exposure compensation Set this in the same way as for the built in flash See page 257 FE lock The setting procedure is basically the same as for the built in flash See page 258 F If it is difficult to achieve focus with autofocus the EOS dedicated external Speedlite will automatically emit the AF assist beam as necessary 259 4 Using an External Speedlite Canon Speedlites Other Than the EX series With an EZ E EG ML TL series Speedlite set to A TTL or TTL autoflash mode the flash can be fired at full output only Set the camera s shooting mode to lt M gt manual exposure or lt Av gt aperture priority AE and adjust the aperture setting before shooting When using a Speedlite that has manual flash mode shoot in the manual flash mode Non Canon Flash Units Sync Speed The camera can synchronize with non Canon compact flash units at 1 250 sec and slower speeds With large studio flash units be sure to test the flash synchronization before shooting with the sync speed set within approx 1 60 sec
107. playback 355 INFO Shooting Information Display lt Sample Information for Still Photos Basic information display Eye Fi transfer completed Rating Eye Fi card transmission status Protect images Battery check Card Folder number File number Playback number Total images recorded Shutter speed MPPD Aen so O Ra FTE Image recording quality Aperture Highlight tone priority Exposure compensation ISO speed amount 356 INFO Shooting Information Display Shooting information display Detailed information Exposure compensation amount Histogram Brightness RGB flee 4100 0003 PSH Shooting date y L Jal and time Shutter speed oti Ww ISO speed Shooting mode Ate wy Scroll bar Multiple exposure SPET p Lal Wy Ba a SOPs Highlight tone priority White balance S EOR VAC ESXi Epa a Demos Metering mode Eh A4 aL 31 0MB File size Auto Lighting Optimizer Flash exposure compensation amount HDR Mode Multi Shot Noise Reduction Color temperature when lt E gt is set Image recording quality White balance correction Picture Style Settings AF Microadjustment When you shoot in RAW JPEG image quality the RAW image file size will be displayed During flash photography without flash exposure compensation lt gt will be displayed lt HDR gt and the dynamic range adjustment amount will be displayed for images taken in the HDR
108. port Use the provided interface cable or one from Canon p 478 When connecting the interface cable use the provided cable protector p 34 Movies cannot be printed The camera cannot be used with printers conforming only to CP Direct or Bubble Jet Direct If there is a long beeping sound in step 5 it indicates a problem with the printer Resolve the problem displayed in the error message p 420 Printing is not possible if Multi Shot Noise Reduction or the HDR Mode is set E You can also print RAW images taken with this camera Ifyou use a battery to power the camera make sure it is fully charged With a fully charged battery printing up to approx 3 hr is possible Before disconnecting the cable first turn off the camera and printer Hold the plug not the cord to pull out the cable For direct printing using AC Adapter Kit ACK E6 sold separately to power the camera is recommended 413 6 Printing m The screen display and setting options will differ depending on the printer Some settings may not be available For details refer to the printer s instruction manual Select the image to be printed Check that the lt A gt icon is displayed on the upper left of the LCD monitor Turn the lt 3 gt dial to select the image to be printed Press lt gt The print setting screen will appear Print setting screen Sets printing effects p 416 Sets date or file
109. press the lt gt button gt The two image index display will appear The currently selected image will be highlighted with an orange frame Select the images to be compared Pressing lt gt switches the orange frame between the two images Turn the lt 3 gt dial to select an image Repeat this procedure to select the other image to be compared Ifthe left and right images are the same the e2 icon will appear on the upper left of both images By pressing the lt Q gt button you can set the same magnification and magnified area for both images The magnification settings will match those of the image not highlighted with an orange frame By holding the lt L gt gt button you can display the image highlighted with an orange frame as a single image To return to the previous display press the lt LI gt button F By pressing the lt INFO gt button you can change the information display You cannot play back movies in the two image display 366 Rotating the Image m You can rotate the displayed image to the desired orientation Select Rotate image Protect images Under the L gt 1 tab select Rotate sob mepe image then press lt gt Erase images Print order Photobook Set up Image copy RAW image processing 2 Select an image Turn the lt 3 gt dial to select the image to be rotated You can also select an image
110. quality hold Pressing the button assigned to this function will switch to the image recording quality set here While this change is in effect the image recording quality JPEG RAW will blink in the viewfinder with Show hide in viewfinder s Image quality checkmarked Even after shooting the One touch image quality setting will not be canceled To revert to the previous image recording quality setting press the button assigned to this function again 6 On the setting screen by pressing the lt INFO gt button you can select the image recording quality for this function Image quality Press lt gt to display the image recording quality setting screen p 149 on the LCD monitor QD If RAW or RAW JPEG is set for the image recording quality to be switched to with One touch image quality setting and One touch image quality hold Multi Shot Noise Reduction p 176 will not work after the switch For 3 High ISO speed noise reduct n Standard will be applied for shooting F During the switch to the One touch image quality setting you can display lt gt in the viewfinder and on the LCD panel p 441 456 3 Custom Controls 313 Picture Style Press lt gt to display the Picture Style selection setting screen on the LCD monitor p 160 3 Depth of field preview When you press the depth of field preview button the aperture will stop down and you can check the depth of field p 221
111. quality figures marked with an asterisk do not exactly match the aspect ratio The image will be cropped slightly Image Ratio and Pixel Count re r Quality 3 2 e a Se a 8 9 megapixels 7 9 megapixels 7 5 megapixels 5 9 megapixels 2736x1824 2432x1824 2736x1536 1824x1824 5 0 megapixels 4 4 megapixels 4 2 megapixels 3 3 megapixels 1920x1280 1696x1280 1920x1080 1280x1280 2 5 megapixels 2 2 megapixels 2 1 megapixels 1 6 megapixels 720x480 640x480 720x408 480x480 350 000 pixels 310 000 pixels 290 000 pixels 230 000 pixels 404 Sensor Cleaning The camera has a Self Cleaning Sensor Unit to automatically shake off dust adhered to the image sensor s front layer low pass filter The Dust Delete Data can also be appended to the image so that the dust spots remaining can be deleted automatically by Digital Photo Professional EOS software p 537 Smudges adhering to the front of the sensor Besides dust entering the camera from outside in rare cases lubricant from the camera s internal parts may adhere to the front of the sensor If visible spots still remain after the automatic sensor cleaning having the sensor cleaned by a Canon Service Center is recommended Fl Even while the Self Cleaning Sensor Unit is operating you can press the shutter button halfway to interrupt the cleaning and start shooting immediately 405 c Automa
112. repeat step 3 and 4 368 o gt Protecting Images C 4 Protecting All Images in a Folder or on a Card You can protect all the images in a folder or on a card at once S AE When you select All images in folder Sene or All images on card in P 1 All images in folder Protect images all the images in the Unprotect all images in folder A Airese folder or on the card will be protected Unprotect all images on card To cancel the image protection select Unprotect all images in folder or Unprotect all images on card MENU p eD If you format the card p 67 the protected images will also be erased E Movies can also be protected Once an image is protected it cannot be erased by the camera s erase function To erase a protected image you must first cancel the protection If you erase all the images p 393 only the protected images will remain This is convenient when you want to erase unnecessary images all at once When All images on card or Unprotect all images on card is selected the images will be protected or unprotected on the card selected for Record play or Playback under 1 Record functcard folder sel 369 o gt Protecting Images Protecting Images with the lt RATE gt Button During image playback you can use the lt RATE gt button to protect an image EJ n Video system For PAL Battery info Sensor cleaning MA button display options btn functio
113. s Exif information Using an EX series Speedlite Sold Separately Equipped with an LED Light During movie shooting in the lt Gf gt lt P gt lt Tv gt lt Av gt and lt B gt modes this camera supports the function that turns on the Speedlite s LED light automatically in low light conditions For detailed instructions refer to the EX series Speedlite s instruction manual 318 Shooting Movies Scene Icons During movie shooting in the lt 4J gt mode an icon representing the scene detected by the camera will be displayed and the shooting will be adapted to that scene For certain scenes or shooting conditions the icon displayed may not match the actual scene Portrait Background _ 0 NonPortrait Portrait Background Nature and Color Outdoor Scene Blue Sky Included Light blue Dark blue 1 Displayed only when the AF method is set to X Tracking If another AF method is set the Non portrait icon will be displayed even if a person is detected 2 Displayed when the attached lens has distance information With an Extension Tube or Close up Lens the icon displayed may not match the actual scene 3 The icon suiting the scene detected will be displayed 319 Shooting Movies aM Manual Exposure Shooting You can manually set the shutter speed aperture and ISO speed for movie shooting Using manual exposure to shoot movies is for advanced users JAD A
114. settings HDR Mode settings 234 Red eye reduction Interval timer Bulb timer Anti flicker shooting Mirror lockup 65 Live View shooting Live View shooting AF method Continuous AF Grid display Aspect ratio Exposure simulation 36 Silent LV shooting Metering timer 64 Movie Movie Servo AF AF method Grid display Movie recording quality Sound recording AF speed during Movie Servo AF Movie Servo AF tracking sensitivity 65 Movie Silent LV shooting Metering timer Movie recording count Movie play count Silent control button function HDMI output LCD AF1 Case 1 Case 2 Case 3 Case 4 Case 5 Case 6 AF 2 Al Servo 1st image priority Al Servo 2nd image priority AF3 Lens electronic MF AF assist beam firing One Shot AF release priority 465 W Registering Custom Shooting Modes LSS SSL LLL AF 4 Lens drive when AF impossible Selectable AF point Select AF area selection mode AF area selection method Orientation linked AF point Initial AF point L Al Servo AF Auto AF point selection EOS iTR AF AF 5 Manual AF point selection pattern AF point display during focus VF display illumination AF status in viewfinder AF Microadjustment L gt 2 Slide show settings Image jump with lt 7 L gt 13 Highlight alert AF point display Playback grid Histogram display Movie play count Magnification approx 1 File numbering Auto rotate Eye Fi settings 2 Auto power
115. such cases shoot in the lt M gt mode p 320 507 Troubleshooting Guide No picture on the TV set Set the 3 Video system correctly to For NTSC or For PAL Check that the HDMI cable s plug is inserted all the way in p 385 If t425 HDMI output LCD is set to Mirroring the movie will not appear on the TV set via HDMI output even during playback There are multiple movie files for a single movie shoot If the movie file size reaches 4 GB another movie file will be created automatically p 335 My card reader does not recognize the card Depending on the card reader and computer OS used large capacity CF cards or SDXC cards may not be correctly recognized In such a case connect your camera to the computer with the interface cable then transfer the images to your computer using EOS Utility EOS software p 537 cannot process the RAW image M and images cannot be processed with the camera Use the EOS software Digital Photo Professional to process the image p 537 cannot resize the image 3 JPEG images and G M G0 S images cannot be resized with the camera p 403 508 Troubleshooting Guide Sensor Cleaning Problems The shutter makes a noise during sensor cleaning If you selected Clean now the shutter will make a noise but no picture is taken p 406 Automatic sensor cleaning does not work If you repeatedly turn the power switch lt ON gt
116. telephoto T ends EF S18 135mm 3 5 5 6 IS STM After completing the adjustment Adjust focus for each model of eneandivictall press the lt MENU gt button to return to the screen in step 1 Allibyisame amount 0 Select Adjust by lens then press Adjust by lens W 4 1 T 2 INFO KEEA G E Clear all lt gt 5 Check the result of the adjustment Take a picture and play back the image p 354 to check the adjustment result If the shooting result comes out with focus in front of the targeted point adjust toward the Aa side If it comes out with focus behind the targeted point adjust toward the r side If necessary repeat the adjustment 137 N Fine Adjustment of AF s Point of Focus DOO SE P When shooting with the intermediate range focal length of a zoom lens the AF s point of focus is corrected automatically relative to the adjustments made for the wide angle and telephoto ends Even if only the wide angle or telephoto end is adjusted a correction will be made automatically for the intermediate range Clearing All AF Microadjustments When i Clear all appears at the bottom of the screen pressing the lt 7 gt button will clear all the adjustments made for All by same amount and Adjust by lens 4 Cautions for AF Microadjustment The AF s point of focus will vary slightly depending on the subject conditions brightness zoom position and other shooti
117. that Correction data available is displayed for the attached lens panuse Uh YY Select Peripheral illumin then Disable press lt 6 gt Select Enable then press lt gt 3 Take the picture The image will be recorded with the peripheral illumination corrected EEA ELE Mel 9 5 4 Depending on shooting conditions noise may appear on the image periphery E The correction amount applied will be lower than the maximum correction amount settable with Digital Photo Professional EOS software p 537 The higher the ISO speed the lower the correction amount will be 181 tM Correction of Lens Peripheral Illumination and Aberrations Chromatic Aberration Correction Lens aberration correction 1 Select the setting EF S18 135mm f 3 5 5 6 IS STM Check that Correction data available is displayed for the attached lens Select Chromatic aberration then Disable press lt gt Select Enable then press lt amp gt 2 Take the picture The image will be recorded with the chromatic aberration corrected EEAO ELEELE ELSIE Chromatic aberration P Distortion Correction Lens aberration correction 1 Select the setting EF S18 135mm 3 5 5 6 IS STM Check that Correction data available is displayed for the attached lens Select Distortion then press lt 6 gt ere TETEE Select Enable then press lt gt 2 Take the picture The imag
118. the lt INFO gt button 00 EF S18 135mm f 3 5 5 6 IS S gt The Adjust by lens screen will H appear 3 Check and change the lens information Check the lens information Review edit lens information Press the lt INFO gt button gt The screen will show the lens name LOOJFF S18 135mm f 3 5 5 6 IS S and a 10 digit serial number When 1234567890 the serial number is displayed select OK and go to step 4 If the lens s serial number cannot be confirmed 0000000000 will be displayed In this case enter the number by following the instructions on the next page Regarding the asterisk displayed in front of some lens serial numbers see the next page Cancel Registered number 135 EM Fine Adjustment of AF s Point of Focus E om E Review edit lens information Entering the Serial Number Select the digit to be entered then 00 EF S18 135mm f 3 5 5 6 IS S press lt gt so that lt gt appears 01000000000 Enter the number then press lt Ge1 gt E After entering all the digits select OK Lens Serial Number In step 3 if appears in front of the 10 digit lens serial number you can register only one unit of the same lens model Even if you enter the serial number will remain displayed The lens serial number on the lens may differ from the serial number displayed on the screen in step 3 This is nota malfunction Ifthe lens serial nu
119. the aperture will be set automatically within the aperture range that you have set Min aperture Max f You can set it from f 91 to 1 4 Max aperture Min f You can set it from f 1 0 to f 64 F The settable aperture range will differ depending on the lens s maximum and minimum apertures 438 TEM Setting Custom Functions Continuous shooting speed You can set the continuous shooting speed for lt HiH gt high speed continuous shooting lt H gt low speed continuous shooting and lt S gt silent continuous shooting High speed You can set it from 2 to 10 frames per second fps Low speed You can set it from 1 to 9 frames per second fps Silent continuous shooting You can set it from 1 to 4 frames per second fps QD If 94 Anti flicker shoot p 185 is set to Enable or EOS iTR AF p 128 is set to Enable the camera may not be able to shoot at the continuous shooting speed that was set 439 EM Setting Custom Functions ee C Fn3 Display Operation To suit your shooting needs you can change to an optional focusing screen sold separately If you change the focusing screen be sure to change this setting to match the focusing screen type It is to obtain the correct exposure Std LJEh A Standard screen provided with the camera Precision Matte standard focusing screen Eh S PJEh S Super Precision Matte focusing screen makes it easier to distinguish the focus point than wit
120. the camera is OFF The motor does not operate while the camera is OFF or when the camera is OFF due to the auto power off function Therefore users must be aware of the following points Manual focusing is not possible During Zooming inaccurate focusing may occur 2 When the lens is in sleep mode If not operated for a certain period of time this lens will enter sleep mode in order to save power apart from the camera s auto power off To exit sleep mode press the shutter button halfway In sleep mode the motor will not operate even if the camera is ON Therefore users must be aware of the following points Manual focusing is not possible During Zooming inaccurate focusing may occur 3 During initial reset When the camera is turned ON or when the camera is turned ON by pressing the shutter button halfway when the camera is OFF due to the auto power off function 1 the lens performs an initial reset of the focus lens Although the image in the viewfinder will appear out of focus during the initial reset this is not a malfunction Wait approx 1 second 2 until the initial reset has completed before shooting 4 Applicable to the following EF S lens compatible digital SLR cameras EOS 7D Mark II EOS 7D EOS 70D EOS 60D EOS 60Da EOS 50D EOS 40D EOS 30D EOS 20D EOS 20Da EOS 600D EOS 550D EOS 500D EOS 450D EOS 1100D EOS 1000D EOS 400D DIGITAL EOS 350D DIGITAL EOS 300D DIGITAL 2 The initial res
121. to the other card to record images When the card is automatically switched a new folder will be created Rec separately You can set the image recording quality for each card p 149 Each image is recorded to both the CF and SD cards at the image recording quality you set You can freely set the image recording H quality such as to ML and M or 3 and M QW Rec to multiple Each image is recorded to both the CF and SD cards simultaneously at the same image size You can also select RAW JPEG QD If Rec separately is set and different recording qualities are set for the CF card and SD card the maximum burst for continuous shooting will decrease p 151 Even if Record func is set to Rec to multiple movies cannot be recorded to both the CF card and SD card at the same time If Rec separately or Rec to multiple is set the movie will be recorded to the card which is set for Playback Fil Rec separately and Rec to multiple The same file number is used for recording to both the CF card and SD card The LCD panel will display the number of possible shots of the card having the lower number If one of the cards becomes full Card full will be displayed and shooting will be disabled If this happens either replace the card or set Record func to Standard or Auto switch card and select the card with remaining capacity to continue shooting 147 tE Selecting the Card for Recording
122. together with the movie recording size 23 98 fps the movie will be converted via 2 3 pull down 350 Ww General Movie Shooting Cautions White lt M gt and Red lt i gt Internal Temperature Warning Icons Ifthe camera s internal temperature increases due to prolonged movie shooting or under a high ambient temperature a white lt i gt or red lt i gt icon will appear The white lt I gt icon indicates that the image quality of still photos will deteriorate It is recommended that you stop still photo shooting for a while and allow the camera to cool down Since movie image quality will hardly be affected you can still shoot movies The red lt i gt icon indicates that movie shooting will soon be terminated automatically If this happens you will not be able to shoot again until the camera s internal temperature decreases Turn off the power and let the camera rest for a while Shooting a movie at a high temperature for a prolonged period will cause the lt E gt or lt i gt icon to appear earlier When you are not shooting turn off the camera Recording and Image Quality Ifthe attached lens has an Image Stabilizer and you set the Image Stabilizer IS switch to lt ON gt the Image Stabilizer will operate at all times even if you do not press the shutter button halfway The Image Stabilizer consumes battery power and may shorten the total movie shooting time or decrease the number of possible shots If y
123. universal time can be appended to N 35 34 00 0 images E 139940 49 9 Using the digital compass based on 21m NE41 fg A W 24 09 2014 04 30 00 magnetic north the shooting l direction can be appended to images These information can be used to show the shooting location and shooting direction on a map displayed on a computer 14 Certain travel conditions or GPS settings may cause inaccurate geotag information to be added to images 2 Coordinated Universal Time abbreviated UTC is essentially the same as Greenwich Mean Time Logging the Route Traveled You can use the GPS logging function to automatically record the camera s location information at set intervals This geotag information can be viewed on a map displayed on a computer Certain traveling conditions locations or GPS settings may cause inaccurate geotag information to be added to images Setting the Camera Time The camera time can be set using GPS signals 198 GPS Features O Z Viewing Images and Information on a Virtual Map Shooting locations and the route traveled can be viewed on a map displayed on a computer using the Map Utility EOS software p 538 eoa Map Utility Map data 2014 ZENRIN 199 GPS Precautions m Note the following when using the GPS function In certain countries and regions the use of GPS may be restricted Therefore be sure to use GPS in accordance with the laws and regul
124. will be locked when you press the shutter button halfway and focus is achieved In the Partial metering Spot metering and C Center weighted average metering modes the exposure is set at the moment the photo is taken Pressing the shutter button halfway does not lock the exposure When lt gt Spot metering is set you can display lt gt in the viewfinder and on the LCD panel p 441 225 Setting Exposure Compensation Exposure compensation can brighten increased exposure or darken decreased exposure the standard exposure set by the camera Exposure compensation can be set in the lt P gt lt Tv gt and lt Av gt shooting modes Although you can set the exposure compensation up to 5 stops in 1 3 stop increments the exposure compensation indicator in the viewfinder and on the LCD panel can only display the setting up to 3 stops If you want to set the exposure compensation setting beyond 3 stops use the Quick Control p 61 or follow the instructions for 2 Expo comp AEB on the next page If the lt M gt mode with the Auto ISO set see page 223 to set the exposure compensation Check the exposure Press the shutter button halfway 4 and check the exposure level indicator Increased exposure for a brighter image 2 Set the exposure compensation amount Te Co ee While looking at the viewfinder or LCD panel turn the lt 3 gt dial Ifit cannot be set set the lt LO
125. you set the Maximum and Minimum to a narrower range than the default ISO range ISO 100 ISO 16000 it will not take effect You can set the ISO speed manually within ISO 100 ISO 16000 in 1 3 stop increments Under 82 ISO speed settings if you set ISO speed range s Maximum setting to H1 25600 the manual ISO speed setting range s maximum will be expanded to H1 equivalent to ISO 25600 You can also set the Maximum and Minimum to a range narrower than the default range ISO 100 ISO 16000 If ta3 Highlight tone priority is set to Enable p 180 the auto or manual ISO setting range will be ISO 200 ISO 16000 Under t482 ISO speed settings Auto ISO range and Min shutter spd cannot be set p 158 159 for movie shooting 321 Shooting Movies EEE GD Under ISO speed range if Maximum is set to H2 51200 and you switch from still photo shooting to movie shooting the maximum ISO speed for the manual ISO range during movie shooting will be H1 equivalent to ISO 25600 It cannot be expanded to ISO 51200 Changing the shutter speed or aperture during movie shooting is not recommended since the changes in the exposure will be recorded When shooting a movie of a moving subject a shutter speed of 1 30 sec to 1 125 sec is recommended The faster the shutter speed the less smooth the subjects movement will look If you change the shutter speed while shooting under f
126. 00 and you switch from still photo shooting to movie shooting the automatic ISO range s maximum for movie shooting will be H1 equivalent to ISO 25600 except in lt G gt and lt Tv gt modes It cannot be expanded to ISO 51200 317 Shooting Movies eee E Notes for lt G j gt lt P gt lt Tv gt lt Av gt and lt B gt Modes Inthe lt G gt mode the scene icon for the scene detected by the camera is displayed on the upper left of the screen p 319 You can lock the exposure AE lock by pressing the lt gt button except in the lt A3 gt mode p 229 The exposure setting will be displayed for the time length set with 6 6 Metering timer After applying AE lock during movie shooting you can cancel it by pressing the lt gt button AE lock setting is retained until you press the lt E gt button You can set exposure compensation up to 3 stops by setting the lt LOCK gt switch to the left and turning the lt gt dial except in the lt j gt mode Pressing the shutter button halfway displays the ISO speed and shutter speed at the screen bottom This is the exposure setting for taking a still photo p 323 The exposure setting for movie shooting is not displayed Note that the exposure setting for movie shooting may differ from that for still photo shooting Inthe lt G gt lt P gt and lt B gt modes the shutter speed and aperture will not be recorded in the movie
127. 0001 to 9999 and saved in one folder You can change how the file number is assigned Example BE3B0001 JPG a x 1 Select File numbering Under the 1 tab select File numbering then press lt gt File numbering Auto reset Manual reset Select the file numbering method Select the desired setting then press lt Ge gt Continuous Continues the file numbering sequence even after the card is replaced or a new folder is created Even after you replace the card create a folder or switch the target 9999 for the images saved This is convenient when you want to save images numbered anywhere between 0001 to 9999 on multiple cards or in multiple folders into one folder on your computer If the replacement card or existing folder already contains images recorded previously the file numbering of the new images may continue from the file numbering of the existing images on the card or in the folder If you want to use continuous file numbering it is recommended that you use a newly formatted card each time File numbering after File numbering after replacing the card creating a folder Next sequential file number 193 tM File Numbering Methods Auto Reset Restarts the file numbering from 0001 each time the card is replaced or a new folder is created When you replace the card create a folder or switch the target card for the images saved This is convenient if you want to organize images
128. 1 Select ISO speed settings EEN KET Under the 2 tab select ISO a speed settings then press lt gt White balance AWB Custom White Balance WB Shift Bkt 0 0 0 Color space sRGB ISO speed settings 2 Select ISO speed range ISO speed Auto ISO speed range 100 16000 Auto ISO range 100 6400 Min shutter spd Auto ISO speed range Set the minimum limit Minimum anun Select the minimum limit box then a 100 16000 press lt 1 gt Select the ISO speed then press lt 61 gt ISO speed range Set the maximum limit Minimum Maximum Select the maximum limit box then a 100 16000 press lt gt X Select the ISO speed then press lt ei gt 5 Select OK 157 ISO Setting the ISO Speed E E M Setting the ISO Speed Range for Auto ISO You can set the automatic ISO speed range for Auto ISO within ISO 100 ISO 16000 You can set the minimum limit within ISO 100 ISO 12800 and the maximum limit within ISO 200 ISO 16000 EO 1 Select Auto ISO range ISO speed Auto ISO speed range 100 16000 Auto ISO range 100 6400 Min shutter spd Auto Auto ISO range Set the minimum limit MUTE Maximum Select the minimum limit box then 100 6400 press lt amp gt Select the ISO speed then press Cancel lt 1 gt Auto ISO range Set the maximum limit Minimum Maximum Select the maximum limit box then 100 6400 press lt amp gt y Select the IS
129. 2 E Under t 82 ISO speed settings you can use ISO speed range to expand the settable ISO speed range up to H2 equivalent to ISO 51200 p 157 Even if 9 1 ISO speed setting increments is set to 1 stop you can still select ISO 16000 155 ISO Setting the ISO Speed Auto ISO If the ISO speed is set to A Auto the actual ISO speed to be set will be displayed when you press the shutter button halfway As indicated below the ISO speed will be set automatically to suit the shooting mode Shooting Mode ISO Speed Setting Automatically set within ISO 100 ISO 6400 P Tv Av M nome set within ISO 100 ISO 16000 With flash ISO 400 1 2 3 4 1 The actual ISO speed range depends on the Minimum and Maximum settings set in Auto ISO range 2 If fill flash will cause overexposure ISO speed may be reduced down to a possible minimum of ISO 100 except in the lt M gt and lt B gt modes 3 Except in the lt 4 amp J gt mode 4 In the lt P gt mode if the external Speedlite is set for bounce flash ISO 400 ISO 1600 will be set automatically 156 ISO Setting the ISO Speed SSS SS SSS aaa M Setting the Manually Settable ISO Speed Range You can set the manually settable ISO speed range minimum and maximum limits You can set the minimum limit within ISO 100 to H1 equivalent to ISO 25600 and the maximum limit within ISO 200 to H2 equivalent to ISO 51200
130. 2 5 Compact Macro B Extender EF1 4x EF50mm f 2 5 Compact Macro B EF300mm f 2 8L IS USM B A EF85mm f 1 2L USM EF300mm f 2 8L IS II USM 104 Lenses and Usable AF Points EF300mm f 2 8L IS II USM B EF500mm f 4L IS II USM Extender EF1 4x EF500mm f 4L IS II USM EF300mm f 2 8L IS II USM B Extender EF1 4x Extender EF2x EF500mm f 4L IS II USM G f 8 EF300mm f 4L USM B Extender EF2x EF300mm f 4L USM B EF500mm f 4 5L USM B Extender EF1 4x EF500mm f 4 5L USM G fi8 EF300mm f 4L USM Extender EF2x G f 8 Extender EF1 4x EF300mm f 4L IS USM B EF600mm f 4L USM B EF300mm f 4L IS USM B EF600mm f 4L USM B Extender EF1 4x Extender EF1 4x EF300mm f 4L IS USM G f 8 EF600mm f 4L USM Extender EF2x G f 8 Extender EF2x EF600mm f 4L IS USM B EF400mm f 2 8L USM A EF600mm f 4L IS USM B EF400mm f 2 8L USM B Extender EF1 4x Extender EF 1 4x EF600mm f 4L IS USM G f 8 EF400mm f 2 8L USM B Extender EF2x Extender EF2x EF600mm f 4L IS II USM B EF400mm f 2 8L II USM A EF600mm f 4L IS II USM B EF400mm f 2 8L II USM B Extender EF1 4x Extender EF1 4x EF600mm f 4L IS II USM G f 8 EF400mm f 2 8L II USM B Extender EF2x Extender EF2x EF800mm f 5 6L IS USM E EF400mm f 2 8L IS USM A EF800mm f 5 6L IS USM G f 8 EF400mm f 2 8L IS USM B Extender
131. 20 Metering timer cceeeee 347 Microphone c c0000e 314 337 Movie recording SiZ 331 Movie Servo AF speed 345 Movie Servo AF tracking sensitivity aaaeeeaa eeaeee 346 Movie shooting button 348 Playback eecceieeeccccsczsadesicees 376 378 Quick Control ccsseeeeeees 329 PROG PUM eerren 339 Record command 0 005 341 Recording time ccccee 334 Recording playback count 340 Shutter priority AE 0 315 Silent Control cccceeceeeeeeee ees 338 Silent shooting 0eeee 347 Sound recording 0eeeeee 336 SSG Senceddecedeece caccnseaaasaneeeteeeweces 327 Time code 1 0 ce eeeeeeceeeeceeeeeeeees 339 Viewing on a TV set 376 385 Wind filter sassa22dsncaanacconenacsdcesadecs 336 NWP A eirinn een ena ea 330 M RAW Medium RAW 149 151 152 Multi function lock 0 59 442 Multi Shot Noise Reduction 176 Multi controller c ccseeeeeeeeees 58 Multiple exposures 0ccc eee 238 My MGI caceecssiccc cateaceedenccatecetaades 459 N Noise reduction High ISO speed eeee 176 LONG EXPOSUFES cceceeeeeeee 178 Nomen clature cccccsseeeesseeeees 22 Non Canon flash units 260 Normal image recording quality 149 151 NTSC cceeracaccaneececiceetoctes 331 385 491 O ON
132. 20 min By connecting commercially available headphones equipped with a 3 5 mm diameter stereo mini plug to the camera s headphone terminal p 23 you can listen to the movie s sound p 337 If you connect the camera to a TV set to play back a movie p 385 adjust the sound volume with the TV set Turning the lt gt dial will not change the sound volume If there is audio feedback place the camera farther away from the TV set or turn down the TV sound volume If you took a still photo while you shot the movie the still photo will be displayed for approx 1 sec during the movie playback 379 X Editing a Movie s First and Last Scenes m You can edit out the first and last scenes of a movie in approx 1 sec increments 1 On the movie playback screen select X The movie editing panel will be displayed at the bottom of the screen Specify the part to be edited out Select either 81 Cut beginning or E74 Cut end then press lt gt Tilt lt lt 5 gt to the left or right to see the previous or next frames Holding down the key will fast forward or fast rewind the frames Turn the lt gt dial for frame by frame playback After deciding which part to edit out press lt gt The portion highlighted in gray on the top of the screen is what will remain Check the edited movie Select gt and press lt gt to play back the edited movie To change the editing g
133. 2014 04 30 00 E If GPS information was not recorded for the image the GPS information screen will not be displayed 358 INFO Shooting Information Display Sample Movie Information Display 24 81 ZZ Playback SET pg g 24 09 2014 13 30 00 Aperture a Shutter speed m i A mm 1 125 F8 0 1400 ISO speed AWB amp 5 3 0 0 0 CI i TDF mE 00 12 70 3MB Shooting mode Movie file size Movie recording format Shooting time Playback time Movie recording size Time code Frame rate Compression method e lt g gt and S gt modes Shutter speed aperture and ISO speed are not displayed e lt lv gt mode Aperture and ISO speed are not displayed e lt A gt mode Shutter speed and ISO speed are not displayed e lt aM gt mode Auto ISO ISO speed is not displayed Highlight Alert When L gt 3 Highlight alert is set to Enable overexposed E highlight areas will blink To obtain more image detail in the overexposed blinking areas set the exposure compensation to a negative amount and shoot again AF Point Display When L gt 3 AF point disp is set to Enable the AF point that achieved focus will be displayed in red If automatic AF point selection is set multiple AF points may be displayed 359 INFO Shooting Information Display SSS SSS Histogram The brightness histogram shows the exposure level distribution and overall brightness The RGB histogram is for chec
134. 30 00 then press lt gt dd mm yy gt The date time zone and daylight 4 London saving time will be set and the menu OK Cancel will reappear i The date time zone settings may be reset when the camera is stored without the battery when its battery becomes exhausted or when it is exposed to below freezing temperatures for a prolonged period If this happens set the date time zone again After changing the time zone check that the correct date time are set When performing Sync time between cameras via Wireless File Transmitter using another EOS 7D Mark II is recommended If you perform Sync time between cameras using different models the time zone or time may not be set correctly 48 M amp M Selecting the Interface Language eee E The date time that were set will start from when you press lt gt in step 6 In step 3 the time displayed on the upper right of the screen is the time difference compared with Coordinated Universal Time UTC If you do not see your time zone set the time zone while referring to the difference with UTC ea The time can be set using the GPS auto time setting function p 209 MIY Selecting the Interface Language lt Display the menu screen Press the lt MENU gt button to display the menu screen Under the 2 tab select Language Press the lt Q gt button and select the f tab Turn the lt gt dial t
135. 5 85mm 3 5 5 6 IS USM Focal length Speed Lens construction Minimum aperture Angle of view Closest focusing distance Max magnification Field of view Filter size Max diameter x length Weight Hood Lens cap Case 15 mm 85 mm f 3 5 5 6 17 elements in 12 groups f 22 36 f 22 38 when 1 2 stop increments set for aperture Diagonal extent 84 30 18 25 Vertical extent 53 30 10 25 Horizontal extent 74 10 15 25 0 35 m 1 15 ft 0 21x at 85 mm focal length Approx 255 x 395 75 x 108 10 0 x 15 6 3 0 x 4 3 in at 0 35 m 1 15 ft 72mm Approx 81 6 x 87 5 mm 3 2 x 3 4 in Approx 575 g 20 3 oz EW 78E sold separately E 72 ll LP1116 sold separately All the data above is based on Canon s testing standards and CIPA Camera amp Imaging Products Association testing standards and guidelines Dimensions maximum diameter length and weight listed above are based on CIPA Guidelines except weight for camera body only Product specifications and the exterior are subject to change without notice Ifa problem occurs with a non Canon lens attached to the camera consult the respective lens manufacturer 922 Handling Precautions EF S18 135mm f 3 5 5 6 IS STM The EF S18 135mm f 3 5 5 6 IS STM kit lens uses a stepping motor that drives the focus lens for achieving focus The motor controls the focus lens even during Zooming 1 When
136. 6 Setting Time from GPS on the Camera cccesceeeceeeeeeeseeeeeeeeees 209 Logging the Route Traveled 0 ccccceeeceeceeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeaes 210 6 Advanced Operations 215 P Progam AE sencnainiaa 216 Tv Shutter Priority AE c ccccccccssccsecessecsseecssesssesseeeseeeseeeens 218 Av Aperture Priority AE cccccccccceeeceseecsseceeeeesecesesesseeeneenes 220 Depth of Field Preview ccccccccsssssccccceeeeeeseeeeeeseeseeesseeeeeeeeeas 221 M Manual Exposure cccccccescceeesecccesseecesseeeecesaeeeceseeeenaeees 222 12 Contents 8 9 Selecting the Metering Mode ccccccccceeessseeeecessseeeeeeeees 224 4 Setting Exposure Compensation c cccccssscecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 226 K Auto Exposure Bracketing AEB cc ccccccssseceecesseeeeesees 227 AE LOCK irie E E A E 229 B Bulb Expos US osani aa 230 HDR HDR High Dynamic Range Shooting 233 Multiple EXPOSUIGS visscccionccessatsentasicacensetsceisicandetsaiaasedeccdasivedees 238 AZ Mirror LOCKUP svinccnsssnirsncnssisivsnniniiciwiaicariasvatinntabwarevadanniintctwnntcn s 246 Using the Eyepiece Cover ccccccessscceccceseeesseeseeeeesseeeesseeeeeeeeas 247 Q Using a Remote SWitch cc ccc ccccccccccessceeceessseeeeeesstseeeeeneees 248 1 Remote Control SHOoting cccccccccccccsssssceceeceecesssaeeeeeeeeeesenas 248 DEDE Interval Timer Shooting cccccccceccescsesccescee
137. 6N LP E6 quantity 1 AC power can be supplied via AC Adapter Kit ACK E6 With Battery Grip BG E16 attached size AA LR6 batteries can be used Battery information Remaining capacity Shutter count Recharge performance and Battery registration possible Number of possible With viewfinder shooting shots Based on CIPA Approx 670 shots at 23 C 73 F approx 640 shots at testing standards 0 C 32 F With Live View shooting Approx 250 shots at 23 C 73 F approx 240 shots at 0 C 32 F Movie shooting time Approx 1 hr 40 min at 23 C 73 F Approx 1 hr 30 min at 0 C 32 F With a fully charged Battery Pack LP E6N e Dimensions and Weight Dimensions W x H x D Approx 148 6 x 112 4 x 78 2 mm 5 85 x 4 43 x 3 08 in Weight Approx 910 g 32 10 oz Based on CIPA Guidelines Approx 820 g 28 92 oz Body only e Operation Environment Working temperature 0 C 40 C 32 F 104 F range Working humidity 85 or less e Battery Pack LP E6N Type Rechargeable lithium ion battery Rated voltage 7 2VDC Battery capacity 1865 mAh Working temperature 0 C 40 C 32 F 104 F range Working humidity 85 or less Dimensions W x H x D Approx 38 4 x 21 0 x 56 8 mm 1 5 x 0 8 x 2 2 in Weight Approx 80 g 2 82 oz excluding protective cover 520 Specifications e Battery Charger LC E6 Compatible battery Battery Pack LP E6N LP E6 Recharging time Approx 2 hr 30 min Rated input 100
138. 87 325 LCD panel p 25 26 Eyecup p 247 lt gt AE lock button p 229 Viewfinder eyepiece lt E gt AF point lt INFO gt Info button selection p 60 75 78 204 206 button 288 323 354 468 p 92 93 Power switch p 45 lt Q gt Quick lt MENU gt Menu button Control p 64 button p 61 293 329 374 Terminal cover M lt 32 gt Quick i Control Dial p 57 i Touch pad p 59 lt i gt Setting button p 64 lt MIC gt External microphone IN terminal p 337 lt gt Headphone terminal p 337 lt lt gt gt Digital terminal p 412 425 535 i lt gt PC terminal p 260 Di Ii lt HDMI OUT gt HDMI mini OUT terminal p 385 Cable protector socket HDMI OUT lt f gt Remote control terminal N3 type p 248 4p When connecting the interface cable to a digital terminal also use the provided cable protector p 34 23 Nomenclature Dioptric adjustment knob p 54 lt gt Focal plane mark Speaker for sound lt 6 gt Live View shooting lt p4 OO gt Movie shooting switch Creative Photo p 285 313 Comparative playback lt TAX gt Start Stop button Two image display p 286 314 button p 160 233 238 366 lt 3 gt Multi controller p 58 lt RATE gt Rating button p 370 371 Strap mount p 33 lt Q gt Index Magnify Reduce button p 361 364 lt gt gt Playb
139. 94 fos or Hii 50 00 fps The ISO speed cannot be set for movie shooting Ifthe shooting mode is lt G s gt lt P gt lt Tv gt lt Av gt and lt B gt the ISO speed will be set automatically In the lt M gt mode you can freely set the ISO speed p 321 The manually set ISO speed changes when switching to movie shooting If you shoot a movie with manual exposure set to H2 equivalent to ISO 51200 the ISO speed setting will switch to H1 equivalent to ISO 25600 Even if you switch back to still photo shooting the ISO speed will not revert to the H2 The exposure changes during movie shooting If you change the shutter speed or aperture during movie shooting the changes in the exposure may be recorded Zooming the lens during movie shooting can cause changes in the exposure regardless of whether the lens s maximum aperture changes or not The changes in the exposure may be recorded as a result 503 Troubleshooting Guide N The image flickers or horizontal stripes appear during movie shooting Flickering horizontal stripes noise or irregular exposures can be caused by fluorescent lighting LED lighting or other light sources during movie shooting Also changes in the exposure brightness or color tone may be recorded In the lt M gt mode a slow shutter speed may reduce the problem The subject looks distorted during movie shooting If you move the camera to the left or right
140. AF for Still Subjects Suited for still subjects When you press the shutter button halfway the camera will focus only once When focus is achieved the AF point that achieved focus will be displayed and the focus indicator lt gt in the eo oi ue viewfinder will also light up AF point With evaluative metering p 224 the E Focus indicator exposure setting will be set at the same time as focus is achieved While you hold down the shutter button halfway the focus will be locked You can then recompose the shot if desired E If focus cannot be achieved the focus indicator lt gt in the viewfinder will blink If this occurs the picture cannot be taken even if the shutter button is pressed completely Recompose the shot and try to focus again or see When Autofocus Fails p 139 If t 91 Beep is set to Disable the beeper will not sound when focus is achieved After achieving focus with One Shot AF you can lock the focus on a subject and recompose the shot This is called focus lock This is convenient when you want to focus on a peripheral subject not covered by the Area AF frame 87 AF Selecting the AF Operation Al Servo AF for Moving Subjects This AF operation is suited for moving subjects when the focusing distance keeps changing While you hold down the shutter button halfway the camera will keep focusing on the subject continuously The exposure is set at the m
141. AF operation In One Shot AF mode when you hold down the button to which this function is assigned the camera switches to Al Servo AF mode In the Al Servo AF mode the camera switches to One Shot AF mode only while you hold down the button Convenient when you need to keep switching between One Shot AF and Al Servo AF for a subject that keeps moving and stopping os yp Switch to registered AF point During metering when you press the button assigned to this function the camera will switch to the registered AF point 3 On the setting screen when you press the lt INFO gt button you can select Switch only when btn is held or Switch each time btn is pressed To register the AF point see page 450 452 3 Custom Controls 4 p Selected AF point Center Registered AF point During metering tilting lt gt to the right will switch between the current AF point and the center AF point or registered AF point 4 On the setting screen when you press the lt INFO gt button you can select Switch to center AF point or Switch to registered AF point To register the AF point see page 450 Direct AF point selection During metering you can select an AF point directly with the lt 4 gt dial or lt 3 gt without pressing the lt t gt button With the lt 3 gt dial you can select a left or right AF point Looping sequence for Zone AF and Large Zone AF 5 On the Multi controller setting screen when you pr
142. Also if you play back a movie on a card with a slow reading speed the movie may not play back properly If you want to shoot still photos while shooting a movie you will need an even faster card To check the card s reading writing speed refer to the card manufacturer s website Quick Start Guide 1 Insert the battery p 40 To charge the battery see page 38 Insert the card p 41 The camera front side slot is for a CF card and the camera back side slot is for an SD card Shooting is possible with either a CF card or an SD card in the camera Attach the lens p 50 Align the lens s white or red mount index with the camera s index of the same color Set the lens s focus mode switch to lt AF gt p 50 Z Set the power switch to lt ON gt p 45 Quick Start Guide While holding down the center of the Mode Dial set it to lt Gj gt Scene Intelligent Auto p 29 All the necessary camera settings E will be set automatically Focus on the subject p 55 Look through the viewfinder and aim the viewfinder center over the subject Press the shutter button halfway and the camera will focus on the subject If necessary the built in flash will be raised Take the picture p 55 Press the shutter button completely to take the picture
143. CK gt switch to the left then turn the lt gt dial Decreased exposure for a darker image 3 Take the picture To cancel exposure compensation set the exposure level indicator lt f f gt to the standard exposure index lt 9 gt or lt gt QD lf 2 Auto Lighting Optimizer p 175 is set to any setting other than Disable the image may still look bright even if a decreased exposure compensation for a darker image is set Fl The exposure compensation amount will remain in effect even after you set the power switch to lt OFF gt After setting the exposure compensation amount you can prevent the exposure compensation amount from changing accidentally by setting the lt LOCK gt switch to the right If the exposure compensation amount exceeds 3 stops the end of the exposure level indicator will display lt A gt or lt 4q W gt 226 K Auto Exposure Bracketing AEB By changing the shutter speed or aperture automatically the camera brackets the exposure up to 3 stops in 1 3 stop increments for three successive shots This is called AEB AEB stands for Auto Exposure Bracketing x 1 Select Expo comp AEB Expo comp AEB 73 2 1 9 1 243 Under the 2 tab select BOSSES Expo comp AEB then press Auto Lighting Optimizer Eli White balance AWB ji GE gt Custom White Balance WB Shift Bkt 0 0 0 Color space sRGB Exposure comp AEB setting 2 Set the AEB ra
144. Canon EOS 7 Markl EOS 7D Mark II G Mark Il ENGLISH INSTRUCTION MANUAL Introduction m The EOS 7D Mark II G is a digital single lens reflex camera featuring a fine detail CMOS sensor with approx 20 2 effective megapixels Dual DIGIC 6 approx 100 viewfinder coverage high precision and high speed 65 point AF Cross type AF point Max 65 points approx 10 0 fps continuous shooting Live View shooting Full High Definition Full HD movie shooting Dual Pixel CMOS AF and GPS function Before Starting to Shoot Be Sure to Read the Following To avoid botched pictures and accidents first read the Safety Warnings p 526 528 and Handling Precautions p 20 21 Refer to This Manual While Using the Camera to Further Familiarize Yourself with the Camera While reading this manual take a few test shots and see how they come out You can then better understand the camera Testing the Camera Before Use and Liability After shooting play images back and check whether they have been properly recorded If the camera or memory card is faulty and the images cannot be recorded or downloaded to a computer Canon cannot be held liable for any loss or inconvenience caused Copyrights Copyright laws in your country may prohibit the use of your recorded images of people and certain subjects for anything but private enjoyment Also be aware that certain public performances exhibitions etc may prohibit photography e
145. Control Shooting me With Remote Controller RC 6 sold separately you can shoot remotely up to approx 5 meters 16 4 feet from the camera You can either shoot immediately or use a 2 sec delay You can also use Remote Controller RC 1 and RC 5 1 Focus on the subject 2 Set the lens s focus mode switch to lt MF gt You can also shoot with lt AF gt 3 Press the lt DRIVE AF gt button 6 i Remote Control Shooting A Select the self timer While looking at the LCD panel or through the viewfinder turn the lt 3 gt dial to select lt gt or lt 2 gt Press the remote controller s transmit button Point the remote controller toward the camera s remote control sensor and press the transmit button The self timer lamp lights up and the picture is taken control sensor 4D Fluorescent or LED lighting may cause camera misoperation by triggering the shutter inadvertently Try to keep the camera away from such light sources If you point a remote controller for a TV set toward the camera and operate it it may cause camera misoperation by triggering the shutter inadvertently Fil Remote control shooting is also possible with devices such as an EX series Speedlite equipped with a remote release function 249 OBOE Interval Timer Shooting m With the interval timer you can set the shooting interval and the number of shots The c
146. During interval timer shooting auto power off will not take effect p 250 Shooting Related Problems The lens cannot be attached The camera cannot be used with EF M lenses p 50 The viewfinder is dark Install a recharged battery pack in the camera p 38 No images can be shot or recorded Make sure the card is properly inserted p 41 Ifyou are using an SD card slide the card s write protect switch to the Write Erase setting p 41 If the card is full replace the card or delete unnecessary images to make space p 41 392 If you try to focus in the One Shot AF mode and the focus indicator lt gt in the viewfinder blinks a picture cannot be taken Press the shutter button halfway again to refocus automatically or focus manually p 55 140 The card cannot be used Ifa card error message is displayed see page 44 or 510 cannot lock the focus and recompose the shot Set the AF operation to One Shot AF p 87 Focus lock is not possible in the Al Servo AF or when servo takes effect in Al Focus AF p 83 g 497 Troubleshooting Guide E have to press the shutter button twice completely to take a picture If 4 Mirror lockup is set to Enable set it to Disable The image is out of focus Set the lens s focus mode switch to lt AF gt p 50 Press the shutter button gently to prevent camera shake p 54 55 If the lens has an Image Stabilizer set the IS
147. E SHOT One Shot AF 87 One Shot AF cccccceseeeeeeeeeeeees 87 One touch image quality setting 6 153 456 P P Program ABE ccccc 216 314 PAL ceneczecamnneeeseeeceseaececeee 331 385 491 Partial metering cccccceeeeeeeees 224 PC terminal 22 2scccccrscareccasenesentencsees 260 Peripheral illumination correction 181 Personal white balance 171 Photobook set up 0 ceee 429 PICIBINO OG ve ivonsesaaisternnmtedennneddiavancers 411 Picture Style 160 163 166 PPIMGIS accccaneeeboucuusiessotdandtedcestec 149 151 Playback wencisinniaactecccctcenmunneriancices 353 Possible shots 46 151 287 POW CT cise sstsiteccnceaddilascheouneceeebeies 45 Auto power Off 0e 45 69 Battery check 0ccc00e 46 470 Battery information 470 Household powet c 00 474 Possible shots 46 151 287 Recharge performance 470 Recharging cceccseseeeeeeeeeeseeees 38 Pressing completely cc00 55 Pressing Nalfway ccccceeeeeeeeees 55 PIU caasscesbesnieesnseecdccesedduaicacccatacs 411 ClO DING erreien 419 Page layOut cecceeeeeeeeeeeees 415 Paper settings cee 415 Photobook set up 006 429 Print order DPOF 0 421 Printing effects cceeeeees 416 Tilt correction 419 Prog
148. EA 99 Lenses and Usable AF Point cccccsecccccesesseeeseeeseeesseeeeeees 100 Selecting Al Servo AF Characteristics ccccccessseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 108 Customizing AF Functions icidicccsssecsaicecasisesisvevesasesssasdvdaaseeravensaas 117 Fine Adjustment of AF s Point of FOCUS ccccceeseseseeeeeeeeeeees 133 When Autofocus Fails visicircduviasauudsacdavercesidiadcaesiucaddduiaaveccsinbuddvennads 139 MF Manual Focus acs icconsiciisatetonssainaiacrad iedeitvaendileiasadunarectenseertes 140 Elin Selecting the Drive MOde cccccccescecssceesseeeeseeesseseeneens 141 W Using the Self timer cccccccccccccceeesscseeeeeeeeecerssaeeeeeeeeeseneas 143 A Image Settings 145 Selecting the Card for Recording and Playback csssees 146 Setting the Image Recording Quality ccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 149 ISO Setting the ISO Speed eccecceccccssesscscsescesceseeesecseeseesseeatens 154 3a Selecting a Picture Style cccccesscccsseeeesseeesseeeesseeeeneens 160 Sa Customizing a Picture Style ccc ccccceceseecesseeeeesseeeeeees 163 Sa Registering a Picture Style ccccccccsececesseceeesseeeesseeeeeeaes 166 11 Contents SSS WEB Setting the White Balance c cc cccccecceeetseeeeeeesteeeeeens 168 1 Custom White Balance ccccccccseeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaees 169 4 Setting the Color Temperature 0 ccccccccccces
149. EF1 4x Extender EF1 4x EF1200mm f 5 6L USM E EF400mm f 2 8L IS USM B EF1200mm f 5 6L USM G fi8 Extender EF2x Extender EF1 4x EF400mm f 2 8L IS II USM A EF8 15mm f 4L Fisheye USM B EF400mm f 2 8L IS II USM B EF16 35mm f 2 8L USM A Extender EF1 4x EF16 35mm f 2 8L II USM A EF400mm f 2 8L IS II USM B EF16 35mm f 4L IS USM B Extender EF2x EF17 35mm f 2 8L USM A EF400mm f 4 DO IS USM B EF17 40mm f 4L USM B EF400mm f 4 DO IS USM B EF20 35mm f 2 8L A Extender EF1 4x EF20 35mm f 3 5 4 5 USM C EF400mm f 4 DO IS USM G f 8 EF22 55mm f 4 5 6 USM F Extender EF2x EF24 70mm f 2 8L USM A EF400mm f 5 6L USM B EF24 70mm f 2 8L II USM A EF400mm f 5 6L USM G 8 EF24 70mm f 4L IS USM B Extender EF1 4x EF24 85mm f 3 5 4 5 USM D EF500mm f 4L IS USM B EF24 105mm f 4L IS USM B EF500mm f 4L IS USM B EF28 70mm f 2 8L USM A Extender EF1 4x EF28 70mm f 3 5 4 5 E EF500mm f 4L IS USM G f 8 EF28 70mm f 3 5 4 5 II E Extender EF2x 105 Lenses and Usable AF Points EF28 80mm f 2 8 4L USM EF70 200mm f 2 8L IS USM EF28 80mm f 3 5 5 6 Extender EF1 4x p EF28 80mm f 3 5 5 6 USM EF70 200mm f 2 8L IS USM B EF28 80mm f 3 5 5 6 II Extender EF2x EF28 80mm f 3 5 5 6 II USM EF70 200mm f 2 8L IS II USM EF28 80mm f 3 5 5 6 III USM EF70 200mm f 2 8L IS II USM B EF28 80mm f 3 5 5 6 IV USM Extender EF 1 4x EF28 80mm f 3 5 5 6 V USM EF70 200mm f 2 8L IS II USM B EF28 90mm f
150. EX Map Utility Picture Style Editor F Adobe Reader latest version recommended must be installed to view the Instruction Manual files PDF format Install Adobe Reader if it is not already installed on your Macintosh To save the PDF manual to your computer use the Save function of your Adobe Reader For more information about how to use Adobe Reader see Adobe Reader s Help menu Fi The Instruction Manual PDF incorporates page links so you can quickly go to the desired page On the Contents or Index page just click on the page number to jump to that page 534 Downloading Images to a Computer m You can use EOS software to download the images in the camera to your computer There are two ways to do this aa 1 Install the software p 539 to connect the camera to your computer the camera When connecting the cable to the camera use the cable protector p 34 Connect the cable to the digital terminal with the plug s lt SS lt gt w gt icon facing the back of camera Connect the cord s plug to the computer s USB terminal 3 Use EOS Utility to transfer the images For details refer to the Software Downloading by Connecting the Camera to the Computer Use the provided interface cable Use the interface cable provided with the Instruction Manual PDF on the DVD ROM p 532 QD Use the provided interface cable or one
151. Expo simulation AF method o DEN Live View shoot AF method Continuous AF Grid display Aspect ratio Expo simulation SHOOT5 Lv func Enable X Tracking DEILIG off 32 HELIG SHOOTS Lv func b FlexiZoneAF FlexiZoneAFO A Y SHOOT5 Lv func EIJE FlexiZoneAF Disable off 3 2 EIG tM Menu Operations Display the menu screen Press the lt MENU gt button to display the menu screen 2 Select a tab Each time you press the lt Q gt button the main tab will switch Turn the lt gt dial to select a secondary tab For example the 84 tab refers to the screen displayed when the amp Shooting tab s fourth dot m from the left is selected 3 Select the desired item Turn the lt 3 gt dial to select the item then press lt amp gt A Select the setting Turn the lt 3 gt dial to select the desired setting The current setting is indicated in blue Adjust the setting Press lt gt to set it Exit the setting Press the lt MENU gt button to exit the menu and return to shooting ready 65 tM Menu Operations i Fl The explanation of menu functions hereinafter assumes that you have pressed the lt MENU gt button to display the menu screen You can also use lt gt to operate and set menu functions Except for 11 Erase images and 1 Format card To cancel the operation press th
152. F point expansion in achieving focus making it effective for moving subjects However since it is inclined to focus on the nearest subject focusing on a specific target may be more difficult than with single point AF The AF point s achieving focus is displayed as lt _ gt F ji ES cL 65 point automatic selection AF The Area AF frame entire AF area is used to focus This mode is set automatically in the lt E gt mode With One Shot AF pressing the shutter button halfway will display the AF point s lt gt that achieved focus If multiple AF points are displayed it means they all have achieved focus This mode tends to focus on the nearest subject With Al Servo AF you can set the Al Servo AF s a ee oe starting position with Initial AF pt 2 gt Al Servo AF p 127 As long as the Area AF frame can track the subject during shooting focusing will continue The AF point s achieving focus is displayed as lt _ gt 7990 0 goooo F880 97 AF Area Selection Modes Q When Al Servo AF mode is set with 65 point automatic selection AF 98 Large Zone AF manual selection of zone or Zone AF manual selection of zone the active AF point lt gt will keep switching to track the subject However under certain shooting conditions such as when the subject is small it may not be able to track the subject Also in low temperatures the tracking response may become slower
153. G images A X icon at the upper right of a page title indicates a function that can be used only in these modes lt P gt lt Tv gt lt Av gt lt M gt lt B gt QD The camera may not be able to process images taken with another camera Post processing images as described in this chapter cannot be performed while the camera is connected to a computer via an interface cable RAWI Processing RAW Images with the Camera You can process images with the camera and save them as JPEG images As the RAW image itself does not change you can apply different processing conditions to create any number of JPEG images from it Note that M and S images cannot be processed with the camera Use Digital Photo Professional EOS software p 537 to process those images AF t 9 1 Select RAW image processing See images Under the L gt 1 1 tab select RAW Rotate image image processing then press Erase images Print order lt CE a Photobook Set up gt images will be displayed Image copy RAW image processing Select an image Turn the lt 3 gt dial to select the image you want to process Ifyou press the lt Q gt button and turn the lt s7 3 gt dial counterclockwise you ENE can select an image from the index display Picture Style 0 40 SRGB 3 Process the image Sd ce Press lt gt to make the RAW Gag Ew processing options appear p 400 Eh Zor Use lt gt to select an op
154. Image Processing Options 0 Brightness adjustment You can adjust the image brightness up to 1 stop in 1 3 stop increments The displayed image will reflect the setting s effect Cw White balance p 168 You can select the white balance If you select K and press the lt INFO gt button you can set the color temperature The displayed image will reflect the setting s effect a Picture Style p 160 You can select the Picture Style By pressing the lt INFO gt button you can adjust the sharpness and other parameters The displayed image will reflect the setting s effect B Auto Lighting Optimizer p 175 You can set the Auto Lighting Optimizer The displayed image will reflect the setting s effect NRa High ISO speed noise reduction p 176 You can set the noise reduction for high ISO speeds The displayed image will reflect the setting s effect If the effect is difficult to discern magnify the image p 399 4L Image quality p 149 You can set the image quality when generating an image in JPEG format 400 RAW Processing RAW Images with the Camera sRGB Color space p 187 You can select either SRGB or Adobe RGB Since the camera s LCD monitor is not compatible with Adobe RGB the image will not look very different when either color space is set Cor Peripheral illumination correction p 181 If Enable is set the corrected image will be displayed If the effect is diffi
155. Interval Number of shots Bulb timer Disable Enable Exposure time Anti flicker shooting Disable Enable Mirror lockup Disable Enable In the lt 4y gt mode these menu options are displayed under 82 3 Shooting 5 Red Live View shooting Enable Disable 287 AF method w FlexiZone Multi FlexiZone 299 Exposure simulation In the lt 4y gt mode these menu options are displayed under 33 3 Shooting 6 Red Silent LV shooting Mode 1 Mode 2 Disable 297 A 4 sec 8 sec 16 sec 30 sec 1 min Metering timer 10 min 30 min 298 486 Menu Settings AF AF1 Purple Page Versatile multi purpose setting Case 2 Continue to track the subjects ignoring 109 possible obstacles Case 3 Instantly focus on subjects suddenly entering 44 AF points For subjects that accelerate or decelerate quickly For erratic subjects moving quickly in any direction disabled in Single point AF mode e For subjects that change speed and move erratically disabled in Single point AF mode m AF AF2 Purple Al Servo 1st image a ae oe Release priority Equal priority Focus priority 117 Al Servo 2nd image Shooting speed priority Equal priority Focus 118 priority priority A F AF3 Purple ene electronic Enable after One Shot AF Disable after One Shot AF Disable in AF mode Apaesist beam fining Enable Disable Enable external flash only 420 IR AF ass
156. L I Approx 645 MB min Full HD 29 97p 25 00p 24 00p 23 98p IPB Standard Approx 216 MB min Full HD 29 97p 25 00p IPB Light Approx 87 MB min HD 59 94p 50 00p ALL I Approx 574 MB min HD 59 94p 50 00p IPB Standard Approx 187 MB min HD 29 97p 25 00p IPB Light Approx 30 MB min SD 29 97p 25 00p IPB Standard Approx 66 MB min SD 29 97p 25 00p IPB Light Approx 23 MB min Card requirements CF card Writing reading speed 516 ALL I 30 MB sec or faster IPB Standard Full HD 59 94p 50 00p 30 MB sec or faster IPB Standard other than above 10 MB sec or faster IPB Light 10 MB sec or faster MP4 only Specifications Focus methods Metering modes Brightness metering range Exposure control Exposure compensation ISO speed Recommended exposure index Time code Drop frames Sound recording Headphones Grid display Still photo shooting 2 screen display HDMI output SD card ALL I 20 MB sec or faster IPB Standard Full HD 59 94p 50 00p 20 MB sec or faster IPB Standard other than above 6 MB sec or faster IPB Light 4 MB sec or faster MP4 only Same as focusing with Live View shooting Movie Servo AF customizable Center weighted average and Evaluative metering with the image sensor Automatically set by the focus method EV 0 20 at room temperature ISO 100 Autoexposure shooting Program AE for movie shooting
157. MENU foo Lowest file number 3 Select the folder Number of images in folder Select the folder containing the image pecource folds you want to copy then press lt amp gt O 20 2003 Check the images displayed on the CE right to select the desired folder gt The images in the selected folder will a SR be displayed Folder name Highest file number F The copy source is the card selected for Record play or Playback under 1 Record func card folder sel 388 Copying Images Total images selected A Select the images to be copied Turn the lt 3 gt dial to select an image to be copied then press lt gt gt The vV icon will appear on the upper left of the screen If you press the lt Q gt button and turn a the lt gt dial counterclockwise you Leart po Ge a gt can select an image from a three image display To return to the single image display turn the lt gt dial clockwise To select other images to be copied repeat step 4 5 Press the lt RATE gt button After selecting all the images to be copied press the lt RATE gt button Select OK Check the card where the images will be copied to then select OK er gee Target Copy to Card2 Select target folder to copy to Select the target folder Target folder 100EO0S7D 16 Select the target folder to which you want to copy the images then press lt Ge gt To create a
158. Mode Dial The features explained in this chapter can be set and used in the following shooting modes lt P gt lt Tv gt lt Av gt lt M gt lt B gt m Custom Functions 1 Exposure Catv Movie Shooting Shooting Exposure level increments O O ISO speed setting increments p 434 O In M Bracketing auto cancel O Still photo Bracketing sequence O with WB p 435 Number of bracketed shots O preexelng Safety shift p 436 O Same exposure for new aperture p 437 O 2 2 Exposure Drive Set shutter speed range O O p 438 Set aperture range O O Continuous shooting speed p 439 O Still photo Fl The shaded Custom Functions do not function during Live View LV shooting or movie shooting Settings are disabled 432 tE Custom Functions 4 3 Display Operation a LV Movie Shooting Shooting Focusing screen p 440 Warnings in viewfinder p 441 LV shooting area display O Dial direction during Tv Av O O Multi function lock p 442 O O Custom Controls Depends on setting 4 4 Others Add cropping information p 443 O Default Erase option p 444 During playback 5 Clear Selecting 4 5 Clear all Custom Func C Fn will clear all the Custom Function settings Fil Even if 9 5 Clear all Custom Func C Fn is executed the settings
159. O 25600 or H2 equivalent to ISO 51200 When 83 Highlight tone priority is set to Disable ISO 100 125 160 H1 or H2 can be set p 180 Even if set a decreased exposure compensation the image comes out bright Set t 82 Auto Lighting Optimizer to Disable When Low Standard or High is set even if you set a decreased exposure compensation or flash exposure compensation the image may come out bright p 175 cannot set the exposure compensation while both manual exposure and Auto ISO are set See page 223 to set the exposure compensation Even if an exposure compensation is performed it will not be applied for flash photography Multi Shot Noise Reduction cannot be set Ifthe image recording quality is set to RAW or RAW JPEG Multi Shot Noise Reduction cannot be set The Live View image or movie shooting image is not displayed during multiple exposure shooting If On ContShtng is set Live View display image review after image capture or image playback is not possible during shooting p 238 500 Troubleshooting Guide The multiple exposure image is shot in quality When the image recording quality is set to M or S GM the multiple exposure image will be recorded in quality p 245 When I use the lt Av gt mode with flash the shutter speed becomes slow If you shoot at night when the background is dark the shutter speed automatically becomes slow slow sync shootin
160. O speed then press Cancel lt gt A Select OK Fl The Minimum and Maximum settings will also apply to the ISO speed safety shifts minimum and maximum ISO speeds p 436 158 ISO Setting the ISO Speed E ES M Setting the Minimum Shutter Speed for Auto ISO You can set the minimum shutter speed so that the shutter speed set automatically will not be too slow when Auto ISO is set This is convenient in the lt P gt and lt Av gt modes when you use a wide angle lens to shoot a moving subject or when you use a telephoto lens It helps to reduce camera shake and blurred subjects ISO speed settings 1 Select Min shutter spd ISO speed Auto ISO speed range 100 16000 Auto ISO range 100 6400 Min shutter spd Auto Automatically set 2 Set the desired minimum shutter Min shutter spd speed AntoSangann Select Auto or Manual ae If you select Auto turn the lt gt Ree pee dial to set the desired speed slower a ee or faster compared to the standard speed then press lt gt Manually set Ifyou select Manual turn the lt s gt al dial to select the shutter speed then Manual 1 125 press lt eI gt METAT 1 8000 1 4000 1 2000 1 1000 1 500 1 250 1 60 1 30 1 15 1 8 1 4 0 5 ie a 4p Ifa correct exposure cannot be obtained with the maximum ISO speed limit set with Auto ISO range a shutter speed slower than the Min shutter spd will be set to ob
161. RIT Auto g AUTO 100 125 160 200 250 im 320 400 500 640 800 1000 1250 1600 2000 2500 3200 4000 5000 6400 8000 10000 12800 16000 Hi 2560 0 semar 125 5 6 Aperture 320 1 Set the Mode Dial to lt M gt Set the Live View shooting Movie shooting switch to lt gt Set the ISO speed Press the lt 4 ISO gt button The ISO speed setting screen will appear on the LCD monitor Turn the lt g gt dial to set the ISO speed For details on the ISO speed see the next page Set the shutter speed and aperture Press the shutter button halfway and check the exposure level indicator To set the shutter speed turn the lt s gt dial The settable shutter speeds depend on the frame rate EER 1 4000 sec 1 30 sec Git 1 4000 sec 1 60 sec To set the aperture turn the lt 3 gt dial If it cannot be set set the lt LOCKR gt switch to the left then turn the lt gt or lt gt dial Shooting Movies Focus and shoot the movie The procedure is the same as steps 3 and 4 for Autoexposure Shooting p 314 ISO Speed in the lt M gt Mode With Auto A the ISO speed will be set automatically within ISO 100 ISO 16000 Under 2 ISO speed settings if you set ISO speed range s Maximum setting to H1 25600 p 157 the automatic ISO range will not expand to the H1 maximum Even if
162. Reduction INFO GY Rl Multi Shot Noise Reduction This applies noise reduction with higher image quality than High For a single photo four shots are taken continuously and aligned and merged automatically into a single JPEG image If the image recording quality is set to RAW or RAW JPEG you cannot set Multi Shot Noise Reduction 3 Take the picture The image will be recorded with noise reduction applied Fl When Multi Shot Noise Reduction is set you can display lt gt in the viewfinder and on the LCD panel p 441 176 UEM Setting Noise Reduction QD Cautions for Setting Multi Shot Noise Reduction If there is significant misalignment in the image due to camera shake the noise reduction effect may be minimal If you are handholding the camera keep it steady to prevent camera shake Using a tripod is recommended If you shoot a moving subject the moving subject may leave afterimages The image alignment may not function properly with repetitive patterns lattice stripes etc or flat single tone images If the subject s brightness changes as the four consecutive shots are taken irregular exposure in the image may result Recording the image to the card will take longer than with normal shooting During the processing of the images buSY will be displayed in the viewfinder and on the LCD panel and you cannot take another picture until the processing is completed
163. S digital compass settings Viewfinder display 2 Select Viewfinder level Viewfinder level Hide VF grid display Disable Show hide in viewfinder Viewfinder display 3 Select Show Viewfinder level Press the shutter button halfway gt The electronic level will be displayed in the viewfinder This also works with vertical shooting HHA 7 5 or greater YQ Even when the tilt is corrected there may be a margin of error of approx ml 76 MEAN Setting the Viewfinder Information Display The shooting function settings Shooting mode White balance Drive mode AF operation Metering mode Image quality JPEG RAW Flicker detection can be displayed in the viewfinder By default only Flicker detection is checkmarked v O a of Select Viewfinder display Auto power off j Under the 2 tab select LED brightness auto Viewfinder display then press Date Time Zone 24 09 14 13 30 Yale UECGES English lt Get gt Viewfinder display v Viewfinder display 2 Select Show hide in viewfinder Viewfinder level Hide VF grid display Disable Show hide in viewfinder Show hide in viewfinder 3 Checkmark v the information to ECER WELLS be displayed 3 a a n n r Select the information to display and MODE WB Drive AF G press lt gt to append a checkmark lt gt Cancel Repeat this procedure to append a checkmark v to all the information to be displayed Then select OK gt
164. S18 55mm f 3 5 5 6 II C Extender EF1 4x EF S18 55mm f 3 5 5 6 II USM C EF135mm f 2L USM Extender EF2x B EF S18 55mm f 3 5 5 6 Ill C EF135mm f 2 8 Softfocus A EF S18 55mm f 3 5 5 6 IS C EF180mm f 3 5L Macro USM B EF S18 55mm f 3 5 5 6 IS II C EF180mm f 3 5L Macro USM F EF S18 55mm f 3 5 5 6 IS STM C Extender EF1 4x EF S18 135mm f 3 5 5 6 IS B EF200mm f 1 8L USM A EF S18 135mm f 3 5 5 6 IS STM B EF200mm f 1 8L USM Ae EF S18 200mm f 3 5 5 6 IS B Extender EF1 4x EF S55 250mm f 4 5 6 IS B EF200mm f 1 8L USM Extender EF2x B EF S55 250mm f 4 5 6 IS II B EF200mm f 2L IS USM A EF S55 250mm f 4 5 6 IS STM B EF200mm f 2L IS USM A EF14mm f 2 8L USM A Extender EF1 4x EF14mm f 2 8L II USM A EF200mm f 2L IS USM B EF15mm f 2 8 Fisheye A Extender EF2x EF20mm f 2 8 USM A EF200mm f 2 8L USM EF24mm f 1 4L USM A EF200mm f 2 8L USM B EF24mm f 1 4L II USM A Extender EF1 4x EF24mm f 2 8 A EF200mm f 2 8L USM B EF24mm f 2 8 IS USM A Extender EF2x EF28mm f 1 8 USM A EF200mm f 2 8L II USM EF28mm f 2 8 A EF200mm f 2 8L II USM B EF28mm f 2 8 IS USM A Extender EF1 4x EF35mm f 1 4L USM A EF200mm f 2 8L II USM B EF35mm f 2 A Extender EF2x EF35mm f 2 IS USM A EF300mm f 2 8L USM A EF40mm f 2 8 STM A EF300mm f 2 8L USM B EF50mm f 1 0L USM A Extender EF1 4x EF50mm f 1 2L USM A EF300mm f 2 8L USM B EF50mm f 1 4 USM A Extender EF2x EF50mm f 1 8 A EF300mm f 2 8L IS USM EF50mm f 1 8 II A EF300mm f 2 8L IS USM B EF50mm f
165. Spot metering p 225 the warning icon will appear Fil When you set any of the checkmarked v functions lt gt will also appear for the respective setting except when Multi Shot Noise Reduction is set on the shooting settings screen p 60 469 LV shooting area display When the aspect ratio for Live View shooting p 295 is set to 4 3 16 9 or 1 1 you can set the display method for the shooting area LI Masked LI Outlined 441 M1 Setting Custom Functions SSS EE EEE Dial direction during Tv Av 7 Normal Reverse direction Dial turning direction when setting the shutter speed and aperture can be reversed In the lt M gt shooting mode the turning direction of the lt gt and lt z gt dials will be reversed In other shooting modes the turning direction of only the lt s gt dial will be reversed The lt 3 gt dial s turning direction in the lt M gt mode and the turning direction to set the exposure compensation in the lt P gt lt Tv gt and lt Av gt mode will be the same When the lt LOCK gt switch is set to the right it can prevent the lt s5 gt lt 63 gt lt 42 gt and lt gt from accidentally changing a setting Select the camera control you want to lock then press lt gt to append a checkmark vV Select OK to register the setting 2 Main Dial Quick Control Dial amp gt Multi controller AF area selection lever F If t
166. With Single point Spot AF manual selection focusing with the Speedlite s AF assist beam may be difficult If a peripheral AF point or a wide angle lens is used achieving focus may be difficult with an EOS dedicated external Speedlite s AF assist beam In such a case use an AF point closer to the center When the AF point s light up part or all of the viewfinder may light up in red This is a characteristic of AF point display using liquid crystal In low temperatures the AF point s display may be difficult to see This is a Characteristic of AF point display using liquid crystal With AF 4 Orientation linked AF point you can set the AF area selection mode AF point or only the AF point separately for the horizontal and vertical orientations p 125 With AF 4 Selectable AF point you can change the number of manually selectable AF points p 123 AF Sensor m The camera s AF sensor has 65 AF points The illustration below shows the AF sensor pattern corresponding to each AF point With f 2 8 or larger maximum aperture lenses high precision AF is possible with the center AF point Depending on the lens attached to the camera the number of usable AF points and AF pattern will differ For details see pages 100 107 Diagram Cross type focusing f 5 6 vertical f 5 6 horizontal Dual cross type focusing f 2 8 right diagonal f 2 8 left diagonal f 5 6 vertical f 5 6 horizontal The focusing sensor is
167. a Quasi Zenith Satellite System QZSS MICHIBIKI Japan Geotag information Latitude Longitude Elevation Direction Coordinated appended to image Universal Time UTC satellite signal condition Geotag updating 1 sec 5 sec 10 sec 15 sec 30 sec 1 min 2 min 5 interval min Time setting GPS time data set to camera Digital compass Three axis geomagnetic sensor and three axis accelerometer sensor used for orientation sensing Log data One file per day NMEA format Changing the time zone creates another file The log data saved in internal memory as a log file can be transferred to a card or downloaded to a computer Log data deletion Possible e Custom Functions Custom Functions 18 My Menu Up to 5 screens can be registered Custom shooting Register under Mode Dial s C1 C2 or C3 modes Copyright information Text entry and inclusion enabled e Interface DIGITAL terminal SuperSpeed USB USB 3 0 Computer communication direct printing Wireless File Transmitter WFT E7 Ver 2 connection HDMI mini OUT terminal Type C Auto switching of resolution CEC compatible External microphone IN 3 5 mm diameter stereo mini jack terminal Headphone terminal 3 5 mm diameter stereo mini jack Remote control terminal For N3 type remote control units Wireless remote control Compatible with Remote Controller RC 6 Eye Fi card Supported 519 Specifications e Power Battery Battery Pack LP E
168. a clear image Ifthe LCD monitor is dirty use a soft cloth to clean it In low or high temperatures the LCD monitor display may seem slow or may look black It will return to normal at room temperature Eye Fi settings does not appear Eye Fi settings will appear only when an Eye Fi card is inserted in the camera If the Eye Fi card has a write protect switch set to the LOCK position you will not be able to check the card s connection status or disable Eye Fi transmission p 475 506 Troubleshooting Guide EE E Playback Problems Part of the image blinks in black gt 3 Highlight alert is set to Enable p 359 A red box is displayed on the image gt 3 AF point disp is set to Enable p 359 The image cannot be erased Ifthe image is protected it cannot be erased p 368 The movie cannot be played back Movies edited with a computer using ImageBrowser EX EOS software p 538 or other software cannot be played back with the camera Camera operation noise can be heard when the movie is played back If you operate the camera s dials or lens during movie shooting the operation noise will also be recorded Using an external microphone commercially available is recommended p 337 The movie has still moments During autoexposure movie shooting if there is a drastic change in the exposure level the recording will stop momentarily until the brightness stabilizes In
169. a will automatically change the manually selected setting to obtain a standard exposure ISO ISO speed This works in the Program AE P shutter priority AE Tv and aperture priority AE Av modes If the subject brightness changes and the standard exposure cannot be obtained within the autoexposure range the camera will automatically change the manually set ISO speed to obtain a standard exposure Fl Under 2 ISO speed settings even if ISO speed range or Min shutter spd is changed from the default setting safety shift will override it if a standard exposure cannot be obtained The minimum and maximum ISO speeds of the safety shift using the ISO speed will be determined by the Auto ISO range setting p 158 However if the manually set ISO speed exceeds the Auto ISO range the safety shift will take effect up or down to the manually set ISO speed Safety shift will take effect if necessary even when flash is used 436 tM Setting Custom Functions Same exposure for new aperture If the lt M gt mode manual exposure shooting is set and the ISO speed is set manually other than Auto ISO the maximum aperture s f number may change to a higher number smaller aperture if you do any of the following 1 Change the lens 2 Attach or detach an Extender or 3 Use a zoom lens whose maximum aperture f number changes If you then shoot at the exposure setting as is the image will be underexposed by the amount t
170. able for any damage to this product and or accidents such as fire etc caused by the malfunction of non genuine Canon accessories e g a leakage and or explosion of a battery pack Please note that this warranty does not apply to repairs arising out of the malfunction of non genuine Canon accessories although you may request such repairs on a chargeable basis QD Battery Pack LP E6N LP E6 is dedicated to Canon products only Using it with an incompatible battery charger or product may result in malfunction or accidents for which Canon cannot be held liable 925 Safety Warnings Follow these safeguards and use the equipment properly to prevent injury death and material damage Preventing Serious Injury or Death To prevent fire excessive heat chemical leakage and explosions follow the safeguards below Do not use any batteries power sources and accessories not specified in this booklet Do not use any home made or modified batteries Do not short circuit disassemble or modify the battery pack or back up battery Do not apply heat or apply solder to the battery pack or back up battery Do not expose the battery pack or back up battery to fire or water And do not subject the battery pack or back up battery to strong physical shock Do not install the battery pack or back up battery in reversed polarity Do not mix new and old or different types of batteries Do not recharge the battery pack outside the allowable
171. ack button p 354 Card slot cover p 41 lt gt Erase button Batter p 392 7 compartment cover release lever p 40 Battery compartment cover p 40 Access lamp p 44 Speaker for beeper LCD monitor p 64 286 314 354 394 ttn ewe ee es ee es ee ee ee Ss Tripod socket Multi function lock switch p 59 ri Ambient light sensor p 394 Serial number SD card slot p 41 CF card slot p 41 CF card eject button p 43 24 Nomenclature SSS O LCD Panel Shutter speed Aperture FE lock FEL Busy buSY AF point selection Built in flash recycling buSY Multi function lock warning L No card warning Card Error code Err Cleaning image sensor CLn Logging function LOG C __ AF SEL SEL AF AF point registration C__ HP SEL SEL HP Card warning Card 1 2 Card full warning FuLL 1 2 Possible shots Self timer countdown Bulb exposure time Card error warning Err Error number White balance Remaining images to record p 168 MD Auto tae et Se a Cloudy Piri Ci Ss Metering mode p 224 T t UUU UU UUU Evaluative metering ee tungsten A DEDE CA aaa light Sam ey Ee DR Partial metering imi VVhite e Spot metering fluorescent CJ Center weighted light average metering 4 Flash E E SS a es E4 Color temperature Battery check p 46 lt gt AEB p 227 lt C
172. ack procedure see the next page CD Before listening to a movie s sound through headphones turn down the volume to prevent hurting your ears The camera may not be able to play movies shot with another camera 378 Playing Movies eer Movie Playback Panel Playback Description gt Play Pressing lt gt toggles between play and stop Adjust the slow motion speed by turning the lt gt dial gt Slow motion The slow motion speed is indicated on the upper right of the screen Displays the movie s first frame Each time you press lt 7 gt the previous frame is ALPEEVIOUS tame displayed If you hold down lt gt it will rewind the movie Each time you press lt 7 gt the movie will play frame by frame If you hold down lt gt it will fast forward the movie gt gt Last frame Displays the movie s last frame X Edit Displays the editing screen p 380 Playback position Playback time minutes seconds with Movie play count Rec time set hh mmi ss ff DF Time code hours minutes seconds frames with Movie hh mm ss ff NDF play count Time code set Vol Turn the lt s gt dial to adjust the volume of the built in al Volume speaker p 378 or headphones MENG To return to the single image display press the lt MENU gt button Fl With a fully charged Battery Pack LP E6N the continuous playback time at room temperature 23 C 73 F will be approx 3 hr
173. adjustment is not required Perform this adjustment only if necessary Note that performing this adjustment may prevent accurate focusing from being achieved Adjust All by Same Amount Set the adjustment manually by adjusting shooting and checking the result Repeat this until appropriate adjustment is made During AF regardless of the lens used the point of focus will always be shifted by the adjustment amount O AF Ii Y Manual AF pt selec pattern AF point display during focus VF display illumination AF status in viewfinder AF Microadjustment AF Microadjustment Adjust focus for all lenses by the same adjustment amount All by same amount Adjust by lens INFO KAEO E Clear all 1 Select AF Microadjustmenty Under the AF5 tab select AF Microadjustment then press lt gt F 2 Select All by same amount 3 Press the lt INFO gt button gt The All by same amount screen will appear 133 ME Fine Adjustment of AF s Point of Focus eee AF Microadjustment E A Make the adjustment ay cacao Set the adjustment amount The adjustable range is 20 steps 5 Setting it toward will shift the point of focus in front of the standard point of focus Setting it toward Aa will shift the point of focus to the rear of the Adjust focus for all lenses by standard point of focus the same adjustment amount After making the adjustment press lt Ge
174. age display 361 gt Searching for Images Quickly TE Jump through Images Jump Display In the single image display you can turn the lt gt dial to jump through the images forward or backward according to the jump method set 1 Select Image jump w 7 3 Resize Under the gt 2 tab select Image jump w 73 then press lt gt Image transfer Image jump w E 2 Select the jump method Jump 10 images Select the jump method then press lt G1 gt sigh CRCECEC EC ECE m E E f Display images one by one m Jump 10 images foo Jump 100 images Display by date f Display by folder fa Display movies only Display stills only Display protected images only Display by image rating p 371 Turn the lt gt dial to select 362 gt Searching for Images Quickly ee 3 Browse by jumping Press the lt L gt gt button to play back images Inthe single image display turn the lt s gt dial gt You can browse by the method that was set Playback position El To search images by shooting date select Date To search images by folder select Folder If the card contains both movies and still photos select Movies or Stills to display one or the other If no images match the Protect or Rating setting you cannot browse through images with the lt gt dial 363 Q Magnifying Images m You can magnify a ca
175. al Speedlite Custom Function Settings For details on the external Speedlite s Custom Functions refer to the Speediite s sold separately instruction manual Flash control Select External flash C Fn Flash firing Enable setting E TTL II meter Evaluative Flash sync speed in Av mode AUTO Built in flash settings External flash func setting External flash C Fn setting External flash C Fn setting Set the desired functions NO a Select the number then press lt gt 1 Disabled Select the setting then press lt gt QD With an EX series Speedlite if the Flash metering mode Custom Function is set to TTL flash metering autoflash the Speedlite will always fire at full output E Clear Settings AE 1 Select Clear settings Flash firing Enable E TTL Il meter Evaluative Flach syncs pacdiiniAv ide A Select the settings to be cleared oes Select Clear built in flash set External flash func setting External flash C Fn setting Clear external flash set or Clear Clear settings MENU gt ext flash C Fn set then press lt gt On the confirmation dialog select Clear built in flash set f Clear external flash set OK Then the flash settings or elesIeexeitlastiSIsee Custom Function settings will all be cleared Clear settings Fil The Speedlite s Personal Function P Fn cannot be set or canceled with the camera s Flash control screen Set it with the Speedl
176. al aM ASi ASi S2 3 SET LOJN F If H is set for both RAW and JPEG L will be set The number of possible shots will be displayed up to 1999 on the LCD panel 150 M9 Setting the Image Recording Quality ee Guide to Image Recording Quality Settings Approx Image Pixels Printing File Size Possible Maximum Quality Recorded Size MB Shots Burst i 1 1 1 AL 20M AD 6 6 090 30 1090 gL 3 5 2060 2060 2060 3 6 2000 2000 2000 iii 8 9M A3 aM 1 8 3810 3810 3810 JPEG 4S 2 3 3060 3060 3060 5 0M A4 d S1 1 2 5800 5800 5800 S2 2 5M 9x13 cm 1 3 5240 5240 5240 32 0 3M 0 3 20330 20330 20330 20M A2 24 0 290 24 31 RAW M EM 11M A3 19 3 350 28 31 S 5 0M A4 13 3 510 35 35 RAW 20M A2 AL 20M A2 24 0 6 6 220 18 19 RAW a By A 19 3466 260 18 19 JPEG SE 5 0M A4 AL 20M AQ 13 3 6 6 340 18 19 1 2 is suitable for playing the images on a digital photo frame 2 3 is suitable for emailing the image or using it on a website 2 and 3 will be in Fine quality The file size possible shots and maximum burst during continuous shooting are based on Canon s testing standards 3 2 aspect ratio ISO 100 and Standard Picture Style using an 8 GB CF card These figures will vary by the subject card brand aspect ratio ISO speed Picture Style Custom Functions and other settings The maximum burst
177. alibrate digital compass MENU BS then press lt gt gt The camera will be ready for Calibrate digital compass calibration Hold the camera securely and rotate it in an arc of at least 180 as shown Cancel 207 Using the Digital Compass Move the camera 1 Swing the camera to the left and right by at least 180 2 Tilt the camera up and down by at least 180 3 Turn the camera by at least 180 Be careful not to drop the camera Steps 1 2 and 3 can be performed in any order Keep moving the camera until the calibration is completed Ifthe compass is not calibrated after you perform this turn your body to the right or left and move the camera again Calibrate digital compass Exit the calibration When the calibration is completed a screen indicating completion will be displayed Calibration will be completed normally even if the completion message appears while you are still moving the camera in step 2 Digital compass calibration complete 4 For safety reasons detaching the lens from the camera is recommended before you perform the calibration 208 Setting Time from GPS on the Camera m The time information obtained from GPS signals can be set in the camera The margin of error is approx 1 sec GPS digital compass settings Select Set up GPS Enable Check that GPS is set to Enable Set up Select Set up then press l
178. ally show the effects of the settings listed below Final Image Simulation During Live View Shooting Picture Style All settings such as sharpness contrast color saturation and color tone will be reflected White balance White balance correction Metering mode Exposure with t 85 Expo simulation Enable set Depth of field with depth of field preview button ON Auto Lighting Optimizer Peripheral illumination correction Chromatic aberration correction Distortion correction Highlight tone priority Aspect ratio image area confirmation E Cautions for distortion correction during Live View shooting are on page 183 291 Shooting Function Settings m WB e DRIVE AF 4 ISO 4 Settings While the Live View image is displayed if you press the lt WB e gt lt DRIVE AF gt lt 4 ISO gt or lt G4 gt button the setting screen will appear on the LCD monitor and you can turn the lt s gt or lt gt dial to set the respective shooting function By pressing the lt WB gt button and then the lt INFO gt button you can set WB shift and WB bracketing F When you set Partial metering or L Spot metering a metering circle will be displayed in the center 292 Shooting Function Settings SSS SSS SSS SS SS Q Quick Control In the lt P gt lt Tv gt lt Av gt lt M gt lt B gt modes the AF method Drive mode Metering mode Recording playing back card and image
179. also adjusts focus automatically by detecting whether the subject is still or moving p 83 1 Set the Mode Dial to lt G gt volt Gi a e Turn the Mode Dial while holding La down the lock release button at the center Area AF frame 2 Aim the Area AF frame over the subject All the AF points will be used to focus and the camera will focus on the closest object Aiming the center of the Area AF frame over the subject will make focusing easier 3 Focus on the subject Press the shutter button halfway The lens s focusing ring will rotate to focus gt During the autofocus operation lt gt will be displayed The AF point that achieves focus will be displayed At the same time the beeper will sound and the focus indicator lt gt will light up gt In low light the AF point s will light up briefly in red gt If necessary the built in flash will be raised automatically Focus indicator 80 Cy Fully Automatic Shooting Scene Intelligent Auto 4 Take the picture Press the shutter button completely to take the picture gt The captured image will be displayed for 2 sec on the LCD monitor After you finish shooting push down the built in flash with your fingers E The lt j gt mode makes the colors look more impressive in nature outdoor and sunset scenes If you did not obtain the desired color tones change the m
180. ame one as the slave unit Set Firing group to All The slave unit may be set to any firing group A B or C Fire a test flash Check that the slave unit is ready to fire then while the Built in flash settings screen is displayed press the lt INFO gt button The slave unit will fire Take the picture Set the camera and take the picture in the same way as with normal flash shooting To terminate wireless flash shooting set Wireless func to Disable Fl Setting E TTL Il meter to Evaluative is recommended Wireless MULTI flash shooting is not possible 276 Using Wireless Flash Fully Automatic Shooting with One External Speedlite and the Built in Flash Built in flash settings Flash mode E TTL Il Wireless func s He Channel 1 Flash exp comp _3 2 1 1 2 3 q 24 qi 12 INFO MESAER LALA Built in flash settings Flash mode E TTL Il Wireless func a He Channel 1 Flash exp comp _3 2 1 1 2 73 a 21 e 11 12 INFO RESSE NAi This is fully automatic wireless flash shooting with one external Speedlite and the built in flash You can change the flash ratio between the external Speedlite and built in flash to adjust how the shadows look on the subject take the picture 1 Set Wireless func to F7 7 2 Set the desired flash ratio and Select 4 amp and set the flash ratio within 8 1 to 1 1 Setting a fl
181. amera is recommended If along exposure or shutter speed longer than the shooting interval is set the camera cannot shoot at the set interval The camera will thereby shoot fewer shots than the number set for interval timer shooting Also the number of shots may decrease when the shutter speed and the shooting interval are almost the same or close If card recording time is longer than the set shooting interval due to card performance or shooting settings etc the camera may not shoot at the set shooting interval If you use flash with interval timer shooting set an interval longer than the flash s recycling time Otherwise if the interval is too short the flash may not fire If the shooting interval is too short the camera may not take a picture or capture an image without autofocusing Interval timer shooting will be canceled and reset to Disable if you do any of the following Set the power switch to lt OFF gt display the Live View or movie shooting screen set the shooting mode to lt B gt ora Custom shooting mode or use EOS Utility EOS software p 537 After interval timer shooting starts you cannot use remote control shooting p 248 or remote release shooting with an EOS dedicated external Speedlite During interval timer shooting if your eye will not remain on the viewfinder eyepiece attach the eyepiece cover p 247 Stray light entering the viewfinder can throw off the exposure 252
182. amera will automatically repeat taking one shot with the set interval until the set number of shots are taken x 1 Select Interval timer Red eye reduc Disable Under the 4 tab the 2 tab in ieina Dio lt 4j gt select Interval timer then Anti flicker shoot Disable press lt amp gt Mirror lockup Interval timer0EDE Select Enable Enable Select Enable then press lt INFO gt interval 00 00 10 button No of shots 10 Turning the camera off will end the interval timer INFO POE AEEA EIE Set the interval and number of shots Interval Select the hour minute second or No of shots number of shots Press lt gt so lt I gt is displayed Cancel Set the desired number then press lt 1 gt Returns to lt C gt Interval Settable from 00 00 01 to 99 59 59 No of shots Settable from 01 to 99 If you set 00 the camera will keep shooting until you stop the interval timer 250 ODEDE Interval Timer Shooting ee No of shots 4 Select OK Interval The interval timer settings will be displayed on the menu screen ETET sisli gt lt DEOE gt will be displayed on the LCD eq eye requc IET LOLS Interval timer 00 03 00 10 panel Anti flicker shoot Disable Interval timer 5 Take the picture gt Shooting will start according to the interval timer settings During interval timer shooting lt DEOH gt will blink After the set n
183. an 65 point automatic selection AF the registered AF point will blink F When the AF point is registered the following will be displayed e 65 point automatic selection AF __ HP HP Home Position e Spot AF 1 pt AF Expand AF Area SEL Center SEL HP Off center When registered with SEL or SEL HP the registered AF point will blink To cancel the registered AF point hold down the lt E gt button and press the lt f4 ISO gt button The registered AF point will also be canceled if you select 4 Clear all camera settings 450 3 Custom Controls Al Servo AF characteristics p 108 Press the lt AF ON gt or lt gt button to perform AF with the set case from Case1 to Case6 AF operation p 86 Press the lt AF ON gt or lt gt button to perform AF with the set AF operation AF area selection mode p 90 Press the lt AF ON gt or lt gt button to perform AF with the set AF area selection mode If you want to keep using currently selected AF point when you press the lt AF ON gt or lt gt button set AF start position to Manually selected AF point If you want to keep the currently set Al Servo AF characteristics AF operation and AF area selection mode select Maintain current setting E If AF4 Orientation linked AF point is set to Separate AF pts Areatpt or Separate AF pts Pt only you can register the AF points to be used separately for vertical grip up
184. ange the ISO speed will not change automatically If you do 1 2 or 3 and the camera turns off power switch is set to lt OFF gt etc while the exposure is being maintained the target exposure will be updated to the exposure at the moment the camera turns off 437 EM Setting Custom Functions F This function also works with changes in the highest f number minimum aperture If you set ISO speed or Shutter speed do 1 2 or 3 and then undo 1 2 or 3 without manually changing the ISO speed shutter speed or aperture so that the camera is back to its original state the original exposure setting will be restored If ISO speed is set and the ISO speed increases to an expanded ISO speed the shutter speed may change to maintain the exposure C Fn2 Exposure Drive Set shutter speed range You can set the shutter speed range In the lt Tv gt lt M gt modes you can set the shutter soeed manually within the shutter speed range that you have set In the lt P gt lt Av gt modes the shutter speed will be set automatically within the shutter speed range that you have set Highest speed You can set it from 1 8000 sec to 15 sec Lowest speed You can set it from 30 sec to 1 4000 sec Set aperture range You can set the aperture range In the lt Av gt lt M gt lt B gt modes you can set the aperture manually within the aperture range that you have set In the lt P gt lt Tv gt modes
185. anges the screen may flicker If this happens exit Live View shooting and resume Live View shooting under the actual light source If you point the camera in a different direction it may throw off the Live View image s correct brightness momentarily Wait until the brightness level stabilizes before shooting If there is a very bright light source in the image the bright area may appear black on the LCD monitor However the actual captured image will correctly show the bright area In low light if you set the 2 LCD brightness to a bright setting noise or irregular colors may appear in the Live View image However the noise or irregular colors will not be recorded in the captured image When you magnify the image the image sharpness may look more pronounced than in the actual image Custom Functions During Live View shooting some Custom Functions will not work settings become invalid For details see p 432 433 Lens and Flash The focus preset function is possible for Live View shooting only when using a super telephoto lens equipped with the focus preset mode available since the second half of 2011 FE lock will not work if the built in flash is used FE lock and modeling flash will not work if an external Speedlite is used 311 312 Shooting Movies Movie shooting is enabled by Si setting the Live View shooting Movie shooting switch to lt gt For cards that ca
186. aptured turn the lt 3 gt dial counterclockwise To play back images starting with the first captured image turn the dial clockwise Each time you press the lt INFO gt button the information display will change 1 125 F8 0 E W E0400 o Gea Basic information display 4 100 0003 24 09 2014 13 30 00 P 1 125 F8 0 B 9400 D Ta 5200 WSA2 G1 BEA3 0 0 0 Ei 4 aL 31 08 gt Shooting information display 354 gt Image Playback eee Exit the image playback Press the lt L gt gt button to exit the image playback and return to shooting ready state Shooting Information Display With the shooting information screen displayed p 354 you can tilt lt gt gt up or down to change the shooting information displayed at the screen s bottom as follows For details see pages 357 358 Detailed information GPS information Lens Histogram information Lens aberration correction information White balance information Color space Noise reduction information Picture Style information tM Grid Display 7 In single image display and two image display p 366 you can overlay the grid on the image playback HEROES With 2 3 Playback grid you can x3 E sx Ht select 3x3 6x4 42 or 3x3 diag 3x3 diag SE This function is convenient for checking the image s vertical or horizontal tilt as well as composition El The grid is not displayed during movie
187. ard is selected the images on the card selected for Record play or Playback under 1 Record func card folder sel will be erased 393 Changing Image Playback Settings uam Adjusting the LCD Monitor Brightness The LCD monitor s brightness is adjusted automatically for optimum viewing depending on the ambient light level You can also set the automatic adjustment s brightness level brighter or darker or adjust the brightness manually 1 Select LCD brightness Auto power off 1 min Under the 2 tab select LCD LCD brightness Auto brightness then press lt gt Date Time Zone 24 09 14 13 30 Select Auto or Manual a Turn the lt gt dial to make the Manual selection 3 Adjust the brightness While referring to the gray chart turn the lt gt dial then press lt gt You can adjust Auto to one of three levels and Manual to one of seven levels Automatic adjustment Manual adjustment LCD brightness LCD brightness E L Auto CR i Auto ie w ran A j gt VETE AVELE a E Adjust brightness Adjust brightness QD While Auto is set be careful not to obstruct the round ambient light sensor p 24 on the lower left of the Quick Control Dial with your finger etc F To check the image s exposure looking at the histogram is recommended p 360 During playback pressing the lt 8 gt button will display the screen in step 2
188. ard for recording playback Recording movie Image recording quality White balance Picture Style Auto Lighting a Optimizer vo Exposure mode EB Autoexposure Shutter priority AE Aperture priority AE G30 Manual exposure MOV MP4 ISO speed Highlight tone priority Attenuator Wind filter Exposure level indicator 323 Shooting Movies Fl You can display the electronic level by pressing the lt INFO gt button p 75 Note that if the AF method is set to L Tracking or the camera is connected to a TV set with an HDMI cable p 385 the electronic level cannot be displayed The electronic level cannot be displayed during movie shooting The electronic level will disappear when you start shooting a movie When movie shooting starts the movie shooting remaining time will change to the elapsed time QD Cautions for Movie Shooting Do not point the camera toward an intense light source such as the sun on a sunny day or an intense artificial light source Doing so may damage the image sensor or the camera s internal components Under 1 Record func card folder sel even if Record func is set to Rec to multiple p 147 the movie cannot be recorded to both the is set the movie will be recorded to the card which is set for Playback If lt B gt is set and the ISO speed or aperture changes during movie shooting the white balance may also change If you shoot a
189. are also functions that are set by pressing the button lt gt Press lt gt to finalize the setting and Aen EEE return to the previous screen gato When you select lt a gt p 445 and e eher a ened ed Press the lt MENU gt button the previous screen will reappear 63 MNI Menu Operations me You can set various settings with the menus such as the image recording quality date time etc lt MENU gt button JO U B 6 gt LCD monitor gt lt s gt Main Dial SET lt Q gt button O amp _ lt 3 gt Quick Control Dial lt 6 gt button 45 Mode Menu Screen O PIi Y SHOOT1 Image quality AL Image review 2 sec Beep Enable Release shutter without card 01N Lens aberration correction Certain menu tabs and menu items are not displayed in the lt J gt mode P Tv Av M B Mode Menu Screen Y Set up Custom Functions XK My Menu e DEN Y Oo x Main tabs Secondary sees SHOOT1 tabs Image quality AL Image review 2 sec Beep Enable Release shutter without card Menu settings Menu items SEA Ea A Flash control gt Playback AF AF 48 Shooting 64 Menu Setting Procedure Image quality Image review Beep SHOOT1 AL 2 sec EIG Release shutter without card ON Lens aberration correction Flash control Live View shoot AF method Continuous AF Grid display Aspect ratio
190. ash ratio to the right of 1 1 is not possible E Ifthe built in flash does not fire sufficient light set a higher ISO speed p 154 The 8 1 to 1 1 flash ratio is equivalent to 3 1 to 1 1 stops 1 2 stop increments 2 7 Using Wireless Flash E Fully Automatic Shooting with Multiple External Speedlites Multiple Speedlite slave units can be treated as one flash unit or separated into slave groups whose flash ratio can be set The basic settings are shown below By changing the Firing group setting you can shoot with various wireless flash setups with multiple Speedlites Built in flash settings Basic settings Flash mode E TTL II Flash mode gt E TTL Il H SD Wireless func q Wireless func q Channel 1 Channel Same as slave units Firing group All 4 exp comp 3 2 1 0 1 2 3 INFO RESSAR iaae All Using multiple slave Speedlites as one flash unit Convenient when you need a large flash output All the slave units will fire at the same output and be controlled to obtain a standard exposure No matter which firing group A B or C the slave units belong to they will all fire as one group Built in flash settings 1 Set Firing group to All Flash mode E TTL Il Wireless func 2 2 Take the picture Channel 1 Firing group All 4 exp comp 3 2 1 0 1 2 3 INFO REAREA milelare 278 Using Wireless Flash 4 A B Multiple slave units i
191. ately is recommended If the picture does not appear on the TV screen set the Y 3 Video system correctly to For NTSC or For PAL depending on the video standard of your TV set 1 Connect the HDMI cable to the camera With the plug s lt 4 HDMI MINI gt logo facing the front of the camera insert it into the lt HDMI OUT gt terminal Connect the HDMI cable to the TV set Connect the HDMI cable to the TV set s HDMI IN port Turn on the TV set and switch the TV set s video input to select the connected port 4 Set the camera s power switch to lt ON gt 5 Press the lt gt gt button gt The image will appear on the TV screen Nothing will be displayed on the camera s LCD monitor The images will automatically be displayed at the TV set s optimum resolution By pressing the lt INFO gt button you can change the display format To play back movies see page 378 385 Viewing Images on a TV Set GD Adjust movie sound volume with the TV set The sound volume cannot be adjusted with the camera Before connecting or disconnecting the cable between the camera and TV set turn off the camera and TV set Depending on the TV set part of the image displayed may be cut off Do not connect any other device s output to the camera s lt HDMI OUT gt terminal Doing so may cause a malfunction Certain TV s
192. ations of your country or region Be particularly careful when using GPS outside your home country Be careful about using GPS functions where the operation of electronic devices is restricted Others may be able to locate or identify you by using location data in your geotagged pictures or movies Be careful when sharing these geotagged images movies or GPS log files with others such as when posting them online where many people can view them GPS signal reception may take a longer time in some cases 200 Acquiring GPS Signals m To acquire GPS signals take the camera outside where the sky is unobstructed Face the top of the camera toward the sky while keeping your hands etc away from the camera top When the signal acquisition conditions are good it will take the camera approx 30 sec to 60 sec to catch the GPS satellite signals after you set GPS to Enable Check that KEB is displayed on the LCD panel then shoot 0 DEAR 1 Select GPS digital compass SET UP2 Auto power off settings Seed e Under the 2 tab select GPS Date Time Zone 24 09 14 13 30 Languages English digital compass settings then GPS digital compass settings GPS digital compass settings Set GPS to Enable GPS b Enable GPS Acquisition Status GPS acquisition status is indicated by the KB icon on the LCD panel and on the shooting function settings screen Constant GG Signal acquired Blinking Gi S
193. ave a Mount Index gt 1 Align the red dots then turn the z hood as shown by the arrow Align the red dots on the hood and lens edge then turn the hood as shown by the arrow Turn the hood as shown in the illustration Turn the hood clockwise until it attaches securely Q Ifthe hood is not attached properly it may obstruct the image s periphery making the image look dark When attaching or detaching the hood grasp the base of the hood when turning it Grasping the hood s edges when turning it may deform the hood resulting in failure to turn 52 Lens Image Stabilizer m When you use the IS lens s built in Image Stabilizer camera shake is corrected to obtain a sharper shot The procedure explained here is based on the EF S18 135mm f 3 5 5 6 IS STM lens as an example IS stands for Image Stabilizer 1 Set the IS switch to lt ON gt Also set the camera s power switch to lt ON gt Press the shutter button halfway The Image Stabilizer will operate 3 Take the picture When the picture looks steady in the viewfinder press the shutter button completely to take the picture STABILIZER ONt r OFF 4 The Image Stabilizer will not be effective if the subject moves during the exposure For bulb exposures set the IS switch to lt OFF gt If lt ON gt is set Image Stabilizer misoperation may occur The Image Stabilizer may not be effective
194. ay accidentally cause choking electrical shock or injury Choking or injury may also occur if a child or infant accidentally swallows a camera part or accessory If a child or infant swallows a part or accessory consult a physician immediately Do not store the equipment in dusty or humid places This is to prevent fire and electrical shock Before using the camera inside an airplane or hospital check if it is allowed Electromagnetic waves emitted by the camera may interfere with the plane s instruments or the hospital s medical equipment To prevent fire and electrical shock follow the safeguards below Always insert the power plug all the way in Do not handle a power plug with wet hands When unplugging a power plug grasp and pull the plug instead of the cord Do not scratch cut or excessively bend the cord or put a heavy object on the cord Also do not twist or tie the cords Do not connect too many power plugs to the same power outlet Do not use a cord whose insulation has been damaged Occasionally unplug the power plug and use a dry cloth to clean off the dust around the power outlet If the surrounding is dusty humid or oily the dust on the power outlet may become moist and short circuit the outlet to cause a fire 527 Preventing Injury or Equipment Damage e Do not leave equipment inside a car under the hot sun or near a heat source The equipment may become hot and cause skin burns
195. be canceled temporarily but the AEB range will be retained 434 tM Setting Custom Functions E E Bracketing sequence The AEB shooting sequence and white balance bracketing sequence can be changed 0 0 0 0 0 0 White Balance Bracketing B A Direction M G Direction 0 Standard exposure O Standard white balance 0 Standard white balance Decreased exposure Blue bias Magenta bias Increased exposure Amber bias Green bias Number of bracketed shots The number of shots taken with AEB and white balance bracketing can be changed from the default 3 shots to 2 5 or 7 shots When Bracketing sequence 0 is set the bracketed shots will be taken as shown in the table below 3 3 shots 2 2 shots 5 5 shots 7 7 shots 1 stop increments 4st Shot 2nd 3rd Ath 5th 6th 7th Shot Shot Shot Shot Shot Shot seo Saat a af 1 pastas sm0 Ssss Senda 2 a 2 E If 2 shots is set you can select the or side when setting the AEB range Setting WB bracketing will result in a decreased exposure in the B A or M G direction 435 EM Setting Custom Functions eee Safety shift OFF Disable Tv Av Shutter speed Aperture This takes effect in the shutter priority AE Tv and aperture priority AE Av modes If the subject brightness changes and the standard exposure cannot be obtained within the autoexposure range the camer
196. bjects that change speed Case 6 Or and move erratically disabled Rhythm gymnastics etc 112 in Single point AF mode 108 EW Selecting Al Servo AF Characteristics Case 1 Versatile multi purpose setting AF1 AF config tool Case 1 ka Versatile multi purpose R setting Tracking sensitivity Ha Y Accel decel tracking IA of AF pt auto switching I A INFO LOTS RATE DSE Default settings e Tracking sensitivity 0 e Accel decel tracking 0 e AF pt auto switching 0 Standard setting suited for any moving subject Works with many subjects and scenes Select Case 2 to Case 6 for the following When an obstacle cuts across the AF points or the subject tends to stray from the AF points when you want to focus on a subject appearing suddenly when the speed of a moving subject changes suddenly or when the subject dramatically moves horizontally or vertically Case 2 Continue to track subjects ignoring possible obstacles O AF Pel CEEE AF1 AF config tool x Case 2 Continue to track subjects pe ignoring possible obstacles Tracking sensitivity Y Accel decel tracking Of AF pt auto switching INFO LOT RATE PAEAS Default settings e Tracking sensitivity Locked on 1 e Accel decel tracking 0 e AF pt auto switching 0 The camera will try to continue focusing on the subject even if an obstacle enters the AF points or if the subject strays from the AF points
197. button to display the shooting information screen p 357 Then tilt lt lt 3 gt up or down to check the geotag information Latitude z N 35 34 00 0 Longitude MREZU CR 21m NE41 fd Elevation Um 24 09 2014 04 30100 UTC Coordinated Universal Time Direction Based on magnetic north p 206 Fl When you shoot a movie the GPS information at the time when shooting begins is recorded Note that signal reception conditions are not recorded Shooting locations can be viewed on a map displayed on a computer using the Map Utility EOS software p 538 204 Setting the Positioning Interval The interval time to update the geotag information can be set Although updating the geotag information at shorter intervals will make it more accurate it will reduce the number of possible shots GPS digital compass settings Select Set up GPS Enable Check that GPS is set to Enable Set up Select Set up then press lt gt GPS digital compass settings 2 Select Position update interval Auto time setting Disable Position update interval Every 15s Digital compass Disable GPS information display GPS Logger Disable MENU fap A Position update interval 3 Set the desired update interval Select the desired update interval then press lt 1 gt Every sec Every 30s Every 5s Every min Every 10s Every 2m Every 5m Q The shorter the interval the lower the numbe
198. c art effect Art bold The colors are the most saturated making the subject pop out and the picture look like an oil painting Art embossed The color saturation brightness contrast and gradation are decreased to make the picture look flat The picture looks faded and old The subject outlines will have dalla or dark edges eT Art standard Art bold Art embossed Brightness Standard Standard Standard F Each effect will be applied based on the characteristics of the Picture Style currently set p 160 234 HDR HDR High Dynamic Range Shooting HDR Mode 5 Set Continuous HDR Select either 1 shot only or Every Continuous HOR P shot then press lt G1 gt Every shot With 1 shot only HDR shooting will be canceled automatically after the shooting ends With Every shot HDR shooting continues until the setting in step 3 is set to Disable HDR HDR Mode amp Set Auto Image Align For handheld shooting select Enable When using a tripod select Auto Image Align D Disable then press lt gt Disable HDR Mode 7 Set the images to be saved To save all three images and the merged HDR image select All images then press lt 7 gt To save only the HDR image select HDR img only then press lt gt Save source imgs P HDR img only 235 HDR HDR High Dynamic Range Shooting g Take the picture HDR shooting is possible with viewf
199. can be transferred to a computer and played back with ImageBrowser EX EOS software 4D To have the movie play back smoothly on a computer use a high performance computer Regarding the computer hardware requirements for ImageBrowser EX refer to the ImageBrowser EX User Guide PDF F If you want to use commercially available software to play back or edit the movies be sure it is compatible with MOV or MP4 files For details on commercially available software contact the software manufacturer 377 ym Playing Movies 99 Play back the image Press the lt L gt gt button to display an image pl Select a movie Turn the lt 3 gt dial to select the movie to be played With the single image display the lt Gag gt icon displayed on the upper left indicates a movie Inthe index display perforations at the left edge of a thumbnail indicate a movie AS movies cannot be played from the index display press lt gt to switch to the single image display 3 In the single image display press lt lt gt The movie playback panel will appear at the bottom of the screen ce Play back the movie Select gt Play then press lt G gt The movie will start playing You can pause the movie playback by pressing lt gt You can adjust the sound volume during movie playback by turning the lt s gt dial For more details on the playb
200. can connect the camera to a computer and operate the camera to transfer images recorded on the card to the computer Specifying Images for a Photobook p 429 You can specify images on the card for printing in a photobook 411 Preparing to Print 9 The direct printing procedure can be performed entirely with the camera while you look at the camera s LCD monitor Connecting the Camera to a Printer 1 Set the camera s power switch to lt OFF gt 2 Set up the printer For details refer to the printer s instruction manual 3 Connect the camera to a printer Use the interface cable provided with the camera When connecting the cable to the camera use the cable protector p 34 Connect the cable to the ie digital terminal with the plug s lt SS lt gt w gt icon facing the back of the 5 camera RUS To connect to the printer refer to the printer s instruction manual 4 Turn on the printer 5 Set the camera s power switch to lt ON gt gt Some printers may make a beeping sound 412 Preparing to Print Play back the image g ame SET button for print menu Press the lt gt l gt button NS r gt The image will appear with the lt A gt ae a icon on the upper left of the screen to ad indicate that the camera is connected to a printer wD Make sure the printer has a PictBridge connection
201. can connect the camera to the computer and shoot remotely while viewing the computer screen For details refer to the Software Instruction Manual PDF p 532 on the DVD ROM 285 C3 Shooting with the LCD Monitor m 1 Set the Live View shooting Movie shooting switch to lt 6 gt gt 2 Display the Live View image j Press the lt HR gt button The Live View image will appear on the LCD monitor The Live View image will closely match the brightness level of the actual image you capture Focus on the subject When you press the shutter button halfway the camera will focus with the current AF method p 299 A Take the picture Press the shutter button completely gt The picture is taken and the captured image is displayed on the LCD monitor gt When the playback display ends the camera will return to Live View shooting automatically Press the lt gt button to exit the Live View shooting F The image s field of view is approx 100 when the image recording quality is set to JPEG L Inthe lt P gt lt Tv gt lt Av gt lt Mb gt lt B gt shooting mode you can check the depth of field by pressing the depth of field preview button During continuous shooting the exposure set for the first shot will also be applied to subsequent shots You can also use a remote controller sold separately p 248 for Live View shooting 286
202. card Select the image to be specified Turn the lt 3 gt dial to select the image to be specified then press lt eI gt If you press the lt Q gt button and turn the lt s7 3 gt dial counterclockwise you can select an image from a three image display To return to the single image display turn the lt 7 lt gt dial a clockwise To select other images to be transferred repeat step 3 The number of specified images will be displayed 429 lal Specifying Images for a Photobook SSS SESS as Specifying All Images in a Folder or on a Card You can specify all the images in a folder or on a card at once Se When L 1 Photobook Set up is set No of images 0 to All images in folder or All images Select images on card all the images in the folder or All images in folder on AE TE on the card will be specified Allimages on car To cancel the image protection select Clear all on card Clear all in folder or Clear all on card 4D RAW images and movies cannot be specified Do not specify images already specified for a photobook in another camera for another photobook with this camera The photobook settings may be overwritten 430 14 Customizing the Camera You can customize various camera functions to suit your picture taking preferences with Custom Functions Also current camera settings can be saved under lt J gt lt gt lt amp gt positions of the
203. cccccdecsdvetsaicntssesesxeneoaadune 164 Shooting function settings 60 469 Shooting information display 356 Shooting Modes 0cceeee 29 60 Av Aperture priority AE 220 B Bulb accasastessedcaiienedeceosscondeas 230 Custom shooting 464 M Manual exposure 222 P Program AE 0ssseeeeeees 216 Tv Shutter priority AE 218 AF Scene Intelligent Auto 80 Shooting orientation registration 125 Shutter button ccceccccsssseeeeeees 55 Shutter synchronization 269 Shutter priority AE 218 315 Silent shooting Silent continuous shooting 141 Silent LV shooting 297 347 Silent single shooting 141 Single shooting cceeeeeeeeeees 141 Single image display 00 354 Single point AF cceeeee 90 95 Single point Spot AF 90 95 Slide SHOW sictercieeernccceeecccoianmaaads 382 Small image recording quality 151 403 SOPWAIMEC cccccccccceeesseeeeeecseeeseeees 536 SPOAKE M ccccccseseceeseeeeeeeeees 24 378 SpOt A sganeeenne ent Meererteeeettenn eet 90 95 Spot Metering cccssecceesseeeeees 225 S RAW Small RAW 149 151 152 dC Seer eee mere emer cre een oeeree 187 Standard IPB sseiicccscstneeconssatianns 332 SIU E 33 System MAD cccccseeeseeeeeeeeeeeees 478 T Temperature warni
204. cccevecercinnriccctamtececeas 100 Lens MOOG oi sccnsreccvccevedaetnucieersstecwdies 52 Light IPB sccsccsseseatecbexsssdassseatiasdens 332 Live View shooting 84 285 Aspect ratio cccseeeeeeeeeeeeees 295 Exposure simulation 296 Facet Tracking cccceeeeeees 300 FlexiZone Multi 00 302 FlexiZone Single 00 304 Grid display ceseeeeeeees 295 Information display 0 288 Manual focusing MF 308 Metering timer eee 298 Possible shots ccccccsesseees 287 Quick Control 0 cceeeeeee 293 Silent SHOOTING aaaeeeaa 297 LOCK aep ener rrr emer eenee ree 59 LOG eren E 210 Index POO GING nan stateannitnsaaeraancuttidmmnnntaiss 210 Log data tcrsdtancrcvasiecccacsestceeeeaeday 211 Long exposure noise reduction 178 Long EXPOSUFES osnnnnnnnneenneneenene 230 Low speed continuous shooting 141 M M Manual exposure 222 320 Magnification 305 308 364 Start POSitiONn c eeeeeeeeees 365 Main Dial ccreusssastisneiessnetntdidamennerey 56 Malfunction 0 cccccceeeeeeeeeeeee eens 495 Manual exposure 64 222 320 Manual focusing MF 140 308 Manual reset cccccsssseeeeeseeees 194 Manual selection AF 90 93 95 Maximum burst 0008 151 153 Medium image recor
205. cestadsia E E E A tibet 414 gt Digital Print Order Format DPOF 421 Direct Printing of Print Ordered Images cccssccceeseeeees 424 gt Transferring Images to a COMPUTEL cccccceecesteeeeeeeees 425 lal Specifying Images for a Photobook cccccccceeesseeeeeeeeeeeeees 429 Customizing the Camera 431 Custom Functions sacsexccuccasvinsteiteusenensnsberiansetladiemeatieerimaacnemeneds 432 Setting Custom FUNCTIONS ccccceceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeaaaenees 434 C Fnd EXO SUNG nerenin eea areae aa E EEEE TOER 434 C Fin2 Exposure Drive cccccessscecceeceecesseeeeeeeeseeseeassseeeeeeeeees 438 C Fn3 Display Operation cccccceeseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeeeeas 440 CFDA OMNES terenne inoren E E E EAEEREN EEEE EEEE 443 Q 3 Custom Controls sirisrisdinicacseanitinnrndercntniecvaiuedinitdnmmedneats 445 Registering My Me nu cc ccccccccssssccecseeseeecesesseeeeeseeseeeeensaasess 459 6 Registering Custom Shooting Modes ccccccccsccccesseeeeeees 464 Contents 15 Reference 467 INFO Button Functions c ccccccccccccessceesseeceseeseseeesseeeesseeensnes 468 Checking the Battery Information cccccccssssseeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeees 470 Using a Household Power Outlet cccccccceeeeseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeaaaees 474 FB Using Eye Fi Cards ccccccesseseessseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeaes 475 System Map eissteirsudetdisic
206. ck while the depth of field preview button is pressed 221 M Manual Exposure me In this mode you set both the shutter speed and aperture as desired To determine the exposure refer to the exposure level indicator in the viewfinder or use a commercially available exposure meter This method is called manual exposure lt M gt stands for Manual Yeh gp 1 Set the Mode Dial to lt M gt 2 Set the ISO speed p 154 Shutter speed 3 Set the shutter speed and aperture To set the shutter speed turn the lt gt dial To set the aperture turn the lt 3 gt dial If it cannot be set set the lt LOCKR gt switch to the left then turn the lt 2 gt or lt gt dial A Focus on the subject Press the shutter button halfway The exposure setting will be displayed in the viewfinder and on the LCD panel On the viewfinder s right side the exposure level indicator lt E gt shows how far off the current exposure level is from the standard exposure level lt gt gt Bright 5 Set the exposure and take the picture Check the exposure level indicator and set the desired shutter speed and aperture If the exposure level exceeds 3 Dark stops from the standard exposure Sanden eoeue the end of the exposure level index lt P gt indicator will display lt a gt or lt w gt 222 M Manual Exposure Exposure Compensation with Auto ISO If the ISO s
207. cker me If you shoot an image with a fast shutter speed under a light source such as fluorescent light the blinking of the light source causes flicker and the image may be vertically unevenly exposed If continuous shooting is used under these conditions uneven exposures or colors across the images may result With anti flicker shooting the camera detects the frequency of the light source s blinking and takes the picture when the flicker s effect on the exposure or color is minimal O a A Select Anti flicker shoot Red eye reduc Disable Under the 64 tab select Anti ntenvel ne Disable flicker shoot then press lt gt F Anti flicker shoot Disable Mirror lockup Anti flicker shoot 2 Select Enable EIJE If Enable is set the shutter Take the picture ease ume tag May Peconic The image will be taken with reduced longer or continuous shooting speci may become sow unevenness of exposure or color caused by the flicker QD When Enable is set and you shoot under a flickering light source the shutter release time lag may become slightly longer Also the continuous shooting speed may become slightly slower and the shooting interval may become irregular This function does not work with Live View shooting and movie shooting Inthe lt P gt or lt Av gt mode if the shutter speed changes during continuous shooting or if you shoot multiple shots of the same scene at different shutte
208. ct focus Lens drive when AF impossible OFF Stop focus search If autofocus starts and the focus is far off or if focus cannot be achieved the lens drive stops This prevents the lens from becoming grossly out of focus due to focus searching Fl Super telephoto lenses etc with a wide focusing drive range can become grossly out of focus during focus search taking more time to achieve focus next time Setting Stop focus search is recommended 122 tM Customizing AF Functions Selectable AF point You can change the number of manually selectable AF points If 65 point automatic selection AF is set the Area AF frame entire AF area will be used for AF regardless of the setting below Selectable AF point 223 65 points All 65 AF points will be manually oie selectable mht 21 points Twenty one major AF points will be manually selectable 119 points Nine major AF points will be manually selectable QD With a lens from Groups E to G p 102 103 the number of manually selectable AF points will be fewer E Even with settings other than 65 points AF point expansion manual selection 2 AF point expansion manual selection surrounding points Zone AF manual selection of zone and Large Zone AF manual selection of zone are still possible When you press the lt E gt button the AF points which are not manually selectable will not be displayed in the viewfinder 123 M Customizing AF F
209. ct the interface language Viewfinder level Hide Show VF grid display Disable Enable Viewfinder display Show hide in viewfinder Shooting mode White balance Drive mode AF operation Metering mode Image quality Flicker detection oF icigial ene Set GPS and digital compass functions 197 settings 490 Date Time Zone 4 7 Menu Settings Y Set up 3 Yellow Page Video system For NTSC For PAL set Power source Remaining capacity Shutter Battery information count Recharge performance Battery 470 registration Serial number Battery history Auto cleaning c Enable Disable ie Clean manually 409 Mz button display Displays camera settings Electronic level 468 options Displays shooting functions 371 button function Rating Protect 370 HDMI frame rate Auto 59 94i 50 001 59 94p 50 00p 23 98p 350 Communication Displayed when WFT E7 Ver 2 sold settings separately is attached Options displayed on the screen differ depending on the Video system setting Y Set up 4 Yellow Custom shooting mode Register current camera settings to the Mode C1 C3 Dials and positions Clear all camera settings Resets the camera to the default settings 70 Display copyright information Enter author s Copyright information name Enter copyright details Delete copyright information Certification Logo Some of the camera s certification logos are 467 D
210. cult to discern magnify the image p 399 and check the four corners The peripheral illumination correction applied with the camera will be less pronounced than with Digital Photo Professional EOS software and may be less apparent In such a case use Digital Photo Professional to apply the peripheral illumination correction Sor Distortion correction p 182 Image distortion due to lens characteristics can be corrected If Enable is set the corrected image will be displayed The image periphery will be cropped in the corrected image Since the image resolution may look slightly lower use the Picture Style s sharpness parameter to make adjustments as necessary Aor Chromatic aberration correction p 182 Chromatic aberrations color fringing along the subject s outline due to the lens characteristics can be corrected If Enable is set the corrected image will be displayed If the effect is difficult to discern magnify the image p 399 401 RAWI Processing RAW Images with the Camera QD Peripheral Illumination Correction Distortion Correction and Chromatic Aberration Correction To execute peripheral illumination correction distortion correction and chromatic aberration correction with the camera the correction data of the lens used must be registered in the camera If the lens correction data is not registered in the camera use EOS Utility EOS software p 537 to register the lens correction data QD
211. cusing light up in red during Al Servo AF This will not work if VF display illumination is set to Disable F When you press the lt E gt button the AF points will light up in red regardless of this setting The electronic level and grid in the viewfinder and the information set with Show hide in viewfinder p 77 will also light up in red 131 tM Customizing AF Functions AF status in viewfinder The AF status icon indicating AF operation can be displayed in the viewfinder s field of view or outside the field of view AF status in viewfinder Show in field of view Id of The AF status icon lt M gt is sono displayed in the lower right of the viewfinder s field of view _ Show outside view The lt a gt icon is displayed below the focus indicator lt gt outside the viewfinder s field of view F The AF status icon is displayed while you press the shutter button halfway after focus is achieved and while you hold down the lt AF ON gt button AF Microadjustment You can make fine adjustments for the AF s point of focus For details see Fine Adjustment of AF s Point of Focus on the next page 132 Fine Adjustment of AF s Point of Focus Fine adjustment of the AF s point of focus is possible for viewfinder shooting This is called AF Microadjustment Before making the adjustment read Cautions for AF Microadjustment on page 138 q Normally this
212. d even when the camera is turned off the battery will keep draining When you use the camera again the battery level may already be low If necessary recharge the battery or prepare a charged spare battery sold separately 213 214 Advanced Operations In the lt P gt lt Tv gt lt Av gt lt M gt lt B gt shooting modes you can select the shutter speed aperture and other camera settings to change the exposure and obtain the desired result A X icon at the upper right of a page title indicates a function that can be used only in these modes lt P gt lt Tv gt lt Av gt lt M gt lt B gt After you press the shutter button halfway and let go the exposure values will remain displayed in the viewfinder and on the LCD panel for 4 sec 4 For the functions settable in each shooting mode see page 480 Fl OD Set the lt LOCK gt switch to the left lt n 215 P Program AE gt The camera automatically sets the shutter speed and aperture to suit the subject s brightness This is called Program AE lt P gt stands for Program AE stands for Auto Exposure PRN 1 Set the Mode Dial to lt P gt ye Focus on the subject Look through the viewfinder and aim the AF point over the subject Then press the shutter button halfway gt When focus is achieved the focus indicator lt gt in the viewfinder will light up in One Shot AF mode gt The shutter
213. d sets everything automatically to suit the scene The detected scene type is indicated on the upper left of the screen For certain scenes or shooting conditions the icon displayed may not match the actual scene Non portrait Nature and Background Outdoor Movement Close 2 J k io Included Light blue Orange Dark blue 1 Displayed only when the AF method is set to X Tracking If another AF method is set the Non portrait icon will be displayed even if a person is detected 2 Displayed when the attached lens has distance information With an Extension Tube or Close up Lens the icon displayed may not match the actual scene 3 The icon suiting the scene detected will be displayed 4 Displayed when all the following conditions apply The shooting scene is dark it is a night scene and the camera is mounted on a tripod 290 C3 Shooting with the LCD Monitor ee 5 Displayed with any of the lenses below e EF S18 55mm 3 5 5 6 IS Il e EF S55 250mm f 4 5 6 IS II e EF300mm f 2 8L IS II USM e EF400mm f 2 8L IS II USM e Image Stabilizer lenses marketed in 2012 or later 4 5 If the conditions in both 4 and 5 are met the shutter speed will slow down Final Image Simulation The final image simulation shows the results of the current settings for Picture Style white balance and other functions in the Live View image so you can see what the captured image will look like The Live View image will automatic
214. d on the border on Bordered Bil 9x13 cm or larger prints xxX up Option to print 2 4 8 9 16 or 20 images on one sheet 20 or 35 images will be printed as thumbnails on A4 or Letter size paper 20 up H will have the shooting information imprinted The page layout will vary depending on the printer model or its settings 1 From the Exif data the camera name lens name shooting mode shutter speed aperture exposure compensation amount ISO speed white balance etc will be imprinted 2 After ordering the prints with Digital Print Order Format DPOF p 421 printing by following Direct Printing of Print Ordered Images p 424 is recommended 415 PA Printing 3 Set them if necessary If you do not need W 1 copies to set any printing effects go to step 5 cropping Contents displayed on the screen es eel kapenseinas differ depending on the printer B Photo Cancel i ane a Select the setting then press lt gt Select the desired printing effect then press lt gt If the lt MEA El gt icons are displayed brightly you can also adjust the printing effects p 418 FJOn The image will be printed using the printer s standard colors The image s Exif data is used to make automatic corrections No automatic correction will be applied The image will be printed with higher saturation to produce CSVIVID more vivid blues and greens Image noise is reduced before print
215. dicates that the Live View shooting will soon stop automatically If this happens you will not be able to shoot again until the camera s internal temperature decreases Exit the Live View shooting or turn off the power and let the camera rest for a while Using Live View shooting at a high temperature for a prolonged period will cause the lt M gt or lt i gt icon to appear earlier When you are not shooting turn off the camera If the camera s internal temperature is high the quality of images shot with high ISO speed or long exposure may deteriorate even before the white lt i gt icon is displayed Shooting Results In magnified view the shutter speed and aperture will be displayed in red If you take the picture in magnified view the exposure may not come out as desired Return to the normal view before taking the picture Even if you take the picture in magnified view the image will be captured in the normal view range 310 W General Live View Shooting Cautions Live View Image Under low or bright light conditions the Live View image may not reflect the brightness of the captured image Even if alow ISO speed is set noise may be noticeable in the displayed Live View image under low light However when you shoot the image recorded will have minimal noise The image quality of the Live View image is different from that of the recorded image If the light source illumination within the image ch
216. ding quality 151 403 Memory cards gt Cards WISI viiccmeetrreterrersciseemecctecmamineaieind 64 My Memnu cccccccessssseeeeeees 459 Setting procedure ccce 65 Settings viciadesnncth cas satenrcecagesnaranoes 484 MENURO ola DOO 8 Metering MOdE ceeeeeeeees 224 Metering timer 55 298 347 Mea m a 92 125 258 Microadjustment ceeeee 133 Microphone cccccsseeeeees 314 337 Mirror lockup wactectssesierssscsedeseeresenans 246 Mode Didl ccecccssssseeeeeeees 29 56 Monochrome images 162 165 MOV oo eee e eE 330 Movies si vcssaacncecdiccesdidddcmncussscernneits 313 AE OG ccseeceasteeecannnnnttecosteeuatas 318 AF method cccccccccsseseeees 343 AF OGG i civcnssaseseethiisinccatcenaans 329 Al SERVO AI Servo AF 342 Aperture priority AE 316 Attenuator nener 336 546 Autoexposure shooting 314 Compression method 332 Drop frame ccccccsssseseeeeeeees 341 Editing out first and last SCENES ceive cep auen ascents eniaist 380 Enjoying MOVIECS 0 376 File Size 334 335 Frame rate cccccssssesseeeeeees 331 Free run se issrinvcesenndmasitescbomais 339 Eie EEE PITTE 344 HDMI output 0 cccceeeeees 348 Headphones c ccssseeeeeeees 337 Information display 323 Manual exposure shooting 3
217. dotted line box shown in the illustration over a plain white object Focus manually and shoot with the standard exposure set for the white object You can use any white balance setting 2 Select Custom White Balance Se Een Where Under the 2 tab select Custom ISO speed settings White Balance then press lt gt Auto Lighting Optimizer Sh EEE awe gt The custom white balance selection Custom White Balance screen will appear WB Shift Bkt 0 0 0 Color space sRGB 169 WB Setting the White Balance SSS Import the white balance data Turn the lt 3 gt dial to select the image captured in step 1 then press lt Ge gt gt On the dialog screen that appears OE select OK and the data will be imported Press the lt MENU gt button to exit the menu 4 Press the lt WB gt button 46 Select the custom white balance Look at the LCD panel and turn the lt gt dial to select lt ss gt wD If the exposure obtained in step 1 differs greatly from the standard exposure a correct white balance may not be obtained In step 3 the following images cannot be selected Images captured while the Picture Style was set to Monochrome multiple exposure images and images shot with another camera F Instead of a white object a gray chart or 18 gray reflector commercially available can produce a more accurate white balance amp
218. during movie playback 4D When using headphones for audio noise reduction will not be applied to the headphone output Because of this what you hear will differ from the actual audio recorded with the movie E o Inthe lt Gf gt mode Sound recording can be set to On or Off If On is set the sound recording level will be adjusted automatically same as with Auto but the wind filter function will not take effect When the camera is connected to a TV set with the HDMI cable sound will also be output except when Sound recording is set to Off If the sound from the TV set causes audio feedback place the camera farther away from the TV set or turn down the TV set s sound volume You can also adjust the headphones volume by pressing the lt Q gt button then holding down the lt RATE gt button and titling lt gt up or down The sound volume balance between L left and R right cannot be adjusted amp Audio is recorded at a 48 kHz 16 bit sampling rate If t 25 Silent Control is set to Enable p 338 you can adjust the sound recording level with the lt gt touch pad with less operation noise during movie shooting 337 YESS Silent Control m You can change the settings of the ISO speed sound recording level etc without making too much noise while shooting a movie Silent contrel When 85 Silent Control the 13 Enable Ideal for tab in lt Aj gt is set to E
219. e Ohta ku Tokyo 146 8501 Japan Europe Africa amp Middle East CANON EUROPA N V PO Box 2262 1180 EG Amstelveen The Netherlands For your local Canon office please refer to your warranty card or to www canon europe com Support The product and associated warranty are provided in European countries by Canon Europa N V The lenses and accessories mentioned in this Instruction Manual are current as of August 2014 For information on the camera s compatibility with any lenses and accessories introduced after this date contact any Canon Service Center CEL SV6GA210 CANON INC 2014
220. e display To return to the single image display turn the lt s gt dial clockwise To select other images to be transferred repeat step 4 E Sel lmage Sel fm F When Sel Image is selected you can check the image s transfer status on the upper left of the screen No mark Not selected v Selected for transfer X Transfer failed O Transfer succeeded The procedures for RAW JPEG transfer p 426 and above steps 1 to 4 can also be performed while the camera is not connected to a computer 427 i gt Transferring Images to a Computer Image sel transfer 5 Transfer the image v Images to transfer On the computer screen check that X Images failed trans O Images transferred EOS Utility s main window is displayed Select Direct transfer then press Sel lmage Sel All image lt GE gt Direct transfer MENUEN On the confirmation screen select OK and the images will be transferred to the computer Images selected with Sel fi and All image can also be transferred in this way Sel Select Sel fl and select Folder images not transfer d When you select a folder all the images in that folder not yet transferred to the computer will be selected Selecting Folder images failed transf will select the selected folder s images that failed to transfer Selecting Clear folder transf history will clear the transfer history of the images in the selected folder Af
221. e lt MENU gt button For details about each menu item see page 484 Dimmed Menu Items Example When Multi Shot Noise Reduction is set OM ab y o Dimmed menu items cannot be set The re menu item is dimmed if another function setting is overriding it Picture Style Standard High ISO speed NR Highlight tone priority eae Ga EENET You can see the overriding function by selecting the dimmed menu item and Not available because of the pressing lt GE gt associated function s setting r r A PN ARE If you cancel the overriding function s setting the dimmed menu item will become settable QD Some dimmed menu items will not show the overriding function F With 4 Clear all camera settings you can reset the menu functions to the default settings p 70 66 Before You Start M Formatting the Card If the card is new or was previously formatted by another camera or computer format the card with this camera When the card is formatted all images and data on the card will be erased Even protected images will be erased so make ei sure there is nothing you need to keep If necessary transfer the images and data to a computer etc before formatting the card O a o Mp Select Format card Record func card folder sel Under the 1 tab select Format File numbering Continuous card then press lt GE gt File name Auto rotate Ong Format card Format card Select the card card
222. e as with SO 4 Exposure compensation hold button turn You can set the exposure compensation by holding down lt gt and turning the lt s gt dial Convenient when you want to set exposure compensation while lt M gt manual exposure and Auto ISO are set A Exposure compensation hold down lever turn You can set exposure compensation by tilting lt gt to the right and turning the lt s gt dial Convenient when you want to set exposure compensation while lt M gt manual exposure and Auto ISO are set Tv Shutter speed setting in M mode In manual exposure lt M gt you can set the shutter speed with the lt s 3 gt or lt gt dial 455 4 3 Custom Controls Av Aperture setting in M mode In manual exposure lt M gt you can set the aperture with the lt 3 gt or lt gt dial jpeg One touch image quality setting Pressing the button assigned to this function will switch to the image recording quality set here While this change is in effect the image recording quality JPEG RAW will blink in the viewfinder with Show hide in viewfinder s Image quality checkmarked After the shooting ends the One touch image quality setting will be canceled and the image recording quality will be switched back to the previous quality 6 On the setting screen by pressing the lt INFO gt button you can select the image recording quality for this function jpeg One touch image
223. e card manufacturer Q The camera is not guaranteed to support Eye Fi card functions including wireless transfer In case of a problem with an Eye Fi card please check with the card manufacturer Also note that approval is required to use Eye Fi cards in many countries or regions Without approval use of the card is not permitted If it is unclear whether the card has been approved for use in your area please check with the card manufacturer 1 Insert an Eye Fi card p 41 2 Select Eye Fi settings Under the 1 tab select Eye Fi SET UP1 Record func card folder sel n numbering Continuous settings then press lt G1 gt lle name Fiennes ong a This menu is displayed only when an Format card Eye Fi card is inserted into the Eye Fi settings camera SEAE 3 Enable Eye Fi transmission Eye Fi trans Select Eye Fi trans then press Enable lt E gt Select Enable then press lt gt If you set Disable there will be no automatic transmission even with the Eye Fi card inserted transmission status icon 3 475 Using Eye Fi Cards Eye Fi settings Eye Fi trans Connection info Display the connection information Select Connection info then press lt eI gt Connection info 5 Check the Access point SSID Access point SSID ABCDEFG1234567890 Connection Connected MAC address i i Eye Fi firmware Ver Check that an access point
224. e correction and White balance bracketing provided Flash color temperature information transmission possible Applicable to long exposures and high ISO speed shots Auto Lighting Optimizer provided Provided Peripheral illumination correction Chromatic aberration correction Distortion correction Possible Eye level pentaprism Vertical Horizontal approx 100 with Eye point approx 22mm Approx 1 00x 1 m7 with 50mm lens at infinity Approx 22mm from eyepiece lens center at 1 m Approx 3 0 1 0 m dpt Eh A standard screen interchangeable Provided Provided Shooting mode White balance Drive mode AF operation Metering mode Image quality JPEG RAW Flicker detection Warning symbol AF status Quick return type Provided TTL secondary image registration phase difference detection with the dedicated AF sensor 65 Cross type AF point Max 65 points Number of available AF points cross type points and Dual cross type points vary depending on the lens Dual cross type focusing at f 2 8 with center AF point Excluding some lenses with f 2 8 or larger maximum aperture EV 3 18 Conditions f 2 8 sensitive center AF point One Shot AF room temperature ISO 100 One Shot AF Al Servo AF Al Focus AF Manual focusing MF Specifications AF area selection mode Single point Spot AF manual selection Single point AF AF point automatic selection conditions AF Configuration Tool
225. e improved The dynamic range is expanded from the standard 18 gray to bright highlights The gradation between the grays and highlights becomes smoother 3 Take the picture The image will be recorded with highlight tone priority applied DEJE D When Enable is set noise may increase slightly P With Enable the settable range will be ISO 200 ISO 16000 Also the lt D gt icon will be displayed in the viewfinder and on the LCD panel when highlight tone priority is enabled 180 MNU Correction of Lens Peripheral Illumination and Aberrations Peripheral light fall off is a phenomenon that makes the image corners look darker due to the lens characteristics Color fringing along subject outlines is called chromatic aberration And image distortion due to lens characteristics is called distortion These lens aberrations and light fall off can be corrected By default Peripheral illumination and Chromatic aberration correction are set to Enable and Distortion correction is set to Disable If Correction data not available is displayed see Lens Correction Data on page 183 Peripheral Illumination Correction 1 Select Lens aberration Image quality correction wa review Under the 1 tab select Lens Release shutter without card aberration correction then press Lens aberration correction lt GE gt Lens aberration correction 2 Select the setting EF S18 135mm f 3 5 5 6 IS STM Check
226. e set automatically autoflash exposure to match the manually set aperture The shutter speed will be set automatically between 1 250 sec 30 sec to suit the scene s brightness In low light the main subject is exposed with the automatic flash and the background is exposed with a slow shutter speed set automatically Both the subject and background look properly exposed automatic slow speed flash sync If you are handholding the camera keep it steady to prevent camera shake Using a tripod is recommended To prevent a slow shutter speed under 481 Flash control set Flash sync speed in Av mode to 1 250 1 60 sec auto or 1 250 sec fixed p 263 254 4 Using the Built in Flash Effective Range of Built in Flash Approx in meters feet EF S18 135mm f 3 5 5 6 IS STM ISO Speed EF S15 85mm f 3 5 6 IS USM Wide Angle f 3 5 Telephoto f 5 6 ISO 100 1 3 1 3 3 10 3 1 2 0 3 3 6 4 ISO 200 1 4 4 3 3 14 6 1 2 8 3 3 9 1 ISO 400 1 6 3 3 3 20 6 1 3 9 3 3 12 9 ISO 800 1 1 8 9 3 6 29 2 1 5 6 3 3 18 2 ISO 1600 1 6 12 6 5 2 41 2 1 7 9 3 3 25 8 ISO 3200 2 2 17 8 7 3 58 3 1 4 11 1 4 6 36 5 ISO 6400 3 1 25 1 10 3 82 5 2 0 15 7 6 4 51 6 ISO 12800 4 4 35 6 14 6 116 7 2 8 22 2 9 1 72 9 ISO 16000 5 0 39 9 16 4 130 9 3 1 24 9 10 2 81 8 H1 equivalent to ISO 25600 6 3 50 3 20 6 165 0 3 9 31 4 12 9 103 1 H2 equivalent to ISO 51200 8 9 71 1 29 2 233 3 5 6 44 4 18 2 145 8 QD W
227. e skin tones The image looks softer Suited for close up portraits By changing the Color tone p 163 you can adjust the skin tone Landscape For vivid blues and greens and very sharp and crisp images Effective for impressive landscapes Neutral Suited for processing the image with a computer For natural colors and subdued images Faithful Suited for processing the image with a computer The color of a subject that is captured in sunlight at a color temperature of 5200K will be adjusted to match the subject s colorimetrical color Images will appear subdued 161 313 Selecting a Picture Style Monochrome Creates black and white images QD Black and white images shot in JPEG cannot be reverted to color If you want to later shoot pictures in color make sure the Monochrome setting is canceled F You can display lt gt in the viewfinder and on the LCD panel when Monochrome is set p 441 User Def 1 3 You can register a basic style such as Portrait Landscape a Picture Style file etc and adjust it as desired p 166 Any User Defined Picture Style that is not set will have the same settings as the Standard Picture Style Symbols The symbols of the Picture Style selection screen refer to parameters such as Sharpness and Contrast The numerals indicate the parameter settings such as for Sharpness and Contrast for each Picture Style Symbols eontast PS Saturation Picture Sty
228. e will be recorded with the distortion corrected e aca dle amel 1e M V7 11 1 19 5 182 tM Correction of Lens Peripheral Illumination and Aberrations Q When distortion correction is enabled the camera records an image range narrower than that seen through the viewfinder Image periphery will be slightly cropped and resolution slightly lowered If you set Distortion to Enable the maximum burst p 153 during continuous shooting will decrease Distortion will not be corrected if you shoot a movie or set the HDR mode multiple exposures or Multi Shot Noise Reduction Using distortion correction during Live View shooting will slightly affect the angle of view When you magnify the image during Live View shooting distortion correction is not applied to the image displayed Therefore if the image periphery is magnified a part of the image range that will not be recorded in the actual image may be displayed Dust Delete Data p 407 will not be appended to images recorded with distortion correction enabled Also the AF point s will not be displayed p 359 when you play back the image Lens Correction Data The camera already contains data for lens peripheral illumination correction chromatic aberration correction and distortion correction for approx 30 lenses If you select Enable the peripheral illumination correction chromatic aberration correction and distortion correction will be applied a
229. eBrowser programs that came with previous cameras does not support the EOS 7D Mark II s still photos MOV and MP4 files Use ImageBrowser EX 538 Installing the Software Installing the Software on Windows Compatible OS Windows 8 1 Windows8 Windows 7 1 Check that the camera is not connected to your computer Q Never connect the camera to your computer before you install the software The software will not be installed correctly gt Insert the EOS Solution Disk CD 3 Select your geographic area country and language 4 Click Easy Installation to start installation Canon EOS DIGITAL Register Follow the on screen instructions to complete the installation procedure Click Finish when the installation has completed 6 Remove the CD 539 Installing the Software SSS SSS Installing the Software on Macintosh Compatible OS MAC OS X 10 8 10 9 1 Check that the camera is not connected to your computer gt Insert the EOS Solution Disk CD On your computer s desktop double click and open the CD ROM icon and then double click Canon EOS Digital Installer 3 Select your geographic area country and language 4 Click Easy Installation to start installation Canon EOS DIGITAL Follow the on screen instructions to complete the installation procedure 5 Click Restart when the installation has completed 6 Once the computer has restarted remove the CD
230. easily fine tune Al Servo AF to suit a particular subject or scene just by selecting an option from case 1 to case 6 This feature is called the AF Configuration Tool a AF 1 Select the AF 1 tab San AF1 AF config tool Case 1 w Versatile multi purpose P Select a case Tracking sensitivity a Turn the lt 3 gt dial to select a case Y Accel decel tracking OY AF pt auto switching Icon then press lt gt INFO Se Sa RATE DOT esta gt The selected case will be set The selected case is indicated in blue Case 1 to 6 As explained on pages 113 to 115 case 1 to 6 are six setting combinations of Tracking sensitivity Acceleration deceleration tracking and AF point auto switching Refer to the table below to select the case applicable to the subject or scene Case Icon Description Applicable Subjects Page Case 1 ws Versatile multi purpose setting For any moving subject 109 Continue to track subjects Tennis Payers DURSTNY ear Ke ignoring possible obstacles oe Tee my skiers etc Instantly focus on subjects starting ine ora MYGG Case 3 per race alpine downhill 110 suddenly entering AF points skiers etc Caseal 4 For subjects that accelerate or Soccer motor sports 410 T decelerate quickly basketball etc For erratic subjects moving Case 5 y quickly in any direction disabled Figure skaters etc 111 in Single point AF mode For su
231. ection information is not recorded to the log file p 211 206 Using the Digital Compass aL oen cise llr cba QD Since the digital compass uses geomagnetism for direction sensing correct directions may not be obtained or calibration may not be possible in the following environments e In or near buildings including office buildings residences built using reinforced concrete or masonry and underground shopping malls vehicles including cars trains planes and boats or metal structures such as elevators e Near metals including steel desks and furnishings permanent magnets including magnetic jewelry or home electronics including televisions computers speakers or mobile phones e Near high voltage lines including transmission towers overhead power lines including those powering trains or metal facilities including footbridges and guardrails e At high latitudes Calibrating the Digital Compass While you are using the GPS function if the Calibrate digital compass screen appears or if the direction indicated looks questionable calibrate the digital compass as follows The digital compass should be calibrated at the actual shooting location GPS digital compass settings 1 Select Calibrate digital Auto time setting Disable compass Position update interval Every 15s Eaa Ae T Check that Digital compass is set GPS information display to Enable Calibrate digital compass as es aa Select C
232. ection mode changes F With AF4 Select AF area selec mode you can limit the selectable AF area selection modes p 124 lf you set AF4 AF area selection method to EJ gt Main Dial you can select the AF area selection mode by pressing the lt gt button then turning the lt gt dial p 125 92 Selecting the AF Area and AF Point Selecting the AF Point Manually You can manually select the AF point or zone f FW Press the lt L gt button gt The AF points will be displayed in the viewfinder In AF point expansion modes adjacent AF points will also be displayed Inthe Zone AF mode the selected E zone will be displayed 2 Select an AF point The AF point selection will change in the direction you tilt lt gt If you press lt gt straight down the center AF point or center zone will be selected You can also select a horizontal AF point by turning the lt s gt dial and select a vertical AF point by turning the lt 3 gt dial Inthe Zone AF mode turning the lt gt or lt gt dial will change the zone in a looping sequence E When AF4 Initial AF pt 2 Al Servo AF is set to Initial c2 AF pt selected p 127 you can use this method to manually select the Al Servo s AF starting position When you press the lt E gt button the LCD panel displays the following e 65 point automat
233. ectronic level MA button display options If the electronic level does not Y Displays camera settings Se recone level appear set 3 MEA button Y Displays shooting functions display options so that the electronic level can be displayed in p 468 Cancel 2 Check the camera s tilt The horizontal and vertical tilt are displayed in 1 increments QM RSL TP 7 JHB Bhs When the red line turns green it indicates that the tilt is almost Vertical level Horizontal level corrected RLU Z gt gt gt ee S Hy Q Even when the tilt is corrected there may be a margin of error of approx cell Ifthe camera is very tilted the electronic level s margin of error will be larger ir During Live View shooting and before movie shooting except with Tracking you can also display the electronic level as described above 19 4 Displaying the Electronic Level Doo e tM Displaying the Electronic Level in the Viewfinder An electronic level can be displayed on the upper part of the viewfinder Since this can be displayed while you shoot you can correct the camera tilt while shooting Select Viewfinder display TTT SET UP2 ray nn eee Under the 2 tab select LCD brightness ALES Viewfinder display then press Date Time Zone 24 09 14 13 30 LanguageGa English E a Viewfinder display lt GP
234. efore recording 348 M9 Menu Function Settings a Mirroring e The movie is displayed on the LCD monitor and via the HDMI output simultaneously The HDMI output movie does not show the shooting information AF frame and other details output without an information overlay If you will leave the camera untouched for more than 30 minutes during HDMI output select No mirroring and set 2 Auto power off to Disable p 69 wD If the HDMI movie is output without an information overlay remaining card capacity remaining battery capacity internal temperature warning p 351 and other warnings will not be displayed on the HDMI output device s screen Be especially careful if No mirroring is set If Mirroring is set you can check for warnings on the camera s LCD monitor amp When you are not shooting movies the power will turn off automatically after the 2 Auto power off time elapses If Mirroring is selected and 2 Auto power off is set to Disable HDMI output will stop movie shooting will stop if you leave the camera untouched for 30 minutes Even when Mirroring is set if you play back an image or display a menu the HDMI movie will not be displayed Avoid still photo shooting p 327 while recording the HDMI output to an external recording device Some external recording devices may not synchronize the time code or audio with movie images or may produce audio interference resulting
235. election modes Fil If the subject moves even more dramatically up down left or right setting AF pt auto switching to 2 may give better results p 115 111 EW Selecting Al Servo AF Characteristics DSSS Ee EY Case 6 For subjects that change speed and move erratically disabled in Single point AF mode AF1 AF config tool Fog Case 6 w For subjects that change R speed and move erratically y Tracking sensitivity Sees Y Accel decel tracking uA AF pt auto switching A INFO LOT RATE PAEAS Default settings e Tracking sensitivity O e Accel decel tracking 1 e AF pt auto switching 1 Geared for tracking moving subjects whose speed can change dramatically and suddenly Also if the target subject moves dramatically up down left or right and it is difficult to focus the AF point switches automatically to track the subject This setting takes effect when the AF area selection mode is set to AF point expansion manual selection a AF point expansion manual selection surrounding points Zone AF manual selection of zone Large Zone AF manual selection of zone or 65 point automatic selection AF This setting is not available with the Single point Spot AF manual selection and Single point AF manual selection modes E Ifthe subject is in motion and prone to sudden dramatic changes in speed setting Accel decel tracking to 2 may give better results p 114 I
236. encinniacennnuanniantectes 510 Evaluative metering c000 224 EXFA Ne eee rete ee ene ee eeeere eeenerres 68 Exposure compensation 226 Exposure compensation with Auto ASO elas cos sesivicacausunstnasanuanntinetes 223 Exposure level increments 434 Exposure level indicator 26 27 288 323 543 Index Exposure simulation 0068 296 External Speedlite gt Flash EV OCU is cnacagaanemraressessnnnissctqunadanans 247 Eye Fi Cards ccccccssssssseeeeeseeees 475 Eyepiece COVET cccccceeeeees 33 247 F FE OGM ao apace cast eaidaceseteseciaccees 258 259 Feature Quide ccccccssssseeeeeeeees 78 a 2 Sepa emnr neo Ciner er ekk ee meen 269 File ExteENnsSiOn ccccccsseeeeeeeeees 192 File NaMe seces sc ccveredectacdevacldasaectcsased 190 FG SIZE seiis 151 334 357 Filter effects cccceccceeseseeeeseees 165 Final image simulation 291 326 Fine image recording quality ccatascscessbebenncexecennteanes c 149 151 Firmware version cccceeeceeeeee ees 491 First curtain synchronization 269 Flash Speedlite 253 Built in flaSh cceeeeeeeeeeeees 254 Custom Functions 00 271 Effective range sseeeeeees 255 External flash cccccsseeeee 259 FE lOCk as catbeccedaareccccseeeesst en 258 259 Flash COMM Ol zcetenscceccecsneeesoseetess 262 Flash exposure compensation
237. enu tab p 463 The file name s first character is an underscore _ Set the color space to sRGB If Adobe RGB is set the first character will be an underscore p 187 The fourth character in the file name changes With 1 File name select the camera s unique file name or the file name registered under User setting 1 p 190 The file numbering does not start from 0001 Ifthe card already contains recorded images the image number may not start from 0001 p 193 505 Troubleshooting Guide N The shooting date and time displayed is incorrect Check that the correct date and time are set p 47 Check the time zone and daylight saving time p 47 48 The date and time are not in the picture The shooting date and time do not appear in the picture The date and time are recorded in the image data as shooting information When printing you can imprint the date and time in the picture using the date and time recorded in the shooting information p 417 421 is displayed Ifthe number of images recorded on the card exceeds the number the camera can display will be displayed p 373 In the viewfinder the AF point display speed is slow In low temperatures the display speed of the AF points may become slower due to the AF point display device s liquid crystal characteristics The display speed will return to normal at room temperature The LCD monitor does not display
238. er remote control High speed continuous shooting Max approx 10 0 shots sec settable to 10 to 2 shots sec Max approx 9 5 shots sec with EOS iTR AF Low speed continuous shooting Approx 3 0 shots sec settable to 9 to 1 shots sec Silent continuous shooting Approx 4 0 shots sec settable to 4 to 1 shots sec JPEG Large Fine Approx 130 shots approx 1090 shots RAW Approx 24 shots approx 31 shots RAW JPEG Large Fine Approx 18 shots approx 19 shots Figures are based on Canon s testing standards Aspect ratio 3 x 2 ISO 100 and Standard Picture Style and an 8 GB CF card Figures in parentheses apply to an UDMA mode 7 CF card based on Canon s testing standards Specifications e Flash Built in flash Retractable auto pop up flash Guide number Approx 11 36 1 ISO 100 in meters feet Flash coverage Approx 15mm lens angle of view Recycling time Approx 3 sec External Speedlite Compatible with EX series Speedlites Flash metering E TTL II autoflash Flash exposure 3 stops in 1 3 or 1 2 stop increments compensation FE lock Provided PC terminal Provided Flash control Built in flash function settings External Speedlite function settings External Speedlite Custom Function settings Wireless flash control via optical transmission possible e Live View Shooting Focus methods Dual Pixel CMOS AF system Contrast detection AF system Face Tracking FlexiZone Multi FlexiZone
239. erface cable you can download the log data to the computer with EOS Utility EOS software For details refer to the EOS Utility Instruction Manual PDF on the DVD ROM Transferring the log data to a card for downloading GPS Logger When Transfer log data to card is Log GPS position Disable selected you can transfer the log Unea sce Ghia data in the internal memory as log Delete log data Note that when log files are Transfer log data toicard transferred to a card that log data is i a permanently deleted from the camera s internal memory The log files imported to the card will be stored in the GPS folder in the MISC folder The extension is LOG Selecting Delete log data will completely delete the log data saved in the internal memory Deleting data may take approx one minute 212 Logging the Route Traveled js i pit alaad Ww Use the provided interface cable or one from Canon p 478 When connecting the interface cable use the provided cable protector p 34 The GPS antenna is located at the top of the camera s body For this reason even when carrying the camera such as in a bag try to keep the top of the camera facing upwards and do not place anything on top of it Set the camera time and date as accurately as possible Also set correct time zone and daylight saving time for the shooting location Since the geotag information date and time are constantly recorde
240. es not focus on the desired target subject with automatic AF point selection select a zone or switch the AF method to FlexiZone Single and refocus Depending on the B 5 Aspect ratio the number of AF points varies At 3 2 there are 31 AF points At 4 3 and 1 1 there are 25 AF points And at 16 9 21 AF points Also at 16 9 there are three zones For movie shooting there are 21 AF points or 25 AF points if 640x480 is set and three zones or nine zones if 640x480 is set 303 Using AF to Focus AF Method rr es FlexiZone Single AF O The camera focuses with a single AF point This is effective when you want to focus on a particular subject 1 Display the Live View image Press the lt H gt button The Live View image will appear on the LCD monitor gt The AF point lt gt will appear During movie shooting if Movie Servo AF is set to Enable the AF point will be displayed in a larger size 2 Move the AF point Use lt gt to move the AF point to where you want to focus It cannot be moved to the edge of the screen yN Pressing lt gt or lt gt will return Eak o the AF point to the screen s center 3 Focus on the subject Aim the AF point over the subject and press the shutter button halfway gt When focus is achieved the AF point will turn green and the beeper will sound If focus is not achieved the AF point will turn orange
241. ess the lt INFO gt button you can press the center of lt gt to select Switch to center AF point or Switch to registered AF point To register the AF point see page 450 oo Direct AF point selection Vertical During metering you can turn the lt 3 gt dial to directly select an upper or lower AF point without pressing the lt E gt button Looping sequence for Zone AF and Large Zone AF ck Direct AF area selection During metering you can use lt gt to directly select an AF area selection mode without pressing the lt E gt button 4 If Direct AF point selection is assigned to lt lt s3 gt you cannot use lt gt to scroll up down the shooting information display p 354 357 during the image review just after shooting 453 3 Custom Controls Metering start When you press the shutter button halfway only the exposure metering is performed AE lock When you press the button assigned to this function you can lock the exposure AE lock during metering Convenient when you want to focus and meter the shot at different areas or when you want to take multiple shots at the same exposure setting AE lock while button pressed The exposure will be locked AE lock while you press the shutter button u AE lock hold When you press the button assigned to this function you can lock the exposure AE lock The AE lock will be maintained until you press the button
242. esult only To save only the merged multiple exposure image select Result only then press lt gt Multiple exposure Fi Set Continue Mult exp Select either 1 shot only or Continuously then press lt 6 gt With 1 shot only multiple exposure Continue Mult exp Continuously shooting will be canceled automatically after the shooting ends With Continuously multiple exposure shooting continues until the setting in step 3 is set to Disable E AUTO 8 Take the first exposure gt When On Func Ctrl is set the captured image will be displayed OB Cpi a gt The lt h gt icon will blink oneEsHOT O The number of remaining exposures 3 514 is displayed in brackets in the viewfinder or on the screen Pressing the lt L gt gt button enables you to view the captured image p 244 P e eh ee ee b Remaining number of exposures 240 Multiple Exposures 9 Shoot subsequent exposures gt When On Func Ctrl is set the merged multiple exposure image will be displayed With Live View shooting the multiple exposure images merged so far will be displayed By pressing the lt INFO gt button you can display only the Live View image After you shoot the set number of exposures multiple exposure shooting will exit With continuous shooting after you finish shooting the set number of exposures while holding down the shutter button the shooting w
243. et time varies depending on the camera used 923 Trademarks Adobe is a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated Microsoft and Windows are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and or other countries Macintosh and Mac OS are trademarks of Apple Inc registered in the U S and other countries CompactFlash is a trademark of SanDisk Corporation SDXC logo is a trademark of SD 3C LLC HDMI HDMI logo and High Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC Google Google Maps and Google Earth are trademarks of Google Inc Map Utility uses Google Maps to display images and routes traveled on a map All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners About MPEG 4 Licensing This product is licensed under AT amp T patents for the MPEG 4 standard and may be used for encoding MPEG 4 compliant video and or decoding MPEG 4 compliant video that was encoded only 1 for a personal and non commercial purpose or 2 by a video provider licensed under the AT amp T patents to provide MPEG 4 compliant video No license is granted or implied for any other use for MPEG 4 standard Notice displayed in English as required 524 Use of Genuine Canon Accessories Is Recommended This product is designed to achieve excellent performance when used with genuine Canon accessories Canon shall not be li
244. ets may not be able to display the captured movies Using HDMI CEC TV Sets If the TV set connected to the camera with an HDMI cable is compatible with HDMI CEC you can use the TV set s remote control for playback operations An HDMI standard function enabling HDMI devices to control each other so that you can control them with one remote control unit Set Ctrl over HDMI to Enable Under the gt 3 tab select Ctrl over HDMI then press lt gt Select Enable then press lt gt Ctrl over HDMI Enable Connect the camera to a TV set Use an HDMI cable to connect the camera to the TV set gt The TV set s input will switch automatically to the HDMI port connected to the camera If it does not switch automatically use the TV set s remote control to select the HDMI IN port the cable is connected to 386 Viewing Images on a TV Set Press the camera s lt gt gt button gt An image will appear on the TV screen and you can use the TV set s remote control to play back images Select an image Point the remote control toward the TV set and press the button to select an image Still photo playback menu Press the remote control s Enter gt Bee amp Info button Movie playback menu gt The menu appears and you can i perform the playback operations ooo SD ee cee INFO shown on the left 4 Return Press the remote control s gt s89
245. etting When the function selection ends or if you press the shutter button halfway the camera will be ready to shoot Use this dial to select or set the white balance drive mode flash exposure compensation AF point etc Turn the lt gt dial only While looking at the viewfinder or LCD panel turn the lt 3 gt dial to change the setting Use this dial to set the exposure compensation amount the aperture setting for manual exposures etc 2 F The operations in 1 are possible even when the lt LOCK gt switch is set to the right Multi function lock p 59 57 Basic Operation AF Area Selection Lever The lt gt lever can be tilted to the right Use it to select the AF area selection mode Se After pressing the lt gt button tilt the lt gt Pressing the lt C gt button will make the AF area selection mode and AF point selectable for 6 sec 6 Then when you tilt the lt gt to the right within that time you can change the AF area selection mode F You can also press the lt E gt button and then press the lt M Fn gt button to select the AF area selection mode lt 3 Multi controller The lt gt consists of an eight direction key and a button at the center 58 Use it to select the AF point correct the white balance move the AF point or magnifying frame duri
246. ff automatically Cannot communicate with battery is displayed Do not use any battery pack other than a genuine Battery Pack LP E6N LP E6 Remove and install the battery again p 40 Ifthe battery contacts are dirty use a soft cloth to clean them The battery becomes exhausted quickly Use a fully charged battery pack p 38 The battery performance may have degraded See 3 Battery info to check the battery s recharge performance level p 470 If the battery performance is poor replace the battery pack with a new one The number of possible shots will decrease with any of the following operations e Pressing the shutter button halfway for a prolonged period e Activating the AF frequently without taking a picture e Using the lens s Image Stabilizer e Using the LCD monitor frequently e Continuing Live View shooting or movie shooting for a prolonged period e Using GPS e GPS is set to Enable even after the camera s power is turned off e The Eye Fi card s communication function is operating The camera turns off by itself Auto power off is in effect If you do not want auto power off to take effect set 2 Auto power off to Disable p 69 Even if 2 Auto power off is set to Disable the LCD monitor will still turn off after the camera is left idle for 30 min The camera s power does not turn off 496 Troubleshooting Guide SS ee Auto power off does not work
247. file size and compatibility with a larger range of playback systems Of the three methods available this method allows the longest total possible movie shooting time on a card of a given Capacity QD lf Fb GE 59 94 fps or AMN 50 00 fps is set certain functions will not be available e Movie Servo AF will not work e Contrast detection AF will be applied Focusing may take longer than usual e Still photos cannot be taken If you change the 3 Video system setting set the movie recording size again 332 M9 Setting the Movie Recording Size ee 24 00p Records the movie at a frame rate of 24 00 fps Applies to Full HD quality 24 00p If Enable is set the movie is recorded 1920x1080 24 00fps in SFHD or FHD IPB Standard IPB i If you have set Movie rec size and then set 24 00p to Enable set the Movie rec size again MEINE Playback of 24 00fps movies requires a compatible screen QD Cautions for 24 00p Enable amp 3 Video system cannot be set 3 HDMI frame rate p 350 cannot be set The movie will be output at 1080 24 00p via HDMI If you connect the camera to a TV set etc not compatible with the 1080 24 00p signal via HDMI the movie may not appear If you set it back to Disable 3 HDMI frame rate will be set to Auto Even if you set it back to Disable the movie recording size will not revert to the original Set the movie recording size again
248. flash ratio and the Wireless func gt flash exposure compensation h one Re AEC amount for C then shoot A B fire ratio mo ERA Select A B fire ratio and set the A B exp comp 3 2 1 9 1 2 3 i Grp C exp comp 3 2 1 0 1 2 3 flash ratio INFO Test flash firing Select Grp C exp comp and set the flash exposure compensation amount F If Firing group is set to 4 A B the slave units in firing group C will not fire If firing group C is pointed toward the main subject overexposure may result 280 Using Wireless Flash Fully Automatic Shooting with the Built in Flash and Multiple External Speedlites The built in flash can also be added to wireless flash shooting explained on pages 278 280 The basic settings are shown below By changing the Firing group setting you can shoot with various wireless flash setups of multiple Speedlites complemented with the built in flash Built in flash settings Flash mode E TTL II Wireless func aa a Channel 1 exp comp 73 2 1 0 1 2 3 Firing group E AELE INFO MESAER LaLa Built in flash settings gt Firing group 4 A B amp 4 A B C amp Basic settings Flash mode E TTL Il Wireless func 7 2 Channel Same as slave units Set Firing group Select one of the following All and amp a A B or A B C With A B set the A B flash ratio and sh
249. for excessive shaking such as on a rocking boat E The Image Stabilizer can operate with the lens s focus mode switch set to either lt AF gt or lt MF gt When using a tripod you can still shoot with the IS switch set to lt ON gt with no problem However to save battery power setting the IS switch to lt OFF gt is recommended The Image Stabilizer is effective even when the camera is mounted on a monopod With the EF S18 135mm f 3 5 5 6 IS STM or EF S15 85mm f 3 5 5 6 IS USM lens the Image Stabilizer mode may switch automatically to suit the shooting conditions 53 Basic Operation m Adjusting the Viewfinder Clarity Turn the dioptric adjustment knob Turn the knob left or right so that the AF points in the viewfinder look sharp Ifthe knob is difficult to turn remove the eyecup p 247 F If the camera s dioptric adjustment still cannot provide a sharp viewfinder image using Dioptric Adjustment Lens Eg sold separately is recommended Holding the Camera To obtain sharp images hold the camera still to minimize camera shake Horizontal shooting Vertical shooting 1 Wrap your right hand around the camera grip firmly 2 Hold the lens bottom with your left hand 3 Rest your hand s right index finger lightly on the shutter button 4 Press your arms and elbows lightly against the front of your body 5 To maintain a stable stance place one foot sli
250. from Canon p 478 When connecting the interface cable use the provided cable protector p 34 535 Downloading Images to a Computer Downloading Images with a Card Reader You can use a card reader to download images to your computer 1 Install the software p 539 2 Insert the card into the card reader Use Canon software to download the images Use Digital Photo Professional Use ImageBrowser EX For details refer to the Software Instruction Manual PDF on the DVD ROM p 532 Fl When downloading images from the camera to your computer with a card reader without using EOS software copy the DCIM folder on the card to your computer 536 About the Software EOS Solution Disk This disk contains various software for EOS cameras Q Note that the software provided with previous cameras might not support still photos and movie files shot with this camera Please use the software provided with this camera EOS Utility Communication Software for the Camera and Computer You can download images still images movies you have shot with the camera to your computer You can set the various settings of the camera from your computer You can shoot photos remotely by connecting the camera to your computer Digital Photo Professional Image Viewing and Editing Software You can view edit and print shot images on your computer at high speed
251. from being leaked Before using a new Eye Fi card p 475 the software on the card must be installed on your computer Then format the card with the camera The card capacity displayed on the card format screen may be smaller than the capacity indicated on the card This device incorporates exFAT technology licensed from Microsoft Before You Start ee umm Disabling the Beeper You can prevent the beeper from sounding when focus is achieved or during self timer operation 1 Select Beep Under the 481 tab select Beep E then press lt gt JESSE 2 Select Disable Select Disable then press lt gt gt The beeper will not sound SHOOT Ma Setting the Power off Time Auto Power Off To save battery power the camera turns off automatically after a set time of idle operation elapses The default setting is 1 min but this setting can be changed If you do not want the camera to turn off automatically set this to Disable After the power turns off you can turn on the camera again by pressing the shutter button or other buttons O ar x Select Auto power off Auto power off Under the 2 tab select Auto Aamin power off then press lt gt 4 min 8 min EER Set the desired time 30 min Select the desired setting then press Disable lt gt F Even if Disable is set the LCD monitor will turn off automatically after 30 min to save power The camera s power does n
252. fthe subject moves even more dramatically up down left or right setting AF pt auto switching to 2 may give better results p 115 112 EW Selecting Al Servo AF Characteristics Parameters Tracking sensitivity eae ae Sets the subject tracking sensitivity during Al Servo AF when an obstacle enters the AF points or when the AF points stray from the subject Case 1 Locked on Responsive INFO GIS SET KOM Default setting Suitable for moving subjects in general Locked on 2 Locked on 1 The camera will try to continue focusing on the subject even if an obstacle enters the AF points or if the subject strays from the AF points The 2 setting makes the camera track the target subject longer than with the 1 setting However if the camera focuses on a wrong subject it may take slightly longer to switch and focus on the target subject Responsive 2 Responsive 1 The camera can focus consecutively on subjects at different distances that are covered by the AF points Also effective when you want to always focus on the closest subject The 2 setting is more responsive when focusing on the next subject than 1 However the camera will be more prone to focus on the wrong subject Fl Tracking sensitivity is the feature named Al Servo tracking sensitivity in the EOS 1D Mark III IV EOS 1Ds Mark III and EOS 7D 113 EM Selecting Al Servo AF Characteristics Acceleration deceleration
253. g or movie shooting for a prolonged period the camera may become hot This is not a malfunction If there is a bright light source inside or outside the image area ghosting may occur LCD Panel and LCD Monitor Although the LCD monitor is manufactured with very high precision technology with over 99 99 effective pixels there may be a few dead pixels displaying only black or red etc among the remaining 0 01 or less pixels Dead pixels are not a malfunction They do not affect the images recorded Ifthe LCD monitor is left on for a prolonged period screen burn in may occur where you see remnants of what was displayed However this is only temporary and will disappear when the camera is left unused for a few days The LCD monitor display may seem slow in low temperatures or look black in high temperatures It will return to normal at room temperature Cards To protect the card and its recorded data note the following Do not drop bend or wet the card Do not subject it to excessive force physical shock or vibration Do not touch the card s electronic contacts with your fingers or anything metallic Do not affix any stickers etc on the card Do not store or use the card near anything that has a strong magnetic field such as a TV set speakers or magnet Also avoid places prone to having static electricity Do not leave the card in direct sunlight or near a heat source Store the card in a
254. g so that both the subject and background are properly exposed To prevent a slow shutter speed under 491 Flash control set Flash sync speed in Av mode to 1 250 1 60sec auto or 1 250 sec fixed p 263 The built in flash rises by itself Inthe lt GJ gt mode the built in flash will be raised automatically when necessary The built in flash fires continuous flashes and makes a sound In low light the built in flash fires continuous flashes as an AF assist beam p 89 to make it easier to focus It also makes a sound when it fires the flashes This is normal and not a malfunction The built in flash does not fire If you use the built in flash too often in too short a period of time the flash may stop firing for a while to protect the flash unit The external flash does not fire If you use a non Canon flash unit with Live View shooting set I 6 Silent LV shoot to Disable p 297 501 Troubleshooting Guide rr The external flash always fires at full output If you use a flash unit other than an EX series Speedlite the flash will always be fired at full output p 260 When the external Speedlite s Custom Function setting for Flash metering mode is set to TTL flash metering autoflash the flash will always be fired at full output p 271 Flash exposure compensation cannot be set for the external Speedlite If flash exposure compensation is already set with the external S
255. g O O O Silent continuous O O O shooting 10 sec self timer Remote control O O 0 2 sec self timer Remote O O O control Built in flash External Speedlite Sound recording OIO Oe O Time code OIO Oe O Quick Control OIO IoOolIoOolOIO O O 3 With Auto ISO you can set a fixed ISO speed 4 With Auto ISO you can set exposure compensation 5 Works only before you start shooting a movie 483 Menu Settings Viewfinder Shooting and Live View Shooting 3 Shooting 1 Red Page A MEM SAM Image quality 149 AL AL AM AM 4M ASM S2 5S3 Image review time Off 2 sec 4 sec 8 sec Hold RelgaSESNUNET Enable Disable 42 without card Peripheral illumination Enable Disable rens anerration Chromatic aberration Enable Disable 181 correction Distortion Disable Enable Flash firing E TTL II metering Flash sync speed in Av mode Built in flash settings External flash function settings External flash C Fn setting Clear settings F Shaded menu options are not displayed in the lt A3 gt mode What is displayed under 1 Image quality depends on the Record func p 146 setting under 1 Record func card folder sel If Rec separately is set set the image quality for each card With movie shooting certain menu items are not displayed Also the sa 6 tab will not appear 484 Menu Settings 3 Shooting 2 Red Page Exp
256. g quality The aspect ratio is vea ERPE 16 9 EHD 1280x720 High Definition HD recording quality The aspect ratio is 16 9 EVGA 640x480 Standard definition recording quality The aspect ratio is 4 3 Frame Rate fps frames per second 29 97 fps 59 94 fps For areas where the TV format is NTSC North America Japan South Korea Mexico etc 25 00 fps Mi 50 00 fps For areas where the TV format is PAL Europe Russia China Australia etc 23 98 fps 24 00 fps Mainly for motion pictures Regarding Wi see page 333 GD Movies recorded at FHD 59 94fps or 50 00fps may not be played back properly on other devices due to the heavy data processing load during playback g The frame rate displayed on the movie recording size screen depends on whether 3 Video system is set to For NTSC or For PAL 331 M9 Setting the Movie Recording Size SSS See Compression Method ALL I For editing I only Compresses one frame at a time for recording Although the file size is larger than with IPB Standard and IPB Light the movie is more suited for editing IPB Standard Compresses multiple frames at a time efficiently for recording Since the file size is smaller than with ALL For editing you can shoot longer with the same card IPB IPB Light Selectable when the movie recording format is set to MP4 The movie is recorded at bit rate lower than with IPB Standard resulting in a smaller
257. geared to obtain higher precision focusing with f 2 8 or larger maximum aperture lenses A diagonal cross pattern makes it easier to focus on subjects difficult for AF It is provided at the center AF point The focusing sensor is geared for f 5 6 or larger maximum aperture lenses Since it has a horizontal pattern it can detect vertical lines It covers all 65 AF points The center AF point and the adjacent AF points at the top and bottom are compatible with f 8 or larger maximum aperture lenses The focusing sensor is geared for f 5 6 or larger maximum aperture lenses Since it has a vertical pattern it can detect horizontal lines It covers all 65 AF points The center AF point and the adjacent AF points on the left and on the right are compatible with f 8 or larger maximum aperture lenses Lenses and Usable AF Points 4p Although the camera has 65 AF points the number of usable AF points and focusing patterns will differ depending on the lens The lenses are thereby classified into seven groups from A to G When using a lens in Groups E to G fewer AF points will be usable See which group each lens belongs to on pages 104 107 Check which group the lens in use belongs to F When you press the lt E gt button the AF points indicated by the O mark will blink The W E AF points will stay lit Regarding lighting up or blinking of the AF points see page 94 Regarding new lenses marketed after the sales s
258. ger s power plug do not touch the prongs for approx 10 sec If the battery s remaining capacity p 470 is 94 or higher the battery will not be recharged The charger cannot charge any battery other than Battery Pack LP E6N LP E6 39 Installing and Removing the Battery Load a fully charged Battery Pack LP E6N or LP E6 into the camera The camera s viewfinder becomes bright when a battery is installed and darkens when the battery is removed Installing the Battery Open the cover Slide the lever as shown by the arrows and open the cover 2 Insert the battery Insert the end with the battery contacts Insert the battery until it locks in place Close the cover Press the cover until it snaps shut D Only Battery Pack LP E6N LP E6 can be used Removing the Battery Open the cover and remove the battery Press the battery lock lever as shown by the arrow and remove the battery To prevent short circuiting of the battery contacts be sure to attach the provided protective cover p 38 to the battery 40 Installing and Removing the Card m The camera can use a CF card and an SD card Images can be recorded when at least one card is installed in the camera If both types of card are inserted you can select which card to record images to or simultaneously record images on both cards p 146 148 Q If you use an SD card be sure the
259. ghting correction AWB e E RAW cand Picture Style ONE SHOT rAr gt Bh AL AF operation PAL anne mage recording quality Quick Control icon Possible shots Battery check Maximum burst Number of White balance remaining multiple exposures Eye Fi card transmission status Card indicator Multiple exposures HDR Metering mode Multi Shot Noise Reduction GPS acquisition status Logging function Card selection icon Drive mode Flash ready FE lock High speed sync Pressing the lt Q gt button enables Quick Control of the shooting settings p 61 When you press the lt WB gt lt DRIVE AF gt lt amp 4 ISO gt or lt C gt button the setting screen appears and you can use lt gt lt 63 gt lt M Fn gt or lt gt to set it ISO speed A J AF point selection AUTO 100 125 160 200 250 320 400 500 640 800 1000 1250 1600 2000 2500 3200 4000 5000 6400 8000 10000 12800 16000 Metering mode AF operation Auto selection 65 pt AF GB o i i OO Og Evaluative metering Al Focus AF o a C ONESHOT AIFOCUS AISERVO White balance E Drive mode Flash exposure comp TRE ANAN Sen BESE Auto Single shooting AWE A K Oey ao Ss amp Fl If you turn off the power while the Shooting function settings or Electronic level screen is displayed the same screen will be displayed when you turn on the power again To cancel this press the lt INFO gt button to exit from
260. ghtly ahead of the other 6 Press the camera against your face and look through the viewfinder Fl To shoot while looking at the LCD monitor see page 285 54 Basic Operation Shutter Button The shutter button has two steps You can press the shutter button halfway Then you can further press the shutter button completely Pressing Halfway E This activates autofocusing and the automatic exposure system that sets the shutter speed and aperture The exposure setting shutter speed and aperture is displayed in the viewfinder and on the LCD panel for 4 sec metering timer 4 Pressing Completely This releases the shutter and takes the picture Preventing Camera Shake Hand held camera movement during the moment of exposure is called camera shake It can cause blurred pictures To prevent camera shake note the following e Hold and steady the camera as shown on the preceding page e Press the shutter button halfway to autofocus then slowly press the shutter button completely E Inthe lt P gt lt Tv gt lt Av gt lt M gt lt B gt shooting modes pressing the lt AF ON gt button will execute the same operation as pressing the shutter button halfway Ifyou press the shutter button completely without pressing it halfway first or if you press the shutter button halfway and then press it completely immediately the camera will take a moment before it takes the picture
261. gs cceceeeeeeeeeeeesaeeseeeeeeeeesseeeeeeeees 329 Setting the Movie Recording Size cceeceeeeesneeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeees 330 Setting the Sound Recording ccceeeeeceeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeneseeees 336 Silent COMM secnctianiesiesdaniennessnnteusaiusaacwnitaasredsenshcieneedinniavanseeedeuniicas 338 Setting the Time Code ccccccccccssssesseeeceeceeaeaseeseeeeeeseeaesseeeees 339 Menu Function SettingS ccccccccscccccsessssseeeeeeeesseeeesseeeeeseesaeees 342 Image Playback 353 Image Playback siiicisncscceinviizanetivaiersiiniesersaniensrdiraiiinedaninanieiass 354 INFO Shooting Information Display ccccccccsscccesseeeeenseeeens 356 gt Searching for Images Quickly ccccccceeeeeeeteeeeeeeenteeeeees 361 EJ Display Multiple Images on One Screen Index Display 361 Jump through Images Jump Display ccccceeeeeeeeee ee 362 Q Magnifying IMages cccccccceccecesseeeeecesseceeeceseseeeeeesesteeeeess 364 1 Comparing Images Two Image Display cccccseeeeeee 366 Rotating the IMage ccccccscccsssscecesseeccsseeeecsseeeeesseeeeeseeeens 367 on Protecting IMAQGES cc ccccccecssccccesssceeeccesseeeececestseeeeenssseeeees 368 Setting Ratings seducstete nada dene hahnnese vetdannedelatitedensadtoneetvecesneeienddiieiasa 371 Q Quick Control for Playback cccccccccesssseeecessssseeeesesseeeeees 374 PEE Enjoyi
262. h the standard Precision Matte Eh A focusing screen It is ideal for fast lenses having a maximum aperture of f 2 8 or larger Geared for manual focusing However if the lens maximum aperture is smaller than f 2 8 the viewfinder will look darker than with the Eh A focusing screen Fl The focusing screen setting will not be cleared even if you select 9 5 Clear all Custom Func C Fn To change the focusing screen refer to the focusing screen s instruction manual If the focusing screen does not come down with the holder tilt the camera forward 440 TEM Setting Custom Functions E E Warnings in viewfinder When any of the following functions are set the lt gt icon can be displayed in the viewfinder and on the LCD panel p 26 27 Select the function for which you want the warning icon to appear and press lt gt to append a lt v gt Then select OK to register the setting When monochrome is set If the Picture Style is set to Monochrome p 162 the warning icon will appear When WB is corrected If white balance correction p 172 is set the warning icon will appear When one touch image quality is set If you change the image recording quality with the one touch image quality function p 456 the warning icon will appear When is set lf 233 High ISO speed NR is set to Multi Shot Noise Reduction p 176 the warning icon will appear When spot metering is set If the metering mode is set to
263. hat orientation mk Separate AF pts Pt only The AF point can be set separately for each camera orientation 1 Horizontal 2 Vertical with the camera grip at the top 3 Vertical with the camera grip at the bottom While using the same AF area selection mode the AF point will switch automatically for the respective camera orientation This works with Manual select Spot AF Manual selection 1 pt AF Expand AF areazsa and Expand AF area Surround When you manually select the AF point for each of the three camera orientations it will be recorded for the respective orientation During shooting the manually selected AF point will switch to match the respective camera orientation Even if you change the AF area selection mode to Manual select Spot AF Manual selection 1 pt AF Expand AF area as or Expand AF area Surround the AF point set for the respective orientation will be retained If you change the AF area selection mode to Zone AF manual selection of zone or Large Zone AF manual selection of zone the zone will switch to match the respective camera orientation YD If you clear the camera settings to their defaults p 70 the setting will be Same for both vert horiz Also your settings for the three camera orientations 1 2 and 3 will be cleared and all three will revert to Single point AF Manual selection with the center AF point selected If you set this and later attach a lens from a different AF group p 100
264. he lt LOCK gt switch is set and you try to use one of the locked camera controls lt L gt will be displayed in the viewfinder and on the LCD panel Also LOCK will be displayed in the shooting settings display p 60 If you lock the lt gt dial will be locked by default Even if the lt gt dial is appended with a V checkmark you can still use the touch pad lt gt Custom Controls You can assign often used functions to camera buttons or dials according to your preferences For details see page 445 442 mM Setting Custom Functions ee C Fn4 Others Add cropping information If you set cropping information vertical lines for the aspect ratio you have set will appear on the Live View image You can then compose the shot as if you were shooting with a medium or large format camera 6x6 cm 4x5 inch etc When you take a picture the aspect ratio information for cropping the image with the EOS software will be appended to the image The image is recorded to the card without being cropped After the image is transferred to a computer you can use Digital Photo Professional EOS software p 537 to easily crop the image to the aspect ratio that was set OFF Off 6 7 Aspect ratio 6 7 6 6 Aspect ratio 6 6 5 6 Aspect ratio 10 12 3 4 Aspect ratio 3 4 5 7 Aspect ratio 5 7 4 5 Aspect ratio 4 5 ap If t 85 Aspect ratio is set to any setting other than 3 2 the cropping E informat
265. he battery pack information will be deleted and the screen in E step 1 will reappear 473 Using a Household Power Outlet m With AC Adapter Kit ACK E6 sold separately you can connect the camera to a household power outlet and do not have to worry about the remaining battery level Connect the DC Coupler s plug Connect the DC Coupler s plug to the AC Adapter s socket Connect the power cord Connect the power cord as shown in the illustration After using the camera unplug the power plug from the power outlet Place the cord in the groove Insert the DC Coupler s cord carefully without damaging the cord Insert the DC Coupler Open the battery compartment cover and open the DC Coupler cord hole cover Insert the DC Coupler securely until it locks and put the cord through the hole Close the cover 4 Do not connect or disconnect the power cord or DC Coupler while the camera s power switch is set to lt ON gt 474 Q Using Eye Fi Cards m With a commercially available Eye Fi card already set up you can automatically transfer captured images to a computer or upload them to an online service via a wireless LAN The image transfer is a function of the Eye Fi card For instructions on how to set up and use the Eye Fi card or to troubleshoot any image transfer problems refer to the Eye Fi card s instruction manual or contact th
266. he image with a specific rating still photos only With Windows 8 1 Windows 8 Windows 7 or Windows Vista you can see each file s rating as part of the file information display or in the provided image viewer still photos only 373 Q Quick Control for Playback m During playback you can press the lt Q gt button to set the following On Protect images Rotate image X Rating RW RAW image processing RAW images only Exi Resize JPEG image only 4 Highlight alert 3 AF point display and m Image jump w lt 3 For movies only the functions in bold above can be set 1 Press the lt Q gt button During image playback press the lt Q gt button gt The Quick Control options will Protect images i appear Disable BEG 2 Select an item and set it i Tilt ae up or down to select a a a ce function w Si i gt The setting of the selected function is _ mt displayed at the bottom or e g Turn the lt 3 gt dial to set it For RAW image processing and Resize press lt gt and set the function For details see page 398 for RAW image processing and page 403 for Resize To cancel press the lt MENU gt button 3 Exit the setting Press the lt Q gt button to exit the Quick Control screen 374 Q Quick Control for Playback ee Q To rotate an image set Y 1 Auto rotate to On 6 1 If Y 1 Auto rotate is set to On E or
267. he maximum aperture f number changes to a higher number However by changing the ISO speed or shutter speed Tv automatically you can obtain the same exposure that would be obtained before you did 1 2 or 3 OFF Disable Automatic changes in settings to maintain the specified exposure will not be applied The ISO speed shutter speed and aperture already set will be used for shooting If you do 1 2 or 3 and the maximum aperture f number increases adjust the ISO speed and shutter speed before you shoot ISO ISO speed If you do 1 2 or 3 the ISO speed will automatically increase to compensate for the amount that the maximum aperture f number increases by The same exposure that would be obtained before you did 1 2 or 3 is thereby obtained Tv Shutter speed If you do 1 2 or 3 a slower shutter speed will automatically be set to compensate for the amount that the maximum aperture f number increases by The same exposure that would be obtained before you did 1 2 or 3 is thereby obtained amp This function does not work with macro lenses whose actual aperture f number changes when the magnification changes This function does not work with movies If Shutter speed is set and the exposure cannot be maintained within the range set with 2 Set shutter speed range the shutter speed will not change automatically If ISO speed is set and the exposure cannot be maintained within the range set with ISO speed r
268. he maximum burst for continuous AWB al shooting is 99 or higher 99 will be displayed m ee Ke avory Pe ONESHOT o J 69 514 QD The maximum burst is displayed even when a card is not inserted in the camera Make sure that a card is inserted before taking a picture E If the maximum burst is displayed as 99 it indicates that you can shoot 99 or more shots continuously If the maximum burst decreases to 98 or lower and the internal buffer memory becomes full buSY will be displayed in the viewfinder and on the LCD panel Shooting will then be disabled temporarily If you stop continuous shooting the maximum burst will increase After all the captured images are written to the card you can resume continuous shooting and shoot up to the maximum burst listed on page 151 153 ISO Setting the ISO Speed me Set the ISO speed image sensor s sensitivity to light to suit the ambient light level With the lt Aj gt mode selected the ISO speed will be set automatically p 156 Regarding the ISO speed during movie shooting see pages 317 and 321 1 Press the lt amp amp 4 ISO gt button 66 2 Set the ISO speed While looking at the LCD panel or in the viewfinder turn the lt 7 lt gt dial ISO speed can be set within ISO 100 ISO 16000 in 1 3 stop increments A indicates Auto ISO The ISO speed will be set automatically p 156 ISO Speed Guide
269. he name of the camera control and a S e the assignable functions will be o u ENS ARO 0 Default set displayed Shutter butt half press 3 Assign a function Select the function to assign Select a function then press lt GE gt Metering start If the NA icon appears on the x bottom left you can press the lt INFO gt button and set other related options 4 Exit the setting When you press lt gt to exit the setting the screen in step 2 will reappear Press the lt MENU gt button to exit E With the screen in step 2 displayed you can press the lt gt button to revert the Custom Control settings to their defaults Note that the 4 3 Custom Controls settings will not be canceled even if you select 4 5 Clear all Custom Func C Fn 445 3 Custom Controls Assignable Functions to Camera Controls AF Function Metering and AF start Page 450 AF ON On At OFF AF stop AF Switch to registered AF function ONESHOT AI SERVO ONE SHOT Al SERVO Oo Hp AF Switch to registered AF point 452 o_o SEL HP Selected AF point Center Registered AF point AF point direct selection Direct AF point selection Vertical Direct AF area selection Metering start AE lock AE lock while button pressed AE lock hold X AF OFF AE lock AF stop FEL FE lock 453 454
270. he power switch to lt OFF gt e Removing or inserting the battery The surface of the image sensor is extremely delicate Clean the sensor with care Use a plain blower without any brush attached A brush can scratch the sensor Do not insert the blower tip inside the camera beyond the lens mount If the power is turned off the shutter will close and the shutter curtains or reflex mirror may get damaged Never use pressurized air or gas to clean the sensor The blowing force can damage the sensor or the spray gas can freeze on the sensor and scratch it If the battery level becomes low while you clean the sensor the beeper will sound as a warning Stop cleaning the sensor Ifasmudge that cannot be removed with a blower remains having the sensor cleaned by a Canon Service Center is recommended 410 Printing Images and Transferring Images to a Computer Printing p 414 You can connect the camera directly to a printer and print out the images on the card The camera is compliant with A PictBridge which is the standard for direct printing Digital Print Order Format DPOF p 421 DPOF Digital Print Order Format enables you to print images recorded on the card according to your printing instructions such as the image selection quantity to print etc You can print multiple images in one batch or give the print order to a photofinisher Transferring Images to a Computer p 425 You
271. hen you let go of the button Movie Servo AF will resume When Movie Servo AF is paused if you return to movie shooting after pressing the lt MENU gt or lt L gt gt button changing the AF method or performing some other operation Movie Servo AF will resume automatically When Disable is set Press the shutter button halfway or press the lt AF ON gt button to focus AF method The AF methods are the same as described on pages 299 307 You can select X Tracking FlexiZone Multi or FlexiZone Single ie WD Cautions When Movie Servo AF is Set to Enable Shooting Conditions that Make Focusing Difficult e A fast moving subject approaching or moving away from the camera e A subject moving at a close distance in front of the camera e Also see Shooting Conditions that Make Focusing Difficult on page 306 Movie Servo AF will pause during zooming or magnified view During movie shooting if a subject approaches or moves away or if the camera is moved vertically or horizontally panning the recorded movie image may momentarily expand or contract change in image magnification 343 t Menu Function Settings ee Grid display With 3x3 or 6x4 you can display grid lines to help you level the camera vertically or horizontally Also with 3x3 diag the grid is displayed together with diagonal lines to help you compose with better balance by aligning the intersections over
272. hen you use the built in flash detach any lens hood and keep at least 1 meter 3 3 feet away from the subject Ifa lens hood is attached or if the subject is too close the built in flash will be obstructed and the bottom of the picture may look dark Do not perform flash photography when the built in flash is held down with your finger or not fully raised for some other reason Fil If you use a super telephoto lens or large aperture lens and the bottom of the picture looks dark using an external Speedlite sold separately p 259 is recommended 255 4 Using the Built in Flash SSS u Red eye Reduction Using the red eye reduction lamp when taking a flash picture can reduce red eye Select Red eye reduc Ts a Under the 4 tab the 1022 tab in AD lt Aj gt select Red eye reduc then press lt gt Select Enable For flash photography when you press the shutter button halfway the red eye reduction lamp will be emitted Fl The red eye reduction feature is most effective when the subject looks at the red eye reduction lamp the room is well lit and you are close to the subject When you press the shutter button halfway the scale display on the bottom of the viewfinder will shrink and turn off For best results take the picture after this scale display turns off The effectiveness of red eye reduction varies depending on the subject 256 mp qi 4 Using the Buil
273. his Auto setting is effective in most cases Enable Noise reduction is performed for all exposures of 1 sec or longer The Enable setting may reduce noise that cannot be detected with the Auto setting 3 Take the picture The image will be recorded with noise reduction applied 178 UEM Setting Noise Reduction QW With Auto and Enable the noise reduction process after the picture is taken may take the same amount of time as that for the exposure During noise reduction shooting is still possible as long as the maximum burst indicator in the viewfinder shows 1 or higher Images taken at ISO 1600 or higher may look grainier with the Enable setting than with the Disable or Auto setting With Enable if a long exposure is shot with the Live View image displayed BUSY will be displayed during the noise reduction process The Live View display will not appear until the noise reduction is completed You cannot take another picture 179 MM Highlight Tone Priority You can reduce overexposed highlight areas 1 Select Highlight tone priority Picture Style Standard Under the 63 tab select Long lexpanciseieduetion OFF Highlight tone priority then press High ISO speed NR all Highlight tone priority lt gt DY OK 3 am BY 1 1 DY ts Multiple exposure Disable HDR Mode Disable HDR Highlight tone priority Select Enable Highlight details ar
274. hooting the camera focuses on the subject continuously The default setting is Enable When Enable is set The camera focuses on the subject continuously even when you are not pressing the shutter button halfway Since this drives the lens continuously it will consume battery power and shorten the total possible movie shooting time p 325 With certain lenses the lens operation noise during focusing may be recorded If this happens use an external microphone commercially available to reduce lens operation noise in the movie Also using the EF S18 135mm f 3 5 5 6 IS STM lens will reduce lens operation noise If you want to set the lens s focus mode switch to lt MF gt during Movie Servo AF first set the Live View shooting Movie shooting switch to lt gt QD If FFHD EA 59 94 fps or 50 00 fps is set Movie Servo AF will not work Also since contrast detection is used for AF control it may take longer to focus 342 M9 Menu Function Settings CEEE SA If you want to keep the focus at a specific point or you do not want the lens operation noise to be recorded you can temporarily stop Movie Servo AF as follows When you stop Movie Servo AF the AF point will turn gray When you perform the same steps below Movie Servo AF will resume e Press the lt 4 gt button e Under 4 3 Custom controls if a button is assigned to AF stop you can pause the Movie Servo AF while holding down that button W
275. hooting is possible with radio or optical transmission For details on wireless flash refer to the instruction manual of a Speedlite compatible with the wireless flash shooting With a macro flash MR 14EX II etc compatible with external flash function settings you can set the flash ratio between flash tubes or flash heads A and B or use wireless flash with slave units For details on flash ratio control refer to the macro flash s instruction manual Flash zoom Flash coverage Flash zoom 268 With Speedlites having a zooming flash head you can set the flash coverage Normally set this to AUTO so that the camera will automatically set the flash coverage to match the lens focal length TEM Setting the Flash Shutter synchronization Shutter synchronization Normally set this to First curtain synchronization so that the flash fires First curtain synchronization immediately after the exposure starts gt p If Second curtain synchronization is set the flash will fire right before the shutter closes When this is combined with a slow shutter speed you can create a trail of light such as from car headlights at night with a more natural feel With second curtain synchronization two flashes will be fired once when you press the shutter button completely and once immediately before the exposure ends If High speed synchronization is set the flash can be used at all shutter speeds This i
276. hsieeimetunwiasdunsdeuaiaduastadcleietbnistaviwarccsuvhediuny 478 Function Availability Table According to Shooting Mode 480 Menu Settings soccccccccscnssicsescccasstctendeesecied vicssucseordeaesaabsisaeenceananssens 484 Troubleshooting Guide ccccccecseeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeaeeeeeeeeees 495 Error CodeS iiiealcdeeatceceniiaveluccunlidnenaninteloiceabontiacsstectonindedincchactohoats 510 Specifications siinctecenutwvsavainieesnuiiuaiacivuienievaactanderrindivelearnonivenuseveds 511 Handling Precautions EF S18 135mm f 3 5 5 6 IS STM 523 Safety Warnings ccccccccsseeeeeeeeeeceeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeeeeasaaesees 526 16 Viewing the DVD ROM Instruction Manuals Downloading Images to Your Computer 531 Viewing the EOS Camera Instruction Manuals Disk DVD ROM 532 Downloading Images to a Computer cceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 535 About the Software cccccccccccccccessecceeeeeseeeeeceeeeeeseeeaeeeeeeaeeeeeees 537 Installing the Software cccccssseseeeeeceeceeeeseeeeeeeeeseeeeesseeeeeeeeeas 539 NUEK aat E E 542 16 Index to Features m Power Charging the battery Battery check Battery information check Household power outlet Auto power off Card Formatting Recording function Select card Release shutter without card Lens Attaching Zoom Hood Image Stabilizer Basic Settings Language
277. ic focusing ring you can set whether to use electronic manual focusing EF50mm f 1 0L USM EF300mm f 2 8L USM EF600mm f 4L USM EF85mm f 1 2L USM EF400mm f 2 8L USM EF1200mm f 5 6L USM EF85mm f 1 2L II USM EF400mm f 2 8L II USM EF28 80mm f 2 8 4L USM EF200mm f 1 8L USM EF500mm f 4 5L USM EF40mm f 2 8 STM EF S18 55mm f 3 5 5 6 IS STM EF S55 250mm f 4 5 6 IS STM EF S10 18mm f 4 5 6 3 IS STM EF S18 135mm f 3 5 5 6 IS STM Lens electronic MF Enable after One Shot AF After AF operates if you keep pressing the shutter button halfway you can adjust the focus manually Disable after One Shot AF After AF operates manual focusing adjustment is disabled Disable after One Shot AF Opi Disable in AF mode OFF OFF Disable in AF mode When the lens s focus mode switch is set to lt AF gt manual focusing is disabled 119 EM Customizing AF Functions SSS SS E AF assist beam firing Enables or disables the AF assist beam from the built in flash or EOS dedicated external Speedlite AF assist beam firing ON Enable The AF assist beam is emitted when Disable Enable external flash only necessary IR AF assist beam only OFF Disable The AF assist beam is not emitted Prevents the AF assist beam from disturbing others INFO aG 4 Enable external flash only The AF assist beam will be emitted when necessary only if an external Speedlite is used The camera s b
278. ic selection AF Zone AF Large Zone AF __ AF e Single point Spot AF Single point AF and AF point expansion SEL Center SEL AF Off center With AF5 Manual AF pt selec pattern you can set either Stops at AF area edges or Continuous p 129 93 Selecting the AF Area and AF Point aE AF Point Display Indications Pressing the lt C gt button lights up the AF points that are cross type AF points for high precision autofocusing The blinking AF points are horizontal line or vertical line sensitive For details see pages 99 103 Registering the AF point You can register a frequently used AF point to the camera When you use the button or lever set with the 4 3 Custom Controls p 445 menu s detailed settings screens for Metering and AF start Switch to registered AF point Selected AFpt Cent Reg AF pt Direct AF point selection or Register recall shooting func you can instantly switch from the current AF point to the registered AF point For details on registering the AF point see page 450 94 AF Area Selection Modes m El Single point Spot AF Manual selection For pinpoint focusing over a narrower area than p Tesa 322 With single point AF manual selection Select one o eegee ouaa AF point lt E gt to focus am mae Effective for pinpoint focusing or focusing overlapping subjects such as an animal in a cage Since Single point Spot AF manual selection covers a very small area
279. ided 25 Possible Single image display without shooting information Single image display with simple information Single image display Shooting information displayed Detailed information Lens histogram White balance Picture Style Color space noise reduction Lens aberration correction GPS Index display 4 9 36 100 images Two image display Overexposed highlights blink Provided 3 types Approx 1 5x 10x initial magnification and position settable Single image Jump by 10 or 100 images By shooting date By folder By movies By stills By protected images By rating Provided Provided Enabled LCD monitor HDMI Built in speaker All images By date By folder By movies By stills By protected images By rating Possible Possible e Post Processing of Images In camera RAW image Brightness correction White balance Picture Style Auto processing Resize 518 Lighting Optimizer High ISO speed noise reduction JPEG image recording quality Color space Peripheral illumination correction Distortion correction Chromatic aberration correction Provided Specifications e Direct Printing Compatible printers PictBridge compatible printers Printable images JPEG and RAW images Print ordering DPOF Version 1 1 compliant e Image Transfer Transferrable files Still photos JPEG RAW RAW JPEG images Movies e GPS Function Compatible satellites GPS satellites USA GLONASS satellites Russi
280. ie clip is 29 min 59 sec If the movie shooting time reaches 29 min 59 sec the movie shooting will stop automatically You can start shooting a movie again by pressing the lt gt button A new movie file starts being recorded QD When shooting movies if the file size exceeds 4 GB buSY will be displayed on the LCD panel for a while Still photo shooting is not possible while buSY is displayed on the screen 335 M Setting the Sound Recording lt IEEE You can shoot movies while recording sound ondea with the built in monaural microphone or an external stereo microphone commercially available You can also freely adjust the sound recording level Sound recording settings are under 6 4 Sound recording the 2 tab in lt gt Wind filter Attenuator Sound Recording Sound Recording Level Auto The sound recording level is adjusted automatically Auto level control will operate automatically in response to the sound level Manual For advanced users You can adjust the sound recording level to one of 64 levels Select Rec level and look at the level meter while turning the lt 3 gt dial to adjust the sound recording level While looking at the peak hold indicator 3 sec adjust so that the level meter sometimes lights up the 12 12 dB mark on the right for the loudest sounds If it exceeds 0 the sound will be distorted Disable Sound will not be recorded Also no sou
281. ie shooting start stop Disable Controls external device s recording start stop from external recording device o To check whether your external recording device is compatible with the Time code or Rec command consult the manufacturer Drop Frame If the frame rate setting is 29 97 fps or 59 94 fps the time K code s frame count causes a discrepancy between the actual time and time code This discrepancy can be corrected automatically This correction function is called drop frame Enable The discrepancy is corrected automatically by skipping time code numbers DF Drop frame Disable The discrepancy is not corrected NDF Non drop frame The time code will be displayed as follows Enable DF 00 00 00 Playback time 00 00 00 00 Disable NDF 00 00 00 Playback time 00 00 00 00 E If the frame rate is J 23 98 fps WAN 24 00 fps N 25 00 fps or Gi 50 00 fps drop frame is not used If H A is set or if f 3 Video system is set to For PAL Drop frame will not be displayed 341 M Menu Function Settings m a4 O A 0 When the Live View shooting Movie a he Enabte shooting switch is set to lt gt the AF method E Tracking movie shooting menu options will appear arideispiay ot under the 434 and 65 tabs the Movie rec quality ETa 2500P Masa MOV Sound recording Auto 62 Le 3 tabs in lt E gt SHOOT4 Movie Movie Servo AF During movie s
282. iewing on a TV set 376 385 Index display succiccecorsssssceeernes ceavenas 361 INFO button 60 288 323 354 468 Initial AF POI isscsscdeccmweniatouiaers 127 Interval timer ccccceececeeeeeee esses 250 IPB Light Standard 008 332 ISO speed 154 317 321 Automatic setting Auto 156 Automatic setting range 158 ISO expansion ceeeee 157 Manual setting range 157 Minimum shutter speed 159 Setting increments 0 434 IR AF esetexsbaqcadeecciuasiteecseveueuacdeseate 128 J JPEG oea 149 151 Jump display ccccceeeeeeeeeees 362 L Language ccceeeeeceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeenees 49 Large image recording quality 151 Large Zone AF cccssseeeeees 91 97 LCD monitor icceieetcs covceaiernpcttvesenticdeass 21 Brightness adjustment 394 Electronic level ccccssssccees 75 Image playback sseee 353 Menu display 0000 64 484 Shooting function settings 60 469 LCD panel ssscreertcscovucsmeneetsetissieasids 25 LenS ae EEE N 30 50 Chromatic aberration COTTECtIOn sivvccsviweniadsadaudauesannnide 182 Distortion correction 182 Image Stabilizer 0 00 53 Instruction manual CD ROM LOCK rel AS ccceecceeeeeeeeeeeees 51 Peripheral illumination COMMS CHOM scsscarriiceeicicoriccsaateantns 181 Lens group sss
283. ignal not acquired yet 3 2601 Qee1e 2053 When you shoot while RB is displayed the image will be geotagged AWB Som ab ONE SHOT O am G4 201 Acquiring GPS Signals QD If Enable is selected lt gt will still be displayed on the LCD panel even when you turn the camera s power switch to lt OFF gt Also since the camera will receive GPS signals at regular intervals the battery will drain quickly and the number of possible shots will decrease If you will not use the camera for a prolonged period set to Disable The GPS antenna is built in around the hot shoe Although the GPS signal can be acquired while an external Speedlite is attached to the hot shoe the acquisition sensitivity will slightly decrease GPS Receiver GP E2 sold separately cannot be used Poor GPS Coverage Under the following conditions the GPS satellite signal will not be properly acquired As a result the geotag information may not be recorded or inaccurate geotag information may be recorded Indoors underground in tunnels or forests between buildings or in valleys Near high voltage power lines or mobile phones operating on the 1 5 GHz band The camera is left inside a bag etc When traveling a long distance When traveling through different environments Since GPS satellites move as time passes satellite movement can interfere with geotagging and cause missing or inaccurate geotag information even in co
284. ill be recorded as separate files on the card Under 1 Record func card folder sel if Record func p 146 is set to Standard or Auto switch card the movies and still photos will be recorded to the same card If Rec separately or Rec to multiple is set the movies will be recorded to the card set for Playback p 148 The still photos will be recorded at the image recording quality set for the respective card Functions particular to still photo shooting are shown below Other functions will be the same as for movie shooting As set in 1 Image quality When the movie recording size is 1920x1080 or 1280x720 the aspect ratio will be 16 9 When the size is 640x480 the aspect ratio will be 4 3 e lt gt ISO 100 ISO 6400 ISO Speed lt P gt lt Tv gt lt Av gt and lt B gt ISO 100 ISO 16000 e lt M gt See ISO Speed in the lt M gt mode on page 321 lt G gt lt P gt and lt B gt Automatically set shutter speed and aperture lt Tv gt Manually set shutter speed and automatically set aperture lt Av gt Manually set aperture and automatically set shutter speed lt M gt Manually set shutter speed and aperture If highlight tone priority is set the ISO speed range will start from ISO 200 327 Shooting Movies QD If FHD 59 94 fps or 50 00 fps is set or if B5 button function is set to EAF or e you cannot take still
285. ill stop 4 The image recording quality ISO speed Picture Style high ISO speed noise reduction and color space etc set for the first single exposure will also be set for the subsequent exposures 5 Aspect ratio will be fixed at 3 2 During multiple exposure shooting Disable will be applied for 9 1 Lens aberration correction 2 Auto Lighting Optimizer and 6 3 Highlight tone priority If t 23 Picture Style is set to Auto Standard will be applied for shooting If On Func Ctrl and Additive are both set the image displayed during shooting may look noisy However when you finish shooting the set number of exposures noise reduction will be applied and the final multiple exposure image will be less noisy If you perform Live View shooting while On ContShtng is set the Live View function will stop automatically after the first shot is taken From the second shot onward shoot while looking through the viewfinder g When On Func Ctrl is set you can press the lt gt gt button to view the multiple exposures taken so far or delete the last single exposure p 244 241 Multiple Exposures QD With multiple exposures the more exposures there are the more noticeable the noise irregular colors and banding will be Also as noise increases with higher ISO speeds shooting at low ISO speeds is recommended If Additive is set the image processing after taking the multi
286. image Set up Print MENU Aa 1 Prepare to print See page 412 Follow the Connecting the Camera to a Printer procedure up to step 5 2 Under the L gt 1 tab select Print order 3 Select Print Print will be displayed only if the camera is connected to a printer and printing is possible 4 Set the Paper settings p 414 Set the printing effects p 416 if necessary D Select OK ap Before printing be sure to set the paper size Certain printers cannot imprint the file number If Bordered is set certain printers may imprint the date on the border Depending on the printer the date may appear faint if it is imprinted ona bright background or on the border Under Adjust levels Manual cannot be selected Fl If you stopped the printing and want to resume printing the remaining images select Resume Note that printing will not resume if any of the following are the case e You changed the print order or deleted any of the print ordered images before resuming the printing e When index is set you changed the paper setting before resuming the printing e The card s remaining capacity was low when you paused the printing Ifa problem occurs during printing see page 420 424 Transferring Images to a Computer lt You can connect the camera to a computer and operate the camera to transfer images on the card to the computer This is called direct image tran
287. image periphery will be slightly cropped and resolution will be slightly lowered Also if the images cannot be aligned properly due to camera shake etc auto image alignment may not take effect Note that when shooting with excessively bright or dark exposure settings auto image alignment may not work properly If you perform handheld HDR shooting while Auto Image Align is set to Disable the 3 images may not be properly aligned and the HDR effect may be minimal Using a tripod is recommended amp Auto image alignment may not work properly with repetitive patterns lattice stripes etc or flat single tone images The color gradation of the sky or white walls may not be reproduced correctly Irregular colors irregular exposure or noise may appear HDR shooting under fluorescent or LED lighting may result in unnatural color reproduction of the illuminated areas With HDR shooting the three images will be merged after you take a picture Therefore it will take a longer time to record the HDR image to the card than with normal shooting During the processing of the images puSY will be displayed in the viewfinder and on the LCD panel and you cannot take another picture until the processing is completed If you change the shooting mode or switch to movie shooting after setting HDR shooting HDR shooting setting may be cleared Adjust dyn range setting may be switched to Disable HDR 237 Multiple Exposu
288. in the movie not being recorded correctly as intended Depending on the viewing environment the brightness of the movie shot with the camera may look different from that of the HDMI output movie recorded to an external recording device E By pressing the lt INFO gt button you can change the information displayed A time code can be appended to the HDMI output movie p 341 The HDMI output will also output sound except when Sound recording is set to Off 349 M49 Menu Function Settings Video system For PAL Battery info Sensor cleaning MA button display options btn function Rating HDMI frame rate HDMI frame rate For HDMI output you can set the frame rate to Auto 59 94i 50 00i 59 94p 50 00p or 23 98p Set the frame rate that is compatible with the commercially available external recording device you will use to record the movie via HDMI output 4 The frame rate cannot be set if 24 00p for 4 Movie rec quality is set to Enable Fl The selectable frame rates vary according to the 3 Video system setting If the movie does not appear on the HDMI output device set the 3 Video system correctly to For NTSC or For PAL depending on the video standard of your output device Ifthe manually set frame rate is not compatible with the external recording device the frame rate will be set automatically If 3 HDMI frame rate s 59 94i or 59 94p is set
289. in the same way as with AF point expansion manual selection a mode p 95 cas ZOne AF Manual selection of zone The AF area is divided into nine focusing zones for focusing All the AF points in the selected zone are used for the automatic AF point selection It is superior to single point AF or AF point expansion in achieving focus and it is effective for moving subjects However since it is inclined to focus on the nearest subject focusing on a specific target may be more difficult than with single point AF or AF point expansion The AF point s achieving focus is displayed as lt gt 96 AF Area Selection Modes Large Zone AF Manual selection of zone The AF area is divided into three focusing zones left center and right for focusing Since the focusing area is larger than with Zone AF it is superior in focusing on the subject Since auto selection AF is used it is superior to single point AF or A
290. inder shooting and Live View shooting gt lt HDR gt will be displayed on the LCD panel When you press the shutter button completely three consecutive images will be captured and the HDR image will be recorded to the card i If the image recording quality is set to RAW the HDR image will be recorded in L quality If the image recording quality is set to RAW JPEG the HDR image will be recorded in the JPEG quality set HDR shooting is not possible with ISO expansion H1 H2 HDR shooting is possible within ISO 100 ISO 16000 The flash will not fire during HDR shooting During HDR shooting Disable will be applied for Distortion 6 2 Auto Lighting Optimizer 3 Highlight tone priority and B 5 Expo simulation AEB cannot be set If you shoot a moving subject the subject s movement may leave afterimages In HDR shooting 3 images are captured with different shutter speeds set automatically Therefore even in lt Tv gt and lt M gt shooting modes the shutter speed will be shifted based on the shutter speed you set To prevent camera shake a high ISO speed may be set 236 HDR HDR High Dynamic Range Shooting SSS ee WD When shooting HDR images with Auto Image Align set to Enable AF point display information p 359 and Dust Delete Data p 407 will not be appended to the image If you perform handheld HDR shooting while Auto Image Align is set to Enable
291. ing ee Set the printing effects YY B W B W Prints in black and white with true blacks B W Warm tone Prints in black and white with warm yellowish blacks B W Cool tone Prints in black and white with cool bluish blacks Prints the image in the actual colors and contrast No automatic color adjustments are applied rim Printing characteristics are the same as the Natural setting However this setting enables finer printing adjustments than with Natural Printing will differ depending on the printer For details refer to Cy Default the printer s instruction manual When you change the printing effects changes are reflected in the image displayed on the upper left of the screen Note that the printed image may look slightly different from the displayed image which is only an approximation This also applies to Brightness and Adjust levels on page 418 QD When making a large print of a RAW or RAW JPEG image printing a JPEG L image created by processing a RAW image p 398 or printing via Digital Photo Professional EOS software p 537 is recommended 416 Zo me O Both E Photo Borderless W 1 copies Cropping Paper settings Cancel Print FgOn Y Both BJ 9x13cm B Photo Borderless W1 copies Cropping Paper settings Cancel Print FgOn we J Both BJ 9x13cm B Photo Borderless W 1 copies Cropping Paper settings Cancel Print impri
292. ing only Starts stops movie shooting lf ea or EP is set besides pressing the lt 8 gt button you can start stop the movie shooting by pressing the shutter button completely or by using Remote Switch RS 80N3 or Timer Remote Controller TC 80N3 both sold separately p 248 However with ear P or E P set still photo shooting p 327 is not possible C During movie shooting the button function setting overrides any function assigned to the shutter button with 2 3 Custom Controls HDMI output LCD This is for recording an HDMI movie to an external recording device The default setting is No mirroring No mirroring When HDMI output starts the camera s LCD monitor turns off e Shooting information AF point and other details are overlaid on the HDMI output movie However while viewing an external monitor connected to an external recording device you can press the lt INFO gt button to switch to output without any information overlay If you do not connect the HDMI output to an external device and only view the output on the camera s LCD monitor you cannot make the settings for output without an information overlay even by pressing the lt INFO gt button When recording a movie without an information overlay use an external monitor to confirm that the shooting information AF point and other details are not displayed confirm that the movie is output without an information overlay b
293. ing those adjustments E RAW Image Processing Software To display RAW images on a computer using Digital Photo Professional DPP EOS software is recommended Previous versions of DPP may not be able to process RAW images taken with this camera If your computer has a previous version of DPP update it with the EOS Solution Disk CD ROM provided with this camera The previous version will be overwritten Commercially available software may not be able to display RAW images taken with this camera For compatibility information contact the software manufacturer 152 M9 Setting the Image Recording Quality ee One touch Image Quality Setting With Custom Controls you can assign the image recording quality to the lt M Fn gt button or depth of field preview button so you can switch to it momentarily If you assign One touch image quality setting or One touch image quality hold to the lt M Fn gt button or depth of field preview button you can quickly switch to the desired image recording quality and shoot For details see Custom Controls p 445 4D Under 1 Record func card folder sel if Record func is set to Rec separately you cannot switch to the One touch image quality setting Maximum Burst for Continuous Shooting The approximate maximum burst is displayed on the bottom right both in the viewfinder and on the shooting function P 1 125 F5 6 100 settings screen 3 2 1 0 1 2 3 b If t
294. int When the lens s focus mode switch is set to lt MF gt AE lock is applied at the center AF point Fil AE lock is not possible with bulb exposures 229 B Bulb Exposures 9 amp 0 In this mode the shutter stays open as long as you hold down the shutter button completely and closes when you let go of the shutter button This is called bulb exposure Use bulb exposures for night scenes fireworks the heavens and other subjects requiring long exposures all i 1 Set the Mode Dial to lt B gt Set the desired aperture While looking at the LCD panel or the viewfinder turn the lt g gt or lt 3 gt dial Elapsed exposure time 3 Take the picture The exposure will continue for as long as you keep the shutter button pressed completely gt The elapsed exposure time will be displayed on the LCD panel Cy Long exposures produce more noise than usual If Auto ISO is set the ISO speed will be ISO 400 p 156 Fora bulb exposure if you use both the self timer and mirror lockup instead of the bulb timer keep pressing the shutter button completely self timer delay time bulb exposure time If you let go of the shutter button during the self timer countdown there will be a shutter release sound but no picture will be taken If you use the bulb timer under the same shooting conditions you need not hold down the shutter button completely Do not point the camera toward
295. io is different from the printing paper s aspect ratio the image may be cropped significantly when you print it as a borderless print If the image is cropped the print may look grainier due to the fewer number of pixels If you imprint shooting information on an image shot at an expanded ISO speed H1 or H2 the correct ISO speed may not be imprinted Depending on the printer the cropped image area may not be printed as you specified The smaller you make the cropping frame the grainier the picture will look in the print Check the camera s LCD monitor while cropping the image If you look at the image on a TV screen the cropping frame may not be displayed accurately F Handling Printer Errors If printing does not resume after you resolve a printer error no ink no paper etc and select Continue operate the buttons on the printer to resume printing For details on resuming the printing refer to the printer s instruction manual Error Messages If a problem occurs during printing an error message will appear on the camera s LCD monitor Press lt Q gt to stop printing After fixing the problem resume printing For details on how to fix a printing problem refer to the printer s instruction manual Paper Error Check whether the paper is properly loaded in the printer Ink Error Check the printer s ink level and the waste ink tank Hardware Error Check for any printer problems other than paper and i
296. ion will not be appended to the image Cropping information will also be appended for viewfinder shooting However the cropping information will not be displayed If cropping information is added to a RAW image the image cannot be cropped with the camera s RAW image processing 443 EM Setting Custom Functions Default Erase option During image playback and image review after image capture when you press the lt j gt button the erase menu appears p 392 You can set which option Cancel or Erase is to be preselected on this screen If Erase is set you can just press lt amp gt to quickly erase the image fe Cancel selected tl Erase selected Q If Erase is set be careful not to erase an image accidentally Q 3 Custom Controls m You can assign often used functions to camera buttons or dials according to your preferences GA cl MOM x 1 Select 4 3 Custom Controls munan C Fn3 Disp Operation Focusing Screen Std Under the 9 3 tab select Custom Warnings in viewfinder Controls then press lt GE gt LV shooting area display O i Dial direction during TwAv n gt The Custom Controls screen to select JOU UE Ue z control buttons and dials will appear Custom Controls Custom Controls 2 Select a camera button or dial Shutter butt half press Select a camera button or dial then Metering and AF start ar OD press lt gt g gt T
297. is displayed for Access point SSID You can also check the Eye Fi card s MAC address and firmware version Press the lt MENU gt button to exit the menu 6 Take the picture ONE SHOT LJ gt B Transmission status icon Gray Not connected Blinking Connecting Illuminated Connected EN EN 7S S e e UON AN e t Transferring 476 The picture is transferred and the lt gt icon switches from gray not connected to one of the icons below For transferred images a is displayed in the shooting information display p 357 No connection with access point Connecting to access point Connection to access point established Image transfer to access point in progress Using Eye Fi Cards G Cautions for Using Eye Fi Cards If is displayed an error occurred while retrieving the card information Turn the camera s power switch off and on again Even if Eye Fi trans is set to Disable it may still transmit a signal In hospitals airports and other places where wireless transmissions are prohibited remove the Eye Fi card from the camera If the image transfer does not function check the Eye Fi card and computer settings For details refer to the card s instruction manual Depending on the wireless LAN s connection conditions the image transfer may take longer or it may be interrupted The Eye Fi card may become hot as it
298. is situation the subject will be focused on in FlexiZone Multi method with automatic selection The shape of the AF frame lt i 1 gt varies depending on the size and shape of the subject 301 Using AF to Focus AF Method SSS SS SSS a FlexiZone Multi AFC You can focus over a wide area with up to 31 AF points automatic selection This wide area can also be divided into 9 zones for focusing zone selection sissies 1 Display the Live View image Press the lt gt button The Live View image will appear on the LCD monitor 3 2 1 0 1 2 3 E5 auto Area frame ues gt Select the AF point Pressing lt gt or lt gt will toggle between automatic selection and Ta zone selection In the lt j gt mode n g automatic selection is set LABAR Baty automatically Use lt gt to select the zone To return to the center zone press lt gt or lt gt again 3 Focus on the subject Aim the AF point over the subject and press the shutter button halfway gt When focus is achieved the AF point will turn green and the beeper will sound If focus is not achieved the area frame will turn orange e Zone frame 302 Using AF to Focus AF Method eee iste A Take the picture Check the focus and exposure then press the shutter button completely to take the picture p 286 125 5 6 g3 2 1 9 1 2033 109 4 Ifthe camera do
299. isplay displayed ey ware ver Select to update the firmware of the camera i lens Speedlite or Wireless File Transmitter QD When using GPS function or a Wireless File Transmitter be sure to check the countries and areas of use and use the device in accordance with the laws and regulations of the country or region 491 Menu Settings 4 Custom Functions Orange Page C Fn1 Exposure C Fn2 Exposure Drive C Fn4 Others C Fn5 Clear Clear all Custom Function settings amp My Menu Green Add My Menu tab Add My Menu tabs 1 5 459 elete all My Menu tabs Delete all My Menu tabs 462 C Fn3 Display Customize camera functions as desired Operation Delete all items Delete all items under My Menu tabs 1 5 462 Normal display Display from My Menu tab Menuidispiay Display only My Menu tab 492 Menu Settings Movie Shooting 3 Shooting 41 Movie Red Page Movie Servo AF Enable Disable 342 34 AF method ed FlexiZone Multi FlexiZone Grid display Off 3x3 E 6x4 HHE 3x3 diag MOV MP4 Movie recording size e 1920x1080 1280x720 640x480 Movie recording quality f M cee EARR 3 e ALL I For editing IPB Standard IPB Light 24 00p Disable Enable 3 3 3 3 5 Recording level Sound recording Wind filter Disable Enable Attenuator Disable Enable When active Always on During shooting Movie Servo AF speed 3 AF speed Slow 4 3 2 1 Standard
300. ist beam only One Shot AF release ak Release priority Focus priority 121 487 Menu Settings AF AF4 Purple Page Lens drive when AF impossible Selectable AF point 65 points 21 points 9 points Manual selection Spot AF Manual selection 1 point AF Expand AF area 2 Expand AF area Surround Manual selection Zone AF Continue focus search Stop focus search Select AF area selection mode Manual selection Large Zone AF Auto selection 65 point AF AF area selection a f th vertical horizontal eaa Some fOr both vertical horizontal point Separate AF points Area point Separate AF points Point only Initial AF point 2 Al Initial C AF point selected Servo AF Manual 6 O 2 2 AF point Auto Auto AF point selection EOS iTRAF EN Disable AF AF5 Purple Manual AF point Stops at AF area edges Continuous selection pattern Selected constant All constant Selected pre AF focused Selected focused Disable display AF point display during focus VF display illumination AF point during Al Servo AF Non illuminated AF status in viewfinder Show in field of view Show outside view 132 AF Microadjustment Disable All by same amount Adjust by lens Auto Enable Disable ea TT 488 Menu Settings gt Playback 1 Blue Page Protect images Protect images 368 Rotate image Rotate images gt Playback 2 Bl
301. ite 2 1 Using Wireless Flash memen The camera s built in flash can work as a master unit for Canon EX series external Speedlites having a wireless slave feature It can wirelessly trigger the Speedlite s to fire via optical transmission Be sure to read about wireless flash photography optical transmission in the Speedlite s instruction manual Slave Unit Settings and Position Regarding your Speedlite slave unit refer to its instruction manual and set it as follows The settings other than the ones below for the slave unit s control are all set with the camera Different types of slave units can be used and controlled together 1 Set the external Speedlite as a slave unit 2 Set the external Speedlite s transmission channel to the same channel as set on the camera 3 For flash ratio control set the slave unit s firing group 4 Position the camera and slave unit s within the range shown below 5 Face the slave unit s wireless sensor toward the camera Example of Wireless Flash Set up Approx 10 m 32 8 ft Indoors ae Approx 7m 23 0 ft Outdoors Approx 5m Approx 7m 16 4 ft 23 0 ft 27 2 Using Wireless Flash 41 If the Speedlite does not have a transmission channel setting function it operates regardless of the channel set on the camera 2 In small rooms the slave unit may work even if its wireless sensor does not face the camera The ca
302. king the color saturation and gradation The display can be switched with L gt 3 Histogram disp Brightness Display Sample Histograms This histogram is a graph showing the distribution of the image s brightness level The horizontal axis indicates the brightness level darker on the left and brighter on the right Dark image while the vertical axis indicates how many pixels exist for each brightness level The more pixels there are toward the left the darker the image The more pixels there are toward the right the brighter the image If there are too many pixels on the left the shadow detail will be lost If there are too many pixels on the right the Bright image highlight detail will be lost The gradation in between will be reproduced By checking the image and its brightness histogram you can see the exposure level inclination and the overall gradation RGB Display This histogram is a graph showing the distribution of each primary color s brightness level in the image RGB or red green and blue The horizontal axis indicates the color s brightness level darker on the left and brighter on the right while the vertical axis indicates how many pixels exist for each color brightness level The more pixels there are toward the left the darker and less prominent the color The more pixels there are toward the right the brighter and denser the color If there are too many pixels on the left the respective color inf
303. l is printed beneath the symbol shown above in accordance with the Battery Directive this indicates that a heavy metal Hg Mercury Cd Cadmium Pb Lead is present in this battery or accumulator at a concentration above an applicable threshold specified in the Battery Directive This product should be handed over to a designated collection point e g on an authorized one for one basis when you buy a new similar product or to an authorized collection site for recycling waste electrical and electronic equipment EEE and batteries and accumulators Improper handling of this type of waste could have a possible impact on the environment and human health due to potentially hazardous substances that are generally associated with EEE Your cooperation in the correct disposal of this product will contribute to the effective usage of natural resources For more information about the recycling of this product please contact your local city office waste authority approved scheme or your household waste disposal service or visit www canon europe com weee or www canon europe com battery CAUTION RISK OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS REPLACED BY AN INCORRECT TYPE DISPOSE OF USED BATTERIES ACCORDING TO LOCAL REGULATION 529 530 Viewing the DVD ROM Instruction Manuals Downloading Images to Your Computer This chapter explains how to view the Camera and Software Instruction Manuals on the DVD ROM provided on your computer
304. lash exposure darker turn the lt 3 gt 4 Using the Built in Flash TE FE Lock FE flash exposure lock obtains and locks the appropriate flash exposure for the desired part of the image 1 Press the lt gt button The built in flash will be raised Press the shutter button halfway and look through the viewfinder to check that the lt gt icon is lit 2 Focus on the subject 3 Press the lt M Fn gt button 416 Aim the viewfinder center over the subject where you want to lock the flash exposure then press the lt M Fn gt button gt The flash will fire a preflash and the required flash output is calculated and retained in memory Inthe viewfinder FEL is displayed for a moment and lt 4 gt will light up Also the flash exposure level indicator will be displayed as shown on the left Each time you press the lt M Fn gt button a preflash is fired and the flash output is calculated and retained in memory 4 A Take the picture Compose the shot and press the shutter button completely gt The flash is fired when the picture is taken G Ifthe subject is too far away and beyond the effective flash range the lt 4 gt icon will blink Move closer to the subject and repeat steps 2 to 4 FE lock is not possible with Live View shooting 258 4 Using an External Speedlite 9 EOS dedicated EX series Speedlites Flash
305. layed Program shift will be canceled automatically when the metering timer 4 ends exposure setting display turns off Program shift cannot be used with flash 217 Tv Shutter Priority AE In this mode you set the shutter speed and the camera automatically sets the aperture to obtain the standard exposure matching the brightness of the subject This is called shutter priority AE A faster shutter speed can freeze the action of a moving subject A slower shutter speed can create a blurred effect giving the impression of motion lt Tv gt stands for Time value Blurred motion Frozen action Slow shutter speed 1 30 sec Fast shutter speed 1 2000 sec 1 Set the Mode Dial to lt Tv gt s 2 Set the desired shutter speed While looking at the LCD panel or through the viewfinder turn the lt 7 gt dial Focus on the subject Press the shutter button halfway The aperture is set automatically A Check the viewfinder display and shoot As long as the aperture is not blinking a standard exposure will be obtained 218 Tv Shutter Priority AE If the lower f number blinks it indicates underexposure Turn the lt gt dial to set a slower shutter speed until the aperture stops blinking or set a higher ISO speed If the higher f number blinks it indicates overexposure Turn the lt gt dial to set a faster shutter speed until the aperture
306. le Ls Taa FT aa 3 0 0 2 0 0 Picture Style Filter effect Monochrome Toning effect Monochrome WifetaYatal aidata aTe 162 313 Customizing a Picture Style m You can customize a Picture Style by adjusting individual parameters such as Sharpness and Contrast To see the resulting effects take test shots To customize Monochrome see page 165 1 Press the lt C gt button 2 Select 3132 gt The Picture Style selection screen will Picture Style appeal Choose image effects to suit the subject or scene Picture Style 3 Select a Picture Style Portrait Select a Picture Style then press SSL AU eRe lt INFO gt button INFO Detail set SET LOLS Detail set EZP Portrait Select a parameter OSharpness aoe Select a parameter such as Ooms Sharpness then press lt gt So Saturation c color tone Default set 163 31 Customizing a Picture Style SSS ee Detail set EEP Portrait 5 Set the parameter Sharpness waon Adjust the parameter as desired then press lt gt Picture Style Press the lt MENU gt button to save the ee adjusted parameters The Picture 030082060 Style selection screen will reappear Any parameter settings different from the default will be displayed in blue INFO DACIE A SET O Parameter Settings and Effects Sharpness 0 Less sharp outline 7 Sharp outline Contrast 4 Low contra
307. lect a multiple exposure image as the first single exposure If you select Deselect img the selected image will be canceled Checking and Deleting Multiple Exposures During Shooting When On Funce Ctrl is set and you have not finished shooting the set number of exposures you can press the lt gt gt button to view the merged seu teat cen multiple exposure image so far You can gt eee oC check how it looks and the exposure Not possible when On ContShtng is set If you press the lt gt button the operations possible during multiple exposure shooting will be displayed Deletes the last image you shot shoot another m Undo last image image The number of remaining exposures will increase by 1 If Save source imgs All images is set all of the single exposures and the merged multiple exposure image will be saved before exiting If Save source imgs Result only is set only the multiple exposure image merged so far will be saved before exiting 2 Exit without savin None of the images will be saved before m g exiting The screen before you pressed the lt j gt button will reappear 2 Save and exit S Return to previous screen 4 During multiple exposure shooting you can only play back multiple exposure images 244 Multiple Exposures 2 FAQ Are there any restrictions on the image recording quality All JPEG image recording quality settings can be selected If M or S is se
308. lect the 2 tab Turn the lt 3 gt dial to select Date Time Zone then press lt gt to power off LCD brightness Date Time Zone Date Time Zone 3 Set the time zone mMsizONe London is set by default 24 09 2014 13 30 00 Turn the lt 3 gt dial to select Time dd mm yy ZO ne i Press lt gt so lt I gt is displayed Paa Turn the lt gt dial to select the time zone then press lt gt 47 tE Setting the Date Time and Zone _ SS ee Date Time Zone 4 Set the date and time 24 09 201 Turn the lt 3 gt dial to select the number 24 09 2014 15 30 00 Press lt gt so lt gt is displayed dd mm yy Turn the lt 3 gt dial to select the London desired setting then press lt gt OK Cancel Returns to lt o gt Date Time Zone 5 Set the daylight saving time Daylight saving time off Set it if necessary 24 09 2014 15 30 00 Turn the lt 3 gt dial to select 3 dd mm yy Press lt gt so lt gt is displayed i Jondon Turn the lt 32 gt dial to select then ok Cancel press lt gt When the daylight saving time is set to e the time set in step 4 will advance by 1 hr If is set the daylight saving time will be canceled and the time will go back by 1 hr Date Time Zone 6 Exit the setting 24 09 2014 Turn the lt 3 gt dial to select OK 24 09 2014 15
309. lem or 2 communication with the battery pack failed with a non Canon battery pack the protection circuit will stop charging and the charge lamp will blink in orange at a high speed In the case of 1 unplug the charger s power plug from the power outlet Detach and reattach the battery pack to the charger Wait a few minutes then reconnect the power plug to the power outlet If the problem persists contact your dealer or nearest Canon Service Center The charger s lamp does not blink Ifthe internal temperature of the battery pack attached to the charger is high the charger will not charge the battery for safety reasons lamp off During charging if the battery s temperature becomes high for any reason Charging will stop automatically lamp blinks When the battery temperature goes down charging will resume automatically The camera does not operate even when the power switch is set to lt ON gt Make sure the battery compartment cover is closed p 40 Make sure the battery is installed properly in the camera p 40 Recharge the battery p 38 Make sure the card slot cover is closed p 41 495 Troubleshooting Guide a The access lamp still lights or blinks even when the power switch is lt OFF gt If the power is turned off while an image is being recorded to the card the access lamp will remain on or continue to blink for a few seconds When the image recording is completed the power will turn o
310. lide show Slide show Display time Repeat gt DIELLI G F When All images is selected the images on the card selected for Record play or Playback under 1 Record func card folder sel will be played back 383 um s lide Show Auto Playback Slide show Start the slide show E T 46 images Select Start then press lt amp gt E i 384 i rad x TGR t D gt After Loading image is displayed the slide show will start Ct LUO j Start MENU fp Exit the slide show To exit the slide show and return to the setting screen press the lt MENU gt button To pause the slide show press lt gt During pause IH will be displayed on the upper left of the image Press lt gt again to resume the slide show During auto playback you can press the lt INFO gt button to change the still photo display format p 354 During movie playback you can adjust the sound volume by turning the lt s gt dial During auto playback or pause you can turn the lt 3 gt dial to view another image During auto playback auto power off will not take effect The display time may vary depending on the image To view the slide show on a TV set see page 385 Viewing Images on a TV Set By connecting the camera to a TV set with an HDMI cable sold separately you can play the camera s still photos and movies on the TV set For the HDMI cable HDMI Cable HTC 100 sold separ
311. ll be maintained With Auto ISO set and 4 1 ISO speed setting increments set to 1 2 stop any 1 2 stop exposure compensation will be implemented with the ISO speed 1 3 stop and shutter speed However the shutter speed displayed will not change 223 Selecting the Metering Mode You can select one of four methods to measure the subject brightness In the lt G 3 gt mode evaluative metering is set automatically 2 Select the metering mode While looking at the LCD panel or viewfinder turn the lt gt dial Evaluative metering c Partial metering L Spot metering L_ Center weighted average metering Evaluative metering This is a general purpose metering mode suited even for backlit subjects The camera sets the exposure automatically to suit the scene Partial metering Effective when the background is much brighter than the subject due to backlighting etc Partial metering covers approx 6 of the viewfinder area at the center Selecting the Metering Mode Spot metering This is for metering a specific spot of the subject or scene Spot metering covers approx 1 8 of the viewfinder area at the center The spot metering circle will be displayed in the viewfinder L Center weighted average metering The metering is weighted at the center and then averaged for the entire scene E With Evaluative metering the exposure setting
312. lor tone Detail set G1 User Def 1 Picture Style Vato ETS Sharpness imm Picture Style User Def 1 Landscape 6008 06 0 ESP INFO DACIA 313 Registering a Picture Style E a Select a parameter Select a parameter such as Sharpness then press lt gt Set the parameter Adjust the parameter as desired then press lt gt For details see Customizing a Picture Style p 163 Press the lt MENU gt button to register the modified Picture Style The Picture Style selection screen will then reappear The base Picture Style will be indicated on the right of User Def If a Picture Style has already been registered under User Def changing the base Picture Style in step 5 will nullify the parameter settings of the registered Picture Style If you execute Clear all camera settings p 70 all the User Def settings will revert to their defaults Any Picture Style registered via EOS Utility EOS software will have only its modified parameters reverted to the default setting Def then shoot Regarding the procedure to register a Picture Style file to the camera refer to the EOS Utility Instruction Manual p 537 To shoot with the Picture Style you adjusted select the registered User 167 WB Setting the White Balance _ White balance WB is for making the white areas look white Normally the lt gt Auto
313. low light conditions In the lt P gt lt Tv gt lt Av gt lt M gt or lt B gt mode you can set whether to have the AF points light up in red p 131 AF Assist Beam with the Built in Flash Under low light conditions when you press the shutter button halfway the built in flash may fire a brief burst of flashes It illuminates the subject to help autofocusing a Inthe lt G F gt mode if Flash firing is set to lt gt the built in flash will not emit the AF assist beam The AF assist beam will not be emitted with Al Servo AF operation The built in flash will make a sound when firing continuously This is normal and not a malfunction E The effective range of the AF assist beam emitted by the built in flash is approx 4 meters 13 1 feet Inthe lt P gt lt Tv gt lt Av gt lt M gt or lt B gt mode press the lt 4 gt button to raise the built in flash Then it will fire the AF assist beam when necessary 89 Selecting the AF Area and AF Point The camera has 65 AF points for autofocusing You can select the AF area selection mode and AF point s suiting the scene or subject Depending on the lens attached to the camera the number of usable AF points and AF point patterns will differ For details see Lenses and Usable AF Points on page 100 AF Area Selection Mode You can select one of seven AF area selection modes For the setting procedure see page 92 El Single point Spo
314. luorescent or LED lighting image flicker may be recorded F Under 2 3 Custom Controls if H Expo comp hold btn turn is set p 455 you can set exposure compensation while Auto ISO is set When Auto ISO is set you can press the lt gt button to lock the ISO speed If you press the lt gt button and recompose the shot you can see the exposure level difference on the exposure level indicator p 323 compared to when the lt gt button was pressed By pressing the lt INFO gt button you can display the histogram 322 Information Display Shooting Movies Each time you press the lt INFO gt button the information display will change Maximum burst Possible shots Movie shooting mode iA Autoexposure GF Autoexposure P B atv Shutter priority ev Aperture priority aM Manual exposure AF method Drive mode Movie recording size Frame rate Compression method Headphone volume Movie Servo AF Recording level Manual LED light AE lock Eye Fi card transmission status Shutter speed Digital compass Recording level meter Aperture GPS connection indicator Exposure compensation Applies to a single movie clip EE 9 GS ey om E E eh ee es SO servoar E 125 5 6 1 p AUTO Movie shooting remaining time Elapsed time AF point FlexiZone Single Battery check Temperature warning Histogram M mode Time code Writing indicator C
315. mber includes letters enter only the numbers Ifthe lens serial number is eleven digits or longer enter only the last ten digits The location of the serial number varies depending on the lens Some lenses may not have a serial number inscribed To register a lens that has no serial number inscribed enter any serial number Fl If Adjust by lens is selected and an Extender is used the adjustment will be registered for the lens and Extender combination If 40 lenses have already been registered a message will appear After you select a lens whose registration is to be erased overwritten you can register another lens 136 EM Fine Adjustment of AF s Point of Focus EC S ARY Single focal length lens 4 Make the adjustment AF Microadjustment F Forazoom lens select the wide angle COOJEFSOmm f 1 4 USM W or telephoto T end Pressing a lt 7 gt will turn off the purple frame and make the adjustment possible Set the adjustment amount then press lt gt The adjustable range is 20 steps eT ERE EE F Setting it toward will shift the 00 EF S18 135mm 3 5 5 6 IS S point of focus in front of the standard AF TA point of focus Setting it toward Aa will shift the point of focus to the rear of the standard point of focus Fora zoom lens repeat this procedure and adjust it for the wide INFO UA lace alco Zoom lens AF Microadjustment ff angle W and
316. mera s wireless signals can bounce off the walls and be received by the slave unit When using an EX series Speedlite with fixed flash head and wireless sensor make sure it fires when you take pictures Canceling the slave unit s auto power off To cancel the slave unit s auto power off press the camera s lt M Fn gt button Q The camera s master unit function cannot be used for wireless flash shooting with radio transmission 273 Using Wireless Flash Wireless Flash Shooting Configurations The table below shows the possible configurations for wireless flash shooting Choose the configuration suiting the subject shooting conditions the number of external Speedlites you use etc External Speedlite A B Quantity Flash Flash exp Ratio Built in Flash Wireless Functions Automatic autoflash e Flash exposure compensation p 282 External Speedlite Setting Wireless Firing A B C All and amp cp Even if the built in flash is disabled in the camera settings it will still fire in order to control the slave unit via optical transmission The flash fired to control the slave unit may therefore appear in the picture depending on the shooting conditions 274 Using Wireless Flash Fully Automatic Shooting with One External Speedlite This shows the most basic setup for fully automatic wireless flash shooting with one external Speedii
317. mination Enable Correction correction data retained Chromatic aberration Enable Correction correction data retained Disable Correction Distortion correction 7 data retained White balance Auto Custom White Balance White balance shift White balance bracketing Canceled Long exposure noise reduction High ISO speed noise reduction Highlight tone priority Disable Record function Standard Disable Standard File numbering Preset code Auto cleaning Dust Delete Data Erased 12 Camera Settings Auto power off Magnification 2x magnify Approx from center Image jump wi Auto rotate On H GPS and digital Disable compass settings Video system Unchanged TEA button display All items options selected button function Custom shooting mode Unchanged Copyright information Unchanged Configure MY MENU Menu display Normal display Unchanged Before You Start Live View Shooting Settings Live View shooting Exposure cates Enable simulation Silent LV Mode 1 shooting Metering timer Movie Shooting Settings Movie Servo AF Enable AF method Tracking Grid display Off Movie recording quality MOV MP4 MOV Movie NTSC Hp EGR recording size PAL FHD 24 00P Disable Sound recording Auto Disable Attenuator Disable Movie Servo AF speed When active AF speed Movie Servo AF tracking sensitivity Always on Standard 0 Standard Mode 1 8 sec
318. mode lt 5 gt will be displayed for multiple exposure photos lt W gt will be displayed for images shot with Multi Shot Noise Reduction For still photos taken during movie shooting lt gt will be displayed For images developed with the camera s RAW processing function or resized and then saved lt gt will be displayed QD If the image was taken by another camera certain shooting information may not be displayed 357 INFO Shooting Information Display Lens Histogram information eG Je 41100 0003 24 09 2014 13 30 00 Histogram display Brightness fi Lens name EF S18 135mm 3 5 5 6 IS STM L Histogram display Focal length 18mm m RGB White balance information Aee 41100 0003 Aee 100 0003 24 09 2014 13 30 00 24 09 2014 13 30 00 White balance O sharpness Color temp Ocontrast K EPA ddSaturation WB WB correction A2 G1 color tone Color space Noise Lens aberration correction reduction information information Aee 41100 0003 24 09 2014 13 30 00 Color space Long exp noise reduction High ISO speed NR Fle 41100 0003 a ee 09 2014 13 30 00 4 gt Lens correction data Peripheral illum corr ON Chromatic aberr corr ON Distortion correction GPS information Aee 11100 0003 24 09 2014 13 30 00 Latitude n N 35 34 00 0 UTC Coordinated Longitude E 139 40 49 9 Universal Time 21m NE41 fz Direction Elevation T 24 09
319. mode C2 be registered then press lt CE gt customi shooung mode 62 Select OK on the confirmation dialog gt The current camera settings p 465 466 will be registered under the Mode Dial s C position Automatic Updating If you change a setting while you shoot in the lt W gt lt gt or lt E gt mode the respective Custom shooting mode can be automatically updated to reflect the changes in settings To enable this automatic update in step 2 set Auto update set to Enable Canceling Registered Custom Shooting Modes In step 2 if you select Clear settings the camera will revert to the default settings with no Custom shooting modes registered 464 W Registering Custom Shooting Modes EE E Settings Registered Shooting functions Shooting mode Shutter speed Aperture ISO speed AF operation AF area selection mode AF point Drive mode Metering mode Exposure compensation amount Flash exposure compensation amount Menu functions 1 Image quality Image review time Beep Release shutter without card Lens aberration correction Flash firing E TTL Il flash metering Flash sync speed in Av mode 32 Exposure compensation AEB ISO speed settings Auto Lighting Optimizer White balance Custom White Balance White balance Shift Bracketing Color space 233 Picture Style Long exposure noise reduction High ISO speed noise reduction Highlight tone priority Multiple exposure
320. movie under fluorescent or LED lighting the movie may flicker Zooming the lens during movie shooting is not recommended Zooming the lens may cause changes in the exposure to be recorded regardless of whether the lens s maximum aperture changes or not During movie shooting you cannot magnify the image even if you press the lt Q gt button Be careful not to cover the built in microphone p 314 with your finger etc Multi Shot Noise Reduction p 176 and Distortion p 182 cannot be set They will not function If you connect or disconnect the HDMI cable during movie shooting the movie shooting will end General Movie Shooting Cautions are on pages 351 352 If necessary also read General Live View Shooting Cautions on pages 310 311 324 Shooting Movies Fi Notes for Movie Shooting Movie related settings are under the 484 and 85 tabs p 342 In the lt Aj gt mode they are under the 482 and 433 tabs A movie file is recorded each time you shoot a movie If the file size exceeds 4 GB a new file will be created for every subsequent approx 4 GB The movie image s field of view is approx 100 when the movie recording size is set to 5FHD You can also focus on the image by pressing the lt AF ON gt button Under 85 amp button function if F is selected you can press the shutter button completely to start or stop the movie shooting
321. mperature conversion filter or color compensating filter Each color can be corrected to one of nine levels This function is for advanced users who are familiar with using color temperature conversion or color compensating filters White Balance Correction aA k 1 Select WB Shift Bkt Expo comp AEB 3 241 9 1 2 3 Under the 2 tab select WB ISO speed settings l Shift Bkt then press lt gt Auto Lighting Optimizer El White balance AWB Custom White Balance WB Shift Bkt 0 0 0 Color space 2 Set the white balance correction Use lt 55 gt to move the m mark to the appropriate position Bis for blue A for amber M for magenta and G for green The image s color balance will be corrected towards the selected color On the right of the screen Shift indicates the direction and correction amount respectively Bracket Pressing the lt gt button will cancel all the WB Shift Bkt settings Press lt gt to exit the setting 5 Shift a Clear all Bracket SET fe Fl During the white balance correction lt W8 gt will be displayed on the LCD panel You can display lt gt in the viewfinder and on the LCD panel when white balance correction is set p 441 One level of the blue amber correction is equivalent to approx 5 mireds of a color temperature conversion filter Mired Measuring unit indicating the density of a color temperature c
322. n Rating is selected in 3 btn function you can set the rating marks that can be selected when you press the lt RATE gt button 371 Setting Ratings SSS SSS tM Setting Ratings with the Menu 1 Select Rating Rese Under the L gt 1 2 tab select Rating Rating then press lt 6 gt Slide show Image transfer Image jump w 2 Select an image Turn the lt 3 gt dial to select an image or movie to be rated Ifyou press the lt Q gt button and turn the lt s gt dial counterclockwise you can select an image from a three image display To return to the single image display turn the lt gt dial clockwise 3 Rate the image Press lt gt and a blue highlight frame will appear as shown in the screenshot Turn the lt 3 gt dial to select a rating then press lt gt gt The total number of images rated will be counted and displayed for each rating To rate another image repeat steps 2 and 3 372 Setting Ratings eee Fil A total of up to 999 images of a given rating can be displayed If there are more than 999 images with a given rating will be displayed F Taking Advantage of Ratings With gt 2 Image jump w 73 you can display only images having the specified rating With gt 2 Slide show you can play back only images with a specific rating With Digital Photo Professional EOS software p 537 you can select only t
323. n To turn on the camera again just press the shutter button halfway You can set the auto power off time with 2 Auto power off p 69 ir If you set the power switch to lt OFF gt while an image is being recorded to the card Recording will be displayed and the power will turn off after the recording finishes 45 Turning on the Power draza Checking the Battery Level When the power switch is set to lt ON gt the battery level will be indicated in one of six levels A blinking battery icon ca indicates that the battery will be exhausted soon Level 100 70 69 50 49 20 19 10 9 1 0 Number of Possible Shots Temnaratlre Room Temperature Low Temperatures p 23 C 73 F 0 C 32 F No Flash Approx 800 shots Approx 760 shots 50 Flash Use Approx 670 shots Approx 640 shots The figures above are based on a fully charged Battery Pack LP E6N no Live View shooting and CIPA Camera amp Imaging Products Association testing standards Possible shots with Battery Grip BG E16 sold separately e With LP E6N x 2 approx twice the shots without the battery grip e With size AA LR6 alkaline batteries at room temperature 23 C 73 F approx 270 shots with no flash approx 210 shots with 50 flash use Fl Doing any of the following will exhaust the battery sooner e Pressing the shutter button halfway for a prolonged period e Activating the AF frequently without taking a
324. n Rating HDMI frame rate btn function Protect 1100 0003 St a i age 2 UTA bet ee SOU ee RAW 27 370 1 Select MM3 btn function Under the 3 tab select WB button function then press lt gt 2 Select Protect 3 Select an image Press the lt L gt gt button to play back images Turn the lt gt dial to select the image to be protected You can also select an image or movie on the index display p 361 Protect the image When you press the lt RATE gt button the image will be protected and the lt o gt icon will appear To cancel the image protection press the lt RATE gt button again The lt gt icon will disappear Setting Ratings m You can rate images still photos and movies with one of the five rating marks E 41 E This function is called rating Rating Images with the lt RATE gt Button 1100 0003 Select an image During image playback turn the lt gt dial to select an image or movie to be rated You can also select an image or movie on the index display p 361 Rate the image Each time you press the lt RATE gt button the rating mark will change Le i L4 05 E4 None To rate another image repeat steps 1 and 2 E If 3 btn function is set to Protect change it to Rating If you press the lt Q gt button whe
325. n multiple groups You can divide the slave units into groups A and B and change the flash ratio to obtain the desired lighting effect Refer to the Speedilite s instruction manual and set one slave unit to firing group A and the other to firing group B Position the Speedlites as shown in the illustration Built in flash settings 1 Set Firing group to 4 A B Wireless func Channel Firing group 4exp comp A B fire ratio INFO RESSE NAi Built in flash settings 2 Set the A B flash ratio and shoot Select A B fire ratio and set the Wireless func an flash ratio Channel 1 Firing group 4 A B aexp comp B2 OTE A B fire ratio 21 Wt 12 INFO RSIS aae E The 8 1 to 1 1 to 1 8 flash ratio is equivalent to 3 1 to 1 1 to 1 3 stops 1 2 stop increments 279 Using Wireless Flash a A B C Multiple slave units in multiple groups This is a variant of the a A B setup This setup has group C eliminating the background shadows created by groups A and B Refer to the Speedilite s instruction manual and set three slave units to firing group A B and C respectively Position the Speedlites as shown in the illustration Built in flash settings Set Firing group to 4 A B C Wireless func a Channel 1 Firing group 4 A B C l A B fire ratio 210 1 gt 12 A B exp comp 3 2 1 1 2 3 INFO Becca eCamilelare Built in flash settings Set the A B
326. n record movies see page 5 If you handhold the camera and shoot movies camera shake can cause blurred movies Using a tripod is recommended F Full HD 1080 Full HD 1080 indicates compatibility with High Definition featuring 1080 vertical pixels scanning dein lines Shooting Movies mem A P Autoexposure Shooting When the shooting mode is set to lt j gt lt P gt or lt B gt autoexposure control will take effect to suit the scene s current brightness Exposure control will be the same for all the shooting modes Set the Mode Dial to lt j gt lt P gt or lt B gt Set the Live View shooting Movie shooting switch to lt gt The reflex mirror will make a sound then the image will appear on the LCD monitor Focus on the subject Before shooting a movie focus with AF or manual focus p 299 309 When you press the shutter button halfway the camera will focus with the current AF method a 4 Shoot the movie Press the lt gt button to start shooting a movie While the movie is being shot the mark will be displayed on the upper right of the screen gt Sound will be recorded by the built in microphone To stop shooting the movie press the lt T gt button again Built in microphone 314 Shooting Movies lv Shutter priority AE When the shooting mode
327. n the lt j gt mode if the subject moves distance to camera changes while or after you focus Al Servo AF will take effect to focus on the subject continuously The beeper will continue beeping softly As long as you keep the Area AF frame positioned over the subject while pressing the shutter button halfway the focusing will be continuous When you want to take the picture press the shutter button completely 83 G Full Auto Techniques Scene Intelligent Auto Cy Live View Shooting You can shoot while viewing the image on the LCD monitor This is called Live View shooting For details see page 285 1 Set the Live View shooting Movie shooting switch to lt 6 gt s 2 Display the Live View image on 2106 the LCD monitor Press the lt HR gt button The Live View image will appear on the LCD monitor Focus on the subject Press the shutter button halfway to focus gt When focus is achieved the AF point will turn green and the beeper will sound A Take the picture G Press the shutter button completely The picture is taken and the captured image is displayed on the LCD monitor When the playback display ends the camera will return to Live View shooting automatically Press the lt gt button to end the Live View shooting 84 Setting the AF and E Drive Modes The AF points in the viewfinder are arranged to make
328. nTEnE oii selection made in step 4 Red eye corr Off Brightness The image brightness can be adjusted Adjust levels When you select Manual you can change E Adjust levels the histogram s distribution and adjust the 231 bey image s brightness and contrast lt x With the Adjust levels screen displayed press W aao the lt INFO gt button to change the position of oo the lt amp gt Turn the lt gt dial to freely adjust the shadow level 0 127 or highlight level 128 255 Brightener Effective in backlit conditions where the subject s face looks dark When On is set the face will be brightened for printing Red eye corr Effective in flash images where the subject has red eye When On is set the red eye will be corrected for printing F The Brightener and Red eye corr effects will not be reflected on the screen When Detail set is selected you can adjust the Contrast Saturation Color tone and Color balance To adjust the Color balance use lt gt B is for blue A for amber M for magenta and G for green The image s color balance will be corrected towards the selected color amp If you select Clear all all the printing effect settings will be reverted to their defaults 418 PA Printing eee Cropping the Image Tilt correction You can crop the image and print only an enlarged version of the cropped portion as if the image is recomp
329. nable you Quiet operation when can use the touch pad lt gt on the inner shooting movies Tap AY east ring of the Quick Control Dial You can just touch the top bottom left or right of lt gt for silent operation During movie shooting you can press the lt Q gt button to display the Quick Control screen and change the functions below with lt gt Settable Shooting Mode Functions G P B Tv Av M Shutter speed eh Aperture IO O ISO speed O Exposure compensation O O O o l Recording level O lololo Volume O O Oo 1 With Auto ISO set 2 With Sound recording Manual set Q If 5 Silent Control is set to Enable you cannot change Quick Control settings with the lt 3 gt Quick Control dial during movie shooting Even if you change the aperture silently with lt gt the movie will still record the lens aperture driving sound If there is water or dirt on the lt gt the touch operation may not work In such a case use a clean cloth to clean the lt gt If it still does not work wait a while and try again Fl Before shooting a movie you can use lt gt with the Rec level setting to adjust the sound recording level 338 M Setting the Time Code m The time code is a time reference Time code aa recorded automatically to synchronize p Rec run i
330. nce may not be attained or malfunction may result If Battery Grip BG E16 sold separately and Wireless File Transmitter WFT E7 Ver 2 sold separately are both attached to the camera battery information only for the BG E16 will be displayed Battery information for the WFT E7 Ver 2 will not be displayed F The shutter count is the number of still photos taken Movies are not counted The battery information will also be displayed for Battery Pack LP E6N LP E6 inside Battery Grip BG E16 sold separately If size AA LR6 batteries are used only the battery level will be displayed 470 EM Checking the Battery Information ee Fil If communication with the battery is not possible or irregular for some reason Use this battery will be displayed If you select OK you can continue shooting However depending on the battery the battery info screen may not be displayed or may not display battery info correctly Registering Batteries to the Camera You can register up to six LP E6N LP E6 battery packs to the camera To register multiple battery packs to the camera follow the procedure below for each battery pack 1 Press the lt INFO gt button With the battery info screen displayed press the lt INFO gt button The battery history screen will appear If the battery is not registered it will be grayed out 2 Select Register gt The confirmation dialog will appear 3 Select OK The ba
331. nd will be output through HDMI output p 348 Wind Filter Attenuator Wind filter When Enable is set it reduces the wind noise when recording outdoors This feature takes effect only with the built in microphone Note that Enable reduces low bass sounds so set it to Disable when there is no wind It will record a more natural sound than with Enable Attenuator Automatically suppresses sound distortion caused by loud noises Even if Sound rec is set to Auto or Manual before shooting sound distortion may still result if there is a very loud sound In such a case setting it to Enable is recommended 336 M9 Setting the Sound Recording ee Using a microphone Normally the built in microphone will record monaural sound Stereo sound recording is also possible by connecting an external stereo microphone commercially available equipped with a miniature stereo plug 03 5 mm to the camera s external microphone IN terminal p 23 Using headphones By connecting stereo headphones commercially available equipped with a 3 5 mm diameter mini plug to the camera s headphone terminal p 23 you can listen to the sound during movie shooting If you are using an external stereo microphone commercially available you can listen to the sound in stereo To adjust the headphones sound volume press the lt Q gt button and select lt gt Then turn lt 3 gt to adjust p 329 You can also use headphones
332. nditions other than the above Additionally the geotag information may also include the route travelled even if the camera was used only at one location E The camera can receive GPS signals even in the vertical orientation 202 Acquiring GPS Signals T Viewing GPS Information GPS digital compass settings Select Set up GPS Enable Check that GPS is set to Enable Set up Select Set up then press lt gt eO a 2 Select GPS information display Auto time setting Disable gt Detailed GPS information is Position update interval Every 15s Digital compass Disable displayed GPS information display GPS Logger Disable GPS information display Latitude N30 30 30 0 Longitude W30 30 30 0 Elevation 50m Direction NE 45 UTC 20 09 2014 00 00 00 Satellite reception Sal 3D Take the picture Shots taken after GPS signal acquisition are geotagged QD Generally elevation is not as accurate as latitude and longitude due to the nature of GPS E The lt ul gt icon indicates signal conditions When lt 3D gt is displayed elevation can also be recorded However elevation cannot be recorded when lt 2D gt is displayed UTC Coordinated Universal Time is essentially the same as Greenwich Mean Time Inthe sample screen the NE45 direction indicates northeast 45 203 Acquiring GPS Signals Geotagging Information Play back the images and press the lt INFO gt
333. ng 310 351 Time code ists cccoccrtinceistiascmisentiiars 339 Time ZONE wecccvsuscatteccceniesacteccsiueenion 47 548 Tone PiOKity cccceeeceeeseseeeeeeees 180 Toning effect Monochrome 165 Touch DAG icescccccstccenaaceansstencens 59 338 Tracking sensitivity 0 108 Tripod SOCKEt cccccssssesseeeeeseeees 24 Tv Shutter priority AE 218 315 Two image display c 366 U Ultra DMA UDMA 0eeeeeee 42 Underscore ou cceceeeeeeees 187 192 USB DIGITAL terminal a an 412 425 534 Ee Seeeereer eee rr cre ttnn hesnsee ce ererer eee 198 V Video SYStEM ccceeeeseeeeeeeeeeees 330 Viewfinder vciceiiscecsrsisnatecierdseeenneccssds 27 Dioptric adjustment 54 Electronic level ccccccecreeees 76 NG EEES 74 Information display 00 77 Viewing ona TV set 376 385 Volume movie playback 379 W Warning ICON cccccceeeeeeeeeeeees 441 White balance WB 0 168 Bracketing ccccccsssesseeeeeees 173 Color temperature setting 171 Correction wwesccsrcsistacetccareeincecnaas 172 CUSTOM eerie sarae 169 Persomal ccccccssssseseeeeeseeees 170 Wind filter 2 nssseseveecedesias Geceddescdsieecs 336 Wireless flash shooting 272 Z Zone AF ae eeinr een net eae ee 91 96 549 Canon CANON INC 30 2 Shimomaruko 3 chom
334. ng Live View shooting scroll around magnified images during playback operate the Quick Control screen etc You can also use it to select and set menu items For menus and Quick Control the Multi controller works only in the vertical and horizontal directions lt AV gt lt gt gt It does not work in diagonal directions Basic Operation Touch Pad During movie shooting the touch pad provides a quiet way to adjust the shutter speed aperture exposure compensation ISO speed sound recording level and headphone volume p 338 This function works when 85 Silent Control is set to Enable After pressing the lt Q gt button tap the lt 3 gt dial s inner ring at the top bottom left or right LOCK Multi Function Lock By setting 4 3 Multi function lock p 442 and moving the lt LOCK gt switch to the right you can prevent the Main Dial Quick Control Dial Multi controller and AF area selection lever from moving and changing lt LOCKB gt switch set to the left Lock released lt LOCK gt switch set to the right Lock engaged E If the lt LOCK gt switch is set to the right and you try to use one of the locked camera controls lt L gt will be displayed in the viewfinder and on the LCD panel On the shooting settings display p 60 LOCK will be displayed 59 Basic Operation 6 LCD Panel Illumination
335. ng MOVIES isivscescitvikedeessaieecxsasiavedeaslaiiectieeessdeesedbieedsuedaces 376 PB Playing MOVIES ccccccccccssssceecessseceeccesesteeeeecsetseeeeeseessaeees 378 X Editing a Movie s First and Last Scenes eeeeeeeeeeeeeees 380 Slide Show Auto Playback ccccceseeeeeceeeeseeseeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeeeeees 382 Viewing Images on a TV Set cccccccccccceeessseeeeeeeseesuaseeeeeeeseeas 385 Copying Mag S siisii a 388 TD Erasing Image ccccccccccccccssssceccessssceeescsseeeeeeecestseeeeessnsaeeess 392 Contents Changing Image Playback Settings ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeees 394 Adjusting the LCD Monitor Brightness cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 394 Auto Rotation of Vertical Images cccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeees 395 11 Post Processing Images 397 RAW Processing RAW Images with the Camera cccccccee 398 En RESIZING JPEG IMAGES sicidiiiddscduriareaaseluddsvovranebudooraideauoneseenads 403 1 Sensor Cleaning 405 cr Automatic Sensor Cleaning 0 ccccccecceccsssesesseseseeseseeeeees 406 Appending Dust Delete Data cccccceeeeceeceneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaeees 407 Manual Sensor Cleaning cccccssssseeceecceceeeeseeeeeeeeeseeesseeeeeeeeeees 409 13 Printing Images and Transferring Images toa Computer 411 Preparing to PHIM wisctecencseetaansdinaandtes aveunnadanassdanswiseany Sontunnsduiactanssans 412 a PUN scictessersacein
336. ng conditions Therefore even if you perform AF Microadjustment focus may still not be achieved at the suitable position The adjustment amount of one stop varies depending on the maximum aperture of the lens Keep adjusting shooting and checking the focus repeatedly to adjust the AF s point of focus The adjustment will not be applied to AF during Live View shooting or movie shooting The adjustments will be retained even if you clear all the camera settings p 70 However the setting itself will be Disable F Notes for AF Microadjustment Itis best to make the adjustment at the actual location where you will shoot This will make the adjustment more precise Using a tripod when making the adjustment is recommended For making adjustments shooting at the ML image recording quality is recommended 138 When Autofocus Fails Autofocus can fail to achieve focus viewfinder s focus indicator lt gt blinks with certain subjects such as the following Subjects Difficult to Focus Subjects with very low contrast Example Blue skies solid color flat surfaces etc Subjects in very low light Strongly backlit or reflective subjects Example Cars with highly reflective bodies etc Near and distant subjects framed close to an AF point Example Animals in cages etc Subjects such as dots of light framed close to an AF point Example Night scenes etc Repetitive patterns
337. ng switch to lt gt Set the desired aperture While looking at the LCD monitor turn the lt gt dial Focus and shoot the movie The procedure is the same as steps 3 and 4 for Autoexposure Shooting p 314 dD Changing the aperture during movie shooting is not recommended since variations in the exposure due to the drive of the lens aperture will be recorded 316 Shooting Movies DD ISO speed in the lt 4 gt mode Inthe lt E gt mode the ISO speed will be set automatically within ISO 100 ISO 16000 ISO Speed in the lt P gt lt Tv gt lt Av gt and lt B gt Mode The ISO speed will be set automatically within ISO 100 ISO 16000 Under t 82 ISO speed settings p 157 if you set the ISO speed range s Maximum setting to H1 25600 in the lt P gt lt Av gt or lt B gt mode the automatic ISO range will be expanded to H1 equivalent to ISO 25600 Even if you set the Maximum and Minimum to a narrower range than the default ISO range ISO 100 ISO 16000 it will not take effect If 3 Highlight tone priority is set to Enable p 180 the automatic ISO range will be ISO 200 ISO 16000 Under t482 ISO speed settings Auto ISO range and Min shutter spd cannot be set p 158 159 for movie shooting Also ISO speed range cannot be set in the lt Tv gt mode D For ISO speed range if Maximum is set to H2 512
338. nge Darker Brighter Turn the lt gt dial to set the AEB ES E AE ET range If you turn lt 63 gt you can set the exposure compensation E Press lt gt to set it gt When you exit the menu lt gt and the AEB range will be displayed on the LCD panel A 3 Take the picture A Three bracketed shots will be taken ca according to the drive mode set in this sequence Standard exposure decreased exposure and increased exposure AEB will not be automatically canceled To cancel AEB follow step 2 to turn off the AEB range display Standard Decreased Increased exposure exposure exposure 227 Auto Exposure Bracketing AEB EE F During AEB lt gt in the viewfinder and lt gt on the LCD panel will blink Ifthe drive mode is set to lt L gt or lt S gt press the shutter button three times for each shot When lt HiH gt lt A gt or lt S gt is set and you hold down the shutter button completely the three bracketed shots will be taken continuously and the camera will automatically stop shooting When lt j gt or lt 2 gt is set the three bracketed shots will be taken continuously after a 10 sec or 2 sec delay You can set AEB in combination with exposure compensation If the AEB range exceeds 3 stops the end of the exposure level indicator will display lt aA gt or lt q w gt AEB cannot be used with flash bulb exposures or when Multi Sh
339. nk problems File Error The selected image cannot be printed via PictBridge Images taken with a different camera or images edited with a computer may not be printable 420 Digital Print Order Format DPOF You can set the print type date imprinting and file number imprinting The print settings will be applied to all print ordered images They cannot be set individually for each image Setting the Printing Options 1 Select Print order eee Under the 11 tab select Print Rotateimage order then press lt amp gt Erase images Print order Photobook Set up Image copy RAW image processing Print order 2 Select Set up CJ Standard 0 prints Date Off File No Off Sel lmage By fa All image Set up MENU a 3 Set the options as desired Set the Print type Date and File No Select the option to be set then press lt gt Select the desired setting then press lt gt Print order i Print order Ki Print order Set up Set up Set up Print type b Index On Both gt Print type Date File No 421 gt Digital Print Order Format DPOF Standard Prints one image on one sheet Multiple thumbnail images are printed on Index Print type one sheet Prints both the standard and index prints O On imprints the recorded date on the print On imprints the file number on the print 4 Exit the setting Press the lt MENU gt button The p
340. nt Rec time Magnificatn apx 2x Ctrl over HDMI Disable Magnificatn apx 1x no magnification 4x magnify from center 8x magnify from center 10x magnify from center Actual size from selected pt Same as last magnif from ctr 1x no magnification The image is not magnified The magnified view will start with the single image display 2x 4x 8x 10x magnify from center The magnified view starts at the image center at the selected magnification Actual size from selected point The recorded image s pixels will be displayed at approx 100 The magnified view starts at the AF point that achieved focus If the photo is taken with manual focus the magnified view starts at the image center Same as last magnification from center The magnification will be the same as the last time you exited the magnified view with the lt L gt gt or lt Q gt button The magnified view starts at the image center Fl For images taken with X Tracking or FlexiZone Single p 299 or with Distortion set to Enable p 182 the magnified view will start at the image center even if Actual size from selected pt is set 365 1 Comparing Images Two Image Display You can compare two images side by side on the LCD monitor In the two image display you can use magnified view or jump display as well as protect rate and delete images 1 Set the two image display During image playback
341. nting Set them if necessary PA Printing 5 Set the date and file number Select lt gt then press lt gt Set the print settings as desired then press lt gt 6 Set the number of copies Set it if necessary Select lt g gt then press lt gt Select the number of copies then press lt gt F Start printing Select Print then press lt 6 gt The Default setting for printing effects and other options are the printer s own default settings as set by the printer s manufacturer Refer to the printer s instruction manual to find out what the Default settings are Depending on the image s file size and image recording quality it may take some time for the printing to start after you select Print If image tilt correction p 419 is applied it may take longer to print the image To stop the printing press lt QE gt while Stop is displayed then select OK If you execute 4 Clear all camera settings p 70 all the settings will revert to their defaults 417 Printing SSS as Adjusting Printing Effects In step 4 on page 416 select the printing effect When the lt MEA gt icons are displayed brightly you can press the lt INFO gt button You can then adjust the PrintEffect o NELIE nig printing effects What can be adjusted or Brightness sa Adjust levels Off what is displayed will depend on the AE DO
342. number imprinting to on or off wa EJDefault 3 i aar aa p 417 e z a eile 9 Off Pi copies Sets quantity to be printed p 417 Cropping Sets print area p 419 PRAET Paper settings Sets paper size type and layout p 415 B Photo Cancel Returns to the screen in step 1 B Borderless Print Starts printing Pf The paper size type and layout you set are displayed Depending on the printer certain settings such as the date and file number imprinting and cropping may not be selectable BE vctaui 3 Select Paper settings ee o off The paper settings screen will J o copies appear Cropping J 9x13cm Paper settings A dato ce Cancel B Borderless Print 414 PA Printing eee LJ Setting the Paper Size ap papers Select the size of the paper loaded in 1 the printer then press lt gt a gt The paper type screen will appear CreditCard Setting the Paper Type SR RRT Select the type of the paper loaded in the printer then press lt gt Fast photo gt The page layout screen will appear Default Setting the Page Layout TRAN Select the page layout then press Bordered lt Ge gt gt The print setting screen will reappear Default The print will have white borders along the edges Borderless The print will have no borders If your printer cannot print borderless prints the print will have borders The shooting information will be imprinte
343. o simulation Enable p 296 is set You can display the electronic level by pressing the lt INFO gt button p 75 Note that if the AF method is set to X Tracking or the camera is connected to a TV set with an HDMI cable the electronic level cannot be displayed When lt J gt is displayed in white it indicates that the Live View image brightness is close to what the captured image will look like If lt a gt is blinking it indicates that the Live View image is displayed at a brightness that differs from the actual shooting result because of low or bright light conditions However the actual image recorded will reflect the exposure setting Note that the noise may be more noticeable than the actual image recorded If Multi Shot Noise Reduction bulb exposure or flash is used the lt GH gt icon and histogram will be grayed out for your reference The histogram may not be properly displayed in low or bright light conditions 4D Do not hold the camera in the same position for long periods of time Even if the camera does not feel too hot prolonged contact with the same body part may cause skin redness blistering or low temperature contact burns Using a tripod is recommended for people with circulation problems or very sensitive skin or when using the camera in very hot places 289 C3 Shooting with the LCD Monitor Scene Icons In the lt gt shooting mode the camera detects the scene type an
344. o back to step 2 To cancel the editing press the lt MENU gt button then select OK on the confirmation screen 380 X Editing a Movie s First and Last Scenes a mmo Save the edited movie Select then press lt gt The save screen will appear To save it as a new movie select New file To save it and overwrite the original movie file select Overwrite then press lt gt On the confirmation screen select OK to save the edited movie and return to the movie playback screen Since the editing is performed in approx 1 sec increments position indicated by d on the top of the screen the actual position where the movie is edited may differ from the position you specified If the card does not have enough free space New file will not be available When the battery level is low movie editing is not possible Use a fully charged battery Movies shot with another camera cannot be edited with this camera 381 M Slide Show Auto Playback You can play back the images on the card as an automatic slide show 1 Select Slide show Resize Under the gt 2 tab select Slide baung show then press lt gt Slide show Image transfer Image jump w Select the images to be played Select the desired option on the WP 46 images screen then press lt 61 gt All images All images Movies Stills Protect son Select one of the following
345. o select the 2 tab Turn the lt 3 gt dial to select Language then press lt gt FD brightness Date Time Zone Languageta Romans 3 Set the desired language ____ Turn the lt gt dial to select the Frangais Espa ol 4 pal Nederlands 21 UC Ma language then press lt Q gt Dansk Pycckun APX Portugu s Polski EPX gt The interface language will change Suomi e tina z0 Italiano ETELE AA YkpaiHcbKa 49 Attaching and Detaching a Lens The camera is compatible with all Canon EF and EF S lenses The camera cannot be used with EF M lenses Attaching a Lens Remove the caps Remove the rear lens cap and the body cap by turning them as shown by the arrows Attach the lens Align the lens s red or white mount index with the camera s mount index of the same color Turn the lens as shown by the arrow until it clicks in place Set the lens s focus mode switch to lt AF gt lt AF gt stands for autofocus lt MF gt stands for manual focus Autofocus will not operate Remove the front lens cap Al Image Conversion Factor Since the image sensor size is smaller than the 35mm film format the angle of view of an 35mm image size attached lens will be equivalent 36 x 24 mm 1 42 x 0 94 in to that of a lens with approx 1 6x of the focal length indicated 50 Image sensor size App
346. o switching INFO faao RATE DAERA Default settings e Tracking sensitivity O e Accel decel tracking 1 e AF pt auto switching 0 Geared for tracking moving subjects whose speed can change dramatically and suddenly Effective for subjects having sudden movements sudden acceleration sudden deceleration or sudden stops F If the subject is in motion and prone to sudden dramatic changes in speed setting Accel decel tracking to 2 may give better results p 114 110 EW Selecting Al Servo AF Characteristics Case 5 For erratic subjects moving quickly in any direction disabled in Single point AF mode O D 2 Even if the target subject moves gt E ee dramatically up down left or right the ke For erratic subjects moving AF point will switch automatically to a focus track the subject Effective for Accel decel tracking shooting subjects that move dramatically eae up down left or right This setting takes effect when the AF F Default settings area selection mode is set to AF point e Tracking sensitivity 0 e Accel decel tracking 0 e AF pt auto switching 1 expansion manual selection 2 AF point expansion manual selection surrounding points Zone AF manual selection of zone Large Zone AF manual selection of Zone or 65 point automatic selection AF This setting is not available with the Single point Spot AF manual selection and Single point AF manual s
347. ocus on If no faces are detected the camera will switch to FlexiZone Multi for automatic selection p 302 3 Focus on the subject Press the shutter button halfway to focus gt When focus is achieved the AF point will turn green and the beeper will sound If focus is not achieved the AF point will turn orange 300 Using AF to Focus AF Method CC SSRA Take the picture Check the focus and exposure then press the shutter button completely to take the picture p 286 12 556 PRBS 159100 N Focusing on a subject other than a human face Press lt gt or lt gt and the AF frame lt lt gt will appear in the center Then use lt 4 gt to move the AF frame over the desired subject Once the AF frame achieves focus it will track the subject even if the subject moves or if you change the composition O If the subject s face is significantly out of focus face detection will not be possible You can prevent this by setting B 5 Continuous AF to Enable An object other than a human face may be detected as a face amp Face detection will not work if the face is very small or large in the picture too bright or too dark or partially hidden The lt 1 gt may cover only part of the face F Since AF is not possible with a face detected near the edge of the picture the lt 1 gt will be grayed out If you press the shutter button halfway in th
348. ode Evaluative metering Al Servo 2nd Equal priority ISO speed image priority Minimum limit 100 Lens electronic Enable after ISO speed range a imum limit 16000 MF One Shot AF Auto ISO range ae AF assist beam firing beam firing Enable si aaa AL One Shot AF Focus priority Minimum shutter Auto release priority speed Lens drive when Continue focus J Single shooting AF impossible search Exposure Selectable AF t Flash exposure Canceled Select AF area All items compensation selection mode selected Red eye reduction AF area selection M Fn button Multiple exposure method HDR Mode Disable HDR Orientation linked Same for both Interval timer AF point vertical horizontal Bulb timer Initial AF point 2 Auto Anti flicker shootin Al Servo AF Mirror lockup Automatic AF Viewfinder display point selection Enable Viewfinder level Hide EOS iTR AF VF grid display Manual AF point Stops at AF area Show hide in Only Flicker selection pattern edges viewfinder checkmarked Selected Custom Functions during focus constant Flash control Flashfiring _ Enable E TTL Il Evaluative flash Al Servo AF Flash metering metering AF status in Show in field of Flash sync speed Auto viewfinder view in Av mode AF Disable Microadjustment Adjustment amount retained Before You Start Image Recording Settings Image quality AL Picture Style Standard Auto Lighting Standard Optimizer Peripheral illu
349. ode to lt P gt lt Tv gt lt Av gt or lt M gt set a Picture Style other than lt 2 2A gt then shoot again p 160 2 FAQ The focus indicator lt gt blinks and focus is not achieved Aim the Area AF frame over an area with good contrast then press the shutter button halfway p 55 If you are too close to the subject move away and try again When focus is achieved the AF points do not light up in red The AF points light up in red in low light conditions Multiple AF points light up simultaneously Focus has been achieved at all those points As long as the AF point covering the desired subject lights up you can take the picture The beeper continues to beep softly The focus indicator lt gt does not light up It indicates that the camera is focusing continuously on a moving subject The focus indicator lt gt does not light up You can take sharp pictures of a moving subject Note that focus lock p 83 will not work in this case 81 Gt Fully Automatic Shooting Scene Intelligent Auto 82 Pressing the shutter button halfway does not focus on the subject If the focus mode switch on the lens is set to lt MF gt manual focus set it to lt AF gt autofocus The flash fired even though it was daylight For a backlit subject the flash may fire to help lighten the subject s dark areas If you do not want the flash to fire use the Quick Control to set Flash firing to
350. off LCD brightness Viewfinder display Log GPS position 3 Auto cleaning MEA button display options button function HDMI frame rate 4 1 Exposure level increments ISO speed setting increments Bracketing auto cancel Bracketing sequence Number of bracketed shots Safety shift Same exposure for new aperture 4 2 Set shutter speed range Set aperture range Continuous shooting speed 2 3 Live View shooting area display Dial direction during Tv Av Multi function lock Custom Controls QD My Menu settings will not be registered under Custom shooting modes F Even when the Mode Dial is set to lt W gt lt gt or lt gt you can still change shooting function settings and menu settings By pressing the lt INFO gt button you can check which shooting mode is registered under lt gt lt gt and lt E gt p 468 469 466 15 Reference This chapter provides reference information for camera features system accessories etc Fl Certification Logo Select Y 4 Certification Logo Display and press lt gt to display some of the logos of the camera s certifications Other certification logos can be found in this Instruction Manual on the camera body and on the camera s package INFO Button Functions m If you press the lt INFO gt button when the camera is ready to shoot the screens for the Displays camera settings Electronic level p 75 and Displays shooting func
351. oment the picture is taken When the AF area selection mode p 90 is set to 65 point automatic selection AF focus tracking will continue as long as the Area AF frame covers the subject E With Al Servo AF the beeper will not sound even when focus is achieved Also the focus indicator lt gt in the viewfinder will not light up Al Focus AF for Switching the AF Operation Automatically Al Focus AF switches the AF operation from One Shot AF to Al Servo AF automatically if a still subject starts moving After the subject is focused in One Shot AF if the subject starts moving the camera will detect the movement change the AF operation automatically to Al Servo AF and start tracking the moving subject E When focus is achieved with Al Focus AF with the Servo operation active the beeper will continue beeping softly However the focus indicator lt gt in the viewfinder will not light up Note that focus will not be locked in this case 88 AF Selecting the AF Operation AF Operation Indicator When you press the shutter button halfway and the camera is focusing with AF the lt B gt icon will appear on the lower right of the viewfinder In the One Shot AF mode the icon also appears if you press the shutter button halfway after focus is achieved Fil The AF operation indicator can be displayed outside the viewfinder s image area p 132 AF Points Lighting Up in Red The AF points light up in red in
352. onversion filter 172 WB White Balance Correction White Balance Auto Bracketing With just one shot three images with different color tones can be recorded simultaneously Based on the color temperature of the current white balance setting the image will be bracketed with a blue amber bias or magenta green bias This is called white balance bracketing WB BKT White balance bracketing is possible up to 3 levels in single level increments Set the white balance bracketing amount In step 2 for White Balance Correction when you turn the lt gt dial the a mark on the screen will change to a 3 points Turning the dial to the right sets the B A bracketing and turning it to the left sets the M G bracketing gt On the right Bracket indicates the eee bracketing direction and correction M 5 Shift SEE Clear all amount Bracket EIN ok Pressing the lt j gt button will cancel all the WB Shift Bkt settings Press lt gt to exit the setting Bracketing Sequence The images will be bracketed in the following sequence 1 Standard white balance 2 Blue B bias and 3 Amber A bias or 1 Standard white balance 2 Magenta M bias and 3 Green G bias 173 WB White Balance Correction 0 174 During WB bracketing the maximum burst for continuous shooting will be lower and the number of possible shots will also decrea
353. ook more Toning effect P Purple Impressive G Green The following can be selected N None S Sepia B Blue P Purple or G Green 165 313 Registering a Picture Style You can select a base Picture Style such as Portrait or Landscape adjust its parameters as desired and register it under User Def 1 User Def 2 or User Def 3 You can create multiple Picture Styles with different settings for parameters such as sharpness and contrast You can also adjust the parameters of a Picture Style that is registered to the camera with EOS Utility EOS software p 537 1 Press the lt C gt button 2 Select 42 Fae The Picture Style selection screen will Picture Style appeal Choose image effects to suit the subject or scene Picture Style Select User Def User Def 1 Standard Select User Def then press SAO aOR lt INFO gt button Detail set E 1 User Def 1 Press lt GED gt eee standare With Picture Style selected press QSharpness 0 lt E gt contrast 5 Saturation DME Detail set EET User Def 1 Select the base Picture Style Kicture style Landscape Select the base Picture Style then press lt gt To adjust the parameters of a Picture Style that is registered to the camera with EOS Utility EOS software select the Picture Style here 166 Detail set E 1 User Def 1 Picture Style ERETI Sharpness contrast amp Saturation c co
354. oorsieddivvediinatees 69 Black and white images 162 165 Bracketing cccccseeeeeeees 173 227 Bulb exposures 0 cceeeee eee 230 Bulb TINIAN Gocsccnccesevettinaveseterenncin 231 BUSY eee thehen iiecgstecedaoadedentencece 153 C Custom shooting 0006 464 Cable 3 385 412 425 478 534 Protecti eero eects 34 Camera Camera shake 53 54 246 Clearing the camera settings 70 Holding the camera 00 54 Settings display eee 468 CALS sevicgeiendedscecedtantenabins 5 21 41 67 Card reminde ccccecceeeeeees 42 Formatting cnnssoissemectccusensOnaans 67 Low level formatting 00 68 Troubleshooting 0008 44 68 Write protection 0ccccccceees 41 CaSe o e 108 Center weighted average metering sia cotensunitiandentetercorsemivncacs 225 CF card gt Cards CM ANOS N arrid seacabencectaccees 32 38 Chromatic aberration correction 182 Cleaning image sensor 405 Clearing the camera settings 70 CU ee eE 409 Color Space cseeeeceeeeceeeeeeeeeeees 187 Color temperature 168 171 Color tone xcaiseninicomanitacetnccutesenaad 164 Continuous AF cc ssseeeeeeeeees 294 Continuous file numbering 193 Continuous shooting 0 0 141 Contrast a an 164 175 Coordinated Universal Time 198 Copyright information
355. oot With a A B C set the A B flash ratio and flash exposure compensation amount for C then shoot Using Wireless Flash Creative Wireless Flash Shooting Flash exposure compensation When Flash mode is set to E TTL Il flash exposure compensation can be set The flash exposure compensation settings that can be set see below vary depending on the Wireless func and Firing group settings Built in flash settings Wireless func z A Channel 1 exp comp 3 2 1 0 1 2 13 Firing group E AELE exp comp 3 2 1 1 2 3 INFO Ramee milatare FE lock Flash exposure compensation The flash exposure compensation is applied to the built in flash and all the external Speedlites exp comp The flash exposure compensation is applied to the built in flash a Exp comp The flash exposure compensation is applied to all the external Speediites A B exp comp The flash exposure compensation is applied to both groups A and B Grp C exp comp The flash exposure compensation is applied to group C lf Flash mode is set to E TTL II you can press the lt M Fn gt button to perform FE lock p 258 282 Using Wireless Flash EE Manual Setting of the Flash Output for Wireless Flash Shooting When Flash mode is set to Manual flash flash exposure can be set manually The flash output settings that can be set flash output Group A output etc
356. ormation will be lacking If there are too many pixels on the right the color will be too saturated with no gradation By checking the image s RGB histogram you can see the color s saturation and gradation condition as well as white balance inclination 360 Normal brightness gt Searching for Images Quickly m EJ Display Multiple Images on One Screen Index Display You can search for images quickly with the index display showing 4 9 36 or 100 images on one screen 1 Press the lt Q gt button During image playback or when the camera is ready to shoot press the lt Q gt button gt Q will be displayed on the lower right of the screen 2 Switch to the index display Turn the lt amp gt dial counterclockwise The 4 image index display will appear The selected image is highlighted with an orange frame Turning the lt gt dial further counterclockwise will switch the display from 9 images 36 images and to 100 images If you turn the dial clockwise it will rotate through 100 36 9 4 and single image display sree 3 Select an image Turn the lt 3 gt dial to move the orange frame and select the image Press the lt Q gt button to turn off the 2 Q J icon then turn the lt gt dial to go to the next screen or previous image Press lt 6 gt in the index display to display the selected image in the single im
357. osed Set the cropping right before printing If you change the print settings after setting the cropping you may have to set the cropping again before printing 1 On the print setting screen select Cropping gt Set the cropping frame size position and aspect ratio The image area within the cropping frame will be printed The cropping frame s aspect ratio can be changed with Paper settings Changing the Cropping Frame Size Turn the lt gt dial to change the cropping frame size The smaller the cropping frame the larger the image magnification will be for printing Moving the Cropping Frame Use lt gt to move the frame over the image vertically or horizontally Move the cropping frame until it covers the desired image area Switching the Orientations of the Cropping Frame Pressing the lt INFO gt button will toggle the cropping frame between the vertical and horizontal orientations This enables you to create a vertically oriented print from a horizontal image Image Tilt Correction By turning the lt gt dial you can tilt the image between 10 and 10 degrees in 0 5 degree increments When you adjust the image tilt the lt amp gt icon on the screen will turn blue gt Press lt gt to exit the cropping gt The print setting screen will reappear You can check the cropped image area on the upper left of the print setting screen 419 Printing SSS GD If the image s aspect rat
358. osure compensation AEB setting ISO speed ISO speed range ee Spoed Settings Auto ISO range Minimum shutter speed a Auto Lighting Disable Low Standard High oe Optimizer 1 3 and 1 2 stop increments 5 stops AEB 3 stops Disabled in M or B modes White balance GMD 30 Bay YE SEIEN E4 Approx 2500 10000 Custom White Balance Manual setting of white balance 169 White balance shift White balance correction B A M G bias 9 levels each White balance bracketing B A and M G bias bracketing single level increments 3 levels During movie shooting Expo comp AEB will be Exposure comp Shooting 3 Red 222A Auto 225 Standard P Portrait Picture Style ezl Landscape E3N Neutral E F Faithful EzM Monochrome E User Def 1 3 See Disable Auto Enable 178 reduction High ISO speed noise Disable Low Standard High reduction Multi Shot Noise Reduction Highlight tone priority Disable Enable 8 Dust Delete Data Obtain data to be used by EOS software to 407 delete dust spots Multiple exposure Multiple exposure control Multiple exposure Number of exposures Save source images 238 Continue multiple exposure Adjust dynamic range Effect Continuous HON Moge HDR Auto Image Align Save source images nee 485 Menu Settings 3 Shooting 4 Red Page Red eye reduction Disable Enable 256 Interval timer Disable Enable
359. ot Noise Reduction or HDR Mode is set AEB will be canceled automatically when you set the power switch to lt OFF gt or when the flash is ready to fire 228 AE LOCK m Use AE lock when the area of focus is to be different from the exposure metering area or when you want to take multiple shots at the same exposure setting Press the lt gt button to lock the exposure then recompose and take the shot This is called AE lock It is effective for backlit subjects etc 1 Focus on the subject Press the shutter button halfway gt The exposure setting will be displayed SSN 2 Press the lt gt button 64 gt The lt gt icon lights up in the viewfinder to indicate that the exposure setting is locked AE lock Each time you press the lt gt button the current exposure setting is locked 3 Recompose and take the picture The exposure level indicator on the right of the viewfinder will show the AE lock exposure level and the current exposure level in real time If you want to maintain the AE lock while taking more shots hold down the lt gt button and press the shutter button to take another shot AE Lock Effects Metering Mode AF Point Selection Method p 93 p 224 Automatic Selection Manual Selection on AE lock is applied at the AF AE lock is applied at the el point that achieved focus selected AF point S leJC J AE lock is applied at the center AF po
360. ot turn off 69 Before You Start a SSS eee M3 Setting the Image Review Time You can set how long the image is displayed on the LCD monitor just after shooting To keep the image displayed set Hold To not have the image displayed set Off 1 Select Image review Under the 1 tab select Image review then press lt gt SHOOT Image review Set the desired time Select the desired setting then press lt G1 gt Fl If Hold is set the image will be displayed until the auto power off time elapses 1 Reverting the Camera to the Default Settings The camera s shooting function settings and menu settings can be reverted to their defaults O ar o Mp 1 Select Clear all camera settings Under the 4 tab select Clear all Clear all camera settings camera settings then press lt gt Copyright information Certification Logo Display O firmware ver 1 0 0 an SET UP4 Custom shooting mode C1 C3 Clear all camera settings 2 Select OK gt Clearing all the camera settings will reset the camera to the default settings on pages 71 73 Clear all camera settings Cancel 70 Before You Start Shooting Function Settings AF Settings AF operation One Shot AF Case1 Parameter AF area selection Single point AF Case 1 6 settings of all mode Manual Selection cases cleared AF point selection Al Servo 1st Equalprority Registered AF point image priority Metering m
361. ote Controller TC 80N3 sold separately is recommended p 248 You can also use a remote controller sold separately p 248 Setting the remote controller to a 2 sec delay is recommended Using the Eyepiece Cover m When you use the self timer bulb or a remote switch and do not look through the viewfinder stray light entering the viewfinder can cause the picture to look dark To prevent this use the eyepiece cover p 33 attached to the camera strap During Live View shooting and movie shooting attaching the eyepiece cover is unnecessary Detach the eyecup While grasping both sides of the eyecup slide it upward to detach it 4 aN Attach the eyepiece cover NAL Slide the eyepiece cover down into the eyepiece groove to attach it FEE cmn O I U ws After you finish shooting detach the o CJZ eyepiece cover and attach the Canon te eyecup 247 f Using a Remote Switch me You can connect the Remote Switch RS 80N3 sold separately or Timer Remote Controller TC 80N3 sold separately or any EOS accessory equipped with an N3 type terminal to the camera for shooting p 478 To operate the accessory refer to its instruction manual 1 Open the terminal cover 2 Connect the plug to the remote control terminal J Connect the plug as shown in the illustration To disconnect the plug grasp the silver part and pull i Remote
362. ou use a tripod or if the Image Stabilizer is not necessary it is recommended that you set the IS switch to lt OFF gt The camera s built in microphone will also pick up camera operation noise Use an external microphone commercially available to reduce camera operation noise in the movie Do not connect anything other than an external microphone to the camera s external microphone IN terminal With autoexposure shooting or shutter priority AE if the brightness changes during movie shooting the movie may freeze temporarily In such cases shoot movies with aperture priority AE or manual exposure If there is a very bright light source in the image the bright area may appear black on the LCD monitor The movie will be recorded almost exactly as it appears on the LCD monitor In low light noise or irregular colors may appear in the image The movie will be recorded almost exactly as it appears on the LCD monitor If you play back a movie with other devices image or sound quality may deteriorate or playback may not be possible even if the devices support MOV MP4 format 351 4 General Movie Shooting Cautions Recording and Image Quality If you use a card with a slow writing speed a five level indicator may appear on the right of the screen during movie shooting It indicates how much data has not yet been written to the card remaining capacity of the internal buffer memory The slower the card the
363. p data 2014 ZENRIN continue to log information even when the camera s power is off including auto power off GPS digital compass settings Select Set up GPS Enable Check that GPS is set to Enable SELT Select Set up then press lt gt GPS digital compass settings Select GPS Logger Auto time setting Disable Position update interval Every 15s Digital compass Enable GPS information display Calibrate digital compass GPS Logger Disable MENU pS GPS Logger Set Log GPS position to Log GPS position Enable p Enable Select Log GPS position then press lt gt Select Enable then press lt gt Fl When the GPS logging function is enabled the LOG icon will appear on the shooting function settings screen p 201 When you set the power switch to lt OFF gt or when auto power off takes effect lt LOG gt will be displayed on the LCD panel 210 Logging the Route Traveled eee Geotag Information Logs Geotag information for the route the camera traveled is recorded at the intervals set with Position update interval p 205 The log data is saved in the camera s internal memory by date The table below shows how many days worth of data can be saved Log Data Capacity by Positioning Interval Approx Update Interval Log Data Update Interval Log Data 4 1 days Every 30 sec 100 days Every 10 sec 41 days 100 days Every 15 sec 61 days 100 days Assuming 8 h
364. pacity of the card image recording quality ISO speed etc Even if shooting 2 000 or more shots is possible the indicator will display only up to 1999 Setting t491 Release shutter without card to Disable will prevent you from forgetting to insert a card p 484 42 Installing and Removing the Card ay Removing the Card 1 Open the cover Set the power switch to lt OFF gt Make sure the access lamp is off then open the cover If Recording is displayed close the cover 2 Remove the card To remove the CF card push the eject button To remove the SD card push it in gently and release it Then pull it out Pull the card straight out then close CF card eject button the cover 43 Installing and Removing the Card GD When the access lamp is lit or blinking it indicates that images are being written to read from or erased from the card or data is being transferred Do not open the card slot cover during this time Also never do any of the following while the access lamp is lit or blinking Otherwise it can damage the image data card or camera e Removing the card e Removing the battery e Shaking or banging the camera around Ifthe card already contains recorded images the image number may not start from 0001 p 193 Ifa card related error message is displayed on the LCD monitor remove and reinsert the card If the error per
365. peed is set to A AUTO you can set exposure compensation p 226 as follows e 2 Expo comp AEB Under 9 3 Custom Controls use S Expo comp hold btn turn p 455 or amp Expo comp hold down lever turn p 455 e Quick Control p 61 Set the exposure compensation amount while checking the exposure level indicator on the lower part of the viewfinder or on the LCD panel 0 If Auto ISO is set the ISO speed setting will change to suit the shutter speed and aperture in order to obtain a standard exposure Therefore you may not obtain the desired exposure effect In such a case set the exposure compensation If flash is used when Auto ISO is set exposure compensation will not be applied even if an exposure compensation amount is set Fi Under 2 Auto Lighting Optimizer if the checkmark lt v gt for Disabled in M or B modes is removed Auto Lighting Optimizer can be set even in the lt M gt mode p 175 When Auto ISO is set you can press the lt gt button to lock the ISO speed If you press the lt gt button and recompose the shot you can see the exposure level difference on the exposure level indicator compared to when you pressed the lt gt button If exposure compensation p 226 was applied in lt P gt lt Tv gt or lt Av gt mode and then the shooting mode is switched to lt M gt with Auto ISO set the exposure compensation amount already set wi
366. peedlite flash exposure compensation cannot be set with the camera When the external Speedlite s flash exposure compensation is canceled set to 0 flash exposure compensation can be set with the camera High speed sync cannot be set in the lt Av gt mode Under 81 Flash control set Flash sync speed in Av mode to Auto p 263 The camera makes a small noise when it is shaken When the camera s internal components slightly move a small sound may be heard The shutter makes two shooting sounds during Live View shooting If you use flash the shutter will make two sounds each time you shoot p 287 During Live View or movie shooting a white amp or red icon is displayed It indicates that the camera s internal temperature is high If the white lt gt icon is displayed the still photo s image quality may deteriorate If the red lt i gt icon is displayed it indicates that the Live View or movie shooting will soon stop automatically p 310 351 502 Troubleshooting Guide Movie shooting stops by itself Ifthe card s writing speed is slow movie shooting may stop automatically For cards that can record movies see page 5 To find out the card s writing speed refer to the card manufacturer s website Ifthe movie shooting time reaches 29 min 59 sec the movie shooting will stop automatically Movie Servo AF cannot be used The movie recording size is set to FFHD BE 59
367. pending on the shooting conditions noise may increase If the Auto Lighting Optimizer is too strong and the image is too bright set Low or Disable Ifa setting other than Disable is set and you use exposure compensation or flash exposure compensation to darken the exposure the image may still come out bright If you want a darker exposure set this function to Disable If t 83 Highlight tone priority is set to Enable the Auto Lighting Optimizer will be set automatically to Disable ir In step 2 if you press the lt INFO gt button and uncheck lt v gt the Disabled in M or B modes setting the Auto Lighting Optimizer can also be set in the lt M gt and lt B gt modes 175 MI Setting Noise Reduction me High ISO Speed Noise Reduction This function reduces the noise generated in the image Although noise reduction is applied at all ISO speeds it is particularly effective at high ISO speeds At low ISO speeds the noise in the darker parts of the image shadow areas is further reduced Select High ISO speed NR picture Style Standard Under the 683 tab select High ISO Long exp noise reduction OFF speed NR then press lt GE gt High ISO speed NR all Highlight tone priority Dust Delete Data Multiple exposure Disable HDR Mode Disable HDR High ISO speed NR Set the level Low Select the desired noise reduction Tar level then press lt 1 gt Multi Shot Noise
368. photos Still photo shooting during movie shooting will have approx 99 coverage with IFD or EHD and approx 98 with fyGa when the image recording quality is set to JPEG L AEB cannot be used Even if a flash is used it will not fire Continuous still photo shooting is possible during movie shooting However the captured images will not be displayed on the screen Depending on the still photo s image recording quality number of shots during continuous shooting card performance etc movie shooting may stop automatically AF is possible during movie shooting However the following may occur e Focus may become far off momentarily The brightness of the recorded movie may change e The recorded movie may be momentarily still e The movie may record the lens operation noise e If focus cannot be achieved you cannot shoot still photos F Exposure compensation up to 3 stops can be applied for still photo shooting during movie shooting If you want to shoot still photos continuously during movie shooting using a high speed card is recommended Setting a smaller image recording quality for still photos and shooting fewer continuous still photos are also recommended You can shoot still photos in all drive modes The self timer can be set before you start shooting a movie During movie shooting the camera will switch to single image shooting 328 Shooting Function Settings WB DRIVE AF ISO a Set
369. picture e Using the lens Image Stabilizer e Using the LCD monitor often The number of possible shots may decrease depending on the actual shooting conditions The lens operation is powered by the camera s battery Depending on the lens used the battery may exhaust faster For the number of possible shots with Live View shooting see page 287 See 3 Battery info to check the battery s condition in detail p 470 With Battery Grip BG E16 sold separately loaded with size AA LR6 batteries a four level indicator will be displayed 4 _ 4 will not be displayed 46 MW Setting the Date Time and Zone When you turn on the power for the first time or if the date time zone are reset the date time zone setting screen will appear Follow the steps below making sure to set the time zone first Set the camera to the time zone in which you currently live so that when you travel you can simply change the setting to the correct time zone for your destination and the camera will automatically adjust the date time Note that the date time appended to recorded images will be based on this date time setting Be sure to set the correct date time Display the menu screen Press the lt MENU gt button to display the menu screen 2 Under the 2 tab select Date Time Zone Press the lt Q gt button and select the tab Turn the lt gt dial to se
370. ple exposures will take time The access lamp will light up for longer than usual If you perform Live View shooting while On Func Ctrl and Additive are both set the Live View function will stop automatically when the multiple exposure shooting ends In step 9 the brightness and noise of the multiple exposure image displayed during Live View shooting will be different from the final multiple exposure image recorded If On ContShtng is set let go of the shutter button after shooting the set number of exposures If the power switch is set to lt OFF gt the battery is replaced or if you switch to movie shooting multiple exposure shooting will be canceled Ifyou switch the shooting mode to lt 3 gt or lt gt while shooting multiple exposure shooting will end If you connect the camera to a computer or printer multiple exposure shooting will not be possible If you connect the camera to a computer or printer during shooting multiple exposure shooting will stop 242 Multiple Exposures Merging Multiple Exposures with an Image Recorded on the Card You can select an image recorded on the card as the first single exposure The original of the selected image will remain intact You can only select images You cannot select M G0 S or JPEG images sultiple exposure 1 Select Select image for multi expo Multiple exposure On Func Ctrl The images on the card will be Multi expos ctrl Additive
371. ple exposure Multi expos ctrl gt CECE control method then press lt gt Bright Dark Additive The exposure of each single exposure is added cumulatively Based on the No of exposures set a negative exposure compensation Refer to the basic guide below to set a negative exposure compensation Exposure Compensation Setting Guide for Multiple Exposures Two exposures 1 stop three exposures 1 5 stop four exposures 2 stops Average Based on the No of exposures negative exposure compensation is set automatically as you shoot multiple exposures If you shoot multiple exposures of the same scene the exposure of the subject s background will be automatically controlled to obtain a standard exposure Bright Dark The brightness or darkness of the base image and the images to be added are compared at the same position and then the bright or dark part will be left in the picture Depending on the overlapping colors the colors may be mixed depending on the brightness or darkness ratio of the compared images Multiple exposure 5 Set the No of exposures Select the number of exposures then No of exposures Zs press lt Get gt You can set it from 2 to 9 exposures 239 Multiple Exposures Multiple exposure amp Set the images to be saved To save all the single exposures and the merged multiple exposure image Save source imgs select All images then press lt 6 gt R
372. points Zone AF manual F selection of zone Large Zone AF manual selection of zone or 65 point automatic selection AF Standard setting for gradual AF point switching 2 1 Even if the target subject moves dramatically up down left or right and moves away from the AF point the camera switches its focus to neighboring AF points to continue focusing on the subject The camera switches to the AF point deemed most likely to focus on the subject based on the subject s continual movement contrast etc Setting 2 makes the camera more prone to switch the AF point than with 1 However with a wide angle lens having a wide depth of field or if the subject is too small in the frame the camera may focus with the wrong AF point 115 EW Selecting Al Servo AF Characteristics E Changing Cases Parameter Settings You can manually adjust each case s three parameters 1 Tracking sensitivity 2 Acceleration deceleration tracking and 3 AF point auto switching AF1 AF config tool Case 1 io Versatile multi purpose Here setting Tracking sensitivity m Y Accel decel tracking IA Oof AF pt auto switching IA INFO aA a Default set AF1 AF config tool Case 1 ie Versatile multi purpose ee setting xq Y Accel decel tracking I A of INFO faao AF1 AF config tool Case 1 ko Versatile multi purpose HI setting xq Y Accel decel tracking of INFO LAT 1 Select a case Turn the lt 3 gt
373. prolonged contact with the same body part may cause skin redness blistering or low temperature contact burns Using a tripod is recommended for people with circulation problems or very sensitive skin or when using the camera in very hot places 325 Shooting Movies S Final Image Simulation The final image simulation shows the results of the current settings for Picture Style white balance and other functions in the image so you can see what the captured image will look like During movie shooting the image displayed will automatically show the effects of the settings listed below Final Image Simulation for Movie Shooting Picture Style All settings such as sharpness contrast color saturation and color tone will be reflected White balance White balance correction Exposure Depth of field Auto Lighting Optimizer Peripheral illumination correction Chromatic aberration correction Highlight tone priority 326 Shooting Movies Shooting Still Photos While shooting a movie you can also take a still photo by pressing the shutter button completely Taking Still Photos During Movie Shooting If you take a still photo during movie shooting the movie will record a still moment lasting approx 1 sec The captured still photo will be recorded to the card and the movie shooting will resume automatically when the Live View image is displayed The movie and still photo w
374. ptured image by approx 1 5x to 10x on the LCD monitor 1 Magnify the image The image can be magnified as follows 1 During image playback single image display 2 During the image review after image capture and 3 From the shooting ready state Press the lt Q gt button gt The magnified view will appear The magnified area and 73 Q will be displayed on the lower right of the screen The image magnification increases as you turn the lt 73 gt dial clockwise You can magnify the image up to 10x The image magnification decreases as you turn the lt gt dial counterclockwise In the case of 1 and 3 only turning the dial further will display the index display p 361 Magnified area position 2 Scroll around the image Use lt gt to scroll around the magnified image To exit the magnified view press the lt Q gt button or lt L gt gt button and the single image display will return Fl Inthe case of 1 and 3 only you can turn the lt 3 gt dial to view another image while the magnification is maintained A movie cannot be magnified 364 Q Magnifying Images E S SE umam Magnification Settings Under the L gt 3 tab when you select TERE TEEN Magnificatn apx you can set the AF point disp Disable starting magnification and initial position ayback grid of for the magnified view Histogram disp Brightness Movie play cou
375. quality White balance Picture Style and Auto Lighting Optimizer can be set In the lt gt mode you can set the items in bold and the flash firing 1 Press the lt Q gt button 610 The settable functions will be displayed AF method AF ES AF 2 Select a function and set it Use lt gt to select a function The setting of the selected function is displayed on the screen Turn the lt g gt or lt gt dial to set it a To set the RAW image recording quality press lt gt To select the card for recording playing back WB Shift Bracketing or Picture Style parameters press the lt INFO gt button Press lt gt to finalize the setting and return to Live View shooting 293 MaW Menu Function Settings m When the Live View shooting Movie Een EEE IE shooting switch is set to lt gt the Live AF method E Tracking View shooting menu options will appear Sane under the 485 and 436 tabs the EEIEIE oji P Aspect ratio 32 63 tab in lt gt Expo simulation Enable SHOOTS Lv func The settable functions on this menu screen apply only to Live View shooting They do not work with viewfinder shooting settings become invalid Live View shooting You can set Live View shooting to Enable or Disable AF method You can select X Tracking FlexiZone Multi or FlexiZone Single See pages 299 307 for the AF method Contin
376. quickly high speed panning or shoot a moving subject the image may look distorted Still photo shooting is not possible during movie shooting The movie recording size is set to FFHD BE 59 94 fps or Hi 50 00 fps When I shoot still photos during movie shooting the movie shooting stops To shoot still photos during movie shooting using a CF card capable of UDMA transfer or a UHS I SD card is recommended Setting a lower image quality for still photos or shooting fewer continuous still photos may resolve the problem Time code is off Shooting still photos during movie shooting will cause a discrepancy between the actual time and time code When you want to edit a movie using time code it is recommended not to shoot still photos during movie shooting 504 Troubleshooting Guide Operation Problems cannot change the setting with the lt gt dial lt 63 gt dial lt gt or lt gt Set the lt LOCK gt switch to the left lock release p 59 Check the 4 3 Multi function lock setting p 442 A camera button or dial does not work as expected Check the 4 3 Custom Controls setting p 445 Display Problems The menu screen shows fewer tabs and options Inthe lt G gt mode only certain menu tabs and options are displayed Set the shooting mode to lt P gt lt Tv gt lt Av gt lt M gt lt B gt p 64 Under the xX tab Menu display is set to Display only My M
377. r of data logged per day The log data saved in the internal memory can be transferred as a log file to a card p 212 One log file is created for each day The log file name has the date YYYYMMDD and a number for example 14103100 If the time zone changes p 47 a new log file will be created Ifthe camera s internal memory becomes full the oldest log data will be overwritten with the newest log data Battery Consumption During Logging When GPS is set to Enable the camera will continue to receive GPS signals at set intervals even while the camera s power is switched off This will drain the battery faster reducing the number of shots that can be taken Additionally when Log GPS position is set to Enable shorter update intervals will drain the battery more quickly When you are not traveling or when GPS signals are weak setting GPS to Disable is recommended 211 Logging the Route Traveled SS L EESESE S SSS Downloading Log Data to a Computer The log data in the camera s internal memory can be downloaded to a computer with EOS Utility EOS software or downloaded from a card after transferring the data to the card When you use Map Utility EOS software p 538 to open a log file saved on your computer the camera s travel route will be displayed on a map Importing the log data using EOS software With the camera connected to a computer via the provided int
378. r better shooting Troubleshooting advice Basic Assumptions All operations explained in this manual assume that the power switch is set to lt ON gt and the lt LOCKB gt switch is set to the left Multi function lock released p 45 59 It is assumed that all the menu settings Custom Functions etc are set to their defaults The illustrations in this manual show the camera attached with the EF S18 135mm f 3 5 5 6 IS STM lens as an example Chapters m For first time DSLR users Chapters 1 and 2 explain the camera s basic operations and shooting procedures Introduction E Getting Started 7E Basic Shooting 79 Setting the AF and Drive Modes GPS Settings Flash Photography 85 E 145 B 197 25 E 253 E Image Settings Advanced Operations Shooting with the LCD Monitor Live View Shooting SPa G SO CO NO Vv A wN Image Playback Sensor Cleaning 285 313 353 fj 397 405 Shooting Movies Post Processing Images Printing Images and Transferring Images to a Computer me ek vil Aa Reference 411 i 431 E 467 E Customizing the Camera Viewing the DVD ROM Instruction Manuals 531 E Downloading Images to Your Computer 9 Contents 2 Introduction 2 ltem Check LiISt cccccceececcceceeceesseseeeeeeessauaeaeeeeeeeeseeeaaeeeseeesseaseaees 3 Instruction Manual and DVD CD ROMSG ccccceeseseeeeeeeeeeeaeeeee
379. r of possible shots will be If you are in a location where the GPS acquisition condition is not good the number of possible shots will decrease The nature of GPS may cause some inconsistency in positioning intervals 205 Using the Digital Compass Camera orientation information the direction the camera is facing can be appended to the image GPS digital compass settings 1 Select Set up GPS Enable Check that GPS is set to Enable Sa Select Set up then press lt 6 gt GPS digital compass settings 2 Set Digital compass to Enable Select Digital compass then press lt Ge gt Digital compass b Enable Select Enable then press lt gt Ifthe Calibrate digital compass screen appears perform steps 2 and 3 on page 208 Compass Display During Shooting The camera s current orientation can be displayed on the LCD monitor When you press the lt INFO gt button to display the digital compass the direction will be displayed on the bottom of the screen tla CSLL LTP lirin NE45 N 0 45 90 pou fveucs nfs During Live View shooting and movie shooting you can confirm the age direction using the arrow icon at the ig GPS z FSIS NO location circled in this sample screen cD During continuous shooting if you change the camera direction or tilt the camera up or down the correct direction information may not be recorded The dir
380. r speeds the color tone may be inconsistent To avoid inconsistent color tones use the lt Tv gt or lt M gt mode at a fixed shutter speed The color tone of images shot when Anti flicker shoot is set to Enable may look different from when Disable is set Flicker at a frequency other than 100 Hz or 120 Hz cannot be detected Also if the light s flicker frequency changes during continuous shooting effects of the flicker cannot be reduced 185 MM Reducing Flicker SSS SS SSS enn 0 186 If the subject is against a dark background or if there is a bright light in the image flicker may not be detected Under certain special types of lighting the camera may not be able to reduce the effects of the flicker even while lt GEIS gt is displayed Depending on the light source flicker may not be detected properly If you recompose a shot lt GEIS gt may appear and disappear intermittently Depending on the light sources or shooting conditions expected result may not be obtained even if you use this function Taking test shots is recommended lf lt GHAD gt is not displayed in the viewfinder checkmark Flicker detection in Show hide in viewfinder p 77 When the camera reduces the effects of the flicker when you shoot lt GEISB gt will light Under a light source which does not flicker or if no flicker is detected lt GEAD gt will not be displayed lf Flicker detection is checkmarked and
381. ram AE cost ccertceeessnccececss 216 314 Program Shift ccccceeeeeees 217 Protecting imaQes ccee 368 Q Q Quick Control 61 293 329 374 Quick Control Dial 06 57 R Rating Mark ccccsssseeeeeeeeeees 371 RAW cated teecteeweusiceadceneee 149 151 152 RAW image processing 398 PRAVV EU EG iasiceecede ts ematecenasd 149 151 REC TUN eeeeneeenonrer ere rrrer pres errr 339 Recharging ssciancrars taewerccccevedieedeciay 38 Record function cceeceeeeeees 146 Record separately cce 147 Record to multiple 00 147 Recording level ceccees 336 Red eye reduction 06ccee 256 Reduced display seeecee 361 Release shutter without card 42 Remote control shooting 248 Remote SWItCN ccseeeeeeeeees 248 PROSIZING icccccccsnsssaecnciaadumnivnaddsacnunied 403 Rotation image 367 395 419 S Safety Shift cceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 436 Safety WarnindS eeseeeeeeeees 526 Saturation cxsssidncneccsiwsserccccriaaimantcey 164 Scene ICONS cee ece cece eee e eee 290 319 Scene Intelligent Auto 80 SD SDHC SDXC cards Cards Second curtain synchronization 269 Self tiMer oo eee eee 143 249 Sensor Cleaning eeeeeeeeeeeeees 405 Index Sepia Monochrome 00 165 SHANONESS a
382. recording quality card Rec to multiple To select a RAW quality turn the Image quality Standard lt gt dial To select a JPEG quality AL 20M 5472x3648 999 turn the lt gt dial bau eae On the upper right the M ee ee megapixels x number 7 indicates the recorded pixel count aL 4M AM AS gS S82 83 eam OK and is the number of possible shots displayed up to 9999 Press lt gt to set it Rec separately Img type size ae sapaiately Under 1 Record functcard AL 20W5472 3648 999 folder sel if Record func is set to a Rec separately select CF card J or SD card B then press lt eI gt Image quality Rec separately Select the desired image recording quality then press lt gt AL 20M 5472x3648 999 al 4M aM ASi dS S2 S3 RAW EE RA w BES RAW 149 M9 Setting the Image Recording Quality Image recording Quality Setting Examples AL only Image quality Standard AL 20M 5472x3648 999 RAW 7 RAW RAW ES RA W aL 4M AM ASi AS N2 83 SET KOJN ab LET GR ELST Standard 20M 54723648 L 20M 5472x3648 999 RAW y NTRAW iam RA W al 4M aM E S82 93 SET LOJN only LET GE UELLS Standard 20M 5472x3648 999 RAW 7 NT RAW faim RA W JPEG AL al 4M AM 451 ASi S2 S3 SET LOJN S a M LET GR UELLS Standard SQUAW 5 0M 2736x1824 aM 8 9M 3648x2432 999 y RAW A V RAW JPEG 4
383. res mem You can shoot two to nine exposures to be merged into one image If you shoot multiple exposure images with Live View shooting p 285 you can see how the single exposures are being merged while shooting 1 Press the lt C gt button Select Multiple exposure Select h then press lt gt Multiple exposure man gt The multiple exposure setting screen will appear Multiple exposure 3 Set Multiple exposure Mulu pieesposurg EEE Select On Func Ctrl or Seen On ContShtng then press lt gt To exit shooting multiple exposures select Disable On Func Ctrl Function and control priority Convenient when you want to shoot multiple exposures while checking the result as you proceed During continuous shooting the continuous shooting speed will decrease greatly On ContShtng Continuous shooting priority Geared for continuous multiple exposure shooting of a moving subject Continuous shooting is possible but the following operations are disabled during shooting menu viewing Live View display image review after image capture image playback and undo last image p 244 Also only the multiple exposure image will be saved The single exposures merged in the multiple exposure image will not be saved Fl You can also set multiple exposure with 3 Multiple exposure 238 Multiple Exposures ee Multiple exposure Set Multi expos ctrl Select the desired multi
384. rint order screen will reappear Next select Sel Image By fil or All image to order the images to be printed gD RAW images and movies cannot be print ordered You can print RAW images with PictBridge p 411 Even if Date and File No are set to On the date or file number may not be imprinted depending on the print type setting and printer model With Index prints the Date and File No cannot both be set to On at the same time When printing with DPOF use the card whose print order specifications are set It will not work if you just extract images from the card and try to print them Certain DPOF compatible printers and photofinishers may not be able to print the images as you specified Refer to the printer s instruction manual before printing or check with your photofinisher about compatibility when ordering prints Do not specify a new print order for a card containing images whose print order was set by a different camera The print order may be overwritten Also the print order may not be possible depending on the image type 422 gt Digital Print Order Format DPOF ee Print Ordering Sel Image amie iat Select and order images one by one DIGE EE 7iprints If you press the lt Q gt button and turn the Index ae lt gt dial counterclockwise you can Date 10 File No off select an image from a three image Sel image a Eo display To return to the single image
385. rofessional EOS Utility ImageBrowser EX Map Utility Picture Style Editor Instruction Manual F Adobe Reader latest version recommended must be installed to view the Instruction Manual files PDF format Install Adobe Reader if it is not already installed on your computer To save the PDF manual to your computer use the Save function of your Adobe Reader For more information about how to use Adobe Reader see Adobe Reader s Help menu E The Instruction Manual PDF incorporates page links so you can quickly go to the desired page On the Contents or Index page just click on the page number to jump E to that page 533 Viewing the EOS Camera Instruction Manuals Disk DVD ROM SSS ESaSSSSSSaamnqm Viewing the EOS Camera Instruction Manuals Disk DVD ROM MACINTOSH EOS Camera Instruction Manuals Disk Copy the PDF Instruction Manuals contained on the disk to your computer 1 Insert the EOS Camera Instruction Manuals Disk DVD into the DVD ROM drive of your Macintosh 2 Double click on the disk icon 3 Double click the START htm file 4 Click on the name of the instruction manual you want to view Select your language and operating system The index of the Instruction Manuals is displayed Canon Canon EOS 7D Mark Il Manuals EOS 72 markt EOS 7D Mark II G Hardware Manuals EOS 7D Mark II Instruction Manual Software Manuals Digital Photo Professional EOS Utility ImageBrowser
386. rop it or subject it to physical shock The camera is not waterproof and cannot be used underwater If you accidentally drop the camera into water promptly consult the nearest Canon Service Center Wipe off any water droplets with a dry and clean cloth If the camera has been exposed to salty air wipe it with a well wrung wet cloth Never leave the camera near anything having a strong magnetic field such as a magnet or electric motor Also avoid using or leaving the camera near anything emitting strong radio waves such as a large antenna Strong magnetic fields can cause camera misoperation or destroy image data Do not leave the camera in excessive heat such as in a car in direct sunlight High temperatures can cause the camera to malfunction The camera contains precision electronic circuitry Never attempt to disassemble the camera yourself Do not block the mirror operation with your finger etc Doing so may cause a malfunction Use a blower to blow away dust on the lens viewfinder reflex mirror and focusing screen Do not use cleaners that contain organic solvents to clean the camera body or lens For stubborn dirt take the camera to the nearest Canon Service Center Do not remove the focusing screen unless you are changing it When changing the focusing screen do not touch it with bare hands Instead use the dedicated tool that came with the interchangeable focusing screen sold separately Do not touch
387. rox 22 4 x 15 0 mm 0 88 x 0 59 in Attaching and Detaching a Lens Zooming Turn the zoom ring on the lens with your fingers If you want to zoom do it before focusing Turning the zoom ring after E achieving focus may throw off the focus While pressing the lens release button turn the lens as shown by the arrow Turn the lens until it stops then detach it Attach the rear lens cap to the detached lens To owners of the EF S18 135mm f 3 5 5 6 IS STM lens You can prevent the lens from extending out while you are carrying it around Set the zoom ring to the 18mm wide angle end then slide the zoom ring lock lever to lt LOCK gt The zoom ring can be locked only at the wide angle end at Do not look at the sun directly through any lens Doing so may cause loss of vision When attaching or detaching a lens set the camera s power switch to lt OFF gt If the front part focusing ring of the lens rotates during autofocusing do not touch the rotating part If you purchased a lens kit with the EF S18 135mm f 3 5 5 6 IS STM lens see Handling Precautions on page 523 51 Attaching and Detaching a Lens Attaching a Lens Hood A lens hood can block unwanted light and prevent rain snow dust etc adhering to the front of the lens Before storing the lens in a bag etc you can attach the hood in reverse If the Lens and the Lens Hood H
388. s i If Enable is set the camera will take longer to focus than when Disable is set When EOS iTR AF is operating maximum continuous shooting speed with lt HiH gt set will be approx 9 5 shots sec Also under low light conditions the continuous shooting speed may decrease Even if you set Enable expected result may not be obtained depending on the shooting conditions and subject Under light so low that the flash emits the AF assist beam automatically AF points are selected automatically based only on AF information Face detection may not work if the face is small or under low light conditions 128 tM Customizing AF Functions AF5 Manual AF point selection pattern During manual AF point selection the selection can either stop at the outer edge or it can cycle around to the opposite side This function works in AF area selection modes other than Zone AF manual selection of zone Large Zone AF manual selection of zone and 65 point automatic selection AF works with Al Servo AF Manual AF pt selec pattern Fada s Stops at AF area edges F Convenient if you often use an AF point at the periphery Continuous ta Continuous Instead of stopping at the outer edge the selection of AF point continues to the opposite side 129 tM Customizing AF Functions AF point display during focus You can set whether or not to display the AF point s in the following cases 1 When
389. s exposure of the resulting image If you set exposure compensation the image brightness will change accordingly During B Ghe EHD Normally the image is displayed at the standard brightness to make the Live View image easy to see The image will be displayed close to the actual brightness exposure of the resulting image only while you hold down the depth of field preview button e Disable GDH The image is displayed at the standard brightness to make the Live View image easy to see Even if you set exposure compensation the image is displayed at the standard brightness 296 tm Menu Function Settings SHOOT6 Lv func Silent LV shoot Mode 1 Metering timer 8 sec Silent LV shooting e Mode 1 You can suppress the camera noise when shooting Continuous shooting is also possible If lt Glin gt is set you can shoot at a maximum continuous shooting speed of approx 10 0 fps Mode 2 When the shutter button is pressed completely only one shot will be taken While you keep holding down the shutter button the camera operation will be suspended Then when you return to the shutter button s halfway position the camera operation will resume The shooting noise is thereby minimized Even if continuous shooting is set only a single shot will be taken Disable Be sure to set it to Disable if you use a TS E lens other than those listed in ir below for shifting or tilting the lens or if you use an Extension T
390. s 4 Compatible Cards ccccccssssssececcceceseeeseeceeeeeceeeeseeeeeeeseeauagssseeesees 5 Quick Start Guide ccccccccssseesessssssesseseeeceeeeeeeeeseescereeecesseseesesans 6 Conventions Used in this Manual cccccssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeens 8 Chapters aeee a EE acetates natn enna cada 9 Index to Features cceeeccccceeseeeceeseeeeeeeeeseeesseeseeeeesaseeesneaeeeeenes 17 Handling Precautions ccccccceeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeasaeeeesees 20 Nomenclature cece ceceeeeeececeeeeeceeceeeeeeceeeaseeeessaeseeesssasseessssaaeeeeess 22 1 Getting Started 37 Charging the Battery 2 0 00 cccccccececcseesseeeeeeeeeeeseeaeeeeeeeeeeessaaeeeeeeees 38 Installing and Removing the Battery cccsseeeceeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeees 40 Installing and Removing the Card ccccccsseeeeeeeeceeeeseseeeeseeeeeeees 41 Turning on the POWEL ccccccseeceeceeeeeeeeeesaeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeaeaeeeeeeaaaeeees 45 Setting the Date Time and ZONE cece cceecccceceeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeenees 47 Selecting the Interface LANQUAGE ccccceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaseeeeeeeees 49 Attaching and Detaching a Lens ccceceecesneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeees 50 Lens Image StabiliZer cc ceecccceececesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeessaeeeneees 53 Basic Operation cccccceecesseeeeeeeeeeseeeeeseeeeeeeeeeauaeeeeeeeeeeeseeaeeeeeees 54 Q Quick Control for Shooting Functions
391. s especially effective for portraits using fill flash when you want to give priority to the aperture setting Flash exposure compensation Flash exposure compensation You can set flash exposure A 1 compensation up to 3 stops in 1 3 stop Darker Brighter increments OBO msi bea ant l For details refer to the Speedlite s instruction manual Flash exposure bracketing Flash exposure bracketing While the flash output is changed aa automatically three shots are taken For details refer to the instruction manual of a Speedlite equipped with flash exposure bracketing 269 tM Setting the Flash QD When using second curtain synchronization set the shutter speed to 1 25 sec or slower If the shutter speed is 1 30 sec or faster first curtain synchronization will be applied automatically even if Second curtain synchronization is set E With an EX series Speedlite not compatible with flash function settings you can only set the following Flash firing E TTL II meter and Flash exposure compensation under External flash func setting Shutter synchronization can also be set with certain EX series Speedlites If flash exposure compensation is set with an external Speedlite you cannot set the flash exposure compensation with the camera If it is set with both the camera and external Speedlite the Speedlite s setting overrides the camera s 270 TEM Setting the Flash Extern
392. s images in the target folder will be skipped and not copied e Replace existing image Any images in the target folder having the same file number as the source images including protected images will be overwritten If an image with a print order p 421 is overwritten you will have to set the print order again The image s print order information image transfer information and photo book order information will not be retained when the image is copied Shooting is not possible during the copying operation Select Cancel before shooting 391 T Erasing Images me You can either select and erase unnecessary images one by one or erase them in one batch Protected images p 368 will not be erased Q Once an image is erased it cannot be recovered Make sure you no longer need the image before erasing it To prevent important images from being erased accidentally protect them Erasing a RAW JPEG image will erase both the RAW and JPEG images Erasing a Single Image 1 Play back the image to be erased Press the lt p gt button Ron The Erase menu will appear 3 Erase the image Select Erase then press lt gt The image displayed will be erased Fl Setting 4 4 Default Erase option to Erase selected makes it faster to erase images p 444 M Checkmarking v Images to Be Erased in a Batch By appending checkmarks lt v gt to the images to be era
393. s the AF point more responsive than 1 It is effective when you want to keep tracking a moving subject as its distance from the camera changes or to rapidly focus on another subject If FHD AM 59 94 fps or AND 50 00 fps is set Movie Servo AF will not function and therefore the settings above will not be available If AF method is set to Tracking or FlexiZone Multi the tracking sensitivity will be equivalent to the 0 setting 346 M49 Menu Function Settings Sen SHOOTS Movie Silent LV shoot Mode 1 Metering timer 8 sec Time code Silent Control Disable btn function E HDMI output LCD No mirroring Silent LV shooting This function applies to still photo shooting For details see page 297 Metering timer You can change how long the exposure setting is displayed AE lock time x Time code You can set the time code For details see pages 339 341 Silent Control When Enable is set you can use the touch pad lt gt and Quick Control screen to change settings silently during movie shooting For details see page 338 E 347 M49 Menu Function Settings E button function You can set the functions performed by pressing the shutter button halfway or completely during movie shooting Setting Pressed Halfway Pressed Completely Ea G Metering and AF Still photo shooting e6 Metering only Still photo shooting Metering and AF Starts stops movie shooting Meter
394. se to one third the normal number Since three images are recorded for one shot it takes longer to record the image to the card You can also set white balance correction and AEB together with white balance bracketing If you set AEB in combination with white balance bracketing a total of nine images will be recorded for a single shot When white balance bracketing is set the white balance icon will blink You can change the number of shots for white balance bracketing p 435 Bkt stands for bracketing MIW Auto Correction of Brightness and Contrast If the image comes out dark or the contrast is low the brightness and contrast can be corrected automatically This function is called Auto Lighting Optimizer The default setting is Standard With JPEG images the correction is applied when the image is captured Standard is automatically set in the lt Aj gt mode X Select Auto Lighting Optimizer Expo comp AEB 73 2 1 9 1 2 3 Under the I2 tab select Auto ISO speed settings ss ENET TE Eh Lighting Optimizer then press White balance AWB lt GE gt Custom White Balance WB Shift Bkt 0 0 0 Color space sRGB Auto Lighting Optimizer 2 Select the setting Standard Select the desired setting then press Gh Eh lt gt INFO VAM BYES te TeV ela si natete E 3 Take the picture The image will be recorded with the brightness and contrast corrected if necessary 4D De
395. sed you can erase multiple images at once 1 Select Erase images Bore images Under the L gt 1 1 tab select Erase eel Titel images then press lt gt Erase images Print order Photobook Set up Image copy RAW image processing 392 tT Erasing Images fi Erase images 2 Select Select and erase images Select and erase images gt An image will be displayed All images in folder All images on card Ifyou press the lt Q gt button and turn the lt s 3 gt dial counterclockwise you can select an image from a three image display To return to the single image display turn the lt gt dial clockwise 3 Select the images to be erased Turn the lt gt dial to select the image to be erased then press lt gt gt A checkmark v will be displayed on ee the upper left of the screen aE DE To select other images to be erased repeat step 3 Erase images ii 4 Erase the image Press the lt T gt button then press Erase selected images OK The selected images will be erased in one batch Cancel u Erasing All Images in a Folder or on a Card You can erase all the images in a folder or on a card at once When L gt 1 Erase images is set to All images in folder or All images on card all the images in the folder or on the card will be erased E To erase all images including protected images format the card p 67 When All images on c
396. seeeeeeeeteeeees 171 WB White Balance Correction c cccccccccccesssceeeeesssceeeesessteeeeess 172 Auto Correction of Brightness and Contrast cccceecceeeeee ees 175 Setting Noise Reduction ccccccccsseeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeessaeeeeeees 176 Highlight Tone Priority sccnsersxacencwacenicinciusiescacsanacetenneniienaiseiencuddates 180 Correction of Lens Peripheral Illumination and Aberrations 181 Reducing FNIGKGM cacacosscnneeaasadeencaadanueneasiantaatedaunctecasnanmuonimiauedeances 185 Setting the Color Space cccccccsssssseeeeeceeceaeeeseeeeeeseeauaaeseeeees 187 Creating and Selecting a FOlder ccccccccecessseeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeees 188 Changing the File NAme cccccseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeeeeeess 190 File Numbering Methods ccccccceseseeeeceeeseeeseseseeeeeeaaases 193 Setting Copyright Information cccccceceeeseasseeeeeeeeeeesssaeeseeees 195 5 GPS Settings 197 GPS Fe AICS raion cose saacdacincancnadaduaieanebtew suai Gaacdeunesd dieadiaeaditenantaussa 198 GPS PrecautionS iirevrutieiccdcaonaseveutannder viuwans teuandreerverannininncdeauaruhe 200 Acquiring GPS Signals sv iccessisiesaciacs vnsunsiventtrancetuownsiversernsdsiiveudinndes 201 Setting the Positioning InterVal ccccccceceesesseeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeees 205 Using the Digital COMPASS cece ecceeeee cee eeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeas 20
397. selecting the AF point s 2 When the camera is ready to shoot before AF operation 3 During AF operation and 4 When focus is achieved AF point display during focus No i Selected constant The selected AF point s is always All constant displayed Selected pre AF focused Selected focused SEEN Disable display zu All constant All AF points are always displayed INFO faafe cfc Selected pre AF focused The selected AF point s is displayed for 1 2 and 4 The selected AF point s is displayed for 1 and 4 and for when AF starts OFF Disable display For 2 3 and 4 the selected AF point s will not be displayed 130 tM Customizing AF Functions VF display illumination You can set whether the AF points in the viewfinder are to light up in red when focus is achieved VF display illumination AUTO Auto The AF points automatically light up Enable ON Sa or in red under low light AF point during Al Servo AF OFF ON Enable HEB AF point during Al Servo AF The AF points light up in red E Eee regardless of the ambient light level OFF Disable The AF points do not light up in red With Auto or Enable set you can set whether the AF point is to be light up in red blink when you press the lt Q gt button during Al Servo AF AF point during Al Servo AF OFF Non illuminated The AF point will not light up during Al Illuminated Servo AF ON Illuminated AF points used for fo
398. set the flash output Frequency and Flash count then shoot This mode is for advanced users O To prevent the flash from damage due to overheating do not use MULTI flash more than ten consecutive times If you use MULTI flash 10 times allow the flash to rest for at least 10 min before firing the flash again Flash will be output at 1 128 1 4 for MULTI flash 265 tM Setting the Flash E SSF Shutter synchronization Bullen flashisetings Normally set this to 1st curtain so that the flash fires immediately after the Shutter sync b exposure starts 2nd curtain If 2nd curtain is set the flash will fire right before the shutter closes When this is combined with a slow shutter speed you can create a trail of light such as from car headlights at night with a more natural feel With second curtain synchronization two flashes will be fired once when you press the shutter button completely and once immediately before the exposure ends Flash exposure compensation Built in flash settings You can set flash exposure compensation up to 3 stops in 1 3 stop increments amp exp comp Wireless functions Builvin flacheetunes With wireless flash photography via optical transmission you can use the built in flash to wirelessly control external Wireless func m2 Speediites i For details see Using Wireless Flash on page 272 QD When using second curtain synchronization
399. sfer The direct image transfer can be performed with the camera while you look at the LCD monitor The images transferred to the computer will be saved in the Pictures or My Pictures folder and organized in folders by shooting date Q Before connecting the camera to a computer install the EOS software provided on the EOS Solution Disk CD ROM to the computer For the procedure to install the EOS software see page 539 Preparing Image Transfer 1 Set the camera s power switch to lt OFF gt 2 Connect the camera to a computer Use the interface cable provided with the camera When connecting the cable to the camera use the cable protector p 34 Connect the cable to the digital terminal with the plug s lt SS lt gt w gt icon facing the back of the camera Connect the cord s plug to the computer s USB terminal QD Use the provided interface cable or one from Canon p 478 When connecting the interface cable use the provided cable protector p 34 425 Transferring Images to a Computer 3 Set the camera s power switch to lt ON gt When the computer displays a screen to select the program select EOS Utility gt The EOS Utility screen will appear on the computer D After the EOS Utility screen appears do not operate EOS Utility If any screen other than EOS Utility s main window is displayed Direct transfer in s
400. sists use a different card If you can transfer all the images on the card to a computer transfer all the images and then format the card with the camera p 67 The card may then return to normal Do not touch the SD card s contacts with your fingers or metal objects Do not expose the contacts to dust or water If smudges adhere to the contacts contact failure may result Multimedia cards MMC cannot be used card error will be displayed 44 Turning on the Power m If you turn on the power switch and the date time zone setting screen appears see page 47 to set the date time zone lt ON gt The camera turns on lt OFF gt The camera is turned off and does not operate Set to this position when not using the camera Automatic Sensor Cleaning Whenever you set the power switch Ns to lt ON gt or lt OFF gt sensor cleaning will be executed automatically A small sound may be heard During the sensor cleaning the LCD monitor will display lt tc gt Sensor cleaning You can still shoot during sensor cleaning by pressing the shutter button halfway p 55 to stop cleaning and take a picture If you repeatedly turn the power switch lt ON gt lt OFF gt at a short interval the lt c gt icon may not be displayed This is normal and not a malfunction uam Auto Power Off To save battery power the camera turns off automatically after 1 minute of non operatio
401. speed and aperture will be set automatically and displayed in the viewfinder and on the LCD panel ann aE Check the display A standard exposure will be obtained as long as the shutter speed and aperture displays do not blink Z re Brr2uelesVerls2t3 SO Ii i i Take the picture Compose the shot and press the shutter button completely 216 P Program AE Ifthe 30 shutter speed and the lower f number blink it indicates underexposure Increase the ISO speed or use flash Ifthe 8000 shutter speed and the higher f number blink it indicates overexposure Lower the ISO speed or use an ND filter sold separately to reduce the amount of light entering the lens F Differences Between lt P gt and lt 4j gt Modes In the lt j gt mode many functions such as the AF operation and metering mode are set automatically to prevent spoiled shots The functions you can set are limited With lt P gt mode only the shutter speed and aperture are set automatically You can freely set the AF operation metering mode and other functions p 480 Program Shift Inthe Program AE mode you can freely change the shutter speed and aperture combination Program set automatically by the camera while maintaining the same exposure This is called Program shift To shift the program press the shutter button halfway then turn the lt gt dial until the desired shutter speed or aperture is disp
402. speed will therefore become slow When in magnified view Continuous AF p 294 will not be executed In magnified view the image will be displayed without distortion correction applied 305 Using AF to Focus AF Method SS SS SaaS Shooting Conditions that Make Focusing Difficult Subject with low contrast such as the blue sky solid color flat surfaces or when highlight or shadow details are lost Subjects in low light Stripes and other patterns where there is contrast only in the horizontal direction Subjects with repetitive patterns skyscraper windows computer keyboards etc Fine lines and subject outlines Under a light source whose brightness color or pattern keeps changing Night scenes or dots of light Under fluorescent or LED lighting when the image flickers Extremely small subjects Subjects at the edge of the picture Subjects strongly reflecting light Near and distant subjects covered by an AF point such as an animal in a cage Subjects that keep moving within the AF point and cannot keep still due to camera shake or subject blur A subject approaching or moving away from the camera Performing AF while the subject is very far out of focus Soft focus effect is applied with a soft focus lens A special effect filter is used Noise spots banding etc appears on the screen during AF 306 Using AF to Focus AF Method Fil If you cannot achieve focus with AF set the lens s focus
403. speeds Noise reduction for long exposures Highlight tone priority Lens aberration correction Anti flicker Color space Shooting Shooting mode HDR Multiple exposures Mirror lockup Bulb timer Interval timer Depth of field preview Remote control Quick Control 18 gt p 154 gt p 160 gt p 168 gt p 175 gt p 176 gt p 178 gt p 180 gt p 181 gt p 185 gt p 187 gt p 29 gt p 233 gt p 238 gt p 246 gt p 231 gt p 250 gt p 221 gt p 248 gt p 61 Exposure Exposure compensation gt p 226 Exposure compensation with M Auto ISO AEB AE lock Safety shift GPS GPS Digital compass Logging Flash Built in flash External Speedlite Flash exposure compensation FE lock Flash function settings Wireless shooting gt p 223 gt p 227 gt p 229 gt p 436 gt p 197 gt p 206 gt p 210 gt p 254 gt p 259 gt p 257 gt p 258 gt p 262 gt p 272 External Speedlite Custom Functions Live View Shooting Live View shooting AF method Continuous AF Focusing manually Aspect ratio Silent LV shooting gt p 271 gt p 285 gt p 299 gt p 294 gt p 308 gt p 295 gt p 297 Index to Features Movie Shooting Movie shooting AF method Movie Servo AF Movie Servo AF speed Movie Servo AF tracking
404. ssessseseseneeeees 250 Flash Photography 253 Using the Built in Flash 0 cccccccccesessscceceeecesessseeeeeeeeeeerseees 254 4 Using an External Speedlite oc ccccccecccccsssceeeeessseeeeeeseees 259 Setting the Flash cccccccsssssssseeeeeceseeeeessseeeeceessacssseeeeeeeseeaeaaes 262 USING Wireless Flash vssscoinsenstsccescessnnsdeteisacieiasauncenceainnawsieadddacdiann 272 Shooting with the LCD Monitor Live View Shooting 285 Cs Shooting with the LCD Monitor ccccccccccesceeeeessseeeeeeees 286 Shooting Function Settings ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeesseeeeeeeeeeeeesaaeees 292 Menu Function Settings ccccccscssecceeceeceeessseeeeeeeeesseeeseeeeeeeeees 294 Using AF to Focus AF Method ccccssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeas 299 MF Focusing Manually siiscscsiseasndiiusiadadenamincdiannrce ni Gileioideheedivernsn 308 Shooting Movies 313 PE Shooting MOVIES pssi oien siie a Gda sai 314 Autoexposure Shooting cccccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeseeeaaeseeeess 314 Shutter priority AE cucstiiensarindnaceaseareusaadeiansceinatveeeadvacaasitentiuaanidades 315 Contents 10 14 Aperture priority AE cccccccseeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaeeeeeesaeeeeeesaaes 316 Manual Exposure Shooting cccccccceceeeesseeeeeeeeeeeseeeeseeeeeeeees 320 Shooting Still P NOS ssenscransccevescevierscniatiecusitidentermeecnvesseeversentadean 327 Shooting Function Settin
405. st 4 High contrast 4 Low saturation 4 High saturation Color tone 4 Reddish skin tone 4 Yellowish skin tone F By selecting Default set in step 4 you can revert the respective Picture Style to its default parameter settings To shoot with the Picture Style you adjusted first select the adjusted Picture Style then shoot 164 31 Customizing a Picture Style E SES Monochrome Adjustment For Monochrome you can also set Filter effect and Toning effect in addition to Sharpness and Contrast explained on the preceding pages Filter effect Berieen T With a filter effect applied to a IN None monochrome image you can make YeYellow white clouds or green trees stand out Filter effect Or Orange R Red more G Green Sample Effects Normal black and white image with no filter effects The blue sky will look more natural and the white clouds will look Ye Yellow crisper Or Orange The blue sky will look slightly darker The sunset will look more brilliant l The blue sky will look quite dark Fall leaves will look crisper and R Red brighter Skin tones and lips will appear muted Green tree leaves will look G Green crisper and brighter E Increasing the Contrast will make the filter effect more pronounced Toning effect Detail set Monochrome By applying a toning effect you can bN None create a monochrome image in that color It can make the image l
406. stops blinking or set a lower ISO speed F Shutter Speed Display The shutter speeds from 8000 to 4 indicate the denominator of the fractional shutter speed For example 125 indicates 1 125 sec 0 5 indicates 0 5 sec and 15 is 15 sec 219 Av Aperture Priority AE m In this mode you set the desired aperture and the camera sets the shutter speed automatically to obtain the standard exposure suiting the subject brightness This is called aperture priority AE A higher f number smaller aperture hole will make more of the foreground and background fall within acceptable focus On the other hand a lower f number larger aperture hole will make less of the foreground and background fall within acceptable focus lt Av gt stands for Aperture value aperture opening HHAH l wap ss ie vo lt Blurred background Sharp foreground and background With a low aperture f number f 5 6 With a high aperture f number f 32 Yond 1 Set the Mode Dial to lt Av gt Set the desired aperture While looking at the LCD panel or viewfinder turn the lt gt dial Focus on the subject Press the shutter button halfway gt The shutter speed is set automatically EIET A Check the viewfinder display and shoot As long as the shutter speed is not blinking a standard exposure will be obtained wi Lint 220 Av Apert
407. switch to lt ON gt In low light the shutter speed may become slow Use a faster shutter speed p 218 set a higher ISO speed p 154 use flash p 254 259 or use a tripod There are fewer AF points Depending on the attached lens the number of usable AF points and patterns will differ The lenses are categorized into seven groups from A to G Check which group your lens belongs to Using a lens in Groups E to G will have fewer usable AF points p 102 103 The AF point is blinking or two AF points are displayed The AF point at the registered area is blinking p 94 450 The manually selected AF point or zone and the registered AF point are displayed p 93 450 The AF points do not light up in red The AF points light up in red when focus is achieved in low light conditions Inthe lt P gt lt Tv gt lt Av gt lt M gt and lt B gt modes you can set whether to have the AF points light in red when focus is achieved p 131 498 Troubleshooting Guide AF speed changes depending on lenses used During Live View shooting and movie shooting the AF control method phase difference detection with the image sensor or contrast detection switches automatically depending on the lens type and function used such as magnified view The AF speed may therefore change greatly and focusing may take longer Focusing takes a long time If FlexiZone Multi is set it may take longer to focus on
408. t Ata distance of 20 cm 30 cm 0 7 ft 1 0 ft fill the viewfinder with a patternless solid white object and take a picture gt The picture will be taken in aperture priority AE mode at an aperture of f 22 Since the image will not be saved the data can still be obtained even if there is no card in the camera Eee eee Bete gt When the picture is taken the camera will start collecting the Dust Delete Data obtained Data When the Dust Delete Data is obtained a message will appear Ifthe data is not obtained successfully an error message will appear Follow the Preparation procedure on the preceding page then select OK Take the picture again Dust Delete Data After the Dust Delete Data is obtained it is appended to all the JPEG and RAW images captured thereafter Before an important shoot it is recommended that you update the Dust Delete Data by obtaining it again For details about using Digital Photo Professional EOS software p 537 to erase dust spots refer to the Software Instruction Manual PDF p 532 on the DVD ROM The Dust Delete Data appended to the image is so small that it hardly affects the image file size QD Be sure to use a Solid white object such as a new sheet of white paper If the object has any pattern or design it may be recognized as dust data and affect the accuracy of the dust deletion with the EOS software 408 Manual Sensor Cleaning Dust that co
409. t Approx Quality 3 2 4 3 16 9 1 1 LIEI 5472x3648 4864x3648 5472x3072 3648x3648 20 0 megapixels 17 7 megapixels 16 8 megapixels 13 3 megapixels M 3648x2432 3248x2432 3648x2048 2432x2432 8 9 megapixels 7 9 megapixels 7 5 megapixels 5 9 megapixels MEU 4104x2736 3648x2736 4104x2310 2736x2736 11 2 megapixels 10 0 megapixels 9 5 megapixels 7 5 megapixels S1 S RU 2736x1824 2432x1824 2736x1536 1824x1824 5 0 megapixels 4 4 megapixels 4 2 megapixels 3 3 megapixels S2 1920x1280 1696x1280 1920x1080 1280x1280 2 5 megapixels 2 2 megapixels 2 1 megapixels 1 6 megapixels 53 720x480 640x480 720x408 480x480 350 000 pixels 310 000 pixels 290 000 pixels 230 000 pixels 295 M49 Menu Function Settings QD The image recording quality settings marked with an asterisk do not match the respective aspect ratio exactly The recorded image areas of the aspect ratios marked with an asterisk may be slightly different from what are displayed Check the captured images on the LCD monitor when shooting If you use a different camera to directly print images shot with this camera in the 1 1 aspect ratio the images may not be correctly printed Exposure simulation Exposure simulation simulates and displays how the brightness of the actual image exposure will look Enable GHD The displayed image brightness will be close to the actual brightnes
410. t gt GPS digital compass settings 2 Select Auto time setting Auto time setting Disable Position update intvl Every 15s Digital compass Disable GPS information display GPS Logger Disable MENU ap GPS digital compass settings 3 Select the desired setting Auto time setting _ Auto update Select Auto update or Set now then press lt 6 gt Auto update updates the time when the camera is turned on and a GPS signal is received 4 If signals from at least five GPS satellites cannot be acquired the time cannot be auto updated Set now will be grayed out and not selectable Even if Set now is selected updating the time may not be possible due to an unfavorable timing of the GPS signal acquisition When Auto time setting is set to Auto update the date or time cannot be manually set with Date Time Zone under the 2 tab If you use Wireless Transmitter WFT E7 Ver 2 sold separately and do not want to change the time after performing Sync time between cameras set Auto time setting to Disable in step 2 209 Logging the Route Traveled m When using the GPS logging function the geotag information of the route the camera traveled is automatically recorded in the camera s internal memory Shooting locations and the route traveled can be viewed on a map displayed on a computer using the Map Utility EOS software p 538 tex Note that the GPS logging function will Ma
411. t the merged multiple exposure will be a image Image Recording Merged Multiple JPEG JPEG JPEG M D S GED M D S E TW JPEG MM JPEG MM JPEG M M S AM JPEG M E S GN JPEG aM JPEG Can I merge images recorded on the card With Select image for multi expo you can select the first single exposure from the images recorded on the card p 243 Note that you cannot merge multiple images already recorded on the card Are multiple exposures possible with Live View shooting With On Func Ctrl set you can shoot multiple exposures with Live View shooting p 285 Note that I 5 Aspect ratio will be fixed at 3 2 What file numbers are used for saving merged multiple exposures If all images are set to be saved the merged multiple exposure image file number will be the serial number coming after the file number of the final single exposure used to create the merged multiple exposure image Will auto power off take effect during multiple exposure shooting As long as 2 Auto power off is set to any setting other than Disable the power will turn off automatically after 30 min of non operation If the auto power off takes effect multiple exposure shooting will end and multiple exposure settings will be canceled Before starting the multiple exposure shooting the auto power off will take effect as set with the camera and multiple exposure settings will be canceled 245 K7 Mirror LOCKUp Although
412. t AF TETT oe Manual selection a Co For pinpoint focusing oo og ood O Single point AF eer ae Manual selection Ce ee Select one AF point to focus oo 0 OO oo oO O oO a AF point expansion eae o Manual selection 2 pa oe The manually selected AF point lt gt samep cass and four adjacent AF points lt gt above nee below on the left and on the right are used to focus 90 Selecting the AF Area and AF Point a ane AF point expansion Manual selection surrounding points oaooao0oda aaa oe The manually selected AF point lt L gt ABe eee e and the surrounding AF points lt gt are oe used to focus ana Zone AF TETT Manual selection of zone EA eee One of nine zones is used to focus A oooo0o o0 Large Zone AF ya wee a Manual selection of zone nine meee One of three zones left center or right ere oo 00 is used to focus ooo og9g 65 point automatic selection AF The Area AF frame entire AF area is used to focus This mode is set a automatically in the lt 4j gt mode 91 Selecting the AF Area and AF Point 2 Operate the lt gt or lt M Fn gt button Look through the viewfinder and operate the lt gt or lt M Fn gt button Each time you tilt lt gt to the right the AF area selection mode changes Each time you press the lt M Fn gt button the AF area sel
413. t in 2 Auto power off p 69 If 2 Auto power off is set to Disable Live View shooting will end automatically after 30 min camera power remains on With the HDMI cable HTC 100 sold separately you can display the Live View image on a TV screen p 385 Note that no sound will be output If the picture does not appear on the TV screen set the 3 Video system correctly to For NTSC or For PAL depending on the video standard of your TV set 287 C3 Shooting with the LCD Monitor Information Display Each time you press the lt INFO gt button the information display will change Possible shots Maximum burst Number of remaining multiple exposures Battery check vue ee Temperature warning eee P AF point FlexiZone Single Noise Reduction Histogram display Card for recording Shooting mode playback Image recording M eSa 3 Drive mode O Js White balance Metering mode ME a White balance Flash firing a correction 4s mode Picture Style 5 Ka GPS FEB Auto Lighting AE lock iS apee EY airy Optimizer Exposure simulation Flash ready Flash off AEB FEB Shutter speed ISO speed Flash exposure compensation Highlight tone priority Aperture GPS connection indicator Exposure compensation Digital compass Eye Fi card transmission status Exposure level indicator 288 C3 Shooting with the LCD Monitor SSS SS SS Fl The histogram can be displayed when 495 Exp
414. t in Flash S SE Flash Exposure Compensation Set flash exposure compensation if the flash exposure of the subject does not come out as desired You can set flash exposure compensation up to 3 stops in 1 3 stop increments 1 Press the lt 4 ISO gt button 46 2 Set the exposure compensation amount While looking at the LCD panel or dial To make the flash exposure brighter turn the lt 3 gt dial to the right increased exposure To make the dial to the left decreased exposure After shooting set the exposure compensation amount back to zero lf 2 Auto Lighting Optimizer p 175 is set to any setting other than Disable the image may still look bright even if a decreased flash exposure compensation is set If flash exposure compensation is set with an external Speedlite sold separately p 259 you cannot set the flash exposure compensation with the camera If it is set with both the camera and Speedlite the Speedlite s setting overrides the camera s The exposure compensation amount will remain in effect even after you set the power switch to lt OFF gt You can also set flash exposure compensation with Built in flash settings under B 1 Flash control p 262 The camera can also be used to set the EOS dedicated external Speedlite s flash exposure compensation in the same way as with the built in flash 257 through the viewfinder turn the lt 23 gt f
415. ta Design rule for Camera File System DCF 2 0 JPEG RAW 14 bit Canon original RAW JPEG simultaneous recording possible L Large Approx 20 0 megapixels 5472 x 3648 M Medium Approx 8 90 megapixels 3648 x 2432 S1 Small 1 Approx 5 0 megapixels 2736 x 1824 S2 Small 2 Approx 2 50 megapixels 1920 x 1280 S3 Small 3 Approx 350 000 pixels 720 x 480 RAW Approx 20 0 megapixels 5472 x 3648 M RAW Approx 11 2 megapixels 4104 x 2736 S RAW Approx 5 0 megapixels 2736 x 1824 Standard Auto switch card Record separately Record to multiple Possible Preset code User setting 1 User setting 2 Continuous Auto reset Manual reset e Image Processing During Shooting Picture Style Auto Standard Portrait Landscape Neutral Faithful Monochrome User Defined 1 3 511 Specifications White balance Noise reduction Automatic image brightness correction Highlight tone priority Lens aberration correction Anti flicker Viewfinder Type Coverage Magnification Eye point Built in dioptric adjustment Focusing screen Grid display Electronic level Function setting display Mirror Depth of field preview e Autofocus Type AF points Focusing brightness range Focus operation 912 Auto Preset Daylight Shade Cloudy Tungsten light White fluorescent light Flash Custom Color temperature setting approx 2500 10000 K White balanc
416. tain a standard exposure This function will not be applied to flash and movie shooting F When Auto 0 is set the minimum shutter speed will be the reciprocal of the lens focal length A single step from Slower to Faster is equivalent to a single shutter speed stop 159 313 Selecting a Picture Style ss By selecting a Picture Style you can obtain image characteristics matching your photographic expression or the subject The Picture Style is set automatically to EFA Auto in the lt j gt mode 1 Press the lt C gt button 2 Select 313 gt The Picture Style selection screen will Picture Style APPIAN Choose image effects to suit the subject or scene Picture Style 3 Select a Picture Style Standard gt The Picture Style will be set and the DEDU UE camera will be ready to shoot Nro DEEIESS L set ON Fl You can also select the Picture Style with t493 Picture Style 160 31 Selecting a Picture Style Picture Style Characteristics Auto The color tone will be adjusted automatically to suit the scene The colors will look vivid especially for blue skies greenery and sunsets and in nature outdoor and sunset scenes Fil If the desired color tone is not obtained with Auto use another Picture Style Standard The image looks vivid sharp and crisp This is a general purpose Picture Style suitable for most scenes Portrait For nic
417. tart of EOS 7D Mark II in the second half of 2014 check the Canon website to see which group they belong to Some lenses may not be available in certain countries or regions Group A Autofocusing with 65 points is possible All the AF area selection modes are selectable WE Dual cross type AF point Subject tracking is superior and the focusing a precision is higher than with other AF points E Cross type AF point Subject tracking is superior and high precision focusing is achieved 100 Group B Lenses and Usable AF Points Autofocusing with 65 points is possible All the AF area selection modes are selectable Group C E Cross type AF point Subject tracking is superior and high precision focusing is achieved Autofocusing with 65 points is possible All the AF area selection modes are selectable Group D E Cross type AF point Subject tracking is superior and high precision focusing is achieved LJ AF points sensitive to horizontal lines Autofocusing with 65 points is possible All the AF area selection modes are selectable E Cross type AF point Subject tracking is superior and high precision focusing is achieved LJ AF points sensitive to horizontal lines 101 Lenses and Usable AF Points a a Group E Autofocusing with only 45 points is possible Not possible with all 65 AF points All the AF area selection modes are selectable During automatic AF point selection the outer
418. te Steps 1 to 4 and 6 apply to all wireless flash shooting Therefore these steps are omitted in other wireless flash setups explained on the pages hereafter On the menu screens the lt 7 a gt icons refer to the external Speedlite and the lt 7 gt icons refer to the built in flash Press the lt 4 gt button to raise the built in flash For wireless flash shooting be sure i to raise the built in flash 2 Select Flash control Image quality Under the 1 tab select Flash Image review 2 sec control Beep Enable Release shutter without card ON Lens aberration correction Flash control Flash control 3 Select Built in flash settings Flash firing Enable E TTL Il meter Evaluative Flash sync speed in Av mode AUTO Built in flash settings External flash func setting External flash C Fn setting Clear settings MENU a 275 Using Wireless Flash Built in flash settings Flash mode E TTL Il Shutter sync 1st curtain Built in flash settings Flash mode E TTL II Wireless func ae Channel 1 Built in flash settings Flash mode E TTL II Wireless func z Channel 1 Firing group All Built in flash settings Flash mode E TTL II Wireless func Channel Firing group All aexp comp ehh hoe Set Flash mode to E TTL Il Set Wireless func to 7 a Set Channel Set the channel 1 4 to the s
419. te all items is selected all the items registered under all the created tabs will be deleted 4 If you do Delete tab or Delete all My Menu tabs tab names renamed with Rename tab will also be deleted 462 tM Registering My Menu Menu Display Settings TER You can select Menu display to set the menu screen that is to appear first when Display from My Menu tab you press the lt MENU gt button Display only My Menu tab Normal display Displays the last displayed menu screen Display from My Menu tab Displays with the xX tab selected Display only My Menu tab not be displayed 463 Registering Custom Shooting Modes You can register current camera settings such as the shooting mode menu functions and Custom Function settings as Custom shooting modes under the Mode Dial s lt W gt lt gt and lt E gt positions O a Ci i 1 Select Custom shooting mode Custom shooting mode C1 C3 C1 C3 Under the 4 tab select Custom opyright information Certification Logo Display shooting mode C1 C3 then press firmware ver 1 0 0 lt GE gt Custom shooting mode C1 C3 2 Select Register settings Register settings Clear settings Auto update set Disable Register settings 3 Register the Custom shooting Select the Custom shooting mode mode to register settings to Gustom shooting mode Cl Select the Custom shooting mode to Custom shooting
420. tep 5 on page 428 will not be displayed The image transfer function will not be available F Ifthe EOS Utility screen does not appear refer to the Software Instruction Manual PDF p 532 on the DVD ROM Before disconnecting the cable turn off the camera Hold the plug not the cord to pull out the cable uam Transferring RAW JPEG Images For RAW JPEG images you can specify which image to transfer RAW JPEG transfer D On the next page in step 2 select RAW JPEG transfer and select the image to be transferred JPEG only RAW only or RAW JPEG Image transfer 426 Transferring Images to a Computer M Selecting the Images to be Transferred Sel Image Select Image transfer Resize Under the L gt 1 2 tab select Image kaung transfer then press lt 6 gt Slide show l p Image transfer Image jump w image transfer 2 Select Image sel transfer Image sel transfer RAW JPEG transfer JPEG only Image sel transfer 3 Select Sel Image lt Images to transfer X Images failed trans O Images transferred 4 Select the images to be transferred Turn the lt 3 gt dial to select the image to be transferred then press lt GE gt Turn the lt gt dial to display the V on the screen s upper left then press lt G1 gt If you press the lt Q gt button and turn the lt s7 gt dial counterclockwise you can select an image from a three imag
421. ter clearing the transfer history you can select Folder images not transfer d and again transfer all the images in the folder Allimage If All image is selected and you select Card images not transferred all the images on the card not yet transferred to a computer will be selected For a description of Card images failed transfer and Clear card s transf history see Sel fM above 4p If any screen other than EOS Utility s main window is displayed on the computer Direct transfer is not displayed During the image transfer certain menu options cannot be used F You can also transfer movies Up to 9 999 images can be transferred in one batch Shooting is possible during the image transfer 428 lal Specifying Images for a Photobook lt You can specify up to 998 images to be printed in a photobook When you use EOS Utility EOS software to transfer images to a computer the specified images will be copied to a dedicated folder This function is useful for ordering photobooks online Specifying One Image at a Time 1 Select Photobook Set up Protect images Under the gt 1 tab select Rotate image Photobook set up then press Erase images Print order lt Ge gt Photobook Set up Image copy RAW image processing im Photobook Set up 2 Select Select images No of images 0 Select images All images in folder Clear all in folder All images on card Clear all on
422. tes all registered items 460 tM Registering My Menu Delete tab You can delete the My Menu tab currently displayed Select Delete tab to delete the MY MENU tab Rename tab You can rename the My Menu tab from MY MENU 1 Select Rename tab Rename tab 2 Enter text MY OMENU1 wie Press the lt j gt button to delete any unnecessary characters enn Press the lt Q gt button The text A EEE PR a palette will be highlighted with a color UEA cancel TEI ox frame and text can be entered Operate the lt 3 gt dial or lt gt to move the and select the desired character Then press lt 1 gt to enter it You can enter up to 16 characters 3 Exit the setting After entering the text press the lt MENU gt button then select OK The name is saved 461 tM Registering My Menu T Deleting all My Menu tabs Deleting all items O ar o y Q You can delete all My Menu tabs and a MY MENU Set up Aaa MMT EE delete all My Menu items Delete all My Menu tabs Delete all items Menu display Normal Delete all My Menu tabs You can delete all My Menu tabs When you select Delete all My Menu tabs all the tabs from MY MENU1 to MY MENUS will be deleted and the xX tab will revert to its default Delete all items You can delete all the items registered under the MY MENU1 to MY MENUS tabs and keep the tabs The menu tab s will remain When Dele
423. the subject Note that the grid is not displayed during movie shooting Movie recording quality You can set the movie recording format MOV or MP4 movie recording size and 24 00p For details see page 330 Sound recording You can set sound recording settings For details see page 336 344 M49 Menu Function Settings ee Movie Servo AF speed Movie Servo AF speed You can set the Movie Servo AF s AF Before shoot Standard speed and its operation conditions Eee eek beste i This function is settable when Movie When active Always on Servo AF is set to Enable and AF AF speed re method is set to FlexiZone Single Additionally the function is only enabled when using a lens compatible with slow AF speed focus transition during movie shooting Before shoot Standard During shoot Standard Enabled L INFO LaSo MENU ap y A a a a a Slow Standard SET OLS When active Always on sets the AF adjustment speed to take effect at all times for movie shooting before and during movie shooting During shooting sets the AF adjustment speed to take effect only during movie shooting AF speed You can set the AF adjustment speed focus transition speed to one of five levels from standard E speed to slow to obtain the desired effect Lenses supporting slow focus transition during movie shooting USM lenses marketed in 2009 or later and STM lenses for example the EF S18 135mm
424. the LCD panel or viewfinder turn the lt gt dial F 10 sec self timer 58 gt 2 sec self timer 3 Take the picture Look through the viewfinder focus on the subject then press the shutter button completely gt You can check the self timer operation with the self timer lamp beeper and countdown display in seconds on the LCD panel gt Two seconds before the picture is taken the self timer lamp will light up and the beeper will sound faster wD If you do not look through the viewfinder when you press the shutter button attach the eyepiece cover p 247 If stray light enters the viewfinder when the picture is taken it may throw off the exposure F The lt 2 gt enables you to shoot while not touching the camera mounted on a tripod This prevents camera shake while you shoot still lifes or long exposures After taking self timer shots playing back the image p 354 to check focus and exposure is recommended When using the self timer to shoot yourself use focus lock p 83 on an object at the same distance as where you will stand To cancel the self timer after it starts press the lt DRIVE AF gt button 143 144 Image Settings This chapter explains image related function settings Image recording quality ISO speed Picture Style white balance Auto Lighting Optimizer noise reduction highlight tone priority lens aberration correction an
425. the camera s electrical contacts with your fingers This is to prevent the contacts from corroding Corroded contacts can cause camera misoperation If the camera is suddenly brought in from the cold into a warm room condensation may form on the camera and internal parts To prevent condensation first put the camera in a sealed plastic bag and let it adjust to the warmer temperature before taking it out of the bag If condensation forms on the camera do not use the camera This is to avoid damaging the camera If there is condensation remove the lens card and battery from the camera and wait until condensation has evaporated before using the camera If the camera will not be used for an extended period remove the battery and store the camera in a cool dry well ventilated location Even while the camera is in storage press the shutter button a few times once in a while to check that the camera is still working Avoid storing the camera where there are chemicals that result in rust and corrosion such as in a chemical lab 20 Handling Precautions ee If the camera has not been used for an extended period test all its functions before using it If you have not used the camera for some time or if there is an important shoot such as a foreign trip coming up have the camera checked by your Canon dealer or check the camera yourself and make sure it is working properly If you use continuous shooting Live View shootin
426. the subject depending on the shooting conditions Use FlexiZone Single or focus manually Ifthe movie recording size is set to FHD HM 59 94 fps or aN 50 00 fps contrast detection will be used for the AF control The continuous shooting speed is slow Depending on the shutter speed aperture subject conditions brightness etc the continuous shooting speed may become slower p 142 When EOS iTR AF is operating p 128 maximum continuous shooting speed set with lt ljH gt will be approx 9 5 shots sec Also under low light conditions the continuous shooting speed may decrease If Anti flicker shoot is set to Enable and you shoot under flickering light the continuous shooting speed may become slightly slower or the continuous shooting interval may become irregular Also the time lag until shutter release may be slightly longer than usual p 185 The maximum burst during continuous shooting is lower If you shoot something that has fine detail such as a field of grass the file size will be larger and the actual maximum burst may be lower than the number mentioned on page 151 499 Troubleshooting Guide ISO 100 cannot be set ISO speed expansion cannot be selected If t423 Highlight tone priority is set to Enable the settable ISO speed range will be ISO 200 ISO 16000 Even if you expand the settable ISO speed range with ISO speed range you cannot select the H1 equivalent to IS
427. ti flicker shooting and other functions A X icon at the upper right of a page title indicates a function that can be used only in these modes lt P gt lt Tv gt lt Av gt lt M gt lt B gt MW Selecting the Card for Recording and Playback If either a CF card or SD card is already inserted in the camera you can start recording captured images When only one card is inserted you do not have to follow the procedures described on pages 146 148 If you insert both a CF card and SD card you can select the recording method and select which card to use for recording and playing back images Recording Method with Two Cards Inserted 1 Select Record func card folder Record func card folder sel sel pie numbenng ames COnUNUGUS Under the 1 tab select Record File name Auto rotate ona func card folder sel then press Format card lt GE gt GO aF M H Record func card folder sel 2 Select Record func Record func Standard Record play Folder Record func card folder sel Select the recording method Record func gt Select the recording method then Auto switch card Rec separately press E gt Rec to multiple 146 M9 Selecting the Card for Recording and Playback C Standard Images will be recorded to the card selected with Record play Auto switch card Same as with the Standard setting but if the card becomes full the camera will automatically switch
428. tic Sensor Cleaning m Whenever you set the power switch to lt ON gt or lt OFF gt the Self Cleaning Sensor Unit operates to automatically shake off the dust on the front of the sensor Normally you need not pay attention to this operation However you can choose to perform sensor cleaning manually or disable it Cleaning the Sensor Now Select Sensor cleaning Video system For PAL Under the 3 tab select Sensor Batteryainte cleaning then press lt gt Sensor cleaning MA button display options btn function Rating HDMI frame rate Sensor cleaning 2 Select Clean now to Auto cleaning 6 Enable Select Clean now cy then press Clean now lt D gt Clean manually Select OK gt The screen will indicate that the sensor is being cleaned A small sound may be heard Although there will be a shutter sound no picture is taken Fl For best results perform the sensor cleaning with the camera placed upright and stable on a table or other flat surface Even if you repeat the sensor cleaning the result will not improve much Immediately after the sensor cleaning is finished the Clean now c option will remain disabled temporarily Disabling Automatic Sensor Cleaning In step 2 select Auto cleaning and set it to Disable gt The sensor cleaning will no longer be executed when you set the power switch to lt ON gt or lt OFF gt 406 MA Appending Dust
429. time 00 00 01 INFO PES TTA LS 231 B Bulb Exposures SESE eee Adjust exposure time 3 Set the desired exposure time Enter hours minutes seconds Select the hour minute or second om 4S Press lt gt so lt gt is displayed bf Set the desired number then press lt gt Returns to lt C gt Cancel Adjust exposure time 4 Select OK Enter hours minutes seconds The set time will be displayed on the menu screen gt lt C gt will be displayed on the LCD panel 010 ame 0 SE 010 Cancel Elapsed exposure time 5 Take the picture Press the shutter button completely and the bulb exposure will start and continue until the set time elapses To cancel the timer setting set Disable in step 2 ae E SHOT Bulb timer QD If you press the shutter button completely while the bulb timer is operating the bulb exposure will stop Doing any of the following will cancel the bulb timer reverts to Disable Set the power switch to lt OFF gt display the movie shooting screen or change the shooting mode from lt B gt 232 HDR HDR High Dynamic Range Shooting Highlight detail and shadow detail are retained for a high dynamic range of tones even with high contrast scenes HDR shooting is effective for landscape and still life shots With HDR shooting three images of different exposures standard exposure underexposure and overexposure are captured for
430. ting When you press the shutter button completely only one shot will be taken AH High speed continuous shooting While you hold down the shutter button completely the camera will shoot continuously at a maximum of approx 10 0 shots sec Cl Low speed continuous shooting While you hold down the shutter button completely shots will be taken at a speed of approx 3 0 shots sec OS Silent single shooting Single shooting with less shooting sound than lt C gt during viewfinder shooting Silent continuous shooting Continuous shooting with less shooting sound than lt gt during viewfinder shooting The continuous shooting speed will be approx 4 0 shots sec 1a a QD During Live View shooting and movie shooting shooting will not be silent even if lt LS gt or lt S gt is set 141 Ey Selecting the Drive Mode 0 10 sec self timer remote control 2 sec self timer remote control For self timer shooting see page 143 For remote control shooting see page 248 When EOS iTR AF is operating p 128 maximum continuous shooting speed with lt H gt will be approx 9 5 shots sec Also under low light conditions the continuous shooting speed may decrease If lt 0OS gt or lt GiS gt is set the time lag from when you press the shutter button completely until the picture is shot will be slightly longer than standard If you perform high speed continuous shooting in low temperatures when the remaining ba
431. tings If you press the lt WB Le gt lt DRIVE AF gt lt 4 ISO gt or lt G4 gt button while the image is displayed on the LCD monitor the setting screen will appear on the LCD monitor and you can turn the lt s gt or lt 3 gt dial to set the respective function During manual exposure shooting p 320 you can press the lt amp 4 ISO gt button to set the ISO speed By pressing the lt WB gt button and then the lt INFO gt button you can set WB shift and WB bracketing Note that the following cannot be set lt gt Metering mode lt A gt Flash exposure compensation lt HDR gt HDR mode and lt jh gt Multiple exposures Q Quick Control In the lt P gt lt Tv gt lt Av gt lt M gt and lt B gt modes the AF method Drive mode Movie recording size Recording level set manually only Volume headphones Recording playing back card and image quality still photos White balance Picture Style and Auto Lighting Optimizer can be set In the lt j gt mode only the functions in bold above can be set Press the lt Q gt button 610 gt The settable functions will be displayed a 2 Select a function and set it Use lt gt to select a function The setting of the selected function is displayed on the screen Turn the lt gt or lt 3 gt dial to set it To set the movie recording size or to set the image quality to RAW press lt 1 gt
432. tion p 469 will be displayed in sequence MA button display options Under the 3 tab INFO button Z Displays camera settings display options enables you to select v Electronic level the options displayed when the lt INFO gt Y Displays shooting functions button is pressed OK Select the desired display option and eran press lt gt to append a checkmark v After completing the selections select OK F Note that you cannot remove the v for all three display options The Displays camera settings sample screen is displayed in English for all languages Even if you uncheck the Electronic level so it does not appear it will still appear for Live View shooting and movie shooting when you press the lt INFO gt button Camera Settings Shooting mode registered under the Mode Dial s p 172 173 p 464 C1 p 187 WB Shift Bkt p 171 Transfer of some AF images failed p 133 Long exp noise reduction 0 427 High ISO speed NR al smatelants p 178 Possible shots Freespace Hl p 176 p 42 151 This icon is displayed when the transfer of some images failed 468 INFO Button Functions TI I S Shooting Function Settings Aperture AE lock Shutter speed Highlight tone priority Shooting mode ISO speed Exposure level Flash exposure indicator BY SMAPS e eain UCM compensation Wieda ga3 2 1 0 1 2 3 A B onodi pen a Auto Li
433. tion then MRa C turn the lt gt dial to set it Fo B Reset aus gt The displayed image will reflect i Brightness adjustment White balance and any other setting adjustments To return to the image settings at the time of shooting press the lt INFO gt button 398 RAW Processing RAW Images with the Camera Displaying the setting screen Press lt gt to display the setting screen Turn the lt 3 gt or lt s7 8 gt dial to change the setting Press lt gt to finalize the setting and return to the previous screen 4 Save the image Select 2 Save then press lt amp gt Select OK to save the image Check the destination folder and image file number then select OK To process another image repeat steps 2 to 4 Save as new file Cancel 014 Magnified View You can magnify the image by pressing the lt Q gt button in step 3 The magnification will differ depending on the pixel count of Image quality set in RAW image processing With lt gt you can scroll around the magnified image To cancel magnified view press the lt Q gt button again Images with Aspect Ratio Setting Images shot with the aspect ratio p 404 set to 4 3 16 9 or 1 1 will be displayed with lines indicating the image area JPEG images generated from RAW images will be saved in the set aspect ratio 399 RAW Processing RAW Images with the Camera RAW
434. torage a charged battery will gradually drain and lose its capacity After recharging the battery detach it and disconnect the charger from the power outlet You can attach the cover in a different f orientation to indicate whether the battery has been recharged or not If the battery has been recharged attach the N cover so that the battery shaped hole lt L gt is aligned over the blue sticker on the battery If the battery is exhausted attach the cover in the opposite orientation When not using the camera remove the battery If the battery is left in the camera for a prolonged period a small amount of power current is released resulting in excess discharge and shorter battery life Store the battery with the protective cover attached Storing the battery when it is fully charged may lower the battery s performance The battery charger can also be used in foreign countries The battery charger is compatible with a 100 V AC to 240 V AC 50 60 Hz power source If necessary attach a commercially available plug adapter for the respective country or region Do not attach any portable voltage transformer to the battery charger Doing so can damage the battery charger If the battery becomes exhausted quickly even after being fully charged the battery has reached the end of its service life Check the battery s recharge performance p 470 and purchase a new battery Q After disconnecting the char
435. tracking This sets the tracking sensitivity for a moving subjects whose speed can E Versatile multi purpose suddenly change dramatically by starting Seng or stopping suddenly etc Y Accel decel tracking UIA of INFO LaSo O AF Pl Suited for subjects that move at a steady speed minimal change in moving speed 2 1 Effective for subjects having sudden movements sudden acceleration deceleration or sudden stops Even if the moving subjects speed suddenly changes dramatically the camera continues to focus on the target subject For example for an approaching subject the camera becomes less prone to focus behind it to avoid subject blur For a subject stopping suddenly the camera becomes less prone to focus in front of it Setting 2 can track dramatic changes in the moving subject s speed better than with 1 However since the camera will be sensitive even to the slight movements of the subject the focusing may momentarily become unstable 114 EW Selecting Al Servo AF Characteristics AF point auto switching a AF A This sets the switching sensitivity of the TES ee AF points as they track the subject Versatile multi purpose moving dramatically up down left or setting right y This setting takes effect when the AF Sfi AF ptauto switching i G a n area selection mode is set to AF point INFO Jalelle expansion manual selection 2 AF point expansion manual selection surrounding
436. transmits The battery power will be consumed faster During the image transfer auto power off will not take effect If you insert a wireless LAN card other than an Eye Fi card Eye Fi settings will not appear Also the transmission status icon lt 4 gt will not appear 477 System Map eee ST E2 ST E3 RT 90EX 270EX II 320EX 430EX II 600EX RT Macro Ring Lite Macro Twin Lite 600EX MR 14EX II MT 24EX Bundled Accessories CS Dioptric Adjustment Lenses Eg C Anti Fog Eyepiece Eg Ww BE Angle Finder C Battery Charger LC E6 or LC E6E Focusing Cecesocoojjococsocoocodbosoccococsococsosoosooooolocosocoosoooo Screen Eh AC Adapter DC Coupler AC E6 DR E6 AC Adapter Kit Car Battery ACK E6 Battery Grip Cable CB 570 BG E16 Car Battery Charger eenei a A Fiat ja CBC E6 Battery Magazine BGM E16L for BGM E16A for Leather Case EH20 L LP E6N LP E6 size AA LR6 batteries attached to BG E16 attached to BG E16 Hand Strap E2 qS 478 System Map lt n Headphones Timer Remote Remote Wireless Controller Switch Controller TC 80N3 RS 80N3 LC 5 Remote Controller RC 6 m E D External microphone HDMI Cable HTC 100 2 9 m 9 5 ft
437. ttery capacity is low the continuous shooting speed will be slow In Al Servo AF operation the continuous shooting speed may become slower depending on the subject and the lens used AH The maximum continuous shooting speed of approx 10 shots sec is attained under the following conditions 1 1000 sec or faster shutter speed maximum aperture varies depending on the lens EOS iTR AF OFF and Anti flicker shooting Disable The continuous shooting speed may decrease depending on the shutter speed aperture subject conditions brightness lens flash use temperature remaining battery capacity etc With the AF mode set to One Shot AF and the Image Stabilizer turned off when using the following lenses EF300mm f 4L IS USM EF28 135mm f 3 5 5 6 IS USM EF75 300mm f 4 5 6 IS USM EF100 400mm f 4 5 5 6L IS USM If the 1 Record func card folder sel menu s Record func is set to Rec separately p 146 and the recording quality setting for the CF decrease When internal memory becomes full during continuous shooting the continuous shooting speed may drop during shooting since shooting will be temporally disabled p 153 Fl By setting 4 2 Continuous shooting speed p 439 you can manually set the continuous shooting speed 142 Using the Self timer m Use the self timer when you want to be in the picture 1 Press the lt DRIVE AF gt button 46 2 Select the self timer While looking at
438. ttery pack will be registered and the battery history screen will reappear gt The grayed out battery number will now be displayed in white Press the lt MENU gt button The battery info screen will reappear Battery info Register E The battery pack cannot be registered if Battery Grip BG E16 sold separately using size AA LR6 batteries is attached or the camera is E powered by AC Adapter Kit ACK E6 sold separately If six battery packs are already registered Register cannot be selected To delete unnecessary battery information see page 473 471 M9 Checking the Battery Information N Labeling Serial Numbers on Batteries It is convenient to label all registered Battery Pack LP E6N LP E6 with their serial numbers using commercially available labels Serial number 1 Write the serial number on a label Write the serial number displayed on the battery history screen on a label approx 25 mm x 15 mm 1 0 in x 0 6 Battery info Ca b29fda30 Wawa 99 17 09 14 in in size Delete info D 2 Take out the battery and affix the 2223 label KL Set the power switch to lt OFF gt Open the battery compartment cover and remove the battery Affix the label as shown in the illustration on the side with no electrical contacts Repeat this procedure for all of your battery packs so you can easily see the serial number
439. ube If Mode 1 or Mode 2 is set the standard exposure may not be obtained or an irregular exposure may result QD If you use Mode 1 with continuous shooting the Disable setting will be applied to the second and subsequent shots When shooting with flash the Disable setting will be applied regardless of the Silent LV shoot setting Silent shooting cannot be performed When using a non Canon flash unit set it to Disable The flash will not fire if it is set to Mode 1 or Mode 2 If Mode 2 is set and you use a Remote Controller p 248 the operation will be the same as with Mode 1 Fil With the TS E17mm f 4L or TS E24mm f 3 5L II lens you can use Mode 1 or Mode 2 297 M49 Menu Function Settings E Metering timer You can change how long the exposure setting is displayed AE lock time F Performing any of the following operations will stop Live View shooting To start Live View shooting again press the lt 8 gt button e Selecting B 3 Dust Delete Data 3 Sensor cleaning Y 4 Clear all camera settings or 4 firmware ver 298 Using AF to Focus AF Method m 4p Changes in AF Speed Depending On the AF Control Method During Live View shooting and movie shooting the AF control method used phase difference detection with the image sensor or contrast detection will switch automatically depending on the lens and function used such as magnified view This can
440. ubject o tracking is superior and high Oso precision focusing is achieved z L AF point sensitive to vertical lines top and bottom AF points adjacent to the center AF point or horizontal lines left and right AF points adjacent to the center AF point Not manually selectable It works only when AF point expansion manual selection 2 is selected Disabled AF points not displayed Q a If the maximum aperture is smaller than f 5 6 maximum aperture number is between f 5 6 and f 8 focus may not be achieved with AF when shooting low contrast or low light subjects When Extender EF 2x is attached to the EF 180mm f 3 5L Macro USM lens AF is not possible If the maximum aperture is smaller than f 8 maximum aperture number exceeds f 8 AF is not possible during viewfinder shooting 103 Lenses and Usable AF Points Lens Group Designations LIFE SIZE Converter Extender EF2x EF S60mm f 2 8 Macro USM B EF85mm f 1 2L Il USM A EF S10 18mm f 4 5 5 6 IS STM E EF85mm f 1 8 USM A EF S10 22mm f 3 5 4 5 USM C EF100mm f 2 USM A EF S15 85mm f 3 5 5 6 IS USM B EF100mm f 2 8 Macro B EF S17 55mm f 2 8 IS USM A EF100mm f 2 8 Macro USM E EF S17 85mm f 4 5 6 IS USM B EF100mm f 2 8L Macro IS USM B EF S18 55mm f 3 5 5 6 C EF135mm f 2L USM A EF S18 55mm f 3 5 5 6 USM C EF135mm f 2L USM A EF
441. ue Downsize JPEG image s pixel count OFF L Al EA Be Set Playback description Display time 382 Repeat and start auto playback Image transfer Image selection transfer RAW JPEG transfer 427 1 image 10 images 100 images Date Image jump wi is Folder Movies Stills Protect Rating ate gt Playback 3 Blue 1x no magnification 2x magnify from center 4x magnify from center 8x magnify from center 10x magnify from center Actual size from selected point Same as last magnification from center Magnification approx Control over HDMI Disable Enable The setting is linked to the Time code s Movie play count under the 435 Movie tab 489 Menu Settings Y Set up 1 Yellow Page Record function Standard Auto switch card Record Record function card separately Record to multiple folder selection 2 23 gt _ _ Flerame Preset code Ter seting 17 Usersetng 0 Displayed when a commercially available Eye Eye Fi settings Fi card is inserted a 3 Y Set up 2 Yellow 1 min 2 min 4 min 8 min 15 min 30 min Disable Auto Adjustable to one of three brightness levels LCD brightness 94 Manual Adjustable to one of seven brightness levels 7 Auto power off Date year month day Time hr min sec Daylight saving time Time zone Language amp Sele
442. uilt in flash will not fire the AF assist beam IR IR AF assist beam only When an external Speedlite is attached only infrared AF assist beam will be emitted This prevents the AF assist light from firing as a burst of small flashes With an EX series Speedlite equipped with an LED light the LED light will not automatically turn on for AF assist QD If an external Speedlite s AF assist beam firing Custom Function is set to Disabled the Speedlite will not emit the AF assist beam regardless of this setting 120 tM Customizing AF Functions One Shot AF release priority You can set the AF operation characteristics and shutter release timing for One Shot AF ae ER Focus priority The picture will not be taken until focus is achieved Effective when you t A want to achieve focus before capturing the shot Focus priority CHGS Help EROK o Release priority Priority is given to taking the picture instead of achieving focus This gives priority to getting the shot rather than achieving correct focus Note that the picture will be taken even if focus has not been achieved 121 tM Customizing AF Functions Sen AF4 Lens drive when AF impossible If focus cannot be achieved with autofocus you can have the camera keep searching for the correct focus or have it stop searching ON Continue focus search If focus cannot be achieved with Stop rocussearc autofocus the lens is driven to search for the corre
443. uired E If the captured still photo was shot in the Adobe RGB color space the first character in the file name will be an underscore _ The ICC profile is not appended Refer to explanations about the ICC profile in the Software Instruction Manual PDF p 532 on the DVD ROM 187 M Creating and Selecting a Folder You can freely create and select the folder where the captured images are to be saved This operation is optional since a folder will be created automatically for saving captured images Creating a Folder GO AF M M 1 Select Record func card folder Record func card folder sel sel i Under the 1 tab select Record Auto rotate ona o func card folder sel then press Format card lt GE gt Record func card folder sel 2 Select Folder Record func Standard Record play Folder Select folder 3 Select Create folder 101EQSZD Create folder Select folder i A Select OK gt A new folder with the folder number Gresrenaideraog increased by one is created 188 tM Creating and Selecting a Folder ee Selecting a Folder Lowest file number Select a folder on the folder selection Number of images in folder screen then press lt Ge gt The folder where the captured Select folder Bam 00 0001 images will be saved is selected 101E0S7D a Subsequently captured images will Jeya iea TPE be recorded into the selected folder 310020313 Fr ade
444. uld not be removed by the automatic sensor cleaning can be removed manually with a commercially available blower etc Before cleaning the sensor detach the lens from the camera The image sensor is extremely delicate If the sensor needs to be cleaned directly having it done by a Canon Service Center is recommended a Select Sensor cleaning Video system For PAL Under the 3 tab select Sensor Batievanied cleaning then press lt gt Sensor cleaning button display options btn function Rating HDMI frame rate Sensor cleaning Select Clean manually Auto cleaning Enable Clean now Clean manually Clean manually Select OK gt Ina moment the reflex mirror will lock peta aleenorana up and the shutter will open er manually cleaning sensor turn power switch CLn will blink on the LCD panel to lt OFF gt Cancel 014 4 Clean the sensor 5 End the cleaning Set the power switch to lt OFF gt QD If you use a battery make sure it is fully charged If you use Battery Grip BG E16 sold separately with size AA LR6 batteries manual sensor cleaning will not be possible Fil For the power source using AC Adapter Kit ACK E6 sold separately is recommended 409 tm Manual Sensor Cleaning QD While cleaning the sensor never do any of the following If the power is cut off the shutter will close and the shutter curtains and image sensor may get damaged e Setting t
445. umber of shots are taken the interval timer shooting will stop and be automatically canceled E Using a tripod is recommended Taking test shots is recommended After the interval timer shooting starts you can still press the shutter button completely to take a picture as usual However from 5 sec before the next interval timer shooting the shooting function settings menu operation image playback and other operations will be suspended and the camera will be ready to shoot Ifa picture is taken or an image is being processed as the next interval timer shooting that interval timer shooting will be canceled This will make the number of interval timer images captured lower than the set number of shots Interval timer shooting can be combined with AEB WB bracketing multiple exposures and HDR mode You can stop the interval timer shooting by selecting Disable or turning the power switch to lt OFF gt 251 ODEDE Interval Timer Shooting a QD Ifthe lens s focus mode switch is set to lt AF gt the camera will not shoot when focus is not achieved Setting it to lt MF gt and focus manually first is recommended Live View shooting movie shooting bulb exposures or mirror lockup cannot be performed with interval timer shooting During interval timer shooting auto power off will not take effect For prolonged interval timer shooting using AC Adapter Kit ACK E6 sold separately to power the c
446. unctions _ Se E Select AF area selection mode You can limit the selectable AF area selection modes to suit your shooting preferences Select the desired selection mode and press lt 1 gt to append a checkmark lt y gt Then select OK to register the setting See Aes E El Manual select Spot AF For pinpoint focusing with a narrower area than single point AF manual selection Manual select Spot AF O Manual selection 1 pt AF One of the AF points set by Selectable AF point setting can be selected e Expand AF area The camera will focus with the manually selected AF point and the adjacent AF points above below on the left and on the right so Expand AF area Surround The camera will focus with the manually selected AF point and the surrounding AF points coc Manual select Zone AF The AF area is divided into nine focusing zones for focusing Manual select Large Zone AF The AF area is divided into three focusing zones for focusing cL Auto selection 65 pt AF The Area AF frame entire AF area is used for focusing a The lt y gt mark cannot be deleted from Manual selection 1 pt AF Ifthe attached lens belongs to group G p 103 you can only select Manual select Spot AF Manual selection 1 pt AF and Expand AF area c 124 MEM Customizing AF Functions ee AF area selection method You can set the method for changing the AF area selection mode AF
447. uous AF The default setting is Disable The camera attains rough focus on the subject continuously This makes it quicker to achieve focus when you press the shutter button halfway If Enable is set the lens will operate constantly and consume more battery power This will reduce the number of possible shots due to shorter battery life If you want to set the lens s focus mode switch to lt MF gt during Continuous AF first stop Live View shooting 294 M49 Menu Function Settings ee Grid display With 3x3 or 6x4 you can display grid lines to help you level the camera vertically or horizontally Also with 3x3 diag the grid is displayed together with diagonal lines to help you compose with better balance by aligning the intersections over the subject Aspect ratio The image s aspect ratio can be set to 3 2 4 3 16 9 or 1 1 The area surrounding the Live View image is masked in black when one of the following aspect ratios is set 4 3 16 9 1 1 JPEG images will be saved with the set aspect ratio RAW images will always be saved with the 3 2 aspect ratio Since aspect ratio information is appended to the RAW image the image can be generated in the set aspect ratio when you process the RAW image with the camera or EOS software When you display RAW images on the camera aspect ratio lines will be displayed to show the image area Image Aspect Ratio and Pixel Coun
448. ure Priority AE If the 30 shutter speed blinks it indicates underexposure Turn the lt gt dial to set a larger aperture lower f number until the shutter speed blinking stops or set a higher ISO speed If the 8000 shutter speed blinks it indicates overexposure Turn the lt gt dial to set a smaller aperture higher aperture f number until the shutter speed blinking stops or set a lower ISO speed E Aperture Display The higher the f number the smaller the aperture opening will be The f number displayed will differ depending on the lens If no lens is attached to the camera 00 will be displayed for the aperture Depth of Field Preview The aperture opening diaphragm changes only at the moment when the picture is taken Otherwise the aperture remains fully open Therefore when you look at the scene through the viewfinder or on the LCD monitor the depth of field will look narrow Gg OF ZO Press the depth of field preview button f to stop down the lens to the current aperture setting and check the depth of field range of acceptable focus El A higher f number will make more of the foreground and background fall within acceptable focus However the viewfinder will look darker While looking at the Live View image p 286 you can change the aperture and press the depth of field preview button to see how the depth of field changes The exposure will be locked AE lo
449. ure level indicator lt 4 p gt High speed sync p 269 Exposure compensation amount p 226 AEB range p 227 Flash exposure compensation p 257 Red eye reduction lamp ON p 256 lt B gt Flash exposure compensation p 257 Shutter speed p 218 FE lock FEL Busy buSY Built in flash recycling buSY Multi function lock warning L No card warning Card Error code Err AF point selection CT 7 AF SEL SEL AF AF point registration 777 HP SEL SEL HP Card warning Card 1 2 Card full warning FuLL 1 2 Aperture p 220 28 Nomenclature Mode Dial You can set the shooting mode Turn the Mode Dial while holding down the Mode Dial center Mode Dial lock release button B Bulb p 230 M Manual exposure p 222 Av Aperture priority AE p 220 Tv Shutter priority AE p 218 P_ Program AE p 216 AF Scene Intelligent Auto p 80 Custom shooting mode You can register the shooting mode P Tv Av M B AF operation menu settings etc to W E Mode Dial positions p 464 29 Nomenclature EF S18 135mm f 3 5 5 6 IS STM Lens Focusing ring p 140 308 Focus mode switch p 50 Zoom position index I p 51 Uf Filter thread front of lens Ke Zoom ring p 51 Image Stabilizer switch p 53 Lens mount index p 50 30 Nomenclature EF S15 85mm f 3 5 5 6 IS USM Lens Hood mount p 52 Focus mode switch p 50
450. using the self timer or a remote switch can prevent camera shake using mirror lockup to prevent camera vibrations mirror shock can also help when you use a super telephoto lens or shoot close ups macro photography 1 Set Mirror lockup to Enable Red eye reduc Disable ve Under the 64 tab select Mirror Interval timer Disable lockup then press lt 1 gt Anti flicker shoot BIRELE Select Enable then press lt gt Mirror lockup Mirror lockup Enable 2 Focus on the subject then press the shutter button completely gt The mirror will swing up 3 Press the shutter button completely again The picture is taken and the mirror goes back down d In very bright light such as at the beach or a ski slope on a sunny day take the picture promptly after mirror lockup Do not point the camera toward the sun The sun s heat can scorch and damage the shutter curtains During mirror lockup shooting function settings and menu operations etc are disabled 246 Using the Eyepiece Cover E aa E Even if the drive mode is set to continuous shooting only one shot can be taken You can also use the self timer or bulb timer with mirror lockup If 30 seconds elapse after the mirror has locked up it will go back down automatically Pressing the shutter button completely locks up the mirror again For mirror lockup using a tripod and Remote Switch RS 80N3 sold separately or Timer Rem
451. utomatically for any lens whose correction data is registered in the camera With EOS Utility EOS software you can check which lenses have their correction data registered in the camera You can also register the correction data for unregistered lenses For details refer to the EOS Utility Instruction Manual PDF p 537 on the EOS Camera Instruction Manuals Disk DVD ROM 183 tM Correction of Lens Peripheral Illumination and Aberrations QD Cautions for Lens Correction Peripheral illumination correction chromatic aberration correction and distortion correction cannot be applied to JPEG images already taken When using a non Canon lens setting the corrections to Disable is recommended even if Correction data available is displayed If you use magnified view during Live View shooting the peripheral illumination correction chromatic aberration correction and distortion correction will not be reflected in the image shown on the screen The correction amount will be less if the lens used does not have distance information F Notes for Lens Correction Ifthe effect of the correction is not visible magnify the image after shooting and check it again Corrections can be applied even when an Extender or Life size Converter is attached Ifthe correction data for the attached lens is not registered to the camera the result will be the same as when the correction is set to Disable 184 MIN Reducing Fli
452. utter release keltan s o Release priority Pressing the shutter button takes the EER Hap picture immediately even if focus has not been achieved It is effective when you want to give priority to capturing the image rather than achieving focus Focus priority Pressing the shutter button does not take the picture until focus is achieved Effective when you want to achieve focus before capturing the image 117 EM Customizing AF Functions Al Servo 2nd image priority You can set the AF operation characteristics and shutter release timing during continuous shooting after the first shot with Al Servo AF Al Servo 2nd image priority n O Equal priority E Equal priority is given to focusing and ESual Rony continuous shooting speed In low light or with low contrast subjects shooting speed may slow down CH Shooting speed priority Priority is given to the continuous shooting speed instead of achieving focus Focus priority Priority is given to achieving focus instead of the continuous shooting speed The picture will not be taken until focus is achieved QD Under shooting conditions which activate anti flicker shooting p 185 even if Shooting speed priority is set the continuous shooting speed may become slightly slower or the shooting interval may become irregular 118 tM Customizing AF Functions AF3 One Shot Lens electronic MF With the following USM and STM lenses equipped with an electron
453. vary depending on the Wireless func setting see below Built in flash settings Wireless func Flash mode Manual flash e Firing group All Wireless func The manual flash output setting is Channel applied to all the external Speedilites Firing group i VN ma _bD a m flash output Uklo o Fa Firing group a A B C ME Test flash firing You can divide the slave units into Groups A B and C and set the flash output separately for each group Wireless func 7 7 Firing group All and You can set the flash output separately for the external Speedlite s and built in flash Firing group 4 A B C amp You can divide the slave units into Groups A B and C and set the flash output separately for each group You can also set the flash output for the built in flash Q Built in flash will be output at 1 4 1 128 when 7 4 2 amp is set 283 284 Shooting with the LCD Monitor Live View Shooting Ja You can shoot while viewing the picture on the camera s LCD monitor This is called Live View shooting Live View shooting is enabled by setting the Live View shooting Movie shooting switch to lt gt U If you handhold the camera and shoot while viewing the LCD monitor camera shake can cause blurred images Using a tripod is recommended Fi Remote Live View Shooting With EOS Utility EOS software p 537 installed on your computer you
454. ven for private enjoyment Item Check List Before starting check that all the following items are included with your camera If anything is missing contact your dealer jC Eyecup Eg Battery Pack Battery Charger LP E6N LC E6 LC E6E with body cap with protective cover Wide Strap Interface Cable IFC 150U Il protector Battery Charger LC E6 or LC E6E is provided The LC E6E comes with a power cord The Instruction Manual and DVD CD ROMs provided are listed on the next page If you purchased a Lens Kit check that the lenses are included Depending on the Lens Kit type a lens instruction manual may also be included Be careful not to lose any of the above items Z Connecting to Peripheral Devices When connecting the camera to a computer or printer use the provided interface cable or one from Canon When connecting an interface cable also use the provided cable protector p 34 inthis manual CF card refers to CompactFlash cards and SD card refers to SD SDHC SDXC cards Card refers to all memory AC cards used to record images or movies The camera does not come with a card for recording images movies Please purchase it separately Instruction Manual and DVD CD ROMS The instruction manual consists of a booklet leaflet and PDF manuals in electronic form provided on the DVD ROM
455. vie shooting screen Rec time Indicates the elapsed time from the start of the movie shooting Time code Indicates the time code during movie shooting Movie Playback Count You can select what to display on the movie playback screen Rec time Displays the recording time and playback time during movie playback Time code Displays the time code during movie playback With Time code set 45 1 41 30 1 0 00 E 00 00 00 gt 11101 0132 ware 7 00 00 00 0 During movie playbac ka SERVO AF During movie shooting F Regardless of the Movie rec count setting the time code will always be recorded to the movie file The Movie play count setting under B 5 Time code switches in tandem with the gt 3 Movie play count setting Changing either setting will automatically change the other Frames are not displayed for movie shooting or during movie playback 340 MM Setting the Time Code EE HDMI Time code The time code can be appended to a movie that is output via HDMI p 350 Enable Appends time code to HDMI output movie Disable Time code not appended to HDMI output movie Record command When you record a movie that is an output from HDMI to an external recording device the camera s movie shooting start stop can sync with the recording from that external recording device Enable Synchronizes external recording device s recording start stop with camera s mov
456. you select Delete copyright information in step 2 on the preceding page you can delete the Author and Copyright information ep If the entry for Author or Copyright is long it may not be displayed entirely when you select Display copyright info Fl You can also set or check the copyright information with EOS Utility EOS software p 537 196 GPS Settings This chapter explains the camera s built in GPS settings The EOS 7D Mark II G can receive satellite navigation signals from GPS satellites USA GLONASS satellites Russia and the Quasi Zenith Satellite System QZSS Michibiki Japan The GPS function is set to Disable by default This manual uses the term GPS to refer to the satellite navigation function When GPS is set to Enable p 201 the camera will continue to receive GPS signals at regular intervals even after the power is turned off The battery will thereby drain faster and the number of possible shots will decrease If you will not use GPS setting GPS to Disable is recommended 4D When using GPS function be sure to check the region of use and use the function in accordance with the laws and regulations of the country or region Be particularly careful when using GPS outside your home country 197 GPS Features Geotagging Images 11100 0003 Geotag information latitude 24 09 2014 13 30 00 longitude elevation and coordinated
457. yright Clear all camera settings information then press lt GE gt Copyright information Certification Logo Display O firmware ver 1 0 0 SET UP4 Copyright information 2 Select the option to be set Select Enter author s name or Enter copyright details then press lt e1 gt Enter author s name 3 Enter text XXXXX XXXXX ives Press the lt Q gt button The text a we palette will be highlighted with a color frame and text can be entered Enter author s name Enter copyright details _ 2 0 lt gt 0123456789 abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz ABCDEF GHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXV Z Operate the lt gt dial or lt gt to amp 4 INFO LEEA MENU KOL move the L and select the desired character Then press lt 1 gt to enter it You can enter up to 63 characters To delete a character press the lt 1 gt button To cancel the text entry press the lt INFO gt button then select OK on the confirmation screen 4 Exit the setting After entering the text press the lt MENU gt button then select OK The information is saved 195 TEM Setting Copyright Information E Checking the Copyright Information Dedeye TE nE When you select Display copyright Author info in step 2 you can check the KXXXX XXXXX Author and Copyright information that you entered Copyright Canon Inc Deleting the Copyright Information When

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

AV-R200N  Bryant ASPAS1BBL040 User's Manual  ja-154j_manual  2010 Cellu  Stand Charger für multiCOM pro (Order  Tecumseh RKA5512EXA Drawing Data    

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file